JP7310986B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pachinko machine.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine has been proposed in which a winning game or the like is executed based on a game ball entering a specific ball entrance or a specific area.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2011-010741

In such a game machine, there is a demand for an improvement in the amusement of the game.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention includes a first ball entering means that allows a game ball to enter, a first state in which a first flow path is formed, and a second state in which the first flow path is not formed. variable means capable of changing between two states; variable control means capable of executing control to change the variable means from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition; a game state setting means capable of setting a second game state in which a game ball launched toward the first ball entering means flows down the first flow path more easily than in the first game state; The ball entry means is disposed at a position where a game ball that has flowed down a predetermined flow path among the game balls that have flowed down the first flow path is entered, and the game machine is capable of playing a game that has flowed down the first flow path. A second flow path in which at least some of the game balls that do not flow down the predetermined flow path can flow down, and a game ball that has flowed down the second flow path can enter, At least some of the second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means and the game balls that have flowed down the first flow path and that have not flowed down the predetermined flow path can flow down. A third flow path different from the second flow path, a game ball that has flowed down the third flow path can be entered, and the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means is a different third ball entry means, and at least some of the game balls that have flowed down the first flow path and have not flowed down the predetermined flow path are transferred to the second flow path or the A distribution means capable of distributing to three channels, and when a predetermined end condition is satisfied based on the fact that a value related to a predetermined element is updated to a specific value during the second game state, the first game and means for setting a state, wherein the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means is entered based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means. A benefit that is advantageous to a player with the same value or a different value depending on the means can be given, and if the game ball enters the third ball entering means, the benefit that is advantageous to the player is not given. The value of the predetermined element can be updated based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entering means, and the game ball has entered the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means. It is configured so that the value related to the predetermined element is not updated when the ball is hit .

According to the gaming machine of the present invention , the game ball can enter the first ball entering means, the first state in which the first flow path is formed, and the second state in which the first flow path is not formed. possible variable means, variable control means capable of executing control to change the variable means from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition, and a first game state a game state setting means capable of setting a second game state in which a game ball shot toward the first ball entering means easily flows down the first flow path, the first ball entering means comprising: Among the game balls that have flowed down the first flow path, it is arranged at a position where the game ball that has flowed down the predetermined flow path is entered, and the game machine is the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path, a second flow path through which at least some of the game balls that do not flow down the predetermined flow path can flow down; and a game ball that has flowed down the second flow path can enter the first ball. a second ball entry means different from the means; and at least some of the game balls that have flowed down the first flow path and that have not flowed down the predetermined flow path can flow down, a third flow path different from the second flow path; a ball means for transferring at least some of the game balls that have flowed down the first flow path and that have not flowed down the predetermined flow path to the second flow path or the third flow path; Distributing means capable of distributing and setting the first game state when a predetermined end condition is established based on the value of a predetermined element being updated to a specific value during the second game state. and, the same according to the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means entered based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means A privilege that is advantageous to a player with a value or a different value can be given, and when a game ball enters the third ball entering means, the privilege that is advantageous to the player is not given, It is possible to update the value related to the predetermined element based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and when the game ball enters the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means is configured so that the value of the predetermined element is not updated .

Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the first embodiment, and is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the general electric winning device. It is a partial enlarged view of the game board in the first embodiment, and is a schematic diagram showing the flow of winning balls in the general electric winning device flowing into the out port. It is a partial enlarged view of the game board in the first embodiment, and is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the winning balls in the general electric prize winning device flowing into the special electric operation opening. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the first embodiment, and is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the V winning device. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the first embodiment, and is a schematic diagram showing the ball flow in the V winning device when the reservoir valve is in the reservoir state in the role winning game. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the first embodiment, the ball flow when the storage valve is shifted from the storage state to the release state and the first movable valve is located at the guidance position in the role winning game. It is a schematic diagram showing. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the first embodiment, the ball flow when the storage valve is shifted from the storage state to the release state and the first movable valve is positioned at the passing position in the role winning game. It is a schematic diagram showing. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and (b) is a diagram displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 1 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode at the time of the jackpot ending displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a third symbol display device in the first embodiment. 81 is a diagram showing an example of the display mode at the start of the V rush displayed in FIG. 12, and (c) shows the status of holding each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 12 (a) is displayed. FIG. 12(d) is a schematic diagram showing a state of holding each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 12(b) is displayed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case of winning a normal symbol during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram of the first embodiment. 13(c) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case of winning a character during a V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and (c) shows the display screen shown in FIG. 13(a). 13(d) is a schematic diagram showing the status of holding each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 13(b) is displayed. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case of winning a V prize during a V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the first embodiment. 14(c) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case of a loss during a V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and (c) shows the display screen shown in FIG. 14(a). 14(d) is a schematic diagram showing the pending status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 14(b) is displayed. FIG. . (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case of a jackpot ending during a V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment; FIG. 15C is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of adding a timer during V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. FIG. 15D is a schematic diagram showing a status of holding a symbol, and FIG. 15D is a schematic diagram showing a status of holding each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 15B is displayed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the end of the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a third symbol display in the first embodiment. FIG. 16C is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the device 81 when the V rush is extended, and FIG. 16(d) is a schematic diagram showing a state of holding each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 16(b) is displayed. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the special screen at the time of the jackpot ending displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the third FIG. 17C is a diagram showing an example of the display mode during the heaven mode displayed on the symbol display device 81, and FIG. FIG. 17D is a schematic diagram showing the status, and FIG. 17D is a schematic diagram showing the status of holding each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 17B is displayed; (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the middle chance production for winning a role displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the third It is a diagram showing an example of the display mode in the case of normal pattern stop during V rush displayed on the symbol display device 81, (c) is a case where the display screen shown in FIG. 18 (a) is displayed FIG. 18D is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol, and FIG. 18D is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 18B is displayed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case of a special figure stop during a V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a first embodiment. 19(c) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the lucky time effect during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and (c) shows a case where the display screen shown in FIG. 19(a) is displayed 19(d) is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 19(b) is displayed. FIG. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment; It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing counters and the like provided in a RAM 203 of the main controller 110. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment, (b) schematically shows the contents of a first winning random number table in the first embodiment. FIG. 10C is a schematic diagram showing the content of a second winning random number table in the first embodiment; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the first hit type selection table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special figure jackpot type selection table in the first embodiment. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the V jackpot type selection table in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal table in the first embodiment. , and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a time saving table in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of various action scenario tables in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of an action scenario table per role item in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first movable valve operation scenario table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the structure of an operation scenario table per normal figure in the first embodiment. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a scenario for a normal normal map in the first embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the normal figure per scenario for time saving in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 1st Embodiment. 3A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM of the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment, and FIG. 4B is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment; FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. (a) to (i) are timing charts showing the flow of the game in the normal state in the first embodiment when the game per normal pattern is executed. (a) ~ (i) is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the normal figure per game is executed in the time saving state in the first embodiment. 2 is a block diagram of the electrical configuration of the display control device according to the first embodiment; FIG. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a power-on image. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surfaces BD. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation in-execution process that is executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation stop processing that is executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing prefetching processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart which shows a special electric starting gate winning process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing V entrance passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing V passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart which shows big hit control processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing winning processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing a winning control process executed by an MPU in a main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; It is the flowchart which showed the special figure fluctuation|variation start processing performed by MPU in the sound ramp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing winning command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing state command reception processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing stop-related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; It is the flowchart which showed the normal figure related process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing a win-related process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot end processing performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing a character winning related process executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; It is the flowchart which showed the production|presentation update process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing. 4 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment 10 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing round number command processing; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation stop command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart showing a notification command process. (a) is a flowchart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 10 is a flow chart showing error command processing performed. 4 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing; 7 is a flow chart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; It is a partial enlarged view of the game board in the second embodiment, and is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the general electric winning device. It is a partial enlarged view of the game board in the second embodiment, and is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a ball that has won the general electric prize winning device can flow down to the second special electric operation opening. (a) is a state in which the normal figure long winning game and the accessory winning game are being performed in duplicate during the time saving state (V rush) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment. (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode, (b) is a normal figure long variation in the time saving state (V rush) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment, and a game per role 90A and 90B are diagrams showing an example of a display mode in which , and , are executed in duplicate, and FIG. 90(d) is a schematic diagram showing a state of holding each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 90(b) is displayed. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the remaining period of the interrupted special symbol variation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment is shorter than the predetermined period; b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the remaining period of the interrupted special symbol variation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment is longer than a predetermined period; ) is a schematic diagram showing the status of holding each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 91(a) is displayed, and FIG. 91(d) is a schematic diagram showing the display screen shown in FIG. It is a schematic diagram showing a state of holding each symbol in the case of. (a), (b) is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the termination conditions of the accessory winning game executed during the normal figure long winning in the second embodiment are changed. (a), (b) is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the ending conditions of the game per accessory executed during the normal pattern long variation in the second embodiment are different. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the second embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of the contents of the per-universal figure type selection table in the second embodiment It is a schematic diagram shown, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table in the second embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of various action scenario tables in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a second role-per-accessory action scenario table in the second embodiment. 2 is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of an operation scenario table per normal map in the second embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of two scenarios per normal map for time reduction in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically shown. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of 3 scenarios per normal figure for time saving in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the second embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the special electric starting entrance prize-winning process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows normal figure related processing 2 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows normal figure fluctuation start processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a character winning related process 2 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the character hitting start processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the production|presentation update process 2 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special figure residual variation suggestion process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows normal figure related time update processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. (a) and (c) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode when entering the danger time during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment. d) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a jackpot is discarded at danger time during a V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode when the jackpot is interrupted at the danger time during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a V jackpot type selection 3 table in the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the third embodiment. 12C is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a danger time selection table in the third embodiment. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric starting entrance prize-winning process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the production|presentation update process 3 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the danger time setting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically about the counter etc. which are provided in RAM of the main-control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the small hit random number table in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a process during execution of the first special symbol variation executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows time saving update processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design jackpot determination process performed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 deviation variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation in-execution process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing special figure 2 deviating stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process 4 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a fourth embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st look-ahead processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd look-ahead processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing V passage processing 4 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fourth embodiment; FIG. It is a partial enlarged view of the game board in the modification, and is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the general electric winning device. It is a flowchart which shows the special design variation start processing 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation stop processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure fluctuation|variation start processing 5 performed by MPU in the sound ramp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing stop-related processing 5 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 6th Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode at the time of the jackpot ending displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is the third symbol display device in the sixth embodiment. 145(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the end condition selection screen displayed in FIG. 145(c) shows the holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 145(a) is displayed. It is a schematic diagram. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode after selection of an end condition displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a third symbol display in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 146C is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the V rush start screen displayed on the device 81, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 6th Embodiment. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device in the sixth embodiment; FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing 6 executed by an MPU in a main controller in the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a special electric starting gate winning process 6 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing switching processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in the sixth embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing 6 performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing end condition setting processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 6 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing termination condition related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth embodiment; FIG. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of a display mode during a V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second modification.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 87. FIG. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. FIG. 6 to FIG. 9 are schematic diagrams schematically showing the structure of the general electric winning device 640 provided in the lower area, and FIGS. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of 65, and FIG. 10 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having ball entrances 63, 64, 640 and the like into which a large number of nails and balls can enter is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. Balls (game balls) flow down in front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 21) that shoots a ball to the front area (game area) of the game board 13 and a ball shooting unit 112a that shoots the ball to the front area of the game board 13. A launch rail (not shown) or the like is attached to guide the vehicle to the target. Details of the numerous ball entrances provided on the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and the upper tray 17 discharges prize balls, rental balls, and the like. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 21). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The display lamp 34 has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can indicate that prize balls are being paid out and that an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chromium, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to create more splendor.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball in front of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape as viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and a general input. Ball opening 63, special figure entrance openings 64, 640, variable winning device 65, V winning device 650, normal symbol starting gate (through gate) 67, variable display device unit 80, etc. It is attached to the back side of the frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general ball entrance 63, the special ball entrance 64, the general electric prize winning device 640, the V prize winning device 65, the variable prize winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and a shot is fired). area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 9) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

A first pattern display device 37 is provided on the upper left side of the return rubber 69 . The first pattern display device 37 is arranged so as to be covered with the back surface of the game board 13 (the surface opposite to the surface forming the game area) made of a transparent resin (for example, ABS). It is configured so that the shot ball does not collide with the first pattern display device 37 .

The first pattern display device 37 is provided with a first pattern display device 37 having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display. The first symbol display device 37 displays a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 21), and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10 . In the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 is configured to operate when the ball enters (wins) the special symbol entrance 64 . That is, the first symbol display device 37 is display means for showing the lottery result of the lottery (special figure lottery) executed when the ball enters the special figure entrance 64 . In this embodiment, since the pachinko machine 10 with one type of special symbol is used, the result of one type of special symbol lottery is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. For example, the special symbol If the pachinko machine 10 has two types (first special symbol, second special symbol), the first symbol display device 37 may be provided with a display area corresponding to each special symbol type.

In addition, the first symbol display device 37 uses LEDs to indicate which of the gaming states (for example, normal state, time saving state, etc.) of the pachinko machine 10, or changes the special symbol (first symbol). It is indicated by the lighting state whether or not it is medium (during dynamic display for stopping and displaying the combination of symbols for indicating the lottery result), and whether the stopped symbol is a symbol corresponding to a big win that is advantageous to the player or disadvantageous. Whether a pattern corresponding to a big hit or a lost pattern is indicated by a lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by a lighting state, and the number of rounds during a big hit and an error are displayed by a 7-segment display device. In addition, it is possible to indicate in the lighting state that the variation of the special symbol is temporarily stopped (suspended). A plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED emits different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and a combination of the emitted colors can suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. In this embodiment, various game states are notified by a combination of light emitting colors of the light emitting means (7-segment display device). For example, various game states may be notified by varying the length (blinking mode) of the period in which the light emitting means is lit and the period in which it is extinguished.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery (lottery for special symbols) is conducted when a ball enters the special symbol entrance 64 (winning a prize). Then, in the lottery of the special symbols, the success or failure determination (big hit lottery) of whether or not it is a big hit is performed. Here, based on the fact that it is determined that the jackpot has been won, a jackpot game is executed in which the privilege game state is advantageous to the player.

When the jackpot game is executed, it becomes an open state in which the balls can be easily won in the specific winning opening 650a of the variable winning device 650, and many winning balls are won in a short period of time by making the balls enter the specific winning opening 650a. A game that can be acquired by is executed. This jackpot game is executed (in case) after the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and the opening period (specific winning opening of the variable winning device 650) for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) A period during which a closed state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter 650a is set, a round game period during which the open state is set, and a predetermined period from the end of one round game period until the next round game is started. A period (for example, 0.5 seconds), an interval period in which the closed state is set, and an ending period in which the closed state is set for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) after the end of the last round game period. A big hit game period is set.

In this way, by setting the opening period after the lottery result of the special symbol indicating the winning of the jackpot is stopped (confirmed display), the balls are displayed in accordance with the timing when the specific winning opening 650a is opened during the jackpot game. can be prepared to be shot in any direction, so that a big winning game can be played smoothly. In addition, since this opening period can be used as a period for informing the player of the game content of the current jackpot game, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

In addition, by setting the ending period as the final period of the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress the execution of a lottery of new special symbols immediately after the end of the last round game. Since it is possible to make preparations for shooting the ball in an arbitrary direction toward the game to be executed, it is possible to smoothly switch the game.

In addition, the length of each period (opening period, round period, ending period) of the jackpot game that is executed when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery depends on the game state at the time of the jackpot win and the type of jackpot that was won. For example, when winning a jackpot, the game contents different from the game contents at the time of winning the jackpot are set as the game contents to be executed after the jackpot game ends. The ending period of the jackpot game (for example, 10 seconds) is set to be longer than the ending period of the other jackpot games (for example, 2 seconds), and the player finishes the jackpot game during the ending period. It is preferable to construct an effect that guides in advance the contents of a game to be executed later so that it can be executed. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

On the other hand, when a jackpot is won in which the game content at the time of winning the jackpot and the game content to be executed after the jackpot game is the same, the ending period (for example, 1 second) of the jackpot is changed to another jackpot game. It is preferable to configure the setting to be shorter than the ending period (for example, 2 seconds). This allows the player to play the game efficiently.

In addition, for example, based on the type of the winning jackpot and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, without using a configuration that actually discriminates between the game content when the jackpot is won and the game content to be executed after the jackpot game is finished. Therefore, the game state to be set after the end of the jackpot game may be defined in advance, and the ending period of each jackpot game may be set in advance according to the contents of the regulation.

Although a specific description will be given later, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the game state is the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), a game to be executed by the player, A game to be executed by a player in a time-saving state (low-probability state of special patterns, high-probability state of normal patterns) is configured to be different from the game to be executed in the normal state, and during the time-saving state, the game is executed in the normal state. It is constructed so that the game to be executed by the player is more advantageous to the player (the jackpot game is more likely to be executed).

In other words, the jackpot is won in the state where the normal state is set, and the time saving state is already set in the ending period of the jackpot game in which the time saving state is set after the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot winning is finished. The content of the jackpot game (operation scenario) is defined so as to be longer than the ending period of the jackpot game in which the jackpot is won in a state where the jackpot is won, and the time saving state is set again after the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot win is completed. You should keep it. As a result, the ending period suitable for the player can be set only by executing the jackpot game according to the contents defined in advance.

It should be noted that the period other than the ending period may be defined in advance according to the type of the winning jackpot and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, and the opening period and the interval period may be changed. Further, even if the type of the jackpot won is the same, the length of each period during the jackpot game may be varied according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. As a result, the player can be interested not only in which jackpot type the jackpot has been won (lottery result of special symbols) but also about the game state when the jackpot is won, thereby improving the amusement of the game. be able to.

Furthermore, when a big win is won in a big win lottery, the kind of the big win is determined. Details will be described later, but as the jackpot type to be determined, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 4 rounds, and after the jackpot game ends, a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is given. As a 4R time-saving jackpot, a jackpot type with a different duration of time-saving state 4 times) and a time-saving jackpot (time-saving number of times 15 times)) in which the time-saving state continues until the lottery of special symbols is executed 15 times without winning the jackpot.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the special symbol lottery does not win the jackpot, it is determined that the player is out of the game, and the player is not provided with the privilege. As a result of the lottery, in some cases where it is determined that it is not a big hit as described above, but a loss is given to the player less than the above-mentioned big win (for example, a privilege to open the V winning device 65 for only one round) Small It may be configured such that a winning game is executed. The first symbol display device 37 not only indicates whether or not the result of the lottery is a big win (whether or not it is a small win) as a stop symbol after the end of variation, but also indicates the type of the big win in the case of a big win. A pattern corresponding to is shown.

In this embodiment, the game state is configured to be set to either the "normal state" or the "time saving state". The normal state is a game state in which the special symbol jackpot probability is set to a low probability (1/100) and the normal symbol hit probability is set to a low probability (1/1000) (hereinafter referred to as the special symbol low probability state, In the time saving state, the special symbol jackpot probability is set to a low probability (1/100), and the normal symbol hit probability is set to a high probability (300/1000). It is a game state (hereinafter referred to as a low probability state of special symbols and a high probability state of normal symbols).

Here, "4R jackpot (time reduction 4 times)" means that after a jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds (a jackpot game that opens the variable winning device 650 for 4 rounds), a time reduction state (low probability state of special symbols) , high-probability state of normal symbols), and a time-saving state of four times is set after the end of the big-hit game.

“4R jackpot (time reduction 15 times)” means that after a jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds (a jackpot game that opens the variable winning device 650 for 4 rounds), a time reduction state (low probability state of special symbols, normal symbols (high probability state)), and a time saving state of 15 times of time saving is set after the jackpot game ends.

In this embodiment, after the time saving state is set, when a predetermined end condition (time saving end condition) is satisfied, the game state is configured to shift from the time saving state to the normal state, and the time saving described above The number of times indicates a time saving end condition. In other words, the time saving number of times 4 times means that the special symbol lottery is executed 4 times (4th special symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed) without winning the jackpot after the time saving state is set. is established, and the number of times of time saving 15 times means that the special symbol lottery is executed 15 times (the 15th special symbol variation is stopped and displayed) without winning the jackpot after the time saving state is set. It is specified that the termination condition is satisfied.

That is, the "4R jackpot (4 times shorter time)" is a jackpot type that defines a time-saving end condition that is easier to establish than the "4R jackpot (15 times shorter time)", so the "4R jackpot (4 times shorter time)" )”, the “4R jackpot (time saving 15 times)” is a jackpot type in which the time saving state is likely to continue, and is a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the condition (time saving number of times) regarding the number of times of special symbol lottery during the time saving state is defined, but as a time saving end condition Other configurations It may be used, for example, the result of the special symbol lottery is other than the big hit, and the number of times that the specific lottery result (specific deviation) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) Time saving end condition established Or, a time-saving end condition that is established when a predetermined time (e.g., 100 seconds) has elapsed since the time-saving state was set, or a ball enters a specific entrance during the time-saving state (e.g., a general entrance 63a) A termination condition may be set that is satisfied when the number of hit balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5).

Returning to FIG. 2, the description is continued. In the lower left side of the game area formed on the surface of the game board 13, a plurality of left general ball entrances 63a are provided through which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when balls enter. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 has a liquid crystal display that performs variable display of the third symbol while synchronizing the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 with the entry of the ball into the special symbol entrance 64 (start winning) as a trigger. (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device"), and the passage of the ball to the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is used as a trigger to variably display the normal symbol (second symbol). A second pattern display device (not shown) composed of LEDs is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 21), for example, left, middle and right three patterns. A column of symbols is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row to variably display (moving) the third symbols on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. display). In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 21). A decorative display corresponding to the display of the device 37 is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be constructed using a reel or the like.

The second symbol display device displays a symbol "○" and a symbol "x" as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67. A variable display is performed by alternately lighting up for a predetermined period of time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that a ball has passed through a normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the general electric prize winning device 640 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. It is configured so that a winning game (normal figure winning game) that is only in the operating state (open state) is executed.

The time required for the variable display of the second pattern is always constant (3 seconds) regardless of the result of the normal pattern lottery and the probability state of the normal pattern (low probability state, high probability state). . By configuring in this way, for example, in order to make it difficult to execute the normal pattern per game during the normal pattern low probability state (normal state), the time required for the normal pattern fluctuation display (normal pattern fluctuation time) In a pachinko machine 10 constituted so that the normal state is longer than the time-saving state, a normal pattern winning game (ordinary pattern winning game) is hard to be executed (ordinary pattern low probability state), and the normal pattern is changed from the normal state (low probability state of the normal pattern). When the game state shifts to a time-saving state (high-probability state of normal symbols) in which a winning game is likely to be executed, the long-term normal symbol fluctuation executed during the normal state (is more disadvantageous to the player than during the time-saving state) During the execution of the normal pattern per game), the period during which the normal pattern lottery is not executed is set for a long time despite the fact that the time reduction state is set. can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, the game content (opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a) of the normal pattern per game to be executed is configured to be different between the normal state and the time saving state without changing the fluctuation time of the normal pattern. ing. Specifically, the normal pattern per game that is executed during the time saving state is more advantageous to the player than the general pattern per game that is executed during the normal state, that is, the ball is a special electric operation The opening 643 is configured to facilitate winning. Specifically, when the normal state is set, the opening period of 0.1 seconds is set after the opening period of 4.1 seconds (the closing period of the electric accessory 640a). Normal normal game) is executed, and when the time saving state is set, after the opening period of 0.1 seconds (closing period of the electric accessory 640a), the open period of 3 seconds is set. A winning game (time-saving normal figure winning game) is executed.

In this way, by executing the normal pattern winning game in which the period in which the electric accessory 640a is in the open state is changed according to the probability state of the normal pattern, the time is shorter than the normal state (low probability state of the normal pattern). The state (normal pattern high probability state) can make it easier to win the ball in the general electric prize winning device 640 during the general pattern per game.

Furthermore, although the detailed description will be described later, in the present embodiment, the ratio of the balls that have won the general electric winning device 640 during the general figure per game in the normal state and the time saving state to the special electric operation port 643 configured to be different. Specifically, the ball that won the normal electric winning device 640 during the time-saving normal game than the ball that won the normal electric winning device 640 during the normal normal game that is executed during the normal state. It is configured to make it easier to enter the ball into the special electric operation opening 643. By configuring in this way, when the normal state is set, it is difficult for the ball to win the general electric prize device 640, and even if the ball wins the general electric prize device 640, the special electric operation opening 643 When it is difficult to enter the ball and the time saving state is set, it is easy to make the ball win the general electric prize winning device 640, and when the general electric prize winning device 640 wins the ball to the special electric operation port 643 It can be made easier to enter the ball.

In other words, in the present embodiment, in a plurality of processes until the fired ball enters the special electric activation opening 643, a state in which the ball is allowed to enter the special electric activation opening 643 and a state in which it is restricted are set. Since it is variable according to the game state to be set, the ease with which the ball enters the special electric activation opening 643 can be reliably varied according to the game state to be set.

As described above with reference to FIG. 2, in the present embodiment, the game method that is advantageous to the player is the same ( It is configured to be a left-handed game). In the pachinko machine 10 constructed in this manner, a normal symbol lottery opportunity is established even in the normal state (a ball passes through the through gate 67), and a normal symbol lottery is executed. Then, as a result of the normal pattern lottery, when the hit is won, the electric accessory 640a provided in the game area where the ball fired by the left-handed game can reach is controlled to be opened, so the time-saving normal pattern winning game Also, there is a risk that the ball will enter the general electric prize winning device 640 during execution of the normal general pattern winning game in which it is difficult to win the ball in the general electric prize winning device 640.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even if the ball wins the general electric prize winning device 640 during the general pattern winning game executed during the normal state, the prize winning ball enters the special electric operation opening 643. It is configured to make it difficult to enter the ball. By configuring in this way, the pachinko machine 10 having a configuration for executing the game in the same game method in the normal state (normal pattern low probability state) and the time saving state (normal pattern high probability state), Even if a ball enters the general electric prize winning device 640 in the normal state, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the special electric operation opening 643 .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the same variation time (3 seconds) is set as the variation pattern of normal symbols in the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols) and the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols). However, without being limited to this, for example, when the game state is a normal pattern low probability state (normal state) and a normal pattern high probability state (time saving state), the normal design The high probability state (time saving state) may be configured so that the variation time of normal symbols is shorter. In addition, in the normal pattern high probability state (normal pattern high probability), using other methods such as increasing the probability of winning the normal pattern, increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a for one hit When the high probability state of the normal symbol is set to a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the general electric winning device 640 than the low probability state of the normal symbol, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is regardless of the game state. It may be constant. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than the normal state during normal pattern high probability, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left side area (left side area) of the variable display unit 80, and the balls shot to the game board flow down the left side area of the game board 13. Most (approximately 100%) of the spheres are configured to be passable. When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery of the second pattern, the variable display is performed by the second pattern display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery is performed. If the result is out, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol for variable display.

The number of times the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is reserved up to one time in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the second symbol reservation lamp 84 described above. The second pattern holding lamps 84 are provided one for the maximum number of holdings, and arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls for passing the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is not limited to one, and may be set to two or more times (for example, eight times). In addition, the number of normal symbol starting openings (through gates) 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to the left side of the variable display device unit 80, but may be the right side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. Further, in the present embodiment, most of the balls flowing down the left side area of the game board 13 in a left-handed game are configured to pass through the through gate 67. It may be configured to pass through the through gate 67 .

Next, the configuration of the general electrical winning device 640 that is in the open state when winning the normal symbol lottery will be described. The electric prize winning device 640 is provided below the variable display unit 80, as shown in FIG. An electric accessory 640a that can be changed between states is electrically driven to a point where a ball flowing down the left side area (area on the left side of the variable display unit 80 in front view) of the game area formed on the game board 13 reaches. Accessory 640a is attached. In this embodiment, the ball fired by the left-handed game reaches the general electrical winning device 640 at a rate of about 1 ball out of 3 balls (if the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the general electrical winning device 640 It is configured to reach a position where a prize can be won).

The electric accessory 640a normally maintains the closed state, and when winning the normal symbol lottery, the electric accessory 640a is variably operated to the open state for a predetermined period in a predetermined variable pattern. A normal figure per game is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, the normal pattern lottery wins and the normal pattern winning game is executed, so that the general electric winning device 640 is configured to be able to provide the player with a state in which the ball is likely to win.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by continuously executing the left-handed game, the lottery opportunity of the normal symbol can be established (the ball can pass through the through gate 67), and the normal symbol It is constructed so that a ball can be won in a general electric prize winning device 640 which is in an open state when a prize is won in the lottery. Furthermore, it is configured so that a special pattern lottery opportunity can also be established by a left-handed game. In addition, a variable prize winning device 650 which is variably operated by a jackpot game executed when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery is also arranged at a position where a ball shot by a left-handed game can win a prize.

By configuring in this way, the player can always play the same game method (left-handed game) regardless of the game state, so that the player does not have to change the game method. The game can be played smoothly without giving.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 3 to 5, the configuration of the general electric prize winning device 640 and the flow of winning balls in the general electric prize winning device 640 will be described in detail. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the internal configuration of the electric prize winning device 640, and FIG. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of winning balls in the general electric prize winning device 640 entering the special electric operation opening 643. FIG.

In the present embodiment, when a ball passes through the through gate 67, a lottery for normal symbols is executed, and when a win is won in the lottery for normal symbols, the electric accessory 640a is opened in a predetermined variable pattern. A normal figure per game is executed. Then, when the electric accessary 640a is changed to the open state in this normal game, the ball enters the normal electric prize winning device 640 in a state where it can win.

As shown in FIG. 3 , a second movable valve 642 is provided in the electric prize winning device 640 . This second movable valve 642, triggered by the execution of the game per normal figure, flows into the normal electric winning prize device 640 and flows down the first flow path 641a, the second flow path that communicates to the special electric operation port 643 It is configured to be variable between a first state in which it can be guided to 641b and a second state in which it can be guided to third flow path 641c communicating with out port 644 in a predetermined variable pattern. In addition, the ball that has won the general electric prize winning device 640 is detected by the ball detection sensor 640s, and the number of winning balls to the general electric prize winning device 640 in one general game is configured to be measurable. Although detailed description is omitted, in this embodiment, when the number of balls that have won the general electrical winning device 640 in one general game per game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), at that point It is configured so that the normal figure per game ends. In this embodiment, prize balls (four pieces) are paid out when the ball enters the special electric activation port 643, and prize balls are not paid out when the ball enters the out port 644. ing.

The general electric prize winning device 640 has a cover body formed of transparent acrylic resin so that the player can visually recognize the ball flow inside the general electric prize winning device 640, and the cover body is attached to the game board 13. ing. Therefore, since the player can visually recognize the flow of the ball inside the electric prize winning device 640, the player can enjoy the behavior of the winning ball in the electric prize winning device 640.例文帳に追加

The electric accessory 640a provided in the electric prize winning device 640 is provided with the upper end side of the second partition 640k2 as a base for rotation, and the ball is in a closed state (Fig. 3), and an open state (see FIG. 4) in which the balls are more likely to enter the electric prize winning device 640 than in the closed state. As shown in FIG. 3, the electric accessory 640a in the closed state is configured to be housed in the general electric prize winning device 640. Specifically, the left side of the vertical line of the second partition 640k2 ( The tip of the first partition wall 640k1 is configured to protrude toward the left side in FIG. ing. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the electric accessory 640a in the closed state to come into contact with a ball fired in a left-handed game, so that damage to the electric accessory 640a is less likely to occur. can.

Although the detailed description will be described later, in this embodiment, according to the game state that is set at the time when the game per normal pattern is executed, the winning ball in the general electric winning device 640 wins the special electric operation opening 643 It is configured to vary the probability of winning (easiness of winning). Specifically, by varying the period (opening period per normal pattern) from when the normal pattern per game is executed until the electric accessary product 640a is controlled to be opened in a predetermined opening pattern, it is executed during the normal state. The ball won in the general electric prize winning device 640 in the general electric prize winning game executed during the time saving state is more than the ball won in the general electric prize winning device 640 in the general electric prize winning device 640 in the special electric operation port 643. It is structured so that it is difficult to win a prize.

By configuring in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment in which the same game method (left-handed game) is performed during the normal state and during the time saving state, the ball is moved to the special electric operation opening 643 during the normal state. Winning can be suppressed. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the general pattern per game that is executed during the normal state is a general pattern per game in which the ball is less likely to win in the general electric winning device 640 than the general pattern per game that is executed during the time saving state is configured to run. Also with this configuration, it is possible to suppress the ball from entering the special electric operation opening 643 during the normal state. That is, in the present embodiment, in addition to measures to make it difficult to win the ball in the general electric prize winning device 640 during the normal state than during the time saving state, when the ball wins in the general electric prize device 640 during the normal state has measures to make it more difficult for the ball to enter the special electric operation opening 643 than when the ball enters the general electric prize winning device 640 during the time saving state. In this way, by providing a configuration for suppressing the winning of the ball to the special electric operation opening 643 in the normal state in a plurality of stages, it is possible to suppress it more reliably.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the ball flow when the ball wins in the general electrical winning device 640 in the general pattern winning game executed when the normal state is set will be described. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of balls that have won the general electric prize winning device 640 in the normal state winning game. In this embodiment, in order not to give the player the trouble of changing the game method, it is configured so that the game can always be executed in the left-handed game. Therefore, even in the normal state, which is a low probability state of the normal pattern, the normal pattern lottery opportunity is established (the ball passes through the through gate 67), and when the normal pattern winning game is executed, the general electric winning device There was a risk that the ball would win within 640.

That is, the normal state (normal low probability state of the design) is compared to the time-saving state (normal high probability state of the design) in which it is easy to win the ball in the general electric prize winning device 640. Although it is a difficult game state, in this embodiment, the same game method (left-handed game) is executed in the normal state and the time saving state, so although the probability is low, the general electric winning device 640 during the normal state There was a possibility that the ball would win inside.

As described above, the general electric prize winning device 640 is provided with a special electric activation port 643 that triggers the execution of a winning game (accessory winning game) that opens the V winning device 65, and the ball is in the normal state. When the ball enters the special electric operation opening 643 and the role winning game is executed, there is a problem that the player who is playing the game in the normal state is provided with an excessively advantageous game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ratio of the ball that won the general electric prize device 640 during the normal state enters the special electric operation port 643, and the ball that won the general electric prize device 640 during the time saving state is the special electric It is configured such that the rate at which the ball hits the operating port 643 is different. Specifically, when the normal pattern per game is executed in the normal state, the electric accessary 640a is in the open state after the normal pattern per game is started than when the normal pattern per game is executed in the time saving state. The period until (first open state) is set long, and the second movable valve 642, which is movable based on the start of the general game, is in the second state (the ball that has won the general electric winning device 640 is out It is configured so that the ball can win the general electric prize winning device 640 only at the timing of maintaining the state that can be guided to the mouth 644).

That is, as shown in FIG. 4, when the ball wins the general electric prize winning device 640 during the normal game per game executed during the normal state, the ball flowing period is the first designed to be about 0.5 seconds. The ball flows down the flow path 641a, is guided to the third flow path 641c by the second movable valve 642 positioned in the second state, and enters the out port 644 (reaches the second movable valve 642). 0.3 seconds until the ball enters the out port 644). By configuring in this way, even if the ball wins the general electric prize device 640 during the normal state, it is possible to suppress the ball from entering the special electric operation opening 643, so that the game in the normal state It is possible to suppress the provision of an excessively advantageous game to the player who is playing the game.

Also, in order to suppress the ball from entering the special electric operation port 643 during the normal state, the ball is not won by the general electric winning device 640 by the general pattern winning game executed during the normal state. Since there is no need to use a special configuration, the degree of freedom in designing the game board 13 can be increased.

Furthermore, although the detailed description will be described later, in the normal game per normal state, the timing of changing the second movable valve 642 to the second state (at the start of the normal per game) is the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (4.1 seconds after the start of the normal game), for example, the normal game is started while the second movable valve 642 is in the first state. However, it is configured so that the ball does not reach the second movable valve 642 while the second movable valve 642 is variably operating. By configuring in this way, the second movable valve 642 in variable operation and the winning ball of the general electric prize winning device 640 come into contact with each other, and the ball clogging occurs in the general electric prize winning device 640. , a situation in which the second movable valve 642 breaks down can be prevented.

In this embodiment, when a ball enters the special electric operation opening 643 provided in the general electric winning device 640, four balls are paid out as prize balls, and the ball enters the out opening 644. In the case of a ball, the prize ball is not paid out, but it is not limited to this. For example, when the ball enters the out port 644, the ball enters the special electric activation port 643. A configuration may be adopted in which a larger number of prize balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out than in the case where the player wins. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the privilege given to the player based on the lottery of normal symbols according to the game state. Specifically, in the state where the normal state is set, more prize balls than in the time saving state are given to the player as a privilege, and in the state where the time saving state is set, for the player, In addition to prize balls less than in the normal state, it is possible to provide as a privilege a game with a character that is not (hardly) provided in the normal state. Therefore, regardless of which game state is set, the player can be interested in the lottery result of the normal symbols.

In addition, the same number of prize balls (4) may be paid out when the ball enters the special electric activation port 643 and when the ball enters the out port 644. In this case, It is preferable to make it difficult to understand whether the winning ball in the general electric prize winning device 640 has entered the special electric operation opening 643 or the out opening 644 . As a result, the player cannot grasp which ball entrance (special electric operation opening 643, out opening 644) the ball has entered, depending on the number of paid out prize balls. After winning the ball in the device 640, it is possible to execute an effect that makes it seem that whether or not a winning game (accessory winning game) for opening the V winning device 65 is executed is determined by lottery. It is possible to enhance the performance effect. Furthermore, in this case, when the ball detection sensor 640s detects a ball, it is preferable to pay out prize balls (four pieces). It is possible to quickly pay out the prize balls given to the player based on.

As shown in FIG. 4, when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the tip side of the first partition 640k1 and the electric accessory 640a are substantially parallel to form a spherical flow path therebetween. Therefore, when the electric accessory 640a positioned in the open state catches the ball, it is possible to prevent the ball from rebounding outside the electric prize winning device 640 due to the impact.

Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the ball flow when the ball wins in the general electrical winning device 640 in the general figure per game executed when the time saving state is set will be described. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the balls that have won the general electric prize winning device 640 in the general figure per game during the time saving state. As shown in FIG. 5, when the normal pattern per game is executed during the time saving state, the electric role product 640a is generated after the normal pattern per game is started, rather than the normal pattern per game executed during the normal state. Since the period until the open state (first open state) is set to be short, the second movable valve 642 is in the first state (the general electric prize winning device 640). state) is maintained, the electric accessory 640a becomes an open state.

Therefore, when the winning ball in the general electric prize winning device 640 flows down the first flow path 641a and reaches the second movable valve 642 (0.5 seconds after the ball enters the general electric prize winning device 640 ), since the second movable valve 642 is in the first state, it flows down the second flow path 641b communicating with the first flow path 641a (the flow down period is designed to be about 0.2 seconds), and the special electric The ball enters the operating port 643 . Then, when the entry of the ball into the special electric operation opening 643 is detected by a detecting means (proximity sensor) (not shown), the V prize winning device 65 is opened, and a prize winning game is started.

As shown in FIG. 5, when the second movable valve 642 is positioned in the first state, the ball flowing down the first flow path 641a (flowing vertically downward from the viewpoint of FIG. 5) is the second movable valve 642 The second movable valve 642 is configured to be variable up to a position where it becomes difficult to contact with. As a result, frequent contact between the ball and the second movable valve 642 and failure of the second movable valve 642 can be suppressed. In addition, although detailed description will be described later, when the normal pattern per game is executed during the time saving state, the electric accessory 640a becomes the open state 0.1 seconds after the normal pattern per game is started, and the normal The electric winning device 640 is in a state where the ball can win. Therefore, the shortest period from when the normal pattern winning game is executed until the ball reaches the position of the second movable valve 642 is 0.6 seconds (after the normal pattern winning game starts, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state). and 0.5 seconds until the winning ball reaches the second movable valve 642).

The second movable 642 is variably operated at the same time as the normal per game is started, and its variable operation period (period required to vary from the first state to the second state (from the second state to the first state)) is 0.1 seconds. In addition, since it is configured to variably operate the second movable valve 642 one second after the electric accessory 640a is closed in the normal game, the electric accessory 640a is changed to the closed state. The second movable valve 642 is variable when the double period (1 second) of the period (0.5 seconds) until the ball that wins the general electric prize device 640 reaches the second movable valve 642 immediately before the configured to work. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to contact the second movable valve 642 during the variable operation even in the normal game per game executed during the time saving state.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description is continued. A V winning device 65 is provided on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (left side from the viewpoint of FIG. 2) so that balls launched in a left-handed game and flowing down the left side area can win a prize. Here, the specific configuration of the V winning device 65 and the flow of winning balls in the V winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 9. FIG. In this embodiment, when a ball enters a special electric operation opening 643 provided in the general electric prize winning device 640, the V prize winning device 65 is opened and a prize winning game is executed. ing. Then, it is configured such that a big winning game (V big winning game) is executed by winning a ball in a V winning opening 165 provided in the V winning device 65 .

That is, in the present embodiment, in addition to the execution opportunity of the jackpot game (special jackpot game) that is established when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the special symbols, when the ball wins in a specific winning opening (V winning opening 165) It has an opportunity to execute a successful jackpot game (V jackpot game). In this way, by providing a plurality of opportunities for executing a jackpot game, it is possible to provide the player with a game that never gets bored.

First, the configuration of the V winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIG. The V winning device 65 is provided with an opening/closing door 65a that can be changed between an open state in which the ball can easily win in the V winning device 65 and a closed state in which the ball is less likely to win than in the open state. The opening/closing door 65a is provided at a position (see FIG. 2) where balls flowing down the left side area of the game board 13 can reach, and is changed to an open state when a role winning game is executed.

In the V winning device 65, a first flow path 65b is formed in the space between the first partition wall 65k1 and the second partition wall 65k2, through which balls that have passed through the opening/closing door 65a in the open state flow down. A storage valve 66a is provided at a position where the ball (falling period of 0.5 seconds) that has flowed down the path 65b reaches. A storage portion capable of storing one ball is formed on the upper surface of the storage valve 66a so that the ball that first wins the V winning device 65 during the winning game is temporarily stored in the storage portion. Configure. Further, a storage sensor 65s is provided above the storage valve 66a so as to be able to detect that the balls are stored in the storage portion. Further, a ball detection sensor 65s2 for detecting a winning ball in the V winning device 65 is provided on the upstream side of the first flow path 65b. During the winning game, the number of winning balls to the V winning device 65 is measured, and prize ball payout control for the winning balls is executed. In this way, by providing the ball detection sensor 65s2 at the position where the ball that has won the V winning device 65 flows down immediately after, it is possible to suppress the situation where more than a prescribed number of balls win the V winning device 65. At the same time, it is possible to immediately give the player the prize ball during the game per the accessory.

A second flow path 65c is formed so as to communicate with the first flow path 65b, and a first out port 163a is provided downstream of the second flow path 65c. As shown in FIG. 6, the second flow path 65c does not directly receive the balls flowing down the first flow path 65b. It is configured such that subsequent balls that have flowed down the path 65b come into contact with the balls stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 66a and are guided to the second flow path 65c. The first out port 163a provided on the downstream side of the second flow path 65c is a ball entrance for discharging the entered ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10, and flows down the second flow path 65c ( After a falling period of 0.1 second), the ball entering the first out port 163a flows down a ball discharging path (not shown) and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Although a detailed description will be given later, the storage valve 66a operates in accordance with the progress of the role-winning game (corresponding to an operation scenario in which the role-winning game is executed). It is configured to be variably operated between a release state in which balls are less likely to be stored than the state. When the storage valve 66a is positioned in the released state, the first flow path 65b and the third flow path 65d communicate with each other, and the ball that has flowed down the first flow path 65b or is stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 66a. The sphere that was being held flows down the third flow path 65d. The third flow path 65d is a vertically linear flow path with a width of about 15 mm, which is formed in the space between the lower end side of the first partition 65k1 and the third partition 65k3.

A first movable valve 66b is arranged at a position facing the downstream side of the third flow path 65d. The first movable valve 66b has a predetermined movable pattern triggered by the power-on of the pachinko machine 10, and a guidance position (protrusion position) capable of receiving the ball that has flowed down the third flow path 65d, It is configured to move to a passing position (buried position) where the ball that has flowed down the third flow path 65d cannot be received. Specifically, it is connected to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110 and configured to move according to the operation of the first movable valve solenoid 209d driven and controlled by the main controller 110. When the valve solenoid 209d is set to ON (when energized), the first movable valve 66b moves to a passing position (a position buried in the game board 13) where the first movable valve 66b is retracted from the inside of the V winning device 65, and the first When the movable valve solenoid 209d is set to OFF (when the electricity is cut off), the first movable valve 66b moves to the guidance position (the position where it projects from the game board 13) protruding into the V winning device 65. It is configured as follows.

The first movable valve 66b positioned at the guiding position (protruding position) is configured so that a ball can flow down its upper surface, and as shown in FIG. It is constructed so as to slope downward toward the path 65e. Therefore, the ball that has flowed down the third flow path 65d with the first movable valve 66b positioned at the guiding position (protruding position) (falling period of 0.2 seconds) will flow through the upper surface of the first movable valve 66b into the fourth flow path. It will flow down towards 65e. A second out port 163b is provided on the downstream side of the fourth flow path 65e, and a ball that has flowed down the fourth flow path 65e (falling period of 0.2 seconds) enters the second out port 163b. This second out port 163b is, like the first out port 163a described above, a ball entrance for ejecting a ball that has entered the pachinko machine 10 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. The ball thus played flows down a ball discharge path (not shown) and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 .

On the other hand, when the first movable valve 66b is located at the passage position, the third flow path 65d and the fifth flow path 65f communicate with each other, and the ball that has flowed down the third flow path 65d (falling period of 0.2 second) flows into the fifth flow path 65f (falling period 0.1 second). A V winning port 165 is provided on the downstream side of the fifth flow path 65f. The V winning hole 165 is a winning hole which can be a trigger for executing a big winning game, and when a ball enters the V winning hole 165 while the big winning game is not being executed, the big winning game is executed.

As shown in FIG. 6, the V winning device 65 is provided with a first outlet 163a and a second outlet 163b. By configuring in this way, a ball that has won a prize in the V winning device 65 when the reservoir valve 66a is in the reservoir state can pass through a flow path (third stream) when the reservoir valve 66a is in the released state. It is possible to reliably prevent the flow into the passage 65d, the fourth passage 65e, and the fifth passage 65f). In addition, without being limited to the configuration of this embodiment, for example, the first outlet 163a is eliminated, the second flow path 65c and the fourth flow path 65e are communicated, and the storage valve 66a is in the storage state. , the ball flowing down the second flow path 65c may enter the second out port 163b. In this case, the third partition wall 65k3, which is linearly provided in the vertical direction in FIG. It is preferable to provide so that the extension in the direction is on the right side of the fourth partition wall 65k4 (right side from the viewpoint of FIG. 6). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the ball that has flowed down the second flow path 65c from flowing into the fifth flow path 65f.

Thus, in this embodiment, there are two opportunities for executing the jackpot game, that is, when the jackpot game is executed when the jackpot is won by lottery of special symbols, and when the ball is V during the accessory winning game. There is a case where a jackpot game is executed when a prize is won to the prize winning port 165.例文帳に追加Hereinafter, when the jackpot games are described by classifying execution opportunities, the jackpot game executed when the player enters the V winning port 165 will also be referred to as the V jackpot game.

As described above, the V winning device 65 of the present embodiment enters an open state in which a ball can win a prize by executing a winning game, and only one ball stored in the storage valve 66a moves to the third flow path. 65d, and when the ball flowing down the third flow path 65d reaches the first movable valve 66b, the ball enters the V prize opening 165 according to the operation status of the first movable valve 66b. It is configured to determine whether or not

Although a detailed description will be given later, the first movable valve 66b is positioned at the passage position ( Since the movable pattern is always moving in such a manner that the time for the ball to enter the V winning port 165 is 0.5 seconds, the rate at which the ball flowing down the third flow path 65d enters the V winning port 165 is , approximately 1/11.

Further, even if a plurality of balls are awarded to the V winning device 65 in one role-winning game, the storage valve 66a controls the operation so that the number of balls flowing down the third flow path 65d is one. Therefore, it is configured so that one jackpot game is executed when the accessory winning game is executed 11 times.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 7 to 9, the contents of the winning ball flow in the V winning device 65 during execution of the prize winning game will be described. First, referring to FIG. 7, the ball flow in the first half period of the game per role (the period in which the reservoir valve 66a is in the reservoir state) will be described. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of balls in the V winning device 65 when the reservoir valve 66a is in the reservoir state in the role winning game. Although detailed description will be given later, the storage valve 66a is configured to be in a storage state during the period from the execution of the accessory winning game to the closing state of the V winning device 65. ing. When a plurality of balls enter the V winning device 65 while the storage valve 66a is in the storage state, the ball P1 that wins first is stored in the storage portion formed in the storage valve 66a, and the second prize is won. The ball P2 contacts the ball P1 stored in the storage valve 66a, flows down the second flow path 65c, and enters the out port 163a.

In this way, when the storage valve 66a is in the storage state, all winning balls (for example, balls P2) other than the balls P1 stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 66a enter the out port 163a. Therefore, a plurality of balls do not stay in the V winning device 65. - 特許庁In addition, since the storage valve 66a is released from the storage state after the V opening/closing door 65a of the V winning device 65 is closed (after the operation control for closing the door is executed), the valve 66a is opened once. It is possible to reliably reduce the number of balls flowing down the third flow path 65d to one in the role-winning game.

By configuring in this way, the easiness of winning the ball into the V winning opening 165 can be changed according to the timing of winning the ball into the V winning device 65 during the prize winning game and the number of winnings. Since there is no , it is possible to provide a fair game to all players.

Next, with reference to FIG. 8, the content of the ball flow (second half period of the game per role) when the storage valve 66a shifts from the storage state to the release state will be described. FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram showing a ball flow when the storage valve 66a shifts from the storage state to the release state in the accessory winning game. As shown in FIG. 8, after the V open/close door 65a is closed and new balls cannot enter the V winning device 65, the storage valve 66a is released (indicated by a dotted line in the figure). Upon shifting, the ball P1 (see FIG. 7) stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 66a flows down the third flow path 65d. In the state shown in FIG. 8, since the first movable valve 66b is positioned at the guidance position, the ball P1 rolls on the downward slope formed on the upper surface of the first movable valve 66b, and flows through the fourth flow path 65e. It flows down and enters the second out port 163b.

On the other hand, when the ball P1 (see FIG. 7) stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 66a flows down the third flow path 65d and reaches the first movable valve 66b, the first movable valve 66b moves to the passage position. With reference to FIG. 9, the flow of the ball when positioned at FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram showing a ball flow when the storage valve 66a shifts from the storage state to the release state in the accessory winning game. As shown in FIG. 9, when the ball flowing down the third flow path 65d reaches the first movable valve 66b and the first movable valve 66b is positioned at the passage position, the fifth flow path 66f It flows down and enters the V winning port 165 .

Returning to FIG. 2, the description is continued. Below the variable display device unit 80, a special figure ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is arranged. When the ball enters this special figure entrance 64, a special figure entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the special figure entrance switch is turned on. A lottery for a big win is made by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 21), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37a. Also, when a ball enters the special figure entrance 64, four prize balls are paid out as a privilege. In this embodiment, it is configured so that the ball can enter the special figure entrance 64 at a rate of 1 ball in about 15 balls out of the balls fired by the left-handed game.

As shown in FIG. 10, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132, which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 21). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with an operation knob 121 of a variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 21) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the operation of the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is connected with the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the second symbol display device, and the second symbol reservation lamp. In addition, when the jackpot game is executed, the specific winning opening solenoid 209a for opening and closing the opening and closing door for changing the specific winning opening 650a of the variable winning device 650 between the open state and the closed state, and the V winning device 65 A V winning opening solenoid 209b for opening and closing the door, a storage solenoid 209c for variably driving a storage valve 66a provided in the V winning device 65, and a first movable valve provided in the V winning device 65. The first movable valve solenoid 209d for variably driving the valve 66b, the second movable valve solenoid 209e for variably driving the second movable valve 641 provided in the electric power winning device 640, and other various devices are driven. A solenoid 209 such as another solenoid 209z is connected to the MPU 201 to transmit various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205. FIG.

Also, the input/output port 205 is equipped with a group of switches (not shown) (switches for detecting that a ball has entered each ball entrance, switches for detecting that a ball is positioned at a specific position, etc.). The switch 208 is connected to a later-described RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 performs various operations based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasure signal SG2 output from the RAM erasure switch circuit 253. Execute the process.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. The other devices 228 include various drive motors for operating drive accessories for presentation provided in the pachinko machine 10 .

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the rear image is an image displayed on the rear side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In addition, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, a character object drive command is transmitted to the other device 228 in order to drive a character object for performance (not shown), or a command corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22 is sent. A sound output command for outputting sound to the sound output device 226 is set, and a lamp output command for causing the lamp display device 227 to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22 is set. can be configured to

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 changes the third pattern, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 10). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 10) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 19. FIG. FIGS. 11A and 11B are schematic diagrams schematically showing display contents of the third pattern display device 81 in this embodiment. The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114, which will be described later, so that, for example, three pattern rows (upper, middle, and lower) ( L1 to L3) are displayed (see FIG. 11(b)). The decorative pattern that fluctuates corresponding to the variable display of the third pattern (special pattern) displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81) is attached with identification information imitating the numbers “0” to “9”. It is composed of 10 types of main symbols, respectively.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the main symbols are formed using different types of display modes according to identification information imitating numerals. In this way, by using a display mode corresponding to each piece of identification information, the player can be visually notified of the lottery result of the special symbol, so that the player can play an easy-to-understand game. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery by the main controller 110, which will be described later, is a big hit, the same main symbols (for example, "777") are displayed in a variable display, and the variable display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot occurs after the is over. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110 .

The main display area Dm displays three pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled vertically for variable display.

As shown in FIG. 11(a), the main display area Dm has one effective line L1 formed in the left-right direction. When the three symbols are stopped in a combination of big winning symbols (combination of the same main symbols in the first embodiment) on the activated line L1, a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.

In addition, the mode of the variable display of the third symbols in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the one described above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbols in the row can be changed as appropriate. Also, the patterns displayed in a variable manner on the third pattern display device 81 are not limited to the above. Further, the area where the third symbol is variably displayed may be configured to be variable. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol or moving the variable display area to a position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize (for example, a corner of the display screen), making it difficult for the player to understand whether the third symbol is changing. You may make it Also, during the period when the special symbol is fluctuating, the fluctuation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then changed again.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol is displayed (dynamically displayed), but the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the normal symbol is not limited to this. may be configured to be variably displayed (dynamically displayed). In this case, the player determines whether the variation display of the third symbol executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 corresponds to the variation of the special symbol or the variation of the normal symbol. It is also possible to configure so that the information is notified in an incomprehensible way. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to understand what kind of privilege is given to the player according to the result of the variable display of the third pattern executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加

In addition, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to perform both the variable display corresponding to the variation (lottery) of the special symbols and the variation display corresponding to the variation (lottery) of the normal symbols, the game content ( The target of the third pattern may be switched according to the game state), for example, during the normal state, the variable display of the third pattern corresponding to the variation of the special symbol (lottery) is executed, and the time saving state is performed. In the middle, it may be constructed so as to execute the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation (lottery) of the normal symbol. In this case, it is preferable to variably display the third symbol corresponding to the symbol type in which a lottery advantageous to the player (a lottery on the side where the player pays more attention to the lottery result) is executed. On the other hand, the display mode and display area of the third symbol may be changed so as to correspond to the type of the varying symbol. This makes it possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

As shown in FIG. 11(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts. The upper one-third of the area is a sub-display area Ds for displaying an advance notice effect, characters, the number of pending balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three left, middle and right display areas Dm1 to Dm3, and three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom for variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle and lower stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and the third symbols stop on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. This stop display state is maintained for at least one second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period of time (one second or more), the player can determine whether the combination of the third symbols corresponds to a big win (the lottery result of the special symbols is a big win). presence or absence) can be suppressed from being overlooked. Also, when the third symbol is stopped, if a combination of big winning symbols (in this embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on the effective line L1, the big winning is confirmed, the big winning game is started, and the big winning animation (opening effect) ) is displayed.

In addition, if the combination of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to a loss and there is a held ball, then after one second stop display (confirmed display), a variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the held ball is performed. is started. In addition, when there are a plurality of reserved balls, a lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in terms of time.

On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the missing of the special symbols is stopped (confirmed) for 1 second while there is no held ball, the stopped display of the third symbol continues. . This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or a new game ball enters the special figure entrance 64 . Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has passed since the third symbol was stop-displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. Although the player shoots the game ball continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), it is rare that the ball does not enter the special figure entrance 64, and the third symbol is stopped. Most of the cases where the displayed state continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds) are due to the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing any games because the player has quit the game. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has passed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily judge whether the game is being played based on the presence or absence of display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, if a new game ball enters the special figure entrance 64 before a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the new entry is displayed. executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is evenly divided into three sub-areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the horizontal direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of game balls (retained balls) that have not been changed among the game balls that have entered the special figure entrance 64 and through gate 67. , and the small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying the preview effect image.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 11(b), a total of nine main patterns of the third pattern are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the secondary display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the right small area Ds3, suggesting to the player that the state is more likely to transition to a big win than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character 710 (a boy wearing a headband in this embodiment) normally performs a predetermined action, and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, or another character performs a specific action. A notice effect is performed by appearing or the like.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the special figure entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of times the ball enters is up to four. The number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and is also displayed in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. Also, when the ball enters the through gate 67, the number of times the ball enters is reserved up to one time, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first pattern display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. . In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number pattern is displayed for one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number patterns. That is, when one reserved ball pattern is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one, and when four reserved ball patterns are displayed, the number of reserved balls is Indicates 4 balls. Further, when the reserved ball number pattern is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball. In addition, the left half of the small area Ds1 displays a reserved ball number pattern indicating the number of reserved balls based on the number of balls entered into the special ball entrance 64, and the right half of the small area Ds1 displays through It is configured to display a reserved ball number pattern indicating the number of reserved balls based on the number of balls entered into the gate 67 . In the example of FIG. 11(b), while four reserved ball patterns are displayed in the left half of the small area Ds1, no reserved ball pattern is displayed in the right half. Although there are four reserved balls, the number of reserved balls of normal symbols is zero.

In addition, in this embodiment, the ball entering the special figure entrance 64 is configured to be suspended up to four times, and the ball entering the through gate 67 is suspended up to one time. Although configured, the maximum number of held balls is not limited to this, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Alternatively, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls may be indicated by a number on a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the areas divided into four areas may be changed by the number of reserved balls. (For example, colors or lighting patterns) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

Also, in the display screen shown with reference to FIG. 11, the sub-display area Ds is formed above the main display area Dm, but the display area may be formed in a manner other than this. A sub-display area Ds may be formed below the area Dm. Also, in this case, it is preferable to variably form the display area of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 according to the set game state. As a result, the player can easily understand that the game has changed to a different game state just by looking at the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . Furthermore, a state in which the player is forced to pay attention to the display mode of the main display area Dm, such as a state in which the variable display of the third symbol is executed to indicate that the special symbol lottery result is a big win and the degree of expectation is high. Then, the display area of the sub-display area Ds may be made smaller or the sub-display area Ds may be hidden.

<Regarding the production content of the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 12 to 19, the contents of the effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery (special pattern lottery), a time saving state (low probability state for special patterns, high probability state for normal patterns) is set after the jackpot game ends. This time-saving state continues until the special symbol lottery reaches the specified number of times (until the predetermined end condition of the time-saving state is satisfied), and when the special symbol lottery is performed the specified number of times, the time-saving state end condition. is established and the normal state is set.

The time saving state is a state in which a high probability state of normal patterns is set, and compared to the case where the game state is a normal state, the open state in which the ball can enter the general electric winning device 640 by the general pattern per game is It is configured to be easy to set.

Then, when the win of the normal pattern is won and the ball enters the special electric operation opening 643 in the electric prize winning device 640, the prize winning game is executed, and the ball enters the V prize opening 165 provided in the V winning prize device 65. A game for winning is executed.

Here, in this embodiment, a game ball shot aiming at the left side area of the game board 13 is configured to pass through the through gate 67 with a probability of 100%. Then, in the lottery of the normal pattern executed by the game ball passing through the through gate 67, when the time saving state is set, it is designed to win with a probability of 3/10, and the normal pattern is selected. , the electric accessary 640a will be in an open state, and a general pattern winning game will be executed.

The general pattern per game executed during the time saving state is a period (3 seconds ) A normal figure per game is executed in which the electric accessory 640a is in an open state.

Furthermore, in the general pattern winning game executed during the time saving state, most of the balls that have won the general electric prize device 640 are configured to enter the special electric operation opening 643, and the balls enter the special electric operation opening 643. Triggered by the hitting of the ball, the accessory winning game is executed. Then, the V winning device 65 is opened by executing the role winning game, and the balls winning the V winning device 65 enter the V winning port 165 at a rate of about 1/11, and the V winning port 165 It is constructed such that a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed when the ball wins a prize.

In other words, during the time-saving state, rather than executing a game (special game) that aims to win a jackpot in a special symbol lottery, a game (special electric Since the jackpot game can be executed more easily in the game), the player executes the game while desiring the V prize (V jackpot game) by the role winning game in the special electric game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the left area of the game board 13 in order to win the ball in the general electric prize winning device 640 as a special electric game (for passing the ball through the through gate 67 that triggers the execution of the normal symbol lottery) You need to aim and shoot the ball. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the game (left-handed game) is executed aiming at the left side area of the game board 13, the ball enters the special figure entrance 64, so during the time saving state, the special Both a figure game (a game for drawing a lottery for special symbols) and a special electric game (a game for drawing a lottery for normal symbols) are executed.

The time-saving state in which the special electric game is more advantageous to the player than the special game is the time until the special symbol lottery executed by the special symbol game reaches the specified number of times (i.e., the variation of the special symbol for the specified number of times Since it is configured to continue until the time) passes, when the game state shifts to the time saving state, the time saving state ends and the special symbol fluctuation time that triggers the transition to the normal state passes , Execution of the game while expecting a V prize by the special electric game is a basic game method during the time saving state in this embodiment.

Various effects are executed in the third symbol display device 81 in order to convey the state of the time-saving game to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 12 to 19, but when the jackpot game is executed and the jackpot ends, the game state is changed to a V rush mode for indicating that the game state is a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player. , and notifies that the time saving state has been set. Then, various effects during the V rush will be explained. Hereinafter, the time saving state is referred to as "V rush" for simplification of explanation.

First, with reference to FIG. 12(a), the jackpot ending screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 12(a) is a diagram showing an example of the ending screen of the jackpot (game). When the final round of the jackpot game ends, as shown in FIG. 12(a), the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 displays the characters "After the jackpot ends, the V rush will begin!" , indicates in an easy-to-understand manner for the player that the transition to the V rush mode indicating that the time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game. Then, in the main display area Dm, a comment "Get 40 seconds of V rush period" with a short remaining time mode 801 of "40 seconds" is displayed to indicate the period during which the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot game continues. be done.

Here, the display contents of the remaining short time mode 801 will be described. In this embodiment, as described above, as the end condition of the time saving state, the end condition that is established when the number of special symbol lottery times reaches the specified number of times (for example, 4 times) is set. Therefore, the time-saving state is continued until the time until the special symbol lottery reaches the prescribed number of times (that is, the total time of the fluctuation time of the special symbols for the prescribed number of times) elapses. In the remaining short time mode 801, a display mode showing the total time obtained by totaling the fluctuation time of the special symbols until the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied is displayed.

Next, the holding status of each symbol in the state shown in FIG. 12(a) will be described with reference to FIG. 12(c). FIG. 12(c) is a schematic diagram showing the status of holding each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 12(a) is displayed. In this embodiment, a maximum of four reserved memories of special symbols and a maximum of one reserved memory of normal symbols are configured to be memorizable. In FIG. 12(c), the running special figure th0 for explaining the situation of the special symbol variation being executed, and the special figure first reservation th1 to special figure for explaining the winning information of the special symbols that are reserved and stored. The fourth reservation th4 in the figure, the running normal diagram fh0 for explaining the situation of the normal symbol fluctuation under execution, the first normal diagram reservation fh1 for explaining the winning information of the normal symbols that are reserved and stored, is used to explain the situation of each symbol.

FIG. 12(c) is a state in which four reserves of a special symbol in which a variation pattern of 10 seconds is set are accumulated in the special figure first reservation th1 to the special figure fourth reservation th4. That is, 40 seconds, which is a value obtained by adding up the fluctuation time for four times of the special symbol lottery, is set for the period of the time-saving state this time. Therefore, the characters "40 seconds" are displayed in the short remaining time display mode 801 for indicating the duration of the game state that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner how long the V-rush period will last. can.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the duration of the V rush, which is advantageous to the player, is displayed in a specific number of seconds as shown in the short remaining time display mode 801. The player may be informed of the remaining period of time using an indicator or the like. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a thrilling game.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12A, the short remaining time mode 801 is displayed in a display mode showing all of "40 seconds" calculated as the duration of the V rush. However, at the time of notifying that the V rush is about to start, only a part (e.g., 30 seconds) of the value (e.g., 40 seconds) calculated as the duration of the V rush is notified. However, it may be configured to additionally notify a value corresponding to an unnotified minute (for example, 10 seconds) during execution of the V rush.

In this case, for example, when the number of times of time saving is set to 4 times, the variation time of the special symbols corresponding to 3 special symbol reservations among the 4 special symbol reservations (special symbol reservations) that have already been acquired In the case of FIG. 12(c), the value "30 seconds", which is the total value of the special figure first reservation th1 to the special figure third reservation th3, may be displayed when the V rush rushes. By configuring in this way, it is possible to simplify the processing for notifying only a part of the value calculated as the duration of the V rush.

As shown in FIG. 12(a), in the present embodiment, it is configured to display the duration of the V rush by summing up the fluctuation time of the special symbol lottery executed a plurality of times until the time saving state ends. ing. Furthermore, in order to make it difficult for the player to grasp the current special figure pending number, the display mode for showing the special figure pending number is not displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 . As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the value of the remaining short time mode 801 displayed as the duration of the V rush is the total value of the variable times corresponding to how many special figure reservations. Also, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the variation time of each special symbol lottery.

Therefore, for example, even in the pachinko machine 10 in which the variation pattern of the variation time is set differently depending on whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot or a loss, the display mode of the remaining short time mode 801, It is possible to prevent a player from grasping in advance the lottery result in the special figure reservation (whether or not the special figure reservation contains prize winning information corresponding to the winning of the jackpot).

Further, for example, when the lottery result of the special design is a big hit, the variation pattern with the variation time of 50 seconds is selected, and when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, the variation time is 10 seconds and 20 seconds. second, pachinko machine 10 configured to select any variation pattern of 30 seconds, special figure first hold th1 is "10 seconds", special figure second hold th2 is "30 seconds", special When the third hold th3 of the figure is "20 seconds" and the fourth hold th4 of the special figure is "10 seconds", "50 seconds" is displayed as the display mode of the remaining short time mode 801 indicating the duration of the V rush. It should be configured so that it can be displayed. By configuring in this way, it is a period less than "90 seconds" which is the duration of the V rush (the total value of the fluctuation time for 4 special figure reservations), and is executed during the time saving state It is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation for winning a big win in the special pattern lottery (the special pattern lottery for the first time of time saving has won a big win and the fluctuation time is set to 50 seconds).

In other words, when displaying only a part of the period, not the entire period during which the V rush continues, a value corresponding to the variable time (50 seconds) set when the jackpot is won as described above is displayed. In addition to the configuration, for example, a display mode of "60 seconds" that makes the player think that the first time reduction is a loss variation (variation time of 10 seconds) and the second time reduction is a big hit variation (variation time of 50 seconds). It may be configured to display the remaining short time mode 801 . In other words, the value calculated when combining the variation time that can be selected for the jackpot variation and the variation time that can be selected for the outlier variation that is smaller than the value that indicates the actual duration of the V rush is displayed. do it.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is configured not to display the acquired special figure pending number, but without being limited to this, a display for showing the special figure pending number You may display a mode. Even in this case, by displaying the display mode for indicating the number of reserved special figures in a display mode that makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the content, the player can understand the number of reserved special figures currently acquired. can be made difficult.

Next, with reference to FIG. 12(b), the V rush start screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 12(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode in which the ending period of the jackpot ends and the V rush starts, and FIG. 12(d) shows the display screen shown in FIG. It is the figure which showed each design state in the case of being displayed. In other words, FIG. 12(b) shows the display screen at the time when the special figure reservation indicated by the special figure first reservation th1 at the end of the jackpot starts to change, and the special figure at the end of the jackpot The special figure hold that was the first hold th1 is shifted to the running special figure th0, and the special figure second hold th2 is the special figure first hold th1, and the special figure third hold th3 is the special figure second hold To th2, special figure 4th reservation th4 is the display screen in the state where each is shifted to special figure 3rd reservation th3. In addition, since the V rush is started, there is no new entry into the special figure entrance 64, and the special figure 4th reservation th4 is empty. And, as shown in the normal drawing fh0 during execution, the lottery of the normal symbols also starts to fluctuate, and the reservation is accumulated in the normal drawing first reservation fh1 (see FIG. 12(d)).

When the V-rush is started, the main display area Dm displays characters "under V-rush" as a game status notification mode indicating that it is now in the V-rush period. Next to the main display area Dm, a character 810 resembling a rabbit is dynamically displayed as if trying to take something out of the bag 810a. This indicates that the normal symbol is in the process of being changed.

A timer 812 is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm to indicate the remaining period of the V rush period that is advantageous to the player. This timer 812 displays a value obtained by summing up the fluctuation time for the specified number of times of the special symbols until the end of the time saving state. In FIG. 12(b), the number of lotteries for special symbols during the time saving state is stipulated to be 4 times, and 10 seconds, which is the fluctuation time of the special symbol th0 during execution, and the special symbol 1st reservation th1 to special symbol 3rd The timer 812 indicates “40.0 seconds”, which is the sum of the fluctuation times up to hold th3. This timer 812 is displayed so that its value is decremented each time the variation time of the running special figure th0 is decremented, so that the player can easily understand that the V rush period is progressing. can.

Furthermore, in the sub-display area Ds, the text "When the timer reaches 0, the V rush ends!" Players are notified of this. As described above, during the V rush period, the player plays the game with the aim of entering the ball into the V winning opening 165 . Therefore, the player can easily understand the period (remaining period) until the advantageous period ends by visually recognizing the change state of the value displayed on the timer 812 .

Then, in the display area HR1 on the upper left of the main display area Dm, the character "first run" is displayed, and the game state is changed after the jackpot is won from the normal state (so-called first win) and the V rush is started. It shows how many times the V rush period has passed without shifting to the normal state. Further, a display area HR2 shown below the display area HR1 displays "0pt", and displays the number of prize balls won in the jackpot won during the V rush period. In this way, by displaying the number of times the V rush continues in the display area HR1 and the number of winning balls won in the big win during the V rush in the display area HR2, the player can, at his/her own timing, The game history can be checked, and the convenience of the game can be improved.

A V rush variation area 811 is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the left area 811a, the middle area 811b, and the right area 811c of the V rush variation area 811 are such that the patterns change (dynamically display). A display mode is displayed. In this V rush variation area 811, information for suggesting the game situation during the V rush to the player is displayed. In FIG. 12(b), it is currently in the process of changing between special patterns and normal patterns, and the V rush fluctuation area 811 indicates that the V rush period has passed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 13(a), a description will be given of a display screen in the case where a general pattern is won during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment. FIG. 13(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when winning a normal figure during the V rush, and FIG. 13(c) shows the display screen shown in FIG. 13(a). It is the figure which showed each design state in the case where it is. In this embodiment, as described above, when the lottery for the normal symbol is won, the electric accessory 640a attached to the general electrical winning device 640 is opened so that the game ball can enter.

As shown in FIG. 13(c), the running normal pattern suspension fh0 is indicated by "◯" indicating that the normal symbol lottery was won. In the upper right of the main display area Dm, it is displayed that the character 810 who was looking for something in the bag 810a at the start of the V Rush (see FIG. 12(b)) won the lottery with the normal pattern and obtained the privilege. An animation of taking out the ticket 810b with the characters "Lucky" written thereon is displayed. In the display area HR3 at the lower right of the main display area Dm, an image schematically showing the general electric prize winning device 640 is displayed, the lottery for the normal symbol is won, and the electric accessory 640a is released. is displayed in Furthermore, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "If you enter the electric chew, you have a chance to win V!!" are displayed. By these display contents, the player can understand that the game is to be executed aiming at the electric chew, so that the player can be guided to the correct game method. In other words, the display mode of the display area HR3 and the display mode of the sub-display area Ds described above are guide/notification modes for guiding the game content to be executed to the player.

A timer 812 displayed in the center of the main display area Dm displays 30.9 seconds as its value. In the gaming situation of FIG. 13(a), the remaining variation time of the special figure fluctuation being executed shown in the special figure th0 being executed is 0.9 seconds, and the special figure first reservation th1 to special figure third reservation th3 The special lottery until is the period of V rush. Therefore, the total value of 30.9 seconds is displayed on the timer 812 . In addition, in FIG. 13 (a), the special figure 4th reservation th4 that was not reserved at the start of the V rush (see FIG. 12 (b)) is reserved, but this is the specified number of V rushes. Since it becomes a special figure lottery executed after the period has elapsed, the fluctuation time of this special figure 4th reservation th4 is not added up. Therefore, "-" is shown in the special figure 4th reservation th4 (see FIG. 13(c)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 13(b), the display screen in the case of winning the character during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 13(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the accessory winning game is executed during the V rush, and FIG. 13(d) shows the display screen shown in FIG. 13(b). It is the figure which showed each design state in the case of being displayed. In this embodiment, as described above, when a game ball wins the special electric operation opening 643 in the general electric prize winning device 640, the V opening and closing door 65a attached to the V prize winning device 65 is opened. A game is executed.

FIG. 13(b) is a display screen when a game ball wins in the special electric operation opening 643 in the general electric prize winning device 640 due to the general figure hit shown in FIG. 13(a). In FIG. 13(a), the reserved ball that was reserved in the special figure first reservation th1 is shifted to the special figure th0 during execution in FIG. 13(b). A "?" indicating that the remaining variation time is 9.9 seconds and the variation is temporarily stopped is shown (see FIG. 13(d)). In the present embodiment, when the accessory winning game or the jackpot game is executed, the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation being executed is interrupted (temporarily stopped) until each winning game is completed. are doing.

Then, in the main display area Dm, up to FIG. 13A, the subtraction display of the value of the timer 812, which decreased with the fluctuation time of the special symbol, is the fluctuation of the special symbol (subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation) is discontinued at the discontinued time (that is, the time when the special electric activation opening 643 was won). In addition, the characters "STOP!!" are displayed to indicate that the timer 812 is interrupting the subtraction display. From these display contents, the player can understand that the V rush period has been interrupted. In the display area HR3, the V winning device 65 with the V open/close door 65a opened is schematically displayed together with the characters "Aim!!".

As a result, the player can understand that the V opening/closing door 65a of the V prize winning device 65 is open (that a prize winning game is being executed) by visually recognizing the third symbol display device 81. can. That is, the display mode of the display area HR3 and the display mode of the sub-display area Ds in FIG. and a function of a guidance notification mode for guiding the player to the game to be executed during the winning game.

In addition, the V rush fluctuation area 811 is displayed in a so-called ready-to-win display mode, in which the letter "V" is displayed still in the left area 811a and the right area 811c. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "If you enter the V, you will win a big prize!!" The game can be executed with a sense of expectation that it will be possible.

That is, as shown in FIG. 11(b), a general game in the pachinko machine 10, that is, a lottery of special symbols is executed, and a game (special In the figure game), a plurality of identification information (each symbol (third symbol) dynamically displayed by the third symbol display device 81) for indicating the lottery result is variably displayed in multiple columns (for example, three columns) ( dynamic display), and among the plurality of symbol rows, except for one symbol row, the other symbol rows are a combination of identification information for indicating a jackpot winning, a reach display mode (for example, a combination of the same identification information ) is stopped, a ready-to-win effect is executed to increase the expectation of winning the jackpot.

The game (special electric game) executed during the time saving state (V rush) in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is not a special symbol lottery, but a normal symbol lottery as a base, and finally V winning through various processes. Since it becomes a game in which a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed by winning a ball into the mouth 165, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to understand the specific game content of the special electric game. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the left area 811a of the V rush fluctuation area 811, the middle The variable display mode of the symbols (characters) variably displayed (dynamically displayed) in the respective areas of the area 811b and the right area 811c is changed so that an effect mode as if a special game is being executed is executed. Configure. By configuring in this way, the player can grasp each display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 without grasping the specific game contents in the special electric game. It is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game for the person.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14(a), the V winning screen during the winning character game during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 14(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a game ball enters the V winning opening 165 during a V-rush winning game and a jackpot is awarded, and FIG. 14(c). ) is a diagram showing the state of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 14(a) is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, during the V rush, the role winning game is executed, and when the ball wins the V winning opening 165 during the role winning game (when V wins), the jackpot game ( V jackpot game) is provided.

FIG. 14(a) is a display screen when a ball wins in the V winning hole 165 during the winning game shown in FIG. 13(b). As described above, since the variation of the special symbol is interrupted during the per-accessory game, the running special symbol th0 is temporarily stopped while leaving the variation time of 9.9 seconds. And special figure 1st suspension th1 and special figure 2nd suspension th2 are suspensions within the specified number of times of this V rush, and the variation time is set to 10 seconds each. Therefore, the remaining period of the V rush period remains "29.9 seconds" from the time shown in FIG. 13(b) (see FIG. 14(c)).

Then, when it is confirmed that the ball wins V and the jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed, the subtraction of the V rush period is not subtracted for a predetermined period (jackpot game period). The display mode of “29.9 seconds” displayed by the timer 812 shown in FIG. "Time stock 29.9 seconds" is displayed in the display area HR4.

In this embodiment, when a V winning (V jackpot game) occurs during the temporary stop of the special figure, the special symbol lottery executed after the temporarily stopped special figure fluctuation is executed this time. The time saving state is continued until the time saving number of times set corresponding to the jackpot type of the jackpot game is executed. That is, it is configured so that the information (the number of times of time saving) for establishing the time saving end condition is not updated (subtracted) by the interrupted special pattern variation (restart special pattern variation) executed after the end of the jackpot game.

That is, in the state shown in FIG. 14(c), when the number of times of reduction in working hours is set to 4 times after the end of the jackpot game, the remaining period (9.9 seconds) of the special symbol fluctuation during interruption, 4 special symbols The value obtained by adding the special figure fluctuation time for each is the duration of the next V rush. By configuring in this way, the special game is performed in the normal state, and the jackpot game (V jackpot game) is performed during the V rush against the time saving state (at the time of the first rush of the V rush) set by winning the jackpot. The time saving state (during V rush continuation) that is executed and set again after the end of the jackpot game can set the V rush continuation period longer by the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation time) of the restart special figure fluctuation. It is possible to make it easier to provide a player with an advantageous V rush when the V rush is continued rather than when the V rush is first entered. Therefore, the player can play the game while expecting the V rush to continue.

In addition, other methods may be used to set a time-saving state that is more advantageous to the player when the V rush continues than when the V rush first enters. (Winning a jackpot in a special lottery), and when a time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, and when the conditions for executing the jackpot game are established in the time saving state (V prize in a special electric game), and after the jackpot game ends Time saving It may be configured such that a different variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol depending on when the state is set. than when the jackpot is won) and the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, the conditions for executing the jackpot game are established in the time-saving state (V prize in the special electric game), and the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends It is preferable to configure so that a variation pattern with a longer variation time is more likely to be selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier to lengthen the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation executed during the time saving state during the continuation of the V rush than at the time of the first rush of the V rush, and as a result, the V rush can be extended in duration. Therefore, since added value can be given to the player who continues the V rush, the player's willingness to play can be enhanced.

On the other hand, as a technical idea opposite to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even if it is configured to update (subtract) the information (time saving number of times) for establishing the time saving end condition by executing the restart special figure fluctuation Alternatively, it may be configured such that the special symbol variation with a longer variation time is more likely to be executed when the V rush first enters than when the V rush continues. By configuring in this way, while suppressing the V rush from continuing excessively, the V rush is prevented from executing a jackpot game (V jackpot game) even once in the special electric game executed during the V rush. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the desire to play due to the end of the game.

In addition, as in the present embodiment, when using a configuration in which the timing of interrupting the special figure variation being executed has a great effect on the length of the duration of the V rush after the jackpot game (V jackpot game) ends, In a state where the special figure variation can be interrupted (for example, in a state in which a normal winning game is won), the player is notified of information for indicating the remaining variation time of the special figure variation being executed. , The player may be configured to be able to select whether to interrupt the special figure variation. In other words, if the remaining variation time of the special figure variation being executed is longer than the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the game for interrupting the special figure variation (special electric activation opening 643 during the normal figure per game Execute a game to win a ball and execute a game per accessory), select a game aiming for V winning, and the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation being executed is shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) In some cases, it may be configured so that it is possible to select a game that does not interrupt the special figure fluctuation.

In addition, when a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is provided by a V prize, the fluctuation time of the temporarily stopped special pattern and the special pattern within the specified number of V rushes suspended at that time The variable time is configured to be displayed as the preset duration of the next V rush. The time is displayed in the H display area HR4 of the main display area Dm. Therefore, the player can confirm the period stocked for the next V rush by confirming the display area HR4.

Then, in the V rush variation area 811 for indicating the game state during the V rush in the main display area Dm, "V" is stopped and displayed in the middle area 811b that fluctuates in FIG. 13(b). Since the letter "V" is still displayed in the left area 811a and the right area 811c when the character winning is executed, the left area 811a, the middle area 811b and the right area 811c are combined to form "VVV". ” is displayed, indicating that the jackpot has been won. In addition, the characters "Congratulations on the big win!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display contents, it is clearly shown to the player that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 165 during the winning of the role and the jackpot has been granted.

In the present embodiment, the V rush variation area 811 stops displaying the left area 811a and the right area 811c when the character winning is executed, and displays the middle area 811b when the V prize is won during the character winning. Although it is configured to be stopped, the present invention is not limited to this, and the left region 811a is displayed when winning a general pattern, the right region 811c is displayed when a prize winning is executed, and the middle region is displayed when a V prize is won. 811b may be configured to stop display. In this way, when the game conditions are satisfied, etc., the step-by-step effect is executed, so that when the player visually recognizes the V fluctuation area 811, the player can instantly determine which stage the game stage is. can. Therefore, more information can be provided to the player. Also, the characters to be stopped may indicate that a big win is given and the player can obtain a privilege, and may be displayed as "win" or "V win". By displaying a plurality of characters indicating a big win in this manner, it is possible to provide the player with a more varied presentation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14(b), the loss screen during winning of the character during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 14(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the game ball does not enter the V winning opening 165 during the prize winning during the V rush. In this embodiment, it is configured to temporarily stop the variation of the special symbol that has been executed when it is executed for winning the role, but if the V prize cannot be won during the winning for the role, the temporary stop is performed. The variation of the special pattern that was used is resumed.

FIG. 14(b) is a display screen when the game ball does not enter the V winning opening 165 after the winning of the prize is executed in FIG. 13(b). In the V fluctuation area 811 indicating the game situation during the V rush in the main display area Dm, the character "x" indicating that the V prize is not won is displayed in the middle area 811b. Therefore, in the V rush fluctuation area 811, the deviation display form of "VxV" is displayed. As a result, the player can understand that the game ball could not enter the V winning opening 165 during the winning of the prize this time.

Then, in the main display area Dm, characters "Restart!!" are displayed to indicate that the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped special figure is restarted. Then, the display mode for indicating the remaining period of the V rush indicated by the timer 812 begins to decrease again with the resumption of fluctuation of the special figure shown in the running special figure th0 (see FIG. 14(d)). As a result, the player can easily understand that the game must be executed with the aim of winning V within the time indicated by the timer 812 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 15(a), the jackpot ending screen during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 15(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the jackpot ending during the V Rush, and FIG. 15(c) is each pattern when the display screen shown in FIG. 15(a) is displayed. It is the figure which showed the situation. In the present embodiment, if a jackpot is won or a V prize is won during the V rush period, the V rush period (time saving state) is set again.

FIG. 15(a) is a view showing the ending screen of the big win awarded from the V prize shown in FIG. 14(a). As described above, when the jackpot is given during the V rush, the fluctuation time between the temporary stop running special figure th0 and the special figure second hold th2 which was the specified number of times during the previous V rush period are displayed in the display area HR4 as the time stock, and the characters "time stock 29.9 seconds" are displayed. Then, during the special figure reservation corresponding to the special figure third reservation th3 in FIG. Figure hold variation time is calculated.

As described above, when a big win is awarded during the V rush, the V rush is set again at the end of the big win game. The period of the V rush is set to a value obtained by adding the remaining time of variation of the special figure temporarily stopped during the big win and the variation time for the number of lotteries of the special figure given by the kind of big win. In FIG. 15(a), 29.9 seconds as time stock as displayed in the display area HR4, that is, the remaining period (9.9 seconds) of the interrupted special figure fluctuation, and during the previous V rush The number of seconds obtained by adding up the special figure hold fluctuation time (20 seconds in total) corresponding to the special figure first hold th1 and special figure second hold th2 that had already been added and displayed on the timer 812 is already displayed as a time stock. Then, for the number of seconds that are time stocked, the fluctuation time (15 seconds) of the special figure hold corresponding to the special figure third hold th3 as a value that can be newly added to the V rush period at the time of the end of the jackpot game is added.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 15(a), the ending screen of the jackpot game in which the time reduction is given four times after the end of the jackpot game is shown. Since it is up to hold th2 (for two special figure holds), it is possible to add and display the fluctuation time of two more special figure holds to the timer 812 as this V rush period, but in FIG. 15 (a) , Since there is only one special figure hold that can be added and displayed on the timer 812 (because the special figure hold is not stored in the special figure fourth hold th4), the special figure hold corresponding to the special figure third hold th3 Only time is added and displayed.

In this embodiment, when the jackpot is given during the V rush, and the number of special figures reserved at that time is short of the specified number of times (time saving number) of the time saving (V rush) given this time, The fluctuation time corresponding to the special figure reservation held and stored until after the end of the jackpot game is configured to execute an effect in which the value of the time stock is added, and in FIG. A character of "+15 seconds GET" is displayed in the additional period display mode 802 corresponding to the special figure hold in which the 15 seconds deviation fluctuation pattern shown in th3 is executed. As a result, the player can enjoy the fact that the period in which the player is advantageous has been further extended. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, since it is configured so as to execute the effect of adding the V rush period during the ending period of the jackpot game, there is an expectation that the advantageous period will be extended at the time of the ending of the jackpot game. Since the player can play the game while holding the key, it is possible to draw more attention to the performance during the big win.

In addition, in the display area HR1 of the main display area Dm, the characters "second run" indicating that the V-rush has been continued twice are displayed, and in the display area HR2, the character that was obtained by the big win during the V-rush is displayed. "670P", which is the number of prize balls, is displayed. In this way, the game result is displayed at a position where the player can easily see it, and the value increases each time a big win is executed and a privilege is obtained, thereby making the player feel more satisfied. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, characters of "Continue V rush" are displayed to indicate that the V rush has been set again. As a result, the player can easily understand that the V rush that is advantageous to the player will be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 15(b), the timer addition screen during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 15(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the timer addition screen during the V rush. As described above, in the present embodiment, the special symbol holding newly won at the time of the jackpot ending executed during the V rush, and the fluctuation time of the special symbol that was outside the period of the specified number of times of the V rush. Execute the superimposed production. Then, when the number of reserved balls for the prescribed number of V rushes is not reserved at the end of the jackpot, the number of reserved balls for the prescribed number of V rushes is newly increased during the V rush period until the special figure reservation for the prescribed number of V rushes is accumulated. Execute the additional production for the number of reserved balls.

FIG. 15(b) is a diagram showing a display screen when the game progresses from the ending of the jackpot shown in FIG. FIG. 15(d) is a diagram showing each symbol state when the display screen shown in FIG. 15(b) is displayed. In the main display area Dm, the V rush fluctuation area displays a variable display mode indicating that the V rush period has passed. 15(b), as shown in FIG. 15(d), the running special figure th0 resumes variation, the remaining variation time is 3.2 seconds, and the special figure first hold th1 and special figure second hold th2 stores holds each set to 10 seconds as a variable time. And special figure 3rd reservation th3 is a state in which the retention ball of the fluctuation time of 15 seconds is stored. Therefore, the timer 812 displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 displays "38.2" seconds, which is the sum of these values.

The state of FIG. 15 (a), as described above, is a state in which it is possible to add the variable time for two new special figure reservations as the V rush period, but only one new special figure reservation is acquired It is a state (special figure third reservation th3 only). In this case, as shown in FIG. 15(b), when a new special figure reservation is obtained next time, the change time of the obtained special figure reservation is additionally displayed.

Specifically, it is shown that there was an additional winning in the special figure 4th reservation th4, and a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is set for this new special figure reservation. Therefore, an effect of adding 20 seconds to the current V rush period is executed. A character 810 displayed in the main display area Dm adds a V rush period, and throws a ticket 810b for indicating an extension of the advantageous period to the player to a timer 812 for indicating the remaining period of the V rush. is displayed. After this effect is executed, the fluctuation time of the special figure that has been additionally won this time is added to the remaining period of the V rush, and the timer 812 shows the value "58.2 seconds". is displayed. Also, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "Timer addition!!" are displayed to notify in an easy-to-understand manner that the V rush period has been extended (added).

Next, with reference to FIG. 16(a), the V rush end screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 16(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen showing the end of the V rush, and FIG. 16(c) shows the status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 16(a) is displayed. It is a figure showing. In this embodiment, if the game ball is not entered into the V winning opening 165 during the V rush period, or if the special symbol lottery does not win a jackpot, the V rush period ends, The game state shifts to the normal state.

As shown in FIG. 16(c), the display of "x" is shown to indicate that the running special figure th0f, which is the final variation of the current V rush, has come off and stopped. The reserved balls are accumulated from the special figure first reservation th1 to the special figure third reservation th3, but these reserved balls are reserved balls outside the prescribed number of times of V rush. In addition, during execution, the normal map fh0 is in a fluctuating state, and the normal map first reserved fh1 normal map reserved ball is accumulated.

Then, in the main display area Dm, a character "VGET x 2" indicating how many times the V rush has been continued this time is displayed, and furthermore, a prize ball ( A character is displayed to indicate how many rewards have been acquired. As a result, the game result of the current V rush is reported in an easy-to-understand manner for the player. Also, in the sub-display area Ds, characters "V Rush End" are displayed to notify that the advantageous period has ended. With these display modes, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the V rush period has ended.

Next, the V rush extension screen will be described with reference to FIG. 16(b). FIG. 16(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen showing that the V rush period has been extended, and FIG. 16(d) shows a case where the display screen shown in FIG. 16(b) is displayed. It is a diagram showing each symbol situation in.

In this embodiment, when the time saving state is set, it is configured to execute the V rush effect. Then, the time saving state is configured to end when the special symbol variation of the predetermined specified number of times ends. Specifically, when the number of times of time saving is set to 4 times, when the fourth special symbol variation is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) after the time saving state is set, the time saving state ends and returns to the normal state. It is configured to migrate with Here, since the special symbol lottery (variation) and the normal symbol lottery (variation) are executed independently, just before the end of the V rush period (the final variation of the special symbol in the time saving state stops When the normal figure winning game is executed immediately before displaying), the accessory winning game may be executed after the time saving state ends (after shifting to the normal state).

In this case, if the V rush effect ends at the timing when the game state shifts from the time-saving state to the normal state, a situation in which the role-winning game is started despite the end of the V rush effect does not occur. There is a risk that the player will be confused. Therefore, in the present embodiment, at the end timing of the V rush period (final fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol in the time saving state), if the game per normal pattern is executed, until the game per normal pattern ends, Alternatively, it is configured to extend the V rush effect until the accessory winning game executed in the wake of the normal figure winning game is completed. As a result, the V rush effect can be executed in correspondence with the special electric game period in which the V jackpot game is aimed, and therefore the effect can be easily understood by the player.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16 (d), the state in which the character "○" indicating that the normal figure tf0 was won during execution is shown, that is, during the normal figure per game, the final variation of the time saving state When the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed (stopped with "x" indicating that the running special symbol th0 is stopped due to disconnection), as shown in FIG. 16(b), the third symbol display In the main display area Dm of the device 81, a left area 811a, a middle area 811b, and a right area 811c of a V rush variation area 811 for indicating the game situation during the V rush are displayed in a varying state. That is, it suggests to the player that the V rush is continuing.

Then, the timer 812 displays "00.0 seconds" indicating that all the fluctuations of the special figure for the prescribed number of times in the time saving state have ended. However, above the main display area, the characters "V rush extended" are displayed. With such a display, the player learns that the V rush, which he thought has ended, has been extended, and can obtain unexpected joy. Then, the characters "Last Chance!!" The player can easily understand that the V rush will end.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 16(b), that is, when the ball is entered into the special electric operation opening 643 during the extended display of the V rush, the role per game is played in the same manner as during the normal V rush period. is executed. In this case, the display screen during the winning-access-game shown in FIG. 13B is displayed, and the characters "Last Chance!!" are continuously displayed in the sub-display area Ds. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the V rush period will end if the ball does not enter the V winning opening 165 in the current accessory winning game. Then, when the ball enters the V prize winning opening 165 in the role winning game displayed as "Last Chance!!", the same V jackpot game as during the normal V rush period is executed. On the other hand, if the ball does not enter the V winning opening 165, the V rush end screen shown in FIG. 16(a) is displayed after the accessory winning game ends.

As described above with reference to FIGS. 16(a) and 16(b), in the present embodiment, the V rush period is a period in which the special electric game can be executed, not the transition state of the game state. It is configured to execute a V rush effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand. The display timing of the end screen indicating the end of the V rush period shown in FIG. Display is started when the remaining period reaches a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the final variation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the display of the end screen is terminated at the timing when the next special symbol variation is started. It can be configured as follows. In this case, the V rush period displayed on the timer 812 may be calculated as the period until the end screen of the V rush is displayed.

By configuring in this way, after the value of the timer 812 becomes 0, the end screen can be displayed using a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). can be reported in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, when such a configuration is used, for example, at the time of displaying the end screen of V rush, the lottery situation of normal symbols is determined in advance, and the end screen of V rush is displayed. When it is determined in advance that a winning game will be executed, the extension screen shown in FIG. After the screen is displayed, when the normal figure winning game is executed, the end screen may be switched to the extension screen. In this way, by using the configuration to switch the end screen to the extended screen, it is possible to leave the possibility of aiming for the V jackpot game even after the end screen is displayed, so that the player can expect until the end. A game can be played while keeping the feeling. In addition, in this embodiment, when the extended screen shown in FIG. 16(b) is displayed, the normal state is set as the game state. When such a configuration is used, for example, a jackpot game is executed that is more advantageous to the player when the V jackpot game is executed during the normal state than when the V jackpot game is executed during the time saving state. It is better to configure it so that As a result, the period during which the extended screen is displayed indicates that the V rush period will end soon and that the advantageous jackpot game can be executed. Therefore, the player who is playing the game during the V rush period can play the game with expectation until the end. In addition, in this case, the state in which the normal state is set as the game state is divided into a special normal state in which the V rush period is extended and a normal normal state, and the special normal state is configured so as to be manageable. is set, the player is provided with a jackpot game advantageous to the player, and when the V jackpot game is executed during the normal normal state, almost no prize balls can be obtained as a penalty. Instead, it is preferable that a disadvantageous jackpot game in which the normal state is set is executed after the jackpot game ends. In addition, without being limited to this, for example, when the display condition of the extended screen is satisfied at the time when the final variation of the special symbol in the V rush period is stopped and displayed, the extended screen is displayed without terminating the time saving state. The time saving state may be terminated when the termination condition of is satisfied. As a result, the timing at which the time saving state ends is variable, so it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the time saving state ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17(a), the special screen at the time of the ending of the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 17(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the special screen at the ending of the jackpot game, and FIG. 17(c) is a diagram showing the display screen shown in FIG. 17(a). It is a figure showing each pattern situation. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the jackpot game is executed during the V rush, after the jackpot game ends, the period of the V rush is set again based on the number of reserved balls of the special symbols and the variation time. However, at the end of the jackpot game, if there is a reserved ball that performs a winning variation with a variation time of 200 seconds, a paradise mode performance indicating that the jackpot will be won without fail after the lapse of a predetermined period is executed. .

FIG. 17(a) is a display screen when the winning variation with the variation time of 200 seconds is suspended at the ending of the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 17(c), the holding status of each symbol at the ending of the jackpot game shown in FIG. not In addition, a "↓" is shown to indicate that the running normal map fh0 is fluctuating, and it is shown that the normal map first reserved fh1 is stored. And, in the special figure 1st reservation th1 and the special figure 2nd reservation th2, it is shown that the reservation ball in which the deviation variation pattern of 10 seconds is executed is stored.

And, in the special figure third reservation th3, the reservation ball in which the variation pattern is executed for 200 seconds is shown. In this embodiment, the details will be described later, but as a variation pattern of the special symbol during the time saving game (during the V rush), when the success determination result is a hit, the variation time is 200 seconds per long variation (hereinafter referred to as special (referred to as winning) may be executed. Furthermore, in the big wins (big wins A, big wins B) that are won in the lottery of special symbols, a time-saving state is set after the big win game ends. Therefore, until the fluctuation of this special win stops (during heaven mode), even if the player is unable to enter the V winning slot 165 in the special electric game, he/she will always win a big win by the big win game won by the special win. Since the period of the V rush is set again after the game ends, the special electric game can be executed without anxiety. In addition, as shown in FIG. 17(c), the special figure 4th reservation th4 indicates that there is a reservation ball, but since the jackpot game is executed in the special figure 3rd reservation th3, the special figure 3rd reservation Since it is set as the period of V rush set after the end of the jackpot game executed by the th3 reserved ball, "-" is shown for the variable time.

Then, as shown in FIG. 17(a), when there is a special win in the reserve at the end of the jackpot game, the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 indicates that there is a special win in the reserve. The characters "enter heaven mode" are displayed. In addition, when the game state is the normal state, or during the V Rush when there is no special win in the hold, the first lucky character 820a and the second lucky character 820b which are not displayed are displayed. Also, the characters "Super Lucky!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In this way, the first lucky character 820a and the second lucky character 820b, which are not displayed during the normal state or during the V rush in which there is no special win in the hold, are displayed, so that the player can understand that the game situation is a special situation. It is possible to have a sense of anticipation that it will be, and to continue playing the game with excitement. That is, the first lucky character 820a and the second lucky character 820b form a special game situation suggesting mode for suggesting that the current game situation is a special game situation for the player.

Also, in the center of the main display area Dm, a special period display mode 803 written as "220 seconds" is displayed. The value displayed in the special period display mode 803 is the time until the fluctuation of winning the special prize in the special symbol lottery stops, that is, the value set as the period of the heaven mode. That is, it becomes a special game period notification mode for indicating the special game period to be executed from now on. Therefore, the value displayed in the special period display mode 803 is a sum of 200 seconds, which is the variation time for the special win, and the variation time for the number of reserved balls until the special win is won. In FIG. 17(c), the fluctuation time of 10 seconds is set for each of the special figure first reservation th1 and the special figure second reservation th2. Furthermore, since the special per fluctuation time shown in the special figure 3rd hold th3 is 200 seconds, the value of the fluctuation time from the special figure 1st hold th1 to the special figure 3rd hold th3 is added up "220 seconds" , is the period in which the heaven mode is set.

The period of the time saving state (V rush) in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to notify the player in the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the jackpot game, but the special symbol fluctuation time in the time saving game state is configured to execute a variation pattern in which a maximum variation time of 50 seconds is set as the longest variation time, excluding 200 seconds, which is a special winning variation (see FIG. 25(c)). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17(a), when an extremely long time exceeding 200 seconds is displayed in the special period display mode 803, the player should understand that the time saving state is always set again. can be done, and the special electric game can be executed with peace of mind.

In addition, in this embodiment, at the ending of the jackpot game, it is determined whether or not there is a special hit variation in the reserved balls, and if there is a special hit, the player is notified at the end of the jackpot game. However, the notification mode is not limited to this. For example, when there is a special win in the hold, at the ending of the big win, the time until the special win variation is executed is notified, and when the special win variation starts, "200 seconds" is set. The player may be notified that the period has been extended. With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player an unexpected pleasure that the period of the V-rush, which was thought to have ended, was suddenly extended for a long period of time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17(b), the screen during the heaven mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 17(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen during heaven mode, and FIG. 17(d) shows each pattern situation when the display screen shown in FIG. 17(b) is displayed. It is a diagram. In this embodiment, when there is a special hit in the reserved ball at the end of the jackpot, the time until the fluctuation of the special hit stops is called heaven mode, and the player can execute the special electric game with peace of mind. It is structured to be a period that can be done. FIG. 17(b) is an example of the display screen when the game progresses after shifting to the heaven mode shown in FIG. 17(a).

As shown in FIG. 17B, in the display area HR1 of the main display area Dm, " 10th station" is displayed. In the display area HR2 provided below the display area HR1, characters "6000pt" indicating the number of winning balls won in the jackpot game executed after the shift to the V rush are displayed. Above the main display area Dm, the characters "in paradise mode" are displayed so that the player can instantly determine the current game state. In addition, in the same way as during the V rush, the V rush variation area 811 is displayed, and in each area of the left area 811a, the middle area 811b, and the right area 811c, a lottery of normal symbols is executed, and the special electric game progresses. A variable display mode is shown to indicate that the Also, like during the V rush, an animation of the character 810 looking for something in the bag 810a is displayed in the upper right of the main display area Dm. This indicates that the lottery for normal symbols is being executed.

And, as shown in FIG. 17(d), in the running special symbol th0, the variation of the special symbol with the remaining variation time of 30 seconds is being performed. This running special figure th0, in the gaming situation shown in FIG. 17(c), is that the reserved ball that executes the special hit shown in the special figure third reserved th3 has started to fluctuate. Therefore, the remaining period of heaven mode being executed in FIG. 17(b) is 30 seconds which is the remaining variation time of this executing special figure th0. In addition, although it shows that there is a reserved ball in the special figure 1st reservation th1 to the special figure 3rd reservation th3, it is a special figure lottery that is performed outside the period of the heaven mode being performed , the variable time is indicated by "-". In addition, in the running general map fh0, "↓" indicating that the general map lottery is being executed is shown, and the general map first reservation fh1 is also in a situation where the reserved ball is stored.

The timer 812 in the main display area Dm is displayed so as to be decremented according to the remaining period of the variation of the running special figure th0. As shown in FIG. 17(d), since the remaining variation time of the running special figure th0 is th0, the character "30.0 seconds" is displayed on the timer 812 (see FIG. 17(b)). . Also, in the sub-display area Ds, a character saying "There is something good with the timer 0" is displayed, telling the player that he or she will win a jackpot when the value of the remaining period displayed on the timer 812 becomes 0. suggesting. That is, in the secondary display area Ds, a suggestive effect notification mode for suggesting the game situation from now on to the player is displayed.

As described above, in this embodiment, a part of the display mode in the heaven mode, which is the period until the winning symbols stop after winning the special prize, is configured to be the same as in the V rush mode. By configuring in this way, it is a basic game method that is advantageous to the player to execute the special electric game and win the game ball in the V winning opening 165 during the heaven mode as well as during the V rush. A certain thing can be guided to the player. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

It should be noted that the display mode is not limited to this, and may be configured to execute an effect dedicated to heaven mode. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a wide variety of presentations, and to further enhance the presentation effects.

Next, with reference to FIG. 18(a), the chance effect screen during winning of the character displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 18(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the chance production during winning the role, and FIG. It is the figure which showed the pattern situation. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the winning of the normal symbol is won and the game ball enters the special electric operation opening 643, the winning of the accessory is executed, and the V winning in the V winning device 65 is executed during the execution of the winning of the accessory. A jackpot is given when a game ball wins in the mouth 165.例文帳に追加In FIG. 18(a), the timing at which the game ball is likely to enter the V winning opening 165 during the winning of the accessory from the game situation shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 18(c), the holding status of each symbol in FIG. 18(a) is "?" indicating that the variation is temporarily stopped because the running special figure th0 is in the middle of winning the character. It is shown. Then, each holding ball from the special figure first reservation th1 to the special figure second reservation th2 shows a deviation variation of 10 seconds respectively. In addition, since the special figure third reservation th3 is a special figure variation that is performed outside the period of the V rush that is currently being performed, the variation time indicates "-". Furthermore, it has shown that special figure 4th reservation th4 is not reserved. And, in the normal figure fh0 being executed, "○" is shown to indicate that the normal figure lottery was won.

FIG. 18(a) is a notification screen for notifying the player that the game ball is likely to enter the V winning opening 165 during the prize winning shown in FIG. 13(b). In this embodiment, as described above, the game ball that has won the V winning device 65 during the winning of the accessory is stored in the storage valve 66a. The reservoir valve 66a is configured to be in an open state for 1.5 seconds out of the 3-second period so that the game ball flows down the third flow path 65d (see FIG. 7). Then, the first movable valve 66b disposed above the V winning opening 165 causes the game ball to flow to the V winning opening 165 for 0.5 seconds out of 5.5 seconds regardless of the game state. It is configured to be in an open state in which it can flow down the channel (see FIG. 27(a)).

In other words, in order to win the game ball into the V winning hole 165, the game ball that has flowed down the third flow path 65d after the storage valve 66a is opened, while the first movable valve 66b is set to the open state, It is necessary to enter the ball into the V winning hole 165 . Therefore, in this embodiment, it is determined whether the first movable valve 66b is opened within 2 seconds after the storage valve 66a is set to the open state, and the first movable valve 66b is opened within 2 seconds. When it is determined that this is the case, as shown in FIG. 18A, an emphasis mode 811z is displayed around the V rush fluctuation area 811 displayed in the main display area Dm. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, characters such as "Big Chance for V Winning!!" are displayed. In other words, the emphasis mode 811z is a timing notification mode for notifying the player of the timing at which the game state is likely to shift to an advantageous game state. By configuring in this way, the player can understand the timing at which V winning is likely to occur, and the game can be easily executed.

In the present embodiment, the timing at which V is likely to be won is notified by the highlighted display mode 811z or the comment in the sub-display area Ds. You can By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a more friendly game to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 18(b), the general pattern stop screen during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 18(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the normal symbol lottery is stopped during the period of the V rush, and FIG. 18(d) is the display screen shown in FIG. 18(b). It is a diagram showing each symbol situation when is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, during the V rush (time saving state), it is possible to win the lottery of normal symbols, win the game ball in the special electric operation opening 643, and execute the special electric game aiming at the V winning. , is the most advantageous game method for the player. Therefore, when the normal pattern lottery is not executed during this V rush, the special electric game cannot be executed, so the third pattern display device 81 executes the performance for prompting the shooting of the game ball.

As shown in FIG. 18(d), the holding status of each symbol during the V rush in FIG. ing. In addition, the special figure 1st reservation th1 and the special figure 2nd reservation th2 are each stored with a reservation ball in which deviation variation for 10 seconds is executed. And special figure 3rd reservation th3 and special figure 4th reservation th4 are the states where the reservation sphere is not remembered. Therefore, the remaining period of the V rush shown in FIG. is. And, during execution general figure fh0, "-" which shows that general figure lottery is not executed is shown. Furthermore, the held ball is not stored in the normal first hold fh1.

As shown in FIG. 18(d), when the normal symbol lottery is stopped without being executed during the V rush, the electric accessory 640a associated with the normal winning device 640 is not set to the open state. , it is impossible to enter a game ball into the special electric activation port 643. In other words, the special electric game, which is the basic game method during the V rush, cannot be executed, and the special figure lottery is being executed. ends. Furthermore, in this embodiment, in order to enter the game ball into the special figure ball entrance 64 or the normal winning device 640, a left-handed game in which the game ball is shot aiming at the left area of the game board 13 is executed. Therefore, when a left-handed game is executed, the passage of the game ball to the through gate 67, which triggers the lottery of the normal symbols, is 100% executed. In other words, the game situation in which the normal figure lottery is not executed while the special figure lottery shown in FIG. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 executes an effect for prompting the player to shoot the game ball.

In the main display area Dm, the characters "During V rush" are displayed, and furthermore, the timer 812 displays "22.2 seconds" indicating the remaining period of the V rush as being subtracted as time elapses. are doing. From these display contents, the player can easily understand that the V Rush game is being executed and the remaining period is decreasing. In addition, in the V fluctuation area 811 where the fluctuation display is executed when the lottery for the normal symbol is executed, the left area 811a is "hit", the middle area 811b is "tsu", and the right area is " The characters "hit" in combination with "te" are shown to the player by an animation guided by the character 810. FIG. In other words, the V fluctuation area 811 indicates that the normal symbol lottery is not executed, and is in a warning display mode for indicating to the player that the V rush will end.

In addition, the characters "Please start the game" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display contents, it is possible to inform the player that the normal symbol lottery has not been executed and the special electric game cannot be executed, and since the special symbol lottery is being executed, It is possible to warn that the Vrush period, which is an advantageous period, is about to expire. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the advantageous period from ending unexpectedly by the player.

It should be noted that the effect of prompting the shooting of the game ball described above is not limited to this display mode. In other words, it suffices to convey to the player that the lottery for the normal symbols is not executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further warn the player that there is a risk of loss.

Next, with reference to FIG. 19(a), the special figure stop screen during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 19(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the special symbol lottery is not executed during the V Rush, and FIG. 19(c) is the display screen shown in FIG. 19(a). It is a diagram showing each symbol situation when is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the time saving state (V rush) continues until the special symbol lottery is executed for the specified number of times, and the value obtained by adding the variation time for the specified number of times is specified for the V rush. The period is configured to be notified to the player. Therefore, when the lottery for special symbols is not executed, the specified period is not discriminated, so a performance is executed to make the player expect how long the V rush will continue.

As shown in FIG. 19(c), the holding status of each reserved symbol in the gaming situation shown in FIG. It is shown. In addition, special figure 1st reservation th1 - special figure 4th reservation th4 indicate that the reservation sphere is not remembered. On the other hand, the running normal map fh0 is shown with "↓" indicating that the normal map lottery is being executed, and the normal map first reservation fh1 is also stored.

In this way, when the special symbol lottery is not executed during the V rush, the special electric game can be executed until the special symbol lottery for the prescribed number of times is executed. As shown in FIG. 19(a), the timer 812 displays characters "??? seconds" indicating that the special symbol lottery has not been executed and the prescribed period has not yet been reached. In addition, in the V fluctuation area 811, a fluctuation display of "↓↓↓" indicating that the lottery for normal symbols is being executed is displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a notification mode indicating that the prescribed period of the V-rush has not been reached is displayed as "How long will it last?" According to these display contents, the player is in a state where the remaining period of the V rush has not decreased because the special symbol lottery has not been executed, but since the normal symbol lottery has been executed, the special electric game can be executed. can understand that there is With this configuration, the player can play the game while being excited about how long the game situation advantageous to the player that the special electric game can be executed before the V rush period elapses continues. In other words, the display contents shown in FIG. 19(a) are suggestive notification contents for showing that the player is in an advantageous state.

In addition, as described above, when there are no more reserved balls with special symbols during the V rush period, it is once notified that the V rush period has ended, and then the game balls enter the special symbol entrance 64. When the player enters the ball, a resurrection effect may be executed such that the period of the V rush is revived. With such a configuration, the player can feel that the V rush period, which was thought to have ended, has been revived, and can obtain unexpected pleasure.

Next, with reference to FIG. 19(b), the lucky time screen during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 19(b) is a diagram showing an example of the lucky time screen during the V rush, and FIG. 19(d) shows the status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 19(b) is displayed. It is a diagram showing. In this embodiment, as described above, when the V jackpot game is executed during the time saving state (V rush), the remaining time of the special symbol variation during interruption and the number of times of saving time set after the V jackpot game ends (4 times) is set as a short period of time (V rush period) after the end of the V jackpot game.

Therefore, the longer the remaining period of the interrupted special symbol variation at the time when the V jackpot game is executed, the longer the next V rush period can be. However, on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the V rush period is displayed (subtraction display) using the display mode of the timer 812, but the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed is not displayed. The player had to play the game expecting that the length of the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed would be long every time the special symbol variation was interrupted.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the length of the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed satisfies a predetermined condition, an effect for informing the player of that effect is executed. Specifically, if the remaining period of the special symbol variation is longer than a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), or the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed is longer than the variation time of the special symbol variation to be executed next. is long, the lucky time effect can be executed. By constructing in this way, when the V winning game is executed during the lucky time, the next V rush period can be lengthened, so that the player can be motivated to play the game. can be done.

When the lucky time effect is executed, the characters “Enter lucky time” are displayed in the main display area Dm, and “10 seconds” is displayed as the period display mode 851 . On the display screen shown in FIG. 19(b), a lucky time effect is executed to indicate that the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed is longer than the variation time of the special symbol variation to be executed next. As shown in FIG. 19(d), when the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed is 20 seconds and the variation time of the special symbol variation to be executed next is 10 seconds, the difference is 10 Seconds are displayed in duration display 851 . The number of seconds displayed in the period display mode 851 is displayed by subtraction corresponding to the subtraction of the variation time of the special symbol variation, and when 0 seconds is displayed, the lucky time presentation ends.

Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of "Having a chance to hit a character during the lucky time" is displayed as a guide display mode for guiding the player to the privilege during the lucky time. As a result, the player can be motivated to play the game during the lucky time. Although detailed illustration is omitted, in the present embodiment, when the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed is less than a predetermined time (for example, less than 5 seconds), the effect that can be notified to the player As such, unlucky production is also executable. In other words, if the V jackpot game is executed while the unlucky effect is being executed, the player can understand that the V rush period to be set next tends to be shortened. .

By executing the unlucky performance in this way, the player is instructed to either actively execute the special electric game during the unlucky performance in order to make the player execute the V jackpot game for the time being during the V rush period, or to perform the special electric game during the V rush period. is subtracted, but it is possible to select whether to aim to set a longer V rush period after the end of the V jackpot game without performing the special electric game until the unlucky performance ends, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. can be improved.

In this embodiment, the above-described lucky time production and unlucky production are configured to be executed when the fluctuation time of the special symbol meets a predetermined condition, but the invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined condition is satisfied. In this case, whether or not to execute the performance may be determined by lottery, or whether or not to perform the performance may be determined based on the operation result of the operation means (frame button 22) operable by the player. It may be configured to Furthermore, the execution frequency of the effect may be varied according to the length of the period that can be displayed as the lucky time effect or the unlucky effect. It may be configured such that the lucky time presentation is executed with probability.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19(b), the player is notified of a period of time during which the lucky time effect is being executed, using a period display mode 851, during which the period is advantageous to the player. However, without being limited to this, it is also possible to display only the display mode indicating that it is a lucky time without displaying the period display mode 851 . As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the degree of advantage, so that the enjoyment of predicting the length of the V rush period to be set after the end of the V jackpot game can be provided.

Furthermore, as a condition for executing the lucky time effect and the unlucky effect, the remaining period of the V rush period, that is, the total period of the special symbol fluctuations until the end of the time saving state is a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or more. It may be provided as an execution condition, or it may be constructed so that the lucky time effect and the unlucky effect are not executed during the final variation of the special symbols in the V rush period.

<Regarding Transition of Game State of Pachinko Machine 10 in First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the content of transition of the game state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 20 is a transition diagram showing the flow of game states set in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

In the first embodiment, as the game state, normal state (low probability state of special design, low probability state of normal design), time-saving state (low probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design), 2 It is configured to be able to set two game states, regardless of the game state, the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, and the time saving end condition (for example, the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot) during the time saving state. The normal state is set when the condition that is satisfied when the process is executed a predetermined number of times (four times) is satisfied.

First, the case where the normal state is set as the game state will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the initial state (the state in which the processing when determining that the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 10) was operated in the start-up processing (see FIG. 54) of the main controller 110 was executed ), the normal state is set as the game state. Since this normal state is a low-probability state of normal symbols, it is difficult to win a ball in the general electrical winning device 640 (it is more difficult to win than a high-probability state of normal symbols). A left-handed game for entering a ball into the mouth 64 is executed.

In this normal state, when a jackpot is won in a special pattern (special drawing) lottery (special drawing lottery), either jackpot A or jackpot B is set as the jackpot type, and a jackpot game is executed. be. Detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. )” is set, and “jackpot B (4R (round), time reduction 15 times)” is set as the jackpot type at a rate of 1%.

In other words, when the jackpot is won during the normal state, the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, and the conditions for ending the time-saving state differ according to the type of the set jackpot. ing. Specifically, the easy-to-set jackpot type (jackpot A) is configured to set a time-saving end condition that is easier to establish than the hard-to-set jackpot type (jackpot B). By configuring in this way, in addition to the game aiming to win the jackpot in the special lottery for the player who is playing the game in the normal state, the set jackpot type is advantageous to the player (jackpot B ), the game can be played.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, dynamic display (effect display) for showing the lottery result of the special drawing lottery is executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 while the normal state is set. By grasping the dynamic display mode (performance mode) executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the player can predict the result of the special figure lottery being executed. . In addition, as described above, during the normal state, since the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, it is difficult for the ball to win the general electric winning device 640 by the normal pattern lottery (normal drawing lottery). , On the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the effect display for suggesting the result of the normal figure lottery to the player is not executed, or rather than the dynamic display mode for suggesting the result of the special figure lottery, It is configured to be executed in an inconspicuous display mode.

By configuring in this way, during the period in which the normal state is set, the player is given an effect executed based on the result of the special drawing lottery rather than the effect executed based on the result of the normal drawing lottery. Since it can be made to gaze, it is possible to visually grasp that a game (special figure game) mainly including a special figure lottery is executed during the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

Then, when the time-saving state (low-probability state of special symbols, high-probability state of normal symbols) is set after the end of the jackpot game, the general electric winning device 640 becomes more likely to be in the open state based on the general pattern lottery, and the general pattern. A game (special electric game) aiming for a jackpot game (V jackpot game) in a role winning game executed by entering a ball into a special electric operation port 643 based on a lottery is a jackpot game based on a special drawing. It is configured to be a game more advantageous to the player than a game (special figure game) aiming for (special figure jackpot game).

In this way, by making the execution timing of the big win that the player should aim for differ according to the set game state, it is possible for the player to execute different games according to the set game state. It is possible to suppress early boredom of the game. In addition, in this embodiment, during the normal state, the special game aiming at the special drawing lottery is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the special electric game aiming at the normal drawing drawing, and the special electric drawing aiming at the normal drawing drawing during the time saving state The content of the game to be executed by the player is varied according to the game state by configuring the game so that it is more advantageous to the player than the special game aiming at the special lottery, but it is limited to this. Instead, a plurality of special symbol types are provided (first special symbol, second special symbol), and the special symbol type corresponding to the special symbol lottery to be executed by the player is made different according to the set game state. , for example, when the normal state is set, the first special symbol game aiming for the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol is the second special symbol game aiming for the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol If the game state (for example, time saving state) different from the normal state is set so that it is more advantageous to the player than, the second special game aiming for the special drawing of the second special symbol is the first It may be configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol game aiming at the special symbol lottery of special symbols.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 2, the same game method (left-handed game) is executed when executing a special game or when executing a special electric game. 13 is configured so as not to give the player the trouble of changing the game method every time the game state changes. The method may be configured to be different, for example, during the normal state, a left-handed game (a game aiming at the game area (left area) formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80) is executed, and during the time saving state may be configured to execute a right-handed game (a game aimed at a game area (right area) formed on the right side of the variable display device unit 80). In this case, as a configuration for executing a special game in the left area, a special figure entrance 64 is provided, and as a configuration for executing a special electric game in the right area, a through gate 67, a general electric winning device 640, V A winning device 65 may be provided, and a variable winning device 650 opened as a jackpot game may be provided in a game area (lower area) to which the balls flowing down the left area or the right area can reach.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) according to the game content (special figure game, special electric game) to be mainly executed by the player. Therefore, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of changing the game method.

Also, in this way, when the game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) is changed according to the game content (special game, special electric game) that is mainly executed by the player, Guidance information for guiding the game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) (for example, the display mode of "right-handed" displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) is configured to be executed. good to do

Furthermore, when the game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) is changed according to the game content (special game, special electric game) mainly executed by the player, the ball flowing down the left side area or the right side area reaches By providing a variable winning device 650 that is opened as a jackpot game in the possible game area (lower area), even when the jackpot game is executed based on the special game, the jackpot game is executed based on the special electric game. Even when it is played, it is not necessary to change the game method with the execution of the jackpot game as a trigger, and the game can be played smoothly.

Returning to FIG. 20, the description continues. In this embodiment, it is configured so that the end condition of the time saving state is established based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (the number of times of the special symbol lottery). In addition, the lottery of normal symbols (general figure lottery) is configured to be executable independently without being involved in the lottery of special symbols (special figure lottery). In other words, the execution opportunity of the normal figure lottery is configured to be established regardless of the situation of the special figure lottery.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the ball wins the special electric operation opening 643 provided in the special symbol variation (special figure variation) general electric prize winning device 640, and the accessory per game is executed, the special It is constituted so as to interrupt the symbol variation, and when the accessory winning game is finished, the suspended special symbol variation is resumed. In addition, when the ball enters the V winning port 165 during the role winning game and the jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed, the interrupted special pattern variation is resumed when the jackpot game ends. It is configured to allow

In this embodiment configured in this way, when the time saving state is set, until the end condition (time saving end condition) of the time saving state that can be established based on the special figure lottery is satisfied, that is, a predetermined number of times Until the special figure lottery (for example, four times) is executed, a special electric game aiming at a large number of V jackpot games is executed. To give a specific example, if the special figure fluctuation 4 times is set as the time saving end condition, the period until the fourth special figure lottery ends, that is, for the four special figure lotteries When the variable time of 10 seconds is set, the time saving state set this time will continue until 40 seconds later (the timing when the fourth special figure lottery ends).

In this case, as shown in FIG. 12(a), when there are four special figure pending numbers at the end of the jackpot game, "40 seconds" is set as the period until the time saving state set after the jackpot game ends. Is displayed.

Furthermore, as described above, in the present embodiment, while the role per game and the jackpot game (V jackpot game) in the time saving state are being executed, the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation being executed is not subtracted. Therefore, the period in which the time saving state is actually set is the special figure fluctuation time until the time saving end condition is satisfied, and the interruption time during which the subtraction of the special figure fluctuation time is interrupted. Become. The interruption time during which the subtraction of the special figure fluctuation is interrupted, as described above, corresponds to the period during which the winning game (game per role, jackpot game) is being executed, and the execution period of the winning game is the game of the player Since the length of the period fluctuates depending on the contents, the interruption time cannot be accurately notified to the player.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the remaining time (special figure fluctuation time) is displayed until the time saving state ends (see FIG. 13 (a)), and when the subtraction of the special figure fluctuation time is interrupted, the subtraction Until is restarted, the display mode (see FIG. 13 (b)) for indicating that the subtraction display of the remaining time (special figure fluctuation time) until the time saving state ends is interrupted. Configured to display are doing.

By configuring in this way, the display content of the display mode (remaining short time display mode 801 in FIG. 12 (a)) indicating the period until the time saving state displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 ends There is no difference between the period until the time saving state actually ends, and a game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

The normal pattern lottery (normal pattern lottery) executed during the time saving state (normal pattern high probability state) is configured so that the probability of winning is about 33%, and the normal state (normal pattern low probability It is configured to be easier to win per normal pattern than the probability (1%) of the normal pattern lottery (normal pattern lottery) executed during the state). Furthermore, in this embodiment, regardless of the set game state, the variation time of 3 seconds is set as the variation pattern of the normal symbols. Therefore, by executing the left-handed game continuously during the time saving state, the general electric winning device 640 is configured to be in the open state by executing the general pattern per game once in about 10 seconds.

As described above with reference to FIGS. 3 to 5, when the general pattern per game is executed during the time saving state, the ball that has won the general electric winning device 640 easily enters the special electric operation opening 643 ( It is configured so that it is easier to enter than the normal pattern per game executed during the normal state), and it is configured to be able to execute the accessory per game approximately the same number of times as the normal per pattern game execution times. . Then, as described above with reference to FIGS. 6 to 9, the probability that the ball will enter the V winning port 165 in one accessory game and the jackpot game (V jackpot game) will be executed is about 1/11. It is configured to be

In other words, in the first embodiment, during the time-saving state, at a rate of about once every 10 seconds, it is configured to execute the accessory-winning game as a chance to win the ball into the V winning opening 165. . If the game result of the role-winning game is that the ball can enter the V winning port 165 (if it is a V-winning), after the role-winning game, the jackpot game (jackpot type is jackpot C jackpot game (10R ( Round), time saving 4 times)) is executed, and the time saving state is set again after the jackpot game ends. In other words, when the V jackpot game (jackpot game executed by causing the ball to enter the V winning port 165) is executed during the time saving state, the time saving state is always set after the jackpot game ends. are doing. Therefore, once the time saving state is set, the time saving state will not end as long as the special electric game continues to run the jackpot game. can.

In addition, although the detailed description will be described later, if a jackpot game is executed by a special electric game, after the jackpot game ends, the interrupted special figure fluctuation will be resumed. It is configured so that the special figure lottery (special figure variation) number of times for establishing the time saving end condition is not updated by the figure fluctuation. That is, after the special figure fluctuation after the restart is completed, it is configured so that the time saving state continues until the special figure fluctuation is executed four times.

That is, when the remaining period of the special figure fluctuation is a long time (for example, 30 seconds), the role per game is executed, and when the V jackpot game is executed by the role per game, set after the jackpot game The period of the time saving state to be performed is "30 seconds + 4 special figure fluctuations", whereas the remaining period of the special figure fluctuation is a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds). is executed, and when the V jackpot game is executed by the accessory winning game, the time-saving state period set after the jackpot game is ``0.5 second + 4 special figure fluctuations''.

By configuring in this way, in the case of executing the special electric game aiming at the V jackpot game during the time saving state where the end condition is satisfied based on the elapsed time, it is advantageous for the player to execute the V jackpot game early. It is possible to make it more advantageous for the player to execute the V jackpot game in a state where the remaining period of the special figure fluctuation being executed is long instead of . Therefore, even if the V jackpot game is not executed after a predetermined period of time has passed since the time-saving state was set, the player can continue to play while giving the player a sense of expectation. It becomes possible.

In addition, in the present embodiment, based on the special figure fluctuation restarted after the end of the jackpot number of times (number of special figure fluctuations to be updated in order to establish the time saving end condition) is configured not to be updated (subtracted). However, without being limited to this, based on the special figure fluctuation restarted after the end of the jackpot, the number of times of working hours (the number of special figure fluctuations updated to establish the time saving end condition) may be configured to be updated. . Even if it is configured in this way, the longer the special figure fluctuation period (remaining fluctuation period) after the restart, the more advantageous it is for the player, so the predetermined period has passed since the time saving state was set. Even when the V jackpot game is not executed in the state, the player can continue to play the game while giving the player a sense of expectation.

Returning to FIG. 20, the description is continued. If the game result of the accessory winning game executed during the time saving state does not allow the ball to enter the V winning opening 165 (in the case of non-V winning), the special electric game is repeated until the time saving state ends. is executed.

Also, during the time saving state, when the special symbol variation (special figure variation) ends, it is determined whether the time saving end condition is established, that is, whether the special figure variation for the number of times set as the time saving end condition is completed. , When the time saving end condition is satisfied, the game state shifts to the normal state, and the special figure game is executed. On the other hand, if the time saving end condition is not satisfied, the next special figure variation is executed. Detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. In the case of 50 seconds or 200 seconds, a variation pattern is selected, and if the result of the special lottery is out (99/100), a variation time of 10 to 50 seconds is set. It is configured so that the variation pattern to be determined is selected. That is, a special lottery executed before the time-saving end condition is satisfied (when the time-saving end condition is set four times as the time-saving end condition, a special lottery four times to be executed after the jackpot game ends). In this case, it is possible to facilitate the continuation of the time saving state for a long period of time. Furthermore, when a jackpot is won in a special lottery during the time saving state, the time saving state is set again after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an added value when a jackpot is won by a special lottery within a limited period in which the time saving state is set, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, when it is determined that there is jackpot information in which a fluctuation time of 200 seconds is set in the holding memory of the special symbols acquired at the end of the jackpot game, a special symbol for notifying that fact is displayed. It is configured so as to execute the production (see FIG. 17(a)).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as the end conditions of the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to set a time saving end condition that is easy to be met (time saving 4 times) and a time saving end condition that is difficult to be met (time saving 15 times). It consists of Here, if the time saving 15 times is set, the time saving state will continue until the 15th special figure lottery executed during the time saving state is completed, so depending on the increase in the number of special figure fluctuations The short period of time can be lengthened by this method, the probability of winning a big win during the short time state can be increased, and the short period of time can be made longer by the long-time variation pattern set at the time of winning the big win.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment causes the game to be played in the same game method (left-handed game) during the normal state, during the time saving state, and during the jackpot game. Since it is configured as such, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the special figure lottery is not executed during the time saving state. In addition, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the special figure variation is configured to be selected regardless of the number of reservations of the special symbols (the number of special figure reservations), but not limited to this, for example, the time saving state is If it is set, it is better to configure so that the variation pattern in which the longer the variation time is set, the more the special figure reservation number is set, the more likely it is to be selected.

By configuring in this way, in the stage before the time saving state is set (for example, during the jackpot game), it is possible to motivate the game to reach the upper limit (4 pieces) of the special figure reservation number. . In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state (a state in which the time saving end condition is not established) in which the special figure variation is not executed during the time saving state.

Furthermore, although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, during the period in which the time saving state is set, that is, in the period until the special symbol variation of the predetermined number of times (special symbol variation) ends, the normal symbol It is configured to execute a lottery and finally execute a special electric game for winning a ball into a V winning port 165 in a V winning device 65.例文帳に追加The V winning device 65 is configured so that the ball can easily win during the role winning game, and is configured so that the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation is not subtracted (suspended) during the role winning game. Furthermore, the role-winning game has a plurality of end conditions. Specifically, it is established when the number of winning balls in the V winning device 65 during the role-winning game reaches a predetermined number (three). a first end condition (ball winning end condition), and a second end condition (elapsed time end condition) that is met when the elapsed period from the execution of the accessory winning game reaches a predetermined period (3 seconds). , and when either the first end condition or the second end condition is satisfied, the accessory winning game is ended. In addition, during the normal pattern fluctuation period and during the normal pattern per game execution period, a new normal pattern lottery (normal pattern lottery) is not executed, but during the normal pattern per game The ball is moved to the special electric operation port 643. wins a prize and a new normal drawing lottery can be executed during the period when the accessory winning game is being executed.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, by executing the role winning game during the time saving state, the special electric game is performed aiming at executing more role winning games while interrupting the special figure fluctuation. done. However, the fluctuation period of the normal symbol until the lottery result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, and the period during which the ball can not be won into the general electric prize winning device 640 during the execution period of the game per normal pattern (Electric Accessory 640a is in a closed state), the period in which the game cannot be executed per role is a period for wastefully subtracting the fluctuation time of the special symbol during the time saving state, so during the time saving state, it is disadvantageous to the player Disadvantage will be short term.

Therefore, for example, as a normal pattern fluctuation pattern set during the time saving state, a normal pattern short fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time (variation time 3 seconds) and a normal pattern length fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time (variation time 15 seconds) And, when it is configured to be selectable, the game is played while expecting that the normal figure short fluctuation pattern is selected so that the disadvantageous short period described above is shortened. Furthermore, as in the present embodiment, when using the configuration in which the special figure variation is interrupted during the execution period of the game per role (the process of subtracting the variation time of the special figure variation is interrupted), disadvantageous time reduction By lengthening the overlapping period of the period and the interruption period of the special symbol variation, it is possible to suppress the variation time of the special symbol from being subtracted during a short period of disadvantage.

Therefore, in order to shorten the short period of unfavorable time during the time saving state, the remaining time of the normal figure fluctuation during execution is determined when the game is executed during the time saving state, and the remaining time is a predetermined time (for example , 10 seconds), it is preferable to perform an effect to encourage the player to end the game with the lapse of time instead of ending it with a winning ball. By configuring in this way, the short period of disadvantageous time can be shortened by lengthening the execution period of the game per accessory.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 21, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the operation of the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In the main control device 110, the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the display setting in the first symbol display device 37, the display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and the display setting in the third symbol display device 81 Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 22, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. These counters, etc. are the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display in the first design display device 37, the setting of the display in the second design display device 83, and the setting of the display in the third design display device 81. etc., it is used in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type. 1st per type counter C2 used for , stop type selection counter (not shown) used for selecting the stop type of removal in special symbols, and 1st per random number counter C1 used for initial value setting 1 Initial value random number counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used.

In addition, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used to set the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4, and the variation used for selecting the variation pattern of the normal symbols. A type counter CS1 is used. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 55). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a corresponding to the ball entering the special symbol entrance 64 consisting of four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas), and a special symbol reserved ball. In the storage area 203a, each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is stored in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the special figure entrance 64. stored respectively.

Then, when the special symbol starting condition (fluctuation condition) is established, various values stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted to the special symbol execution area, and the stored various values are A special symbol variation based on the value is started.

In addition, in the present embodiment, one type of special symbol type is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more special symbol types may be provided. In this case, for example, in order to establish the lottery condition of one special symbol type (for example, the first special symbol) based on the entrance of the ball to the special symbol entrance 64 (first entrance), Each value described above is stored in the 1 special symbol reserved ball storage area, and the ball is entered into an entrance (for example, a second entrance) different from the special symbol entrance 64 (first entrance). In order to establish the lottery conditions for other special symbol types (for example, the second special symbol) based on It should be configured to store.

Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol or the start condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied, the first reserved area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area of the corresponding special symbol type. , are shifted to the special symbol execution area, and the special symbol variation based on the stored various values is started. By configuring in this way, even in the pachinko machine 10 using a plurality of special symbol types, each special symbol variation can be executed smoothly.

Furthermore, if the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of special symbol types (first special symbol, second special symbol), the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are executed simultaneously (in parallel). In this case, each special symbol reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area, second special symbol reserved ball storage area) may be configured to have a special symbol execution area. good. Thereby, when the starting condition of each special symbol is satisfied, the next special symbol variation can be quickly executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the lottery result of the special symbol is configured to be only a big hit and a loss, but without being limited to this, for example, in a part of the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, It may be constructed so that the player can win a small prize that can give the player a privilege less than that when winning the big prize (a privilege different from that when winning the big prize). With this configuration, even if the player does not win the jackpot, an opportunity to give the player a privilege can be provided, so that the interest in the game can be improved. In this case, a small hit type counter is provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110, and the value of the acquired small hit type counter can be stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area, and when executing the special symbol lottery. It should be configured so that it can be referenced.

In addition, in the case that a special symbol lottery is configured to allow a small win, for example, the game state transition content based on the big win win and the game state shift content based on the small win win are configured to be different. Alternatively, for example, when a jackpot is won, the game state is shifted to a normal state at the start of the jackpot game, and a new game state can be set after the jackpot game ends based on the set jackpot type. When a small win is won, the small win game may be executed while maintaining the game state at the time of winning the small win, and the game state may not be shifted even after the small win game is finished.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the presence or absence of the transition of the game state and the content of the transition according to the winning type (big win, small win), so that it is possible to provide a game rich in variations. can.

Furthermore, the RAM 203 of the present embodiment is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the entry (passage of the ball) into the through gate 67 consisting of one reserved area (first reserved area). In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, each value of the second winning random number counter C4 and the normal pattern variation type counter CS2 is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the through gate 67.

Then, when the normal symbol start condition (fluctuation condition) is established, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b are shifted to the normal symbol execution area, and the stored various values are shifted to the normal symbol execution area. Normal design variation based on the value is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, each counter will be described in detail. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 55).

The value of the first per random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball enters the special figure entrance 64, the special symbol is reserved in the RAM 203. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the first winning random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is the first winning random number table. If it matches the value of the random number set by 202a as a big hit, it is determined as a special symbol big hit.

Here, the first winning random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 23(b). FIG. 23(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning random number table 202a. This first hit random number table 202a is a table that defines random numbers (determined values) for determining a big hit in a special symbol lottery.

Specifically, in the first winning random number table 202a, the judgment value for judging a big win is defined within a predetermined range, and the judgment value within the predetermined range is defined. As shown in FIG. 23(b), among the values of the first hit random number counter C1, "0 to 3" are defined as jackpot determination values, and other values ("4 to 399") are determined to be off. specified as a value.

In this embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same regardless of the game state. can be Also, in that case, the special symbol jackpot probability may be set to two types, a high-probability state and a low-probability state, or three or more types. In this case, for example, the special symbol jackpot probability may be changed for each of up to four game states set by combining the special symbol state and the normal symbol state, Simply, three or more types of special symbol states, such as a high probability state, a normal probability state, and a low probability state, may be set, and a different jackpot probability may be set for each state.

In addition, when it is configured so that a "small win" can be won as a lottery result of the special symbol, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 corresponding to the "small winning" is defined in the first winning random number table 202a. should be configured. By configuring in this way, the big winning lottery and the small winning lottery of special symbols can be executed in the same process, so compared to the case where the big winning lottery and the small winning lottery are executed in different processes, the main control The processing load of the device 110 can be reduced. In addition, in one special symbol lottery, it is possible to prohibit the winning of both a big win and a small win.

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2, for example, is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball enters the special figure entrance 64, the special It is stored in the symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. In this embodiment, using the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2, the first hit type selection table 202c is referred to to determine the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. Here, the contents of the first hit type selection table 202c will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 24(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first win type selection table 202c. As shown in FIG. 24(a), the first hit type selection table 202c includes a special symbol jackpot type selection table 202c1 to be referred to when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, and a V winning opening 165. It has a V jackpot type selection table 202c2 that is referred to when the ball wins (V wins).

First, with reference to FIG. 24(b), the contents of the special figure jackpot type selection table 202c1 will be described. FIG. 24(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special figure jackpot type selection table 202c1. As described above, this special figure jackpot type selection table 202c1 is a data table for selecting the jackpot type to be set when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery. Different jackpot types are defined accordingly.

Specifically, when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 98", "jackpot A" is defined, and when the value is "99", "jackpot B" is defined. there is

Here, the content of the jackpot game executed corresponding to each jackpot type and the content of the game state set after the jackpot game is finished will be described. In the present embodiment, the contents of the opening operation of the jackpot game (round game contents) executed according to each jackpot type, that is, the contents of the operation (opening timing, The number of openings) is defined in chronological order and is stored in advance in various operation scenario tables 202e of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. FIG.

Then, when the jackpot is won, the opening operation scenario corresponding to the set jackpot type is read out from the various operation scenario table 202e and stored in an executing scenario storage area (not shown) in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. be done. When the opening operation scenario is stored in an executing scenario storage area (not shown), the scenario contents are updated each time the main process (see FIG. 55) of main controller 110 is executed (every 4 milliseconds). In the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 56) for executing the control during the jackpot game, the current scenario content is determined, and the process based on the determination result is executed.

With this configuration, for example, when a plurality of movable members are moved by one opening operation control, by using an opening operation scenario that defines the operation contents of each movable member in chronological order, the plurality of movable members can be moved. It is possible to centrally manage the operation control for Therefore, compared to the case where motion control is executed separately for each movable member, the motion timing of each movable member can be appropriately set, and when a problem occurs in one movable member, other movable members can be moved. It is possible to smoothly execute the motion processing for the member.

“Jackpot A” is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is four rounds as a jackpot game, and the jackpot game in which the variable prize winning device 650 is opened during the four rounds is executed. This round game is a game in which the first attacker 650 is continuously released until 10 balls enter the variable winning device 650 or the release period elapses for 30 seconds. That is, in the "jackpot A" in which 4 rounds of round games are executed, it becomes a jackpot game in which a maximum of 40 balls can be awarded to the variable prize winning device 650 .

Furthermore, the "jackpot A" is defined so that a time saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set after the end of the jackpot game. times", that is, until the special symbol lottery is executed four times without winning a jackpot during the time saving state (until the fourth special symbol lottery result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display)). It is

The "jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is four rounds as the jackpot game, and the jackpot game in which the variable winning device 650 is opened during the four rounds is executed. Then, after the end of the jackpot game, it is stipulated that a time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, and "time saving 15 times" as a period during which the time saving state continues, that is, time saving. A short period of time is stipulated until the special pattern lottery is executed 15 times (until the 15th special pattern lottery result is stop-displayed (determined display)) without winning a jackpot during the state.

That is, in the present embodiment, when a big win is won in a special pattern lottery, four rounds of the big win game are executed without fail, and a time saving state is set after the big win game is finished. Then, if the set jackpot type is "jackpot A" (99% when the jackpot is won), the number of time reduction times is "4 times", and when it is "jackpot B" (1% when the jackpot is won) It is configured so that the number of times of shortening of working hours "15 times" is set.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, during the time saving state, the jackpot is higher than the special game during the normal state (a game where a ball is entered into the special symbol entrance 64 and aims to win a jackpot in a special symbol lottery). It is configured so that a special electric game (a game aiming at a big win by winning a ball (V winning) in the V winning port 165 based on the lottery of normal symbols) which is easy to execute the game is executed, and the game is executed more than the normal state. It is configured so that the time-saving state becomes a game state more advantageous to the player. Therefore, the time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is difficult to end (the end condition of the time-saving state is difficult to be satisfied). .

In addition, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of special symbols, the jackpot game of the same number of rounds is executed for all the jackpots. A different number of round games may be executed depending on the type of jackpot. In addition, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of special symbols, the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is finished with all the jackpots, and the number of times of time saving (time saving end condition) is set according to the jackpot type. Although it is configured to be different, it is not limited to this, and according to the selected jackpot type, a jackpot type in which the time saving state is set at the end of the jackpot game and a jackpot type in which the normal state is set are provided. can be

Next, the contents of the V jackpot type selection table 202c2 will be described with reference to FIG. 24(c). FIG. 24(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the V jackpot type selection table 202c2. This V jackpot type selection table 202c2 is a data table that defines game contents of a jackpot game (V jackpot game) that is executed when a ball wins a prize (V win) in the V prize opening 165. Specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 defines the "jackpot C" in the entire range of "0 to 99".

This "jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is 10 rounds as the jackpot game, and the jackpot game in which the variable winning device 650 is opened during the 10 rounds is executed. . Then, after the end of the jackpot game, it is stipulated that a time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, and "time saving 4 times" as a period during which the time saving state continues, that is, time saving A short period of time is stipulated until the special symbol lottery is executed four times without winning a jackpot during the state (until the fourth special symbol lottery result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display)).

That is, in the present embodiment, the jackpot game (jackpot game executed in the special electric game) executed based on the V winning is more than the jackpot game (jackpot game executed in the special game) executed based on the special drawing lottery game) is configured so that a jackpot game with a large number of rounds is executed. In other words, in terms of the amount of benefits (the number of prize balls) given during the jackpot game, the game state is more advantageous to the player in the time-saving state than in the normal state.

In this embodiment, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is acquired based on the fact that the ball has won the special electric activation port 643, and it is executed based on the fact that V has won during the role winning game. The jackpot game (V jackpot game) is a V jackpot type selection based on the value of the first winning type counter C2 obtained when the ball enters the special electric operation port 643 that triggered the execution of the V winning accessory winning game. It is configured to be executed based on the jackpot type selected with reference to the table 202c2.

In addition, in this embodiment, since there is only one type of jackpot defined in the V jackpot type selection table 202c2 (jackpot C), even if the V prize is won by any accessory game, the same contents are displayed. Although a jackpot game is executed, it is not limited to this, and a plurality of jackpot types may be defined in the V jackpot type selection table 202c2 according to the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2. Also, a plurality of special electric operation openings may be provided in the general electric prize winning device 640, and the jackpot type may be set corresponding to the special electric operation opening in which the ball has won among the plurality of special electric operation openings. Further, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is acquired based on the fact that the ball has won the V winning opening 165 while the role winning game is being executed, and the acquired value of the first winning type counter C2 It may be configured to select the jackpot type based on.

In addition, in this embodiment, regardless of the game state set at the time when the big win is won or when the ball enters the V winning opening 165, the game state after the big win game is completed is selected. However, without being limited to this, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game can be varied according to the game state set when the jackpot is won or when the ball enters the V winning opening 165. In this case, for example, just before the end of the time saving state (immediately before the final fluctuation of the special symbol in the time saving state stops), the normal figure per game is executed, and the normal after the time saving state ends Only when V is won during the accessory winning game executed in the state in which the state is set, that is, only when V is won in the special electric game during the normal state, the time saving end condition is difficult to be established after the end of the jackpot game. A time saving state (for example, a time saving state in which the number of times of time saving is 20 times) may be set.

In this embodiment, the number of types of jackpot types is three, but the number of types is not limited to three, and may be two or less, or may be four or more. Also, the same jackpot type may be set in the case of winning the jackpot in the lottery of the special symbols and in the case of winning the V prize in the special electric game. Furthermore, the selection rate and type of the jackpot type to be selected this time may be varied based on the information on the jackpot type selected in the past (for example, the content of the jackpot game and the transition content of the game state). . By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the past game history (jackpot history) as well. Also, in this case, it is preferable to execute a suggestive performance capable of suggesting to the player the kind of big win that is likely to be set at the time of the next big win based on the past history of big wins. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to continue playing the game.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode (fluctuation time) such as so-called short time out, long time out, normal reach, super reach is determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. be. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 55) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. A variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 25) storing a random value for determining one variation time of pattern variation from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d. As shown in FIG. 25(a), the variation pattern selection table 202d includes a normal table 202d1 used when the normal state is set as the game state, and a time saving table used when the time saving state is set. A table 202d2 for use is defined. Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, since the data table used for selecting the variation pattern is different according to the game state, the variation pattern (variation time) selected according to the game state is made different. be able to.

Next, detailed contents of each table defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 25(b) and 25(c). FIG. 25(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the normal table 202d1. This normal table 202d1 is a data table referred to when the normal state is set as the game state, and the variation time is longer when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win than when it is a loss. It is stipulated that the variation pattern of is easy to select.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 25(b), the lottery result of the special design (special design) is "jackpot (hit)", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 50". Various types of normal reach are defined in association with each variation time of 20 seconds, and super reach per variation time of 60 seconds to 120 seconds is defined in the range of "51 to 198". In FIG. 25(b), in order to simplify the explanation of the fluctuation pattern of the winning super reach, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is shown as "60 seconds to 120 seconds" in the range of "51 to 198", Actually, predetermined variable times (for example, variable time of 60 seconds, variable time of 100 seconds, and variable time of 120 seconds) are defined in the corresponding value range of the variable type counter CS1. That is, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit (hit)" and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "51 to 198", "60 seconds to 120 seconds” is set.

In addition, if the lottery result is "out", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 179" in association with the short deviation of the fluctuation time of 8 seconds, and in the range of "180 to 194" A deviation time of 20 seconds is defined in correspondence with normal reach, and a deviation time of 60 seconds to 120 seconds is defined in correspondence with the range of "195 to 198". The lottery result is "out" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "195 to 198". It is a simplified explanation.

In other words, in this embodiment, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, the types of variable times that can be selected are made the same, and only the rate at which each variable time is selected is made different. ing. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot (hit), the ratio of selecting a longer variation time is set higher than when it is a loss. Therefore, the longer the special symbol variation being executed, the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot. It is possible to suppress that the player gets bored with the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, that is, in this embodiment, as the variable time set for the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, the smaller the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, the longer the variable time is set. It is configured so that By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a period in which the lottery for the first special symbol is not executed frequently occurs. Also, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, a short fluctuation time is set, so the ball enters the special figure entrance 64 with the number of reserved balls reaching the upper limit. It is possible to suppress the situation where the ball is thrown.

In addition, in this embodiment, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, the type of variable time that can be selected is configured to be the same, so that the length of the variable time to be set is increased. By grasping the lottery result of the special symbol, it is configured to be able to suppress the fact that the lottery result of the special symbol is revealed to the player in advance. It may be possible to partially set the variable time that is selected only in the case or the variable time that is selected only in the case of misalignment.

As shown in FIG. 25(b), in this embodiment, the variation pattern is selected based on the special symbol lottery result (result of determination) and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. However, without being limited to this, for example, the variation pattern may be selected based on the type of jackpot that is set when the jackpot is won.

Next, the contents of the time reduction table 202d2 provided in the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 25(c). FIG.25(c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content prescribed|regulated to the table 202d2 for time reduction. As shown in FIG. 25(c), the time saving table 202d2 defines the pattern type, the lottery result, the value range of the change type counter CS1, and the change pattern in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 25(c), when the success/failure determination result (lottery result) is "hit (jackpot)", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 fluctuates within the range of "0 to 99" A “short hit” with a duration of 50 seconds is defined, and a “long hit” with a variable time of 200 seconds is defined within the range of “100 to 198”. In addition, if it is "out", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149", "short out A" with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is defined, and in the range of "150 to 169", "Short-circuit failure B" with a variation time of 15 seconds is specified, "Short-circuit failure C" with a variation time of 20 seconds is specified in the range of "170 to 189", and the variation time is in the range of "190 to 196". "Long Miss A" with 30 seconds is defined, and "Long Miss B" with a variation time of 50 seconds is defined at values "197, 198".

As described above, during the time saving state, unlike during the normal state, the type of variable time that can be selected is configured to be different depending on whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a win or a loss. , the variable time that can be selected in the case of winning a jackpot is longer than the variable time that can be selected in the case of losing.

In this embodiment, as described above, the period in which the time saving state is set becomes a game state advantageous to the player, and during that short period of time, special electric games are executed based on the normal symbol lottery. In addition, the termination condition (the number of times of time saving) based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (the number of times of lottery) is set as the condition of ending the time saving state (the number of times of time saving).

Therefore, when a longer variation time is selected as the special symbol variation executed during the time saving state, the period during which the time saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is set can be lengthened. Then, a special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state, for example, when the time saving 4 times is set, a big hit (1/ 100), a variation pattern with a long variation time is selected as the added value. By constructing in this way, when a special pattern jackpot is won within a limited period of a time-saving state, it is possible to provide a more advantageous game to the player, so that the player can enthusiastically play the game. can be done.

In addition, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is out, since there is a difference of up to 5 times in the variation time selected as "10 seconds to 50 seconds", a longer variation time out variation is selected. The game can be played while making the player expect that the game will be played.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12(a), on the end screen of the jackpot game, a short remaining time mode 801 for indicating the length of the time saving state period (V rush period) is displayed. This remaining time short period mode 801 is within the range until the time saving end condition is satisfied, and is a variable time determined in advance based on the winning information included in the already acquired special symbol reservation It is configured to display the total value of

By configuring in this way, the number of seconds displayed as the remaining time short term mode 801 is a display mode in which the fluctuation time of a plurality of outlier fluctuations is summed up, or a display corresponding to the fluctuation time of one jackpot fluctuation. It is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting what the mode will be.

Returning to FIG. 22, the description continues. The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that sequentially adds 1 within the range of 0 to 999, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 999). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start opening (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the same time and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM203.

Then, the value of the random number that becomes the winning of the normal symbol is set by the second winning random number table 202b stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is the value of the second winning random number table 202b. If it matches the value of the random number that is set as a hit, it is determined as a hit of the normal design (second design). In addition, this second winning random number table 202b is divided into two types, one for low probability of normal symbols and one for high probability of winning normal symbols from the low probability, and included in each. The number of random numbers to be a jackpot is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning is changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high.

The contents defined in the second winning random number table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 23(c). FIG. 23(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second winning random number table 202b. As shown in FIG. 23(c), in the case of the low probability state of the normal design, the second hit random number counter C4 obtained is defined as "0" for the normal design, and in the high probability state of the normal design. In some cases, the acquired second random number counter C4 is defined to be in the range of "0 to 299".

That is, in the present embodiment, when the low probability state of normal symbols is set, the probability (1/1000) of winning in the lottery of normal symbols is set to a low probability. As a result, in the present embodiment in which the same game method (left-handed game) is executed in the normal state, which is a low probability state of normal symbols, and the time-saving state, which is a high probability state of normal symbols, during the normal state Since it is possible to make it difficult to win the general pattern, it is possible to make it difficult to generate a situation in which the general pattern winning game is executed during the normal state and the ball wins in the general electric prize winning device 640. - 特許庁On the other hand, when the high probability state of normal symbols is set, the probability (300/1000) of winning in the lottery of normal symbols is set to a high probability. As a result, it is possible to facilitate execution of the normal pattern winning game based on the normal pattern winning during the time saving state.

In addition, as described above in the present embodiment, in the general pattern per game that is executed during the normal state, the ball is less likely to win the general electric winning device 640 with respect to the general pattern per game that is executed during the time saving state Further, even if a ball enters the general electric prize winning device 640 in the normal state, the prize winning ball is unlikely to enter the special electric operation opening 643.例文帳に追加That is, in the present embodiment, it is difficult to win per normal pattern in the normal state, and even if by any chance you win per normal pattern, the ball wins the general electric winning device 640 during the game per normal pattern. Furthermore, even if the ball wins the general electric prize winning device 640, it is difficult for the winning ball to win the special electric prize opening 643.例文帳に追加

In this way, in a plurality of processes (three processes) from the execution of the lottery for the normal symbols to the winning of the ball into the special electric activation port 643, the game is made more difficult to progress during the normal state than during the time saving state. By configuring as above, it is possible to surely prevent the ball from entering the special electric operation opening 643 with the opportunity of the normal pattern lottery executed during the normal state, and the execution of the accessory winning game.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the above-described three processes, instead of regulating the winning of the ball to the special electric operation opening 643 based on the normal symbol lottery being executed during the normal state, the normal state Among them, a short variation time (3 seconds, which is the same as during the time saving state) is set as the variation time of the normal symbol. In other words, even if the lottery of normal symbols is configured to be easily executed in a short period of time, the regulation in the three processes described above regulates that the ball wins the special electric activation opening 643, so during the normal state It is possible to reliably prevent the ball from entering the special electric operation port 643 with the normal pattern lottery executed at the time, and the execution of the accessory winning game.

In this way, by setting the fluctuation time of the normal pattern short in the normal state, at the timing when the game state switches, for example, at the timing when the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, the normal state (low probability state of the normal pattern ), the normal symbol variation with a long variation time executed during the time is executed across the transition timing of the game state, and although the special symbol variation during the time reduction state is started, the normal symbol variation during the time reduction state To suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a lottery cannot be executed. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the time-saving state is managed for a period, it is possible to provide the player with a game (special electric game) that effectively uses the limited short-time period.

In addition, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned three processes (normal pattern winning probability, winning rate of the ball to the general electric winning device 640 in the general design winning game, the ball winning the general electric winning device 640 is the special electric operation opening 643 In the winning rate to win a prize), it is configured to regulate the winning of the ball to the special electric activation opening 643 in the normal state, but is not limited to this, and is configured to regulate in two or less processes You can In addition, in this embodiment, when the ball that has won the general electric prize device 640 does not win the special electric operation opening 643, the ball enters the out opening 644 so that the player is not given a privilege (for example, a prize ball). Although it is configured, it is not limited to this, for example, when a ball enters the out port 644, it is configured so that more prize balls are paid out than when the ball enters the special electric activation port 643. You can

By configuring in this way, while suppressing the winning of the ball to the special electric operation opening 643 in the normal state, a different privilege (privilege of executing a game per accessory) when winning the general electric prize winning device 640 Since it is possible to give the player a privilege different from that of the game, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected game. In addition, in the state in which the low-probability state of the normal pattern is set, it is possible to provide the player with the added value when winning the normal pattern.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 999), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 55).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main controller 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Ordinary figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is, for example, incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of this general pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 55) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. Then, the normal pattern fluctuation time is determined by the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2. Concretely, using the value of the acquired general pattern variation type counter CS2, it is configured so that the normal pattern variation time is determined.

Returning to FIG. 21, the description continues. The ROM 202 has various data tables defined corresponding to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 22, and the like. Here, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 23(a). FIG. 23(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 23(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment includes a first winning random number table 202a, a second winning random number table 202b, a jackpot type selection table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table. 202d, which has at least various operation scenario tables 202e. The first winning random number table 202a, the second winning random number table 202b, the jackpot type selection table 202c, and the variation pattern selection table 202d have been described above when describing the various counters illustrated in FIG. 22, so description thereof will be omitted. .

The various operation scenario table 202e is a data table having operation scenarios in which the operation contents of various movable members whose operation control is managed by main controller 110 are defined in advance in chronological order. , is read when controlling the movement of the movable member. In this embodiment, when controlling the motion of the movable member, the motion scenario that matches the current motion control condition is read from the various motion scenario tables 202e, and the read motion scenario is temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 203. Remember. Then, in the main process (see FIG. 55) executed at intervals of 4 milliseconds, the contents of the operation scenario stored in the storage area are periodically updated (in units of 4 milliseconds) to correspond to the updated values. When there is an action scenario for variably moving the movable member in the area, the action control is executed based on the action scenario. Further, each action scenario table is not provided for each movable member, but is set for each event (jackpot game, normal figure winning game, accessory winning game) for controlling the operation of the movable member. Therefore, the action scenario table corresponding to an event (for example, a normal game) that requires motion control of a plurality of movable members within one event defines the content of motion control to be executed for a plurality of movable members. It is

Here, the contents of the various operation scenario tables 202e will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 to 28. FIG. FIG. 26(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of various operation scenario tables 202e. As shown in FIG. 26(a), the various action scenario table 202e includes a jackpot action scenario table 202e1, a prize action scenario table 202e2, a normal figure action scenario table 202e3, and a first movable valve scenario table 202e4. ing.

First, referring to FIG. 26(b), the contents of the action scenario table 202e2 will be described. FIG. 26(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing various contents defined in the action scenario table 202e2 for each role. The role-winning action scenario table 202e2 is a data table that defines a role-winning scenario in which action contents during the role-winning game are set. , until the V winning device 65 is opened (the period until the V winning opening solenoid 209b is set to ON)), the round period (the maximum period during which the V winning device 65 is opened), the ending period (the V winning device 65 The open period ends and the grace period after the storage solenoid 209c is set to OFF) is defined, and is set when the role per game is started, periodically (the main processing of the main controller 110 is executed), operation control corresponding to the value of a scenario counter (not shown) whose value is incremented by 1 is executed.

Specifically, when the accessory winning game is started, the value of the scenario counter is set to "1". The scenario counter "1" defines an operation scenario in which the storage solenoid 209c is turned on as a corresponding operation scenario. The storage valve 66a is moved to a state in which the balls can be stored in the storage portion formed on the upper surface of the storage valve 66a. Then, the value of the scenario counter is incremented every 4 milliseconds, and the opening period is terminated when the scenario counter is "25", i.e., 0.1 seconds after the start of the game with the winning character. At the timing when the value becomes "26", the V winning opening solenoid 209b is turned on to open the V open/close door 65a (V attacker). That is, in the present embodiment, the storage valve 66a is changed to the storage state using the period from when the accessory winning game is started until the V winning device 65 is opened. With this configuration, even if the ball enters the V winning device 65 vigorously immediately after the V winning device 65 is opened, the storage valve 66a is already opened at the timing when the V winning device 65 is opened. is changed to the storage state, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from passing through the storage valve 66a and entering the V winning port 165.例文帳に追加

Next, at the timing when the value of the scenario counter is "375", that is, at the timing when 1.6 seconds have passed since the start of the winning-accessory game, the V winning opening solenoid 209b is turned off, and the V opening/closing door 65a (V (attacker) is stipulated. After executing the closing control of the V open/close door 65a (V Attacker), that is, at the timing when the value of the scenario counter is "376", the ending period of the role winning game is set, and the storage solenoid 209c is set to OFF. It is stipulated that Then, until the value of the scenario counter reaches "750", the closing state (ending period) of the accessory winning game is set.

That is, in the role winning game executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the V winning device 65 is opened after the storage valve 66a is shifted to the storage state. The scenario is defined so that the storage solenoid 209c is turned off after the timing of closing the V winning device 65 (scenario counter "375"). By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the execution of the role winning game at an unintended timing due to the occurrence of an unforeseen situation at the start or end of the role winning game.

Next, the contents of the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 will be described with reference to FIG. 27(a). FIG. 27(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the scenario defined in the first movable valve scenario 202e4. The first movable valve 66b of the present embodiment is controlled to operate in a predetermined operation pattern while the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. The operation of the first movable valve 66b is set in the start-up process (see FIG. 54) of the main controller 110 (see S1715 in FIG. 54). The value of the scenario counter is updated (added by 1) by the process executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process (see FIG. 55) of main controller 110 .

As shown in FIG. 27(a), the first movable valve 66b in this embodiment has a V winning possible state in which the ball can enter the V winning opening 165, and a state in which the ball can enter the V winning opening 165. It is configured to be positioned in either state of a difficult-to-win V state in which it is difficult to win. In the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4, the first movable valve solenoid 209d is turned on (the first movable valve 66b enters the V prize opening 165 when the value of the scenario counter is in the range of "1" to "1500"). possible state) and an operation scenario in which the first movable valve solenoid 209d is turned off (a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the V winning port 165).

Specifically, the first movable valve solenoid 209d is turned off until the value of the scenario counter is in the range of "1" to "1250", that is, until five seconds have passed since the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 was set. , the value of the scenario counter is in the range of "1251" to "1500", that is, for 5 seconds to 5.5 seconds after the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 is set, the first movable valve solenoid 209d is turned on. An operating scenario is specified to be set. When the value of the scenario counter reaches the upper limit value "1500", the value of the scenario counter is switched from "1500" to "1" when the next main process (see FIG. 55) is executed. Thereafter, the operation control based on the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 is repeatedly executed until the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first movable valve 66b, which is a variable member for permitting or prohibiting the winning of balls into the V winning opening 165, is turned on for 0.5 seconds during 5.5 seconds. It is configured to perform variable operation so as to switch to a state in which a ball can be won in the V winning opening 165.例文帳に追加As a result, when the ball reaches the first movable valve 66b at random timing, the probability that the ball passes through the first movable valve 66b and enters the V winning port 165 is 1/11. Configure. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand in which role winning game the ball will enter the V winning opening 165, and the player can be motivated to play all the role winning games.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even if a plurality of balls enter the V prize winning device 65 during one role winning game, the number of balls that can reach the first movable valve 66b is It is configured to be one. As a result, the jackpot probability (probability of the ball entering the V prize opening 165) in the role-winning game becomes about 1/11, so that the players are prevented from being provided with the jackpot game excessively. be able to.

In the present embodiment, the operation of the first movable valve 66b is configured so that the same operation is always set while the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. For example, the first movable valve solenoid 209d has an off period (5.5 seconds) and an on period (0.5 seconds). A second operation pattern defined as an OFF period (3 seconds), an ON period (0.2 seconds), an OFF period (2 seconds), and an ON period (0.3 seconds) is set in order. can be

Further, in the present embodiment, the same operation scenario is repeatedly set after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. A measurement means may be provided to measure the elapsed time from 1, and the operation scenario may be switched to a different operation scenario based on the measurement result of the measurement means. In this case, only when the measurement result of the measuring means is a specific measurement result (for example, within 1 hour after the power is turned on, or 3 hours to 3 hours and 10 minutes after the power is turned on, etc.), the first It is preferable that the proportion of the period during which the movable valve solenoid 209d is set to be higher than the proportion of the period during which the movable valve solenoid 209d is set to be off. By configuring in this way, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the jackpot game (V jackpot game) during the time-saving game only for a specific period, and it is possible for the player to play the game aiming at the period. can improve the operation of

Also, the control contents of the operation scenario may be changed according to the game situation. For example, the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 is set to the initial state (scenario counter (value "1")), or the result of the special symbol lottery is a predetermined number of times (for example, 300 times, which is the reciprocal of the jackpot probability of the pachinko machine 10). , a special operation scenario is set in which the ratio of the period during which the first movable valve solenoid 209d is set to ON is higher than the ratio of the period during which the first movable valve solenoid 209d is set to OFF, compared to the normal operation scenario. can be configured to Then, once this special operation scenario is set, the time saving state is set after that, and it is preferable that the setting is continued until the time saving state ends. As a result, the player can continue playing the game by setting the special action scenario. In this case, it is preferable to provide notification means for notifying the player that the special action scenario has been set. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player that the special action scenario is set in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27(b), the contents of the action scenario table 202e3 per normal pattern will be described. FIG. 27(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the action scenario table 202e3 per normal figure. This general pattern per operation scenario table 202e3 is a data table storing the operation pattern of the general pattern per game executed when the normal pattern lottery is won, and at the time when the general per pattern game is started. An action scenario corresponding to the set game state is set.

Specifically, in the normal pattern per action scenario table 202e3, normal per normal pattern per scenario 202e31 which defines the action scenario of the normal per pattern game executed during the normal state, and normal per pattern per scenario 202e31 which is executed during the time saving state. A normal pattern per scenario 202e32 for reducing working hours in which an operation scenario for a normal pattern per game is defined is defined.

Here, with reference to FIG. 27(c), the contents of the normal normal map winning scenario 202e31 will be described. FIG. 27(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the scenario defined in the scenario 202e31 for normal normal map. This normal normal pattern winning scenario 202e31 is when it is determined that the game state is the normal state at the time when the winning normal pattern variation is stopped (determined) in the normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 48) ( S1118 of FIG. 48: No) This is the operation scenario to be set.

In the normal normal map winning scenario 202e31, the general electric solenoid that controls the operation of the electric accessory 640a of the general electric prize device 640 and the general electric prize device for the scenario counter value range of "1" to "1050" Operation scenarios are defined for turning on and off the second movable valve solenoid 209e that controls the operation of the second movable valve 642 that distributes the destination of the winning ball to 640, respectively.

Specifically, the value of the scenario counter is in the range of "1" to "1025", that is, after the normal normal pattern per scenario 202e31 is set (after the normal pattern per game is executed in the normal state) 4 Until one second elapses, the general electric solenoid is turned off (the electric accessory 640a is closed) and the second movable valve solenoid 209e is turned off (the state in which the ball flows down to the out port 644). The value of the scenario counter is in the range of "1026" to "1050", that is, for 0.1 seconds between 4.1 seconds and 4.2 seconds after the scenario 202e31 per normal normal map is executed, the normal solenoid is An operation scenario is defined so that the second movable valve solenoid 209e is turned on (the electric accessary 640a is in an open state) and the second movable valve solenoid 209e is turned on (the state in which the ball flows down to the special electric operation port 643).

That is, when the normal pattern per game is executed in the normal state, the normal pattern per game of the closed state (4.1 seconds) and the open state (0.1 second) is executed. Furthermore, even if the ball enters the electric prize winning device 640 during the open state for 0.1 seconds, the second movable valve 643 is at a position where the winning ball flows down to the out port 644 at that time (see FIG. 4). , it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from entering the special electric operation opening 643.

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the contents of the scenario 202e32 for normal drawing for reducing working hours will be described. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the scenario defined in the scenario 202e32 per standard diagram for reducing working hours. This time-saving normal pattern winning scenario 202e32 is when it is determined that the game state is the normal state at the time when the winning normal pattern variation stops (confirmed) in the normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 48) ( S1118 of FIG. 48: Yes) This is the operation scenario to be set.

A general electric solenoid that controls the operation of the electric accessory 640a of the general electric prize device 640 and the general electric prize device 640 for the scenario 202e32 for the time saving general map and the value of the scenario counter in the range of "1" to "1025" Operation scenarios are defined for turning on and off the second movable valve solenoid 209e that controls the operation of the second movable valve 642 that distributes the destination of the winning ball.

Specifically, the value of the scenario counter is in the range of "1" to "25", that is, 0 after the normal normal pattern winning scenario 202e31 is set (after the normal pattern per game is executed in the normal state). Until one second elapses, the general electric solenoid is turned off (the electric accessory 640a is closed), and the second movable valve solenoid 209e is turned on (the ball flows down to the special electric operation port 643). After that, the value of the scenario counter is in the range of "26" to "775", that is, for 3 seconds between 0.1 and 3.1 seconds after the scenario 202e32 per time-saving normal diagram is set, The general electric solenoid is set to ON (the electric accessory 640a is in an open state), the second movable valve solenoid 209e is continuously set to ON, and the value of the scenario counter is in the range of "776" to "1024", that is, Until 3.1 seconds to 4.1 seconds have passed since the scenario 202e32 per time-saving general map was set, the general electric solenoid is off (the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state), and the second movable valve solenoid 209e is on. (The state in which the ball flows down to the special electric activation port 643) is set, and the value of the scenario counter is "1025", that is, when the upper limit value specified in the scenario 202e32 per scenario 202e32 for time saving, the second movable An operation scenario is defined so that the valve solenoid 209e is turned off (a state in which the ball flows down to the out port 644).

In other words, when the general pattern per game is executed in the time saving state, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a in the general pattern per game is immediately executed for 3 seconds after a short closed state (0.1 seconds). be done. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to win the ball to the general electric prize winning device 640 than the general pattern per game in the normal state.

Furthermore, in the scenario 202e32 for the time-saving general map, during the period in which the ball can enter the general electric prize winning device 640, the second movable valve 643 is positioned to allow the ball to enter the special electric operation opening 643 (Fig. 5 See) can be set, so it is possible to make it easier to win the ball to the special electric operation port 643 during the game per normal pattern.

In addition, in the above-described scenario 202e31 for the normal pattern and the scenario 202e32 for the normal pattern for reduced working hours, the operation scenario for the second movable valve solenoid 209d is defined to be the same, so it is based on the operation scenario. The operation control contents can be unified, and the process of controlling the variable members can be simplified.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, this general pattern per game includes a time end condition that is established based on the passage of time (a condition that the scenario per general pattern is established to be updated to the upper limit), and a general electric winning device A prize-winning end condition is established when the number of prize-winning balls to 640 reaches an upper limit value (for example, 5). When a normal game is played, the prize-winning end condition is set so that the time end condition is satisfied first. As a result, for example, in a general-purpose game, it is possible to suppress the act of illegally winning a large amount of balls into the general-purpose electrical winning device 640 .

Returning to FIG. 21, the description is continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 22, the RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 55) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 54) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 53) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

29, the RAM 203 has a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, a prize number counter 203e, and an operation. Counter group 203f, game state storage area 203g, time saving counter 203h, jackpot flag 203i, time saving end flag 203j, role per flag 203k, special figure temporary stop flag 203m, special figure fluctuation time counter 203n, V flag 203p, other memory area 203z.

The special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a stores various counter values obtained based on the ball entering the special symbol entrance 64 (start winning) up to the upper limit number (4 in this embodiment). This is a storage area for

The special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area for storing various counter values for starting the variable display of the special symbols. This is a storage area in which various counter values are shifted and stored when various counter values are stored in .

The special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) store the first hit random number counter C1 and the first hit type obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 22) upon detection of the start winning. The values of the counter C2 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are stored respectively. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the special figure entrance 64 (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39), each counter C1 to C2, CS1 from the counter buffer and store them in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the special symbol variation (lottery), the big winning lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81 are executed. Of the data corresponding to each start winning stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1), the data corresponding to one start winning is used as the special symbol reserved ball. Shift to execution area. It should be noted that the shift in this embodiment means moving data stored in one area to another area.

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b includes a second winning random number counter C4 and a normal symbol variation type counter CS2 obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 22) upon detection of the ball passing through the through gate 67 (start winning). A storage area in which values are stored. When the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (started winning) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39), the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is detected from the counter buffer. , Acquire the value of the normal pattern variation type counter CS2, and store it in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203b. The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b has one reserved area so that data (values of the counters C4 and CS2) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (reserved) up to one time. In the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the data of the reserved balls in the order of passing through the through gate 67 (start winning) are stored in order from the reserved area in which the order of digestion is earlier among the reserved areas in which the data is vacant. .

In addition, when the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) detects that it is the execution start timing of the variable display effect of the normal symbol based on the start winning, each counter value is stored, and the normal symbol winning lottery Also, it is a memory for storing data (values of counters C4 and CS2) to be referred to in processing such as setting of display (variation pattern) of the first pattern display device 37 or the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, when the MPU 201 detects that it is the timing to start executing the variable display effect of the normal symbols, the above-described normal symbol reservation is performed in order to execute processing such as winning lottery and setting of display of the second symbol display device 83. Of the data corresponding to each starting prize stored in the ball storage area 203b (the value of the second winning random number counter C4, the value of the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2), the data corresponding to one starting prize is Shift to a symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). It should be noted that the shift in this embodiment means moving data stored in one area to another area.

1st special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, based on the winning to the special symbol entrance 64 detected in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds, It is a counter that counts up to four times the number of pending balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display effect performed by the one-symbol display device 37 (the variable display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81). The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting processing of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S1701 in FIG. 54). Then, each time the starting winning prize is detected and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time the variable display effect is executed.

In addition, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (that is, the number of reserved balls) is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a based on the ball entering the special special symbol entrance 64 (start winning). When the counter value is stored, the voice lamp controller 113 is notified by the special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110 . The special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the start winning is detected and the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is incremented by one.

The MPU 201 stores the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer in the special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown). ) is referred to in the special symbol variation start processing (see S205 in FIG. 41), a big hit lottery is performed based on the reference data, and the variation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. do. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main controller 110, variation display is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern and the stop classification which are decided here are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the special figure fluctuation pattern command and the stop classification command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d detects a ball passing through a through gate 67 (hereinafter referred to as "start winning") during timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39) which is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. ), it is a counter that counts the number of holding balls (number of standby times) of variable display performed by the second symbol display device 83 up to one time at maximum. This normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls that is stored based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 . Zero is set as the initial value by the initial setting processing of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S1701 in FIG. 54). Then, every time the starting winning prize is detected and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added to the maximum value (see S1204 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of normal symbols is executed (see S1105 in FIG. 48).

The winning number counter 203e is a counter for counting the number of balls winning the V winning device 65 and the number of balls winning the specific winning opening 650a of the variable winning device 650 during the round game in the accessory winning game. Specifically, when it is detected that the ball has passed through a detection opening (not shown) provided in the V winning device 65, the value is updated by adding one. On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winning prizes in the V winning device 65 (the value of the winning number counter 203e) and the number of ejected balls (the number of passing balls provided in each winning opening are detected by a detection means is reset to the initial value of "0" after it is determined whether or not the number of accumulated detection results of . The value of the winning number counter 203e is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The action counter group 203k is a counter for measuring (updating) the progress of various set action scenarios, and is composed of scenario counters corresponding to the scenarios stored in the action scenario table 202e. When any of the operation scenarios in the various operation scenario tables 202e is set, a counter value update process is performed as a process executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process (see FIG. 55) of the main controller 110. is executed.

In this embodiment, scenarios stored in the various operation scenario tables 202e may be executed redundantly. For example, a scenario related to the normal figure per game and a scenario related to the accessory per game are configured to be executable at the same time. Accordingly, the scenario counters are provided corresponding to the scenarios stored in the various operation scenario tables 202e, but the scenario counters are not limited to this, and may be provided as many scenario counters as the upper limit number of scenarios that can be executed simultaneously. In this case, when a scenario counter is provided with a type and a new operation scenario is set, the unused scenario counter type is discriminated, the scenario counter is set based on the discrimination result, and the set scenario counter is: It is only necessary to set usage information for indicating in which operation scenario it is used, and to set the usage information set in the storage means of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 . Furthermore, it is preferable to provide the storage means in which the usage information is set with a backup function capable of retaining the stored information even when the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, as with the other various configurations of the RAM 203. . By configuring in this way, even if the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like during the operation control based on the operation scenario, the operation control after the power is restored can be continued from the state before the power failure. becomes possible.

The game state storage area 203g is a storage area for temporarily storing the currently set game state, and is a game state corresponding to the game state (setting state of the time reduction counter 203h) set after the jackpot game ends. is stored. Specifically, when the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0, the normal state is stored, and when the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0, the time saving state is stored.

Furthermore, in the state where the jackpot game or the role game is being executed, the winning game state (jackpot state, role game state) indicating that each winning game is being executed It is configured to also store type information indicating the type of jackpot corresponding to the jackpot game that is playing. In addition, it is configured to also store per-universal figure per game information indicating that the per-universal figure game is being executed.

A state command is set based on the information stored (memorized) in the game state storage area 203g, and the state command is output to the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. The sound lamp control device 113 receives the output state command and temporarily stores it in the sub-state setting area 223g.

The information stored in the game state storage area 203g is configured to be able to hold the information even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. In the start-up process (see FIG. 54), a state command corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203g is set.

As a result, even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, the current game state can be determined by the sound lamp control device 113 side.

The time-saving counter 203j is a counter for indicating a state in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set, and a value corresponding to a case where a high probability state of normal symbols is set is set. A value corresponding to the winning jackpot type is set to the time saving counter 203j after the jackpot game ends (S1914, 1915 in FIG. 56). Then, it is cleared to 0 when the jackpot game is won. As a result, since the high probability state of normal symbols is not set during the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress giving excessive benefits to the player during the jackpot game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the high probability state of the normal design is set, the value of the time reduction counter 203j is set, based on the special design lottery (fluctuation), the value of the time reduction counter 203j is subtracted, the time reduction counter 203j When the value of becomes 0, the time saving state ends and the state shifts to the normal state. It may be configured so that the high-probability state of the pattern continues. In this case, "10000" may be set as the value of the time saving counter 203j.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a condition for ending the time saving state, as a condition for subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203j, only the condition to subtract the value of the time saving counter 203j based on the number of special symbol lottery (variation) is set, but not limited to this, for example, when an end condition that can be satisfied depending on the processing contents of various processes executed by the main controller 110 is satisfied, the value of the time saving counter 203j is reduced. You may Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, special winning election), or the normal symbol lottery Even if the result is a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning a special normal figure), it may be configured to subtract the value of the time saving counter 203j, or if the ball enters the special electric activation opening 643 In addition, the value of the time saving counter 203j may be subtracted.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the value of the time-saving counter 203j is configured to be decremented by 1, but according to the type of end condition that has been established, multiple values of the time-saving counter 203j are collectively (for example, 2) It may be configured to be subtracted, or may be configured to be subtracted so that the value of the time saving counter 203j becomes "0" regardless of the current value of the time saving counter 203j. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the time saving state will continue, and it is possible to make the player interested in the game during the time saving state.

Furthermore, the conditions for ending the time saving state may be varied according to the contents of establishment of the conditions for which the time saving state is set (jackpot type). As a result, not only the execution of the jackpot game but also the jackpot type corresponding to the executed jackpot game can be made interesting to the player, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

The jackpot flag 203i is set to ON when the value of the acquired first hit random number counter C1 is determined to be a jackpot at the start of fluctuation based on the ball entering the special figure entrance 64. is a flag that Also, when the jackpot game ends, it is set to OFF.

The time saving end flag 203h is a flag for indicating that the time saving end condition is satisfied, and is set to ON when the time saving end condition is satisfied. This time saving end flag 203h is the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 in the special symbol variation start processing (see S205 in FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, that is, the special figure variation of this time is a time saving state. is set to ON (see S311 in FIG. 41). Then, it is referred to in the special symbol variation stop processing (see S208 in FIG. 45) (see S802 in FIG. 45), and when it is determined that it is ON, the value of the time saving counter 203j is reset to "0", and the time saving state is changed. Processing for termination is executed (see S803 in FIG. 45) and set to OFF (see S804 in FIG. 45).

Also, during the special symbol variation (during the final variation of the time saving state) executed with the time saving end flag 203j set to ON, when the ball wins the V prize opening 165 and the V jackpot game is executed is also set to off (see S1508 in FIG. 52).

That is, in the present embodiment, the subtraction process of the time saving counter 203h is executed at the timing of starting the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the ending process for determining the end of the time saving is executed at the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol. there is Then, when the special symbol variation is interrupted by the role winning game during the variation of the special symbol, and the jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed with the role winning game as a trigger, the time saving end flag 203h is turned off. configured to be set.

Therefore, for example, the V jackpot game is executed in a state in which the time saving end flag 203h is set to ON, and even if the interrupted special pattern fluctuation is restarted after the jackpot game ends, the restarted special pattern fluctuation It is possible to suppress the end of the time saving state at the fluctuation stop timing. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the subtraction process of the time saving counter 203h is executed at the start of the special symbol fluctuation, the subtraction process of the time saving end flag 203h is executed when the special symbol fluctuation is resumed. None. Therefore, when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the process of subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203j from the time when the next special symbol variation after the special symbol variation after the restart is started is executed. .

By configuring in this way, it becomes possible for the player to play the game for a longer time in the set time-saving state, and the player's willingness to play can be enhanced. In addition, in the present embodiment, the process of updating the time saving state only the final change of the time saving state is the time when the special symbol fluctuation stops, but the value of the time saving counter 203j is a predetermined value (for example, 2 ), the process of updating the time saving state may be performed when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped.

The role winning flag 203k is a flag for indicating that the role winning game is to be executed, and is set to ON when the role winning game is to be executed. This accessory winning flag 203k is turned on when a ball that has won a prize in the general electric prize winning device 640 during a general figure winning game enters the special electric operation opening 643 and at that time, the accessory winning game is not being executed. (see S1307 in FIG. 50). In various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, it is referred to when determining whether or not the role winning game is in progress, and is set to OFF when the role winning game ends. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the award winning flag 203k is set to ON, the special symbol variation is interrupted.

Special figure temporary stop flag 203m is a flag indicating a period to stop the update (subtraction) of the variation time of the special figure, and when it is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the variation time is stopped and turned on When the set state is set to OFF, the stopped update (subtraction) of the variable time is restarted.

This special symbol temporary stop flag 203m is for indicating that the special symbol variation is temporarily stopped (interrupted), and is set to ON when the special symbol variation is temporarily stopped (interrupted). It is. In addition, in the present embodiment, when a ball is won in the special electric activation port 643, the role winning game is configured to be executable, and when the role winning game is executed, the fluctuation of the special symbol being executed is stopped. It is configured so that

The special symbol variation time counter 203n is a counter for measuring the variation time of the special symbol, and the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected in the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 of S6 in FIG. 43). is set (see SS509 in FIG. 43). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) each time the special symbol variation in-execution process (see S206 in FIG. 44) is executed. It is determined whether the value is 0 in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 40) (see S204 in FIG. 40). Here, when it is determined that the value of the special figure variation time counter 203a is 0 (S204 of FIG. 40: No), special symbol variation stop processing for stopping the special symbol during variation (see S287 of FIG. 45) ) is executed.

Furthermore, this special figure fluctuation time counter 203n is configured so that the processing for subtracting the value is interrupted when the accessory per game or the jackpot game is executed. Therefore, the value of the special figure variation time counter 203n is not subtracted during the per-accessory game or during the jackpot game.

The V flag 203p is a flag for indicating that the ball has entered the V winning opening during the role winning game, and is set to ON when the ball has entered the V winning opening during the role winning game. It is what is done. The setting status of the V flag 203p is referred to in the control process for the control (see S1805 in FIG. 58) (see S2008 in FIG. 58), and when it is set to ON, the start of the jackpot game (V jackpot game) is started. It is set (see S2010 in FIG. 58). After that, it is set to OFF (see S2011 in FIG. 58).

The other memory area 203z is set (stored) with other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like.

Returning to FIG. 9, the description continues. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate 650b of the specific winning opening 650a. As a specific winning opening solenoid 209a for opening and closing drive to the front side, V winning opening solenoid 209b for opening and closing the opening and closing door 65a of the V winning device 65, and the storage valve 66a provided in the V winning device 65 The storage solenoid 209c for driving, the first movable valve solenoid 209d for driving the first movable valve 66b, and the second movable valve solenoid 209e for driving the second movable valve 643 in the electric winning device 640 , and a solenoid 209 for driving the electric accessory 640a (other solenoid 209z) is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

Also, the input/output port 205 is connected to a group of switches and a group of sensors (not shown) (for example, a storage sensor 65s for detecting balls stored in a storage portion formed in a storage valve 66a in the V winning device 65). and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. Various processing is executed based on the

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 53) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues a ball shooting instruction. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle is activated under the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like.

The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, It controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 and instructs the display control device 114 to change the contents of the presentation. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 .

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

As shown in FIG. 30A, at least a variation pattern selection table 222a and an operation scenario table 222b are stored in the ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113. FIG.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, a variation pattern of each variation pattern type (out of range, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) is set to a counter value for selecting a variation pattern (not shown). The sound ramp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the result of the suitability determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. This allows the audio ramp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.

In the present embodiment, when the game state is the normal state, a variation effect is executed in which the third symbol is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the special symbol variation to be executed. . In this variation effect, the detailed variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the success/failure determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection. A game (special symbol game) can be performed while predicting whether or not the special symbol variation of this time is a big hit by visually recognizing the variation performance executed by the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, when the time saving state is set, the variation performance for showing the result of the special symbol lottery is not executed in the third symbol display device 81, and the special electric game aiming at the V winning game triggered by the normal symbol lottery. It is constructed so that an effect (V rush effect) for guiding the game content of 1 is executed. Therefore, in the variation pattern selection table 222a, various variation patterns are defined as variation patterns to be referred to when the gaming state is the normal state, and variation patterns to be referred to when the time saving state are defined. do not have. It should be noted that, in the time-saving state, when displaying the third pattern in a small size corresponding to the special pattern variation on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 It suffices to define only the variable display mode corresponding to (variable time).

The operation scenario table 222b is a data table for the sound lamp control unit 113 side to grasp the status of operation control for various devices executed on the main control unit 110 side. It is formed from the same data table as the operation scenario table 202e. This operation scenario table 222b is used when setting an operation scenario corresponding to the received command (for example, a command indicating the start of a winning game) indicating the start of operation control from the main controller 110 side. Referenced. The operation scenario set here is updated and controlled so as to synchronize with the update operation on the main controller 110 side.

By configuring in this way, only by outputting only the command indicating the start of operation control from the main controller 110 side, the sound lamp control device 113 side can easily grasp the operation status of various devices and the future operation development. becomes possible. In this embodiment, the operation scenario table 222b is provided on the sound lamp control device 113 side for the purpose of reducing the processing load on the main control device 110 side. The progress of various operation scenarios held in the various operation scenario table 202e may be set as a command and output to the audio lamp control device 113 side.

Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 30(b). As shown in FIG. 30(b), the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 includes a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a special symbol variation start flag 223d, and a stop type selection flag. 223e, production counter 223f, sub-state setting area 223g, look-ahead counter 223h, short time counter 223i, unreported period storage area 223j, unreported pending number storage area 223k, interruption flag 223m, special hit flag 223n, extension flag 223p, V At least a rush flag 223q, a variable time counter 223r, a notified pending number storage area 223s, and another memory area 223z are provided.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until the commands are processed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 61) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out and is read by the command determination processing. , the command is parsed and an action is taken according to the command.

The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area) for special symbols, and winning information is stored in each of these areas. be. Based on the information stored in the prize winning information storage area 223a, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result of the reserved ball and the like before the change starts.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, like the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter that counts up to four times the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable effect that is being held in the main controller 110 . That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from main controller 110 .

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and obtain the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, and manages the number of reserved balls by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. It's becoming

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of pending balls of the variation display is added by the ball entering the special symbol entrance 64, or in the main controller 110, the variation display in the special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203 c after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 from the reserved ball number command, Stored in the symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main controller 110 203c, its value can be updated.

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used to display the reserved ball number symbol. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, and the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of , a command for the number of pending balls for display is transmitted to the display control device 114 .

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball number corresponding to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 is displayed in the sub-display area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 11(b)). As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of pending ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol pending ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. FIG. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The special figure fluctuation start flag 223d is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to on when a special figure fluctuation pattern command for notifying the special symbol fluctuation pattern output from the main controller 110 is received. . On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 .

The special figure stop classification selection flag 223e is set to ON when a stop classification command for notifying the special symbol fluctuation stop classification output from the main controller 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 .

The effect counter 223f is a counter used for selection of variation patterns, selection of various effects, etc., and is repeatedly updated within a range of 0 to 98. It should be noted that it is updated by being incremented by one each time the main process is executed.

Data corresponding to the state command output from the main controller 110 is set in the sub-state setting area 223g. The current game state can also be determined by the sound lamp control device 113 based on the data set in the sub-state setting area 223g. The state setting command is also output from the main control unit 110 when the power is turned on, and the game state backed up can be determined by the sound lamp control unit 113 .

The look-ahead counter 223h is a counter for measuring the number of special figures pending that the fluctuation time is prefetched among the number of times of saving time set as the time saving state, and the number of times of saving time set when the time saving state is set. A value corresponding to is set, and it is subtracted according to the number of special figures pending that performs the variable time look-ahead. Then, when the value of the time short period counter 223i becomes 0, which will be described later, it is referred to, and when the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is not 0, the special symbol variation is executed regardless of the time saving state. , a process for displaying a special effect (see FIG. 19(a)) is executed.

The short time counter 223i is a counter indicating the time of special symbol variation (special symbol variation time) until the time saving state ends, and a plurality of special symbol variations until the end condition of the time saving state is completed. A value obtained by accumulating special figure fluctuation time is set. At this time, the value of the short-term counter 223i is referred to and decremented (Fig. See S5303 and S5304 of 72).

The value indicated by the short time counter 223i is used when setting the display mode of the timer 812 to indicate the remaining period of the V rush in the V rush effect executed during the short time state (see FIG. 12(c))). . In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the same game method (left-handed game) is used during the normal state, during the jackpot game, and during the time saving state, and is set after the jackpot game ends. At the timing when the time saving state is started, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is configured to easily reach the upper limit (4).

Therefore, on the ending screen of the jackpot game in which the number of times of time saving is set to 4 (see FIG. 12(a)), the special symbol reserved information acquired at that time (the special symbol stored in the winning information storage area 223b) Based on winning information), the fluctuation time until the time saving state ends (total value of fluctuation time for four special figure fluctuations) is displayed.

In addition, even if the number of time saving times is greater than the upper limit value (4) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (4), or even if the number of time saving times is set to 4 times, the special symbol reserved number at the end of the jackpot game ( If the number of special symbols reserved) has not reached 4 pieces, the value of the time period counter 223i is set according to the special design reservation information acquired at that time, and the time period is determined from the value of the look-ahead counter 223h. The number of special symbol reservations added to the counter 223i is subtracted. Then, when new special symbol reservation information is acquired, the special symbol variation time is added to the short time counter 223i based on the acquired special symbol reservation information, and the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is subtracted.

The unannounced period storage area 223j receives a winning command in a state where the variable time can be added to the short-time counter 223i, that is, when the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is 1 or more. When the value of the special symbol fluctuation time corresponding to the included special symbol reservation information cannot be added to the short time counter 223i (for example, during the jackpot game, during the game per role), the special symbol reservation information included in the received winning command It is an area that temporarily stores the special figure fluctuation time according to.

The value (special figure fluctuation time) stored in this unnotified period storage area 223j is read when the time period can be added, and is referred to when adding to the time period counter 223i. By configuring in this way, regardless of whether the time period can be added, when the winning command is received, it is only necessary to execute the process of reading the special figure fluctuation time included in the winning command, The processing load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

The unreported pending number storage area 223k is a storage area for temporarily storing the number of winning commands in which the special symbol variation time is stored in the above-described unreported period storage area 223j, that is, the number of special symbol pending balls. It is read out when the time period can be added, and the value of the prefetch counter 223h is subtracted in correspondence with the read value.

The interruption flag 223m is a flag for indicating that the value of the short period counter 223h is not subtracted, and the state in which the value of the short period counter 223h is not subtracted, that is, the accessory winning game and the jackpot game are executed. It is set to ON when

The special winning flag 223n is a flag that is set to ON when winning information indicating a special winning ("jackpot B") is included in the reserved special symbols. This special winning flag 223n is set to ON when it is determined in the jackpot ending process (see S4914 in FIG. 69) that the winning information indicating the special winning is included in the reserved storage (see S5013 in FIG. 69). ).

In this embodiment, if there is a special win in the special symbol reserve obtained at the end of the jackpot game, only the period until the special symbol variation corresponding to the special win is completed is a time saving during the V rush. It is configured to be displayed as a period, and furthermore, it is configured to execute an effect (heaven mode) for notifying the player that a special win exists in the special figure reservation (Fig. 17(a)).

By configuring in this way, after a predetermined period of time has passed (after a short period of time when the display is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81), the player can play the jackpot game (the jackpot won in the special drawing lottery). Since the execution of the game can be notified in advance, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the heaven mode is set, the period until the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the special hit ends is notified as a short period of time. The remaining period of the short period of time at the time of the game (special win) can be set to 0 seconds. Therefore, since it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner how many seconds after the jackpot game will be executed, during a short period of the heaven mode (during the period until the special jackpot game is executed), V jackpot The game can be played while enjoying how many times the game can be played.

Furthermore, when the heaven mode is set, the period until the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the special hit ends is configured to be notified as a short period of time, so the special hit corresponding to the special hit It is possible to prevent the player from determining in advance the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the special figure suspension obtained after the figure suspension. As a result, for example, when a jackpot game corresponding to a special win is executed when the time period is 10 seconds remaining, the player is informed in advance that the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation to be executed next is 10 seconds. It is possible to suppress the fact that the desire to play is lowered due to being grasped by the player.

The extension flag 223p is a flag for indicating that the general pattern per game is executed at the timing when the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied, and the general pattern per game is executed at the timing when the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied. is set to on. In this embodiment, as the operation scenario of the normal pattern per game, normal normal pattern per scenario 202e31 corresponding to the normal pattern per game in the normal state, and time reduction normal pattern per game corresponding to the normal pattern per game in the time reduction state It has a scenario 202e32, and is configured to variably set the game contents of the game per normal pattern based on the game state set at the execution timing of the game per normal pattern.

Therefore, for example, when the normal pattern per game is executed just before the end of the time saving state, the normal pattern per game during the time saving state may be executed even after the game state shifts to the normal state. When such a state occurs, the end timing of the V rush performance indicating the game mode in the time saving state is extended to the end timing of the normal per game game (FIG. 16). (c)). As a result, it is possible to clearly inform the player of the period (V rush period) during which the player should aim for the V prize.

The V rush flag 223q is a flag for indicating that it is a V rush period, and is set to ON when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery (special lottery) in a normal state, and is an end condition for a time saving state. is set to off when This V rush flag 223q is configured to be continuously set to ON even when a jackpot game is executed during a short period of time (during V rush). As a result, it is possible to easily set a period during which various types of cumulative information (the number of winning V jackpot games and information indicating the number of winning balls during the V rush period) are calculated during the V rush period.

The variation time counter 223r is a counter for measuring the variation time of the special symbol, and when the variation pattern command of the special symbol is received, the variation time corresponding to the received variation pattern command is set, and the voice ramp control is performed. In the effect update process (S4111 in FIG. 72) executed every millisecond in the main process of process 113 (see FIG. 60), reference and subtraction are performed (see S5303 and S5304 in FIG. 72). The value of this variation time counter 223h is referred to when determining the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed at the timing at which the special symbol variation can be interrupted, and is used to set different effects modes according to the remaining period. be done.

Informed pending number storage area 223s is an area for storing the special figure pending number corresponding to the variable time already added to the value of the short time counter 223i, and the value of the uninformed pending number storage area 223k is updated. At that time, the updated value is stored, and the value is subtracted when the special symbol variation is completed. Then, at the end of the jackpot game in which the new number of times of time saving is set, by subtracting the value stored in the notified pending number storage area 223s from the value set in the look-ahead counter 223h, a new time saving state is set. In this case, the number of special symbol reserved balls that has already been notified as the remaining period of the time saving state is subtracted, and the number of special symbol reserved balls that can be newly added and displayed for the time period is made to correspond to the value of the look-ahead counter 223h. used for

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, it is configured so as not to execute the production that suggests to the player the variable time corresponding to the special figure hold that has been acquired during the normal state, but not limited to this, in the normal state It may be configured to vary the production mode according to the contents of the special figure reservation.

For example, the stop type of the special design (combination of the third design indicating the jackpot) may be set variably based on the variable time corresponding to the special design reservation that has been acquired, and the total variable time of the special design reservation It is also possible to display a third symbol combination in which odd-numbered numbers are stop-displayed in a square pattern when a jackpot is won in a state exceeding 100 seconds.

In addition, the display mode of the reserved pattern displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 during the normal state is configured to be variably set based on the length of the fluctuation time in addition to the presence or absence of the big hit winning by the special drawing lottery. You can

In addition, in the present embodiment, when entering the V rush, it is configured to notify all the variable time based on the acquired special figure suspension, but not limited to this, for example, the acquired special figure It may be configured to notify the player of only a part of the variable time based on the hold, or the player can operate the operation means to change the duration of the V rush (the period until the time saving state ends) It may be possible to select a game property in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol for showing is not notified.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured to be notified by adding up the variation time corresponding to the special figure variation of a plurality of times executed until the time saving end condition is satisfied, but not limited to this, individual It may be configured so that the operator can identify the fluctuating time corresponding to the special figure hold. In this case, for example, the display mode of the special figure hold corresponding to the special figure fluctuation executed until the time saving end condition is satisfied is displayed in a display mode imitating the character, and according to the type of the displayed character It may be configured so that the player can roughly grasp the length of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation corresponding to the special figure reservation.

In the present embodiment, since the time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is always set after the jackpot game is executed, the V rush flag is set when the jackpot game is executed. However, for example, when the time saving state and the normal state are set at a specific ratio after the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot game is executed Even so, there is a possibility that the time saving state is not set after the end of the jackpot game. In this case, after the jackpot game is over (during the ending period of the jackpot game), whether or not the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is over is determined based on the set jackpot type, and the time saving state is set. If it is determined, it can be changed after the special figure reservation that has been acquired at that time.

Next, game contents executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment triggered by the normal symbol lottery will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. FIG. FIG. 31 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the game per normal pattern is executed in the normal state, and FIG. 32 shows the flow of the game when the game per normal pattern is executed in the time saving state It is a timing chart showing the flow.

Here, with reference to FIG. 31, in the normal state, the flow of the game when the game per normal pattern is executed will be described. In this embodiment, it is possible to execute a game (special electric game) that can progress in the order of a normal pattern game, a role game, and a jackpot game (V jackpot game), triggered by winning a lottery of normal symbols. Configure. In other words, it is configured so that a big winning game can be executed without performing a lottery for special symbols.

First, in the normal state, when winning the normal symbol lottery, the normal pattern winning game based on the normal normal pattern winning scenario 202e31 (see FIG. 27 (c)) is executed, and the normal electric winning device 640 is open control be done. In the normal pattern per game executed during the normal state, as shown in FIG. 27 (c), it takes 4 seconds (t1) from the start of the normal pattern per game until the electric accessory 640a is in the open state. After that, through the open state of 0.1 seconds (t2), through the closed state of 1 second (t3), the game per normal pattern ends. Then, during 4 seconds (t4) from the start timing of the game per normal pattern, the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to ON so that the ball can enter the special electric operation port 643 and enter a winning state. After that, the second movable valve solenoid 209 e is turned off so that the ball is guided to the out port 644 .

Therefore, in the general-purpose winning game executed during the normal state, it is difficult for the ball to enter the general electrical winning device 640, and even if the winning ball wins, the winning ball is guided to the out port 644. It will be. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from entering the special electric operation opening 643 during the normal state and the performance of the accessory winning game. By configuring in this way, during a normal state in which a special game aiming at execution of a big win game is executed by lottery of special symbols, and in a short time state in which a special electric game aiming at execution of a big win game is executed by lottery of normal symbols. Even if the same game method is executed in the medium and the above, it is possible to suppress the execution of the jackpot game by the special electric game during the normal state and to provide the player with the jackpot game excessively. can be suppressed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (4 times or 15 times) during the time saving state, so that the time saving state ends, so the special symbol lottery during the time saving state. is not executed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the same game method is executed in the normal state, the jackpot game state, and the time saving state, there is a game in which only the normal symbol lottery is executed during the time saving state. You can suppress what is done.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the operation content of the game per normal pattern is set so as to prohibit the execution of the special electric game during the normal state, but not limited to this, for example, the execution during the normal state It may be configured so that the same operation scenario as the normal pattern per game executed during the time saving state is selected in a part of the normal pattern per game. This allows the player to play a game with unexpectedness.

Returning to FIG. 31, the description is continued. As described above, when the normal game per game is executed in the normal state, the ball that has won the general electric winning device 640 does not enter the special electric operation opening 643, so the ball to the special electric operation opening 643 The prize-winning game executed with the winning of a prize is not executed, and the prize-winning game in which the V prize winning device 65 is opened and the jackpot game in which the variable prize winning device 650 is opened are not executed. , A new normal pattern variation (normal pattern variation) is executed based on the end of the normal pattern per game. In addition, the first movable valve 66b (FIG. 31(h)) is set to an operation scenario in which it is always driven while the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, so regardless of whether or not a winning game is executed, , is driven in an operation pattern based on the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 (see FIG. 27(a)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the flow of the game when the jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed among the game flows when the normal pattern winning game is executed in the time saving state will be described. .

First, in the time saving state, when winning in the normal symbol lottery, the normal pattern winning game based on the normal pattern winning scenario 202e32 (see FIG. 28) for time saving is executed, and the normal electric winning device 640 is controlled to open. In the general pattern per game executed during the time saving state, as shown in FIG. 28, it takes 0.1 second (t1) from the start of the general pattern per game until the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, After that, through the open state of 3 seconds (t2), through the closed state of 1 second (t3), the game per normal pattern ends. Then, during 4 seconds (t4) from the start timing of the game per normal pattern, the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to ON so that the ball can enter the special electric operation port 643 in the state where the second movable valve 643 can win. After that, the second movable valve solenoid 209 e is turned off so that the ball is guided to the out port 644 .

Therefore, in the general pattern per game executed during the time saving state, the ball is easy to win into the general electric winning device 640 (easier to win than the general pattern per game in the normal state), and the winning ball special electric operation It is configured to be easy to win to the mouth 643 (easier to win than the normal game per game in the normal state). As a result, it is possible to make it easier to win the ball into the special electric operation opening 643 in the normal figure winning game executed during the time saving state, and to facilitate the execution of the accessory winning game.

The ball that has entered the special electric operation opening 643 is detected by the special electric operation opening winning switch (Fig. 32(e)) (not shown), and the V winning device 65 is opened based on the detection result. A hitting game is executed. When the role winning game is started, after a waiting period of 0.1 seconds (t5) has passed, the V winning opening solenoid 209b is set to ON for 1.5 seconds (t6) to open the V open/close door 65a. After that, a prize winning game is executed in which the V prize opening solenoid 209b is turned off for 1.4 seconds (t7). Also, with the start of the role-winning game, the retention solenoid 209c is turned on for 1.6 seconds (t8) to position the retention valve 66a in the retention state. That is, during the period in which the ball can enter the V winning device 65 by the role winning game, the reservoir valve 66a is maintained in the storage state (see FIG. 7), so during one role winning game, It is possible to prevent a plurality of balls from reaching the V winning opening 165.例文帳に追加

When the storage solenoid 209c is turned off after the period t8 has elapsed, one ball stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 66a flows down toward the first movable valve 66b. The first movable valve 66b is driven based on the first movable valve operating scenario 202e4 so as to alternately switch between the closed state for 5 seconds (t10) and the open state for 0.5 seconds (t9). When the ball stored in the valve 66a reaches the first movable valve 66a and the first movable valve 66b is in a closed state, the ball flows down toward the second out port 163b, and the first movable valve 66b is in an open state, the ball flows down toward the V winning opening 165. - 特許庁When the ball enters the V winning opening 165, the passage of the ball is detected by the V winning switch (FIG. 32(i)) not shown, and the big winning game (V big winning game) is started based on the detection result.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the general pattern per game is executed during the time saving state, it is easier to win the ball in the general electric winning device 640 (than the general pattern per game in the normal state Easy to win) and the winning ball is easy to enter the special electric operation port 643. When the general pattern per game is executed during the normal state, the general electric prize winning device 640 Even if it is difficult to win the ball (difficult to win than the normal game in the time saving state) and the ball wins the general electric prize winning device 640, the winning ball goes to the special electric operation port 643. It is constituted so as to execute a normal figure per game that is difficult to win.

By configuring in this way, in order to continuously execute the special symbol variation during the time saving state, the game method aiming at the special entrance 64 which is the lottery trigger for the special symbol and the through which is the lottery trigger for the normal symbol. Even if the game method of aiming at the gate 67 is the same, the probability of executing the role-winning game can be greatly changed according to the game state. Also, in the normal state per game, the act of illegally winning the ball to the general electric prize device 640 (for example, stopping the ball with a magnet in the vicinity of the electric accessory 640a and ) is executed, the winning ball can be prevented from entering the special electric operation opening 643, so that a fair game can be provided to the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, not only the game for establishing the special symbol lottery opportunity, or the normal symbol lottery opportunity, but also the normal pattern per game, the accessory per game, and the jackpot game are all executed in the left-handed game. Therefore, the game can be played smoothly without making the player feel troublesome to change the game method.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs variable display (variation) of the third pattern. production) and advance notice production are controlled. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 10). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 53).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 10) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in this first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 38. FIG. FIG. 33 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third pattern display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional game machine. The image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory generally has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. to store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data blocks. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data in the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Of the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, it is unnecessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for those instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed so as to include the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 73) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed by the MPU 231 to the end, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding a NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 38) sent from the MPU 231 to be described later, and stores the frame in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display controller 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, so that the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In addition, in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the special figure ball opening 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on varying image for displaying the results of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a varying effect when the power is turned on.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 73).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described with reference to FIG. 34 . FIG. 34 shows a power-on image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is powered on. It is an explanatory view explaining a time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays FIG. As shown in FIG. 34( c ), on the display screen of the main image at power-on, a variation image at power-on with a symbol "○" at the lower right position of the screen, and a "○" at the time of power-on as shown in FIG. A power-on fluctuation image of an "x" pattern is alternately and repeatedly displayed at the same position as the pattern during the fluctuation period. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. Judging the result, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the image shown in FIG. The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the stop of the variable effect.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Further, when the player starts the game while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the entry of the ball into the special-figure entrance 64 is detected, the power-on fluctuation image 34(b) and 34(c) are alternately displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to display. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When the entry of a ball into a special symbol entrance 64 is detected while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variation performance is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加can be done.

Returning to FIG. 33, the description is continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. Here, with reference to FIG. 35, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be described. 35A and 35B are explanatory diagrams for explaining four kinds of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. FIG. 35(b) shows the back faces B to D corresponding to the "forest stage," "river stage," and "empty stage," respectively, with respect to back face A corresponding to "town stage." . Also, FIG. 28 shows the back surface E corresponding to the "island stage".

As shown in FIG. 35, the back images corresponding to the respective back surfaces A to D are prepared in the character ROM 234 so as to be longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The image controller 237 draws the image so that the rear image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each back surface A to D (hereinafter referred to as “scrolling images”) are configured so that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area, and then the third pattern display device 81 displays an image between the position a and the position a' as the display area. The background image is scrolled in a continuous manner.

When it is decided to change the back surface type based on the back surface type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to "town stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "sky stage", the MPU 231 , the image controller 237 is controlled so that the initial position of the display area is set between the position a and the position a' of the corresponding rear image, and the image at the initial position is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. . Then, as time elapses, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. When the area reaches the image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between the positions a to c by repeatedly scrolling them in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

On the other hand, the back image on the back E is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the order of (a)→(b)→(c)→(a)→ . Specifically, on the back side E, an image of a mountain towering over an island, an image of a sandy beach at the foot of the mountain, and an image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed as the third pattern in a state where the displayed positions are fixed. It is displayed on the display device 81 . On the other hand, an image of the sky that spreads over the mountains changes its color tone with the passage of time.

When the stage is changed to the "island stage", an orange sky indicating the morning glow is displayed as the initial back image of the back E. As time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, as time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from black to white and further to orange. Then, after a predetermined period of time has passed, the third pattern display device 81 displays a repeated back image that returns to the back image showing the morning glow.

Next, for each rear image, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 35(a), the rear surface A corresponding to the street stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the positions a to d are stored in the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often played without changing the stage while the initial stage "town stage" is displayed. By keeping all of them resident in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the "forest stage", the back surface C corresponding to the "river stage", and the back surface D corresponding to the "sky stage" are shown in FIG. That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. FIG. Also, image data corresponding to the back side E corresponding to the island stage is stored in the back side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and made resident during the start-up process after the power is turned on.

Here, in order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235 . As such, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the back image that is displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed within the range from position a to position a', and from position a including the initial position to position a Since the image data corresponding to the image during the interval b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, fluctuation starts. When the change of the stage is decided by lottery at the time, the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to immediately display the initial position of the back BD with the third pattern. It can be displayed on the device 81, and can be displayed while scrolling or changing color tone over time. In addition, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of images are stored for back faces B to D, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

After the image of the initial position is displayed, the rear faces B to D are displayed from left to right in the range from position a to position b using the image data resident in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from position a to position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from position b' to position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 while scrolling. As a result, the image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled. After scrolling the range from position a to position b by using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b' to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the pattern display device 81 .

Similarly, after the image of the initial position is displayed on the back face E, the image data of the remaining image is displayed using the image data resident in the back face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range of the image data is set so that the transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 can be completed. As a result, image data corresponding to the remaining image can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the image is being displayed, so that the image is displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. After that, by using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the remaining images can be sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as time elapses.

Image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 for the back images B to E is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the rear image provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see FIG. 33). As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

In addition, in the rear faces B to D, the image data stored in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to images between position b' and position b. image data is stored redundantly. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video image is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b' on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection on the third pattern display device 81. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data in the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area. do. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 33, the description is continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 kinds of main patterns with numbers "0" to "9" as the third patterns are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, after the ball enters the special figure entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, although the first symbol display device 37 starts the variable effect, the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variable performance is not immediately started.

In addition, in the third design area 235d, as the main designs to which the numbers "0" to "9" are not attached, the main design consisting of the rear design such as a wooden box, and the rear design and characters such as planes, wrapping cloths, helmets, etc. The image data corresponding to the main pattern consisting of the accessory pattern imitating the . These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the starting prize is not started even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect was stopped. be done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol with no number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols with no numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character pattern area 235e. By being resident, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, it does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but stores the resident data. By reading out the image data previously resident in the character design area 235e of the video RAM 235, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. This eliminates the need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are pre-resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving an error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers and simultaneously , the image for one frame developed earlier can be read out from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, a storage image data discrimination It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a background image change flag 233w, a background image determination flag 233x, a demonstration display flag 233y, and a fixed display flag 233z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily implement diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main controller 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect, , round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are provided.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. If it is either, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

The opening performance is a performance for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to a special game state from now on and the large opening that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round performance will start from now on. This is an effect for informing the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending effect is a effect for informing the player of the end of the special game state.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect stopped. The third pattern composed of the main patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the persons involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect and the demonstration effect. Further, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern, and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which one frame of image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content of an image (drawing content) for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for specifying an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, translucency, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back face type, which is information for specifying the back face image type. The type of back face is the back face A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "town stage", "forest stage", "river stage", "sky stage", and "island stage"). Information specifying whether to display one of the back images or to display a back image different from the back images A to E is described. In addition, when specifying that a back image different from back faces A to E is to be displayed, the back face type also includes information specifying which back face image is to be displayed.

When the type of back face specifies that one of the back faces A to E is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back face image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back faces A to E as a drawing target, In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A to E, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In the present embodiment, a description will be given of a case in which only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and the image drawing based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81) according to the back surface type. display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. information indicating whether or not the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H", which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 37) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 33), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are identified in the order specified in the display data table, so the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in the conventional pachinko machine, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect images become more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to change the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114 .

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance in the pachinko machine 10 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 for normal use from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 for normal use and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 37). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 37).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

Note that "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, as in the display data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 33), which will be described later, is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 37, when the pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effects images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. flag to indicate This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on varying image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 73). Then, when all the resident object image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S7605 in FIG. 85(b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 75(b)). When the image display flag 233c is ON, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75B) and the simple display setting process (see S6308 in FIG. 75(b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 85(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident object image data not stored in resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 85(b)) is executed to transfer the resident object image data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) is executed to transfer the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to commands and the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands and the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A drawing list (see FIG. 33), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the image drawing instruction for is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 adds an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 38), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 38) describing the content of image rendering instructions to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed (see FIG. 75(b)). ), the pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 84) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list described later. (see FIG. 38), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs H.237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., number of reserved balls pattern 1, number of reserved balls pattern 2, ..., error (pattern) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and overwrites the drawn sprite in the frame buffer to develop it. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, transfers the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 .

Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (FIG. 75(b)). )) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S7207 in FIG. 82). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the presentation at the end of the presentation. perform various operations to

The stored image data determination flag 233i is set to indicate whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by initial setting processing (see S6002 in FIG. 74) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when the power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The storage image data determination flag 233i is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the containment state corresponding to the other sprites to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 86). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 86). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j selects a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") from among two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing buffer flag 233j is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. The information of the specified drawing object buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 87).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is done by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process (see S6306 in FIG. 75B) is performed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not the type of the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is to be changed. If the back image change flag 233w is ON, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is OFF, it means that no change is made. The back image change flag 233w is set to ON when a back image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 81(a)). The back image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 86), and is set to OFF when the back image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 86). As a result, the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command and the presentation mode change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

The back image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag consists of, for example, 1 byte, and each bit is associated with each rear face type. If any bit of the back image determination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface type corresponding to the bit that is on is set as the current back surface type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x is ON, it means that the rear surface A is set. In the rear image determination flag 233x, when a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to ON (FIG. 81(a)). ) of S7002). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back surface type can be easily specified.

The demonstration display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration effect is being performed. If the demonstration display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration is not being performed. The demonstration display flag 233y is set to ON when the demonstration display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (see S7221 in FIG. 82). is set to off when a display data table other than the display data table buffer 233d is set (S6505 in FIG. 77(a), S6705 in FIG. 78(a), S6805 in FIG. 78(b) , S6905 in FIG. 79). With this demonstration display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demonstration effect is currently being performed.

The fixed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the fixed display effect is being executed. Here, the fixed display effect means the effect of stopping display (fixed display) of the stop symbol for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the variation pattern. If the confirmation display flag 233z is ON, it means that the confirmation display effect is being performed, and if it is OFF, it means that the confirmation display effect is not being performed. The fixed display flag 233z is set to ON when the fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (S7214 in FIG. 82). It is set to off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 86(a), S6705 in FIG. 78(a), S6805 in FIG. 78(b), FIG. 79, S6905). With this confirmation display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the confirmation display effect is currently being performed.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 39 to 58. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Furthermore, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the second winning random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (399, 99, 999) are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1, C2 and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, the start winning process accompanying the ball entering the special figure ball opening 64 (start winning) and the ball entering the general electric winning device 640 (start winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for performing display on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is followed by the passage of the ball. A gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. After executing the through gate passage processing, the special electric starting gate winning processing is executed (S108), and then the V entrance passage processing (S109) and the V passage processing (S110) are executed. Details of the special electric starting gate winning process, the V entrance passing process, and the V passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. After executing the V-passing process, the firing control process is executed (S111), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S112), and the timer interrupt process ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is the process of deciding on/off of firing. Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, special symbol variation processing (S104), which is one processing of the timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). The special symbol variation process (FIG. 40, S104) performs various determinations (appropriateness determination) and determination of the special symbols based on the obtained counter values, and performs predetermined control in the determined variation display mode. Control the 1 pattern display device 37 to enable variable display, set various commands for executing the variable display effect of the 3rd pattern and the 4th pattern in the 3rd pattern display device 81, A control is executed to stop display in a display mode showing the determination result). The special symbol variation processing (FIG. 40, S104) will be described below.

In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 40, S104), first, it is determined whether the game is in the middle of a jackpot game (during a jackpot) or in a role game (during a role) (S201). Here, based on the information stored in the game state storage area 203g, it is determined whether the current state is during the jackpot game (during jackpot) or during the role winning game (during winning the role).

In the process of S201, when it is determined that the jackpot or the accessory is in progress (S201: Yes), next, it is determined whether the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is set to ON (S202), and ON (S202: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 83 corresponding to the temporarily stopped special figure is updated (S203), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S202, when it is determined that the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is not set to ON (S202: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Here, the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is set to ON when the accessory per game is executed. In the present embodiment, while the role winning game is being executed, the variable time set in the variable display (special figure variable display) for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is configured not to be updated (subtracted). During that period, the first symbol display device 83 is configured to display a temporary stop display mode for indicating that the variable display of the special symbols is temporarily stopped.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player that the variable display of the special symbol that has been in progress along with the start of the accessory winning game is temporarily stopped. It is possible to suppress the distrust given to the player that the special pattern variation of the has disappeared. In addition, as a display mode for indicating that the variable display of special symbols is temporarily stopped, for example, a display mode for indicating that normal variable display is in progress (for example, lighting at intervals of 0.2 seconds, It may be the same display mode as the flashing display mode that repeats turning off), or a display mode with a slower blinking interval than the display mode for indicating that the variable display is in progress (for example, repeatedly turning on and off at 0.5 second intervals) blinking display mode) may be used. Furthermore, when the display mode of the first pattern display device 83 is configured to be able to display a plurality of colors, a blinking display mode using a dedicated color that can be displayed only during temporary stop is used. Also good.

On the other hand, in the process of S201, when it is determined that the present is not during the jackpot or during the accession (S201: No), the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 203n is greater than 0, that is, the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S204). When it is determined that the special symbol is being varied and displayed (the value of the special symbol variation time counter 203n is greater than 0) (S204: Yes), a special symbol variation process is executed (S206).

In this special symbol variation executing process (S206), a process for varying (updating) the variation display mode of the special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 83 during the period when the special symbol is varying is executed. be done. This special symbol variation in-execution process (S206) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Then, when the processing of S206 is finished, next, it is determined whether the value of the special symbol variation time counter 203n updated in the special symbol variation executing processing (S206) is 0 (S207), and the processing of S207 When it is determined that the special figure variation time counter 203n is 0 (S207: Yes), special symbol variation stop processing is executed (S208), and then this processing is terminated.

In the special symbol variation stop process (S208), when the variation time defined for the special symbol being displayed in variation has passed, the process of stopping the variation display with the symbol indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is executed. The details of this special symbol variation stop process (S208) will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation time counter 203n is not 0 in the process of S207 (S207: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation time counter 203n is not greater than 0 (is 0) in the process of S204 (S204: No), that is, when it is determined that the present is not special figure fluctuation, Next, a special symbol variation start process is executed (S205). In this special symbol variation start process (S205), a process for executing a new lottery (variation) of special symbols is performed, and it is determined whether or not the new lottery (variation) can be executed. If it is possible to execute a new lottery (variation), a process of conducting a new lottery (variation) is executed. This special symbol variation start process (S205) will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43. FIG. After executing the special symbol variation start process (S205), this process is terminated.

As described above with reference to FIG. 40, in the present embodiment, in the configuration capable of executing the lottery (variation) of the special symbols, the variation processing (S204 to S208) regarding the special symbols is performed within one special symbol variation processing. configured to run Therefore, when it becomes possible to execute a new lottery (change) for the special symbol, the change processing can be executed without delay, and a smooth game can be provided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the special symbol variation start process (S205), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 40, S104), will be described. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation start process (S205).

In the special symbol variation start process (S205 in FIG. 41), first, the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is acquired (S301), and the acquired value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0. It is determined whether it is larger (S302). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S302: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S302: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (S303).

Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the number of reserved balls after subtraction is set (S304), and the data stored in the reserved areas 1 to 4 of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are sequentially transferred to the execution area side. A shift process is performed (S305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area 1→execution area, reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, and so on.

Next, a special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S306). Details of this special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) will be described later with reference to FIG. , based on the game state that has been set, to determine whether or not a big win.

Next, a special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S307). The special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) will be described later in detail, but based on the result of the determination based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown), the variation pattern is selected. is selected based on each counter value.

After executing the processing of S307, it is then determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S308). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S308: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S308: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 (S309). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 1 (S309: No), the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted by 1 (S310), and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 (S309: Yes), the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON (S311), and then this process ends.

That is, in the present embodiment, during the time saving state, the process for updating the time saving number of times at the timing of starting the fluctuation of the special symbol is executed, and if the special symbol fluctuation of this time is the final fluctuation in the time saving state, the time number is configured to execute the process of setting the time saving end flag 203j to ON without updating . Although the details will be described later, the setting status of the time saving end flag 203j is referred to when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, and when the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the time saving counter 203h It is configured to set the value to 0 and terminate the time saving state. And, when the role winning game is executed by the special electric game during the fluctuation of the special symbol and the V jackpot game is started, the process of setting the time saving end flag 203j to off is executed.

By configuring in this way, for example, when the special symbol variation is interrupted based on the execution of the V jackpot game during the final variation of the special symbol in the time saving state, the interruption is performed after the jackpot game is finished. The special symbol variation corresponding to the remaining period of the special symbol variation that has been held is restarted, but when the special symbol variation after the restart is stopped and displayed, the time saving end flag 203j is set to off, The time-saving state never ends. Further, when the special symbol variation is restarted, the special symbol variation start process (see S205 in FIG. 41) is not executed, so the value of the time saving counter 203h is not decremented.

As a result, when a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed during the time saving state, the interrupted special symbol variation is set to the number of times of time saving (4 times) corresponding to the jackpot type (jackpot C) corresponding to the jackpot game. The period obtained by adding the remaining period of is set as the short period of time when the short working hours state is set. Therefore, the special game is executed during the normal state, and the special electric game is executed during the time reduction state than the duration of the time reduction state set when the special symbol lottery is won, and the ball is sent to the V winning opening 165. To make it easier to lengthen the continuation period of a time-saving state advantageous to a player by adding the remaining period of the interrupted special pattern variation when a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed by winning a prize. can be done.

That is, when the time saving state is set again based on the game in the time saving state, the duration of the time saving state to be set is longer than when the time saving state is set based on the game in the normal state. As a result, the player can be motivated to play the game in anticipation of setting a more advantageous game state.

Furthermore, in the case of using a configuration for executing a process for updating the number of times of time saving and a process for terminating the time saving state at the timing of starting the fluctuation of the special symbol, when the special symbol fluctuation is restarted, the special symbol fluctuation Since the start process (see S205 in FIG. 41) is not executed, the value of the time saving counter 203h is not subtracted, but since the game state during the fluctuation period of the last special symbol fluctuation in the time saving state becomes the normal state, There is a problem that it is not possible to provide the maximum amount of games during the time-saving state to the player.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the processing for updating the number of times of time saving and the processing for ending the time saving state are configured to be executable at different timings. Specifically, it is configured to execute processing for updating the number of times of working hours at the timing of starting fluctuation of special symbols, and to execute processing for terminating the state of working hours at the timing of stopping fluctuation of special symbols. . By configuring in this way, the time saving state can be set as a game state during the fluctuation period of the last special symbol fluctuation in the time saving state without updating the number of times of working time saving when restarting the special symbol fluctuation. , it is possible to provide the maximum amount of games during the time-saving state to the player.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured to execute a process for ending the time saving state at the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol, but not limited to this, for example, the next special symbol fluctuation start condition is established, the period until the next special symbol variation lottery is executed, for example, in the special symbol variation start process (see S205 in FIG. 41), the process of S305 is performed, and the process of S306 is performed. You may comprise so that the process for ending a time saving state may be performed at the timing before being done.

Further, although detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, the number of remaining time reductions during the time reduction state is managed by the audio lamp control device 113 side. That is, based on the information indicating the game state included in the state command set at the end of the jackpot game (information indicating that the time saving state is set, information indicating the number of time saving times), the time saving set this time State information is stored, and based on receiving a special symbol variation pattern command indicating that a special symbol variation is started, by updating the number of remaining time reduction, the game of the time reduction state on the voice lamp control device 113 side. Configured to manage the situation.

By configuring in this way, in the control process of the main controller 110, a command for indicating the remaining time reduction number of times, a command for indicating the final variation of the time reduction state (that the time reduction end flag 203j is set to ON) , the sound lamp control device 113 manages the game situation in the time saving state, and can set an effect mode corresponding to the current game situation. Therefore, control processing in main controller 110 can be simplified.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), which is one process of the special symbol variation start process (S205 in FIG. 41), will be described. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing this special symbol jackpot determination process (S306).

In the special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 42), first, each counter value stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S401). Then, based on the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 23(b)), it is determined whether or not the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S401 matches the jackpot determination value, and the lottery is performed. A result (determination result) is acquired (S402).

When the process of S402 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the lottery result of this time is a big win (S403), and if it is determined to be a big win (S403: Yes), a big win is shown to indicate a special symbol big win. The flag 203i is set to ON (S404). In this embodiment, the jackpot flag 203i is configured to be able to store (set) information indicating whether or not the jackpot has been won.

Then, the lottery result of the special design is set to a big win (S405), and based on the value of the acquired winning type counter C2, the big winning design of the special design to be displayed on the first design display device 37 is set (S406). End the process. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S403 that the result of the lottery this time is not a big hit (S403: No), the special symbol is set in the first symbol display device 37 (S407), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which is one process of the special symbol variation start process (S205 of FIG. 41), will be described. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307).

In the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 43), first, in the special symbol big hit determination process (S306 in FIG. 42), whether or not the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, that is, the special symbol big hit is set. It is determined whether or not it is set (S501). Here, whether or not the big win is determined is determined by whether or not the big win flag 203i is turned on for the special symbols. This jackpot flag 203i is set to ON in the processing of S404 in the above-described special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 42).

In the process of S501, when it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is set (S501: Yes), the jackpot type selection table 202c (see FIG. 24) and the acquired first hit type counter C2 The jackpot type is determined based on the value (S502). Next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special symbol execution area is acquired (S503), and the current game state (normal state, latent state, probability variable) corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203g state) is read (S504).

Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S503 and the variation pattern selection table 202d read in the process of S504 (S505), and based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S505 , to set the special figure variation pattern command (S506). The special figure variation pattern command set here includes the lottery result of the special symbol lottery, information indicating the variation time of the special symbol, and the main processing of the main controller 110 (Fig. 55) External output processing ( (See S1801 in FIG. 55) to output to the audio lamp control device 113. FIG.

Next, a special symbol stop type command indicating a special symbol stop symbol is set (S507), the first symbol display device 37 sets the special symbol variation start (S508), and the variation time of the selected variation pattern is indicated. The value is set to the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 203n (S509), and this process is terminated. The special symbol stop type command set in the process of S507 includes information indicating the type of stop symbol that indicates the result of this special symbol variation, that is, the rough type such as reach out or non-reach out. It is output to the sound lamp controller 113 in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) of the main process (FIG. 55) of the main controller 110. FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S501, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is out (that is, the jackpot flag 203i for the special symbol is off) (S501: No), the process of S502 is skipped and S503 is skipped. to process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the special symbol variation executing process (S206), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 of FIG. 40), will be described. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation executing process (S206). In this special symbol variation in-execution process (S206), a process for updating the variation time of the special symbol variation being performed is executed.

In the special symbol variation executing process (S206), first, it is determined whether the special symbol temporary stop flag 203m is set to ON (S701).

In the process of S701, if it is determined that the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is set to ON (S701: Yes), the special figure fluctuation restart command is set (S702), and the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is turned off Set (S703), subtract 1 from the value of the special symbol fluctuation time counter 203n (S704), update the display of the special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 (S705), and finish this process.

In this embodiment, within the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 40) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39) executed every 2 milliseconds, the special symbol variation in-execution process (FIG. 44 (see S206 of )), and the value of the special figure variation time counter 203n is updated (1 subtraction) within the special symbol variation executing process (see S205 of FIG. 44) there is Therefore, for example, when a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the special symbol, "15000" is set as the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 203n, and the value is subtracted by 1 every 2 milliseconds. It is configured as follows.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is not set to ON in the process of S701 (S701: No), the processes of S702 and S703 are skipped and the process proceeds to S704.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the special symbol variation stop process (S208), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 40), will be described. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation stop processing (S208). This special symbol variation stop processing (S208) is executed when it is determined that the current value of the special symbol variation time counter 203n is "0", that is, when the special symbol (special symbol) variation time has elapsed. It is a process that

When the special symbol variation stop process (S208 in FIG. 45) is executed, it is first determined whether the big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S801). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S801: Yes), next, the jackpot scenario won in this special symbol variation is set (S806), and the jackpot flag 202i and the time-saving counter 203h are set. The value is reset (S807), the information indicating that the current game state is during the jackpot (during jackpot game) is stored in the game state storage area 203g (S808), and the process proceeds to S809. The game state storage area 203g is configured to be able to store the game state (normal state, time saving state) related to the lottery game and the game state related to the winning game, and by executing the process of S808, the jackpot is won. A game state (normal state, time-saving state) relating to the lottery game at the selected timing and a game state indicating that the jackpot is in progress are stored.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine the game state set at the timing of winning the big win at the end of the big win game.

On the other hand, in the process of S801, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203i is set to OFF, that is, if the result of this special symbol lottery is out (S801: No), then the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON (S802). If it is determined that the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON (S802: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the special symbol variation that is stopped this time is the final variation of the time saving state, the time saving counter 203h is reset to 0 (S803), the time saving end flag 203j is set to OFF (S804), information indicating that the current game state is the normal state is stored in the game state storage area 203g (S805), The process proceeds to S809. In the processing of S802, when it is determined that the time saving end flag 203j is set to OFF (S802: No), the processing of S803 to S805 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S809.

In the process of S809, a special symbol confirmation command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to fix and stop the special symbol is set (S809), and the special symbols that are variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 are displayed. is executed (S810), and the process ends.

Thus, in the special symbol variation stop process (S208), the process (S809, S810) of stopping the variation display with the symbol indicating the special symbol lottery (lottery game) result is executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the ball wins the special electric activation port 643 and the accessory per game is executed, the special symbol variation being executed is interrupted, but it is not limited to this, For example, based on the result of the predetermined determination executed when the ball wins the special electric activation opening 643, instead of interrupting the special symbol variation being executed, it may be configured to be discarded. By configuring in this way, it is possible to appear when the special symbol variation indicating the duration of the time saving state is interrupted and when it is discarded, so the duration of the time saving state is suddenly subtracted ( It is possible to end the game, and it is possible to execute an effect with a sense of tension for the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). The starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 46) determines whether the ball has entered the special figure entrance 64 (start winning), and if it has started winning, the upper limit number of reservations (to the special figure entrance 64 Up to 4), each obtained counter value is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

Further, when each counter value acquired based on the reserved ball is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, based on each counter value stored in each special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, A process (so-called look-ahead process) is executed to predict the result of determination of suitability, the variation pattern to be selected, etc. in advance. The starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 46) will be described below.

In the starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 46), first, it is determined whether or not the ball enters (starting winning) into the special figure entrance 64 which is the starting opening (S901). Here, the entry of the ball to the ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the special figure entrance 64 is detected. When it is determined that the ball entered the special symbol entrance 64 (there was a starting prize) (S901: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is acquired (S902), It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S903).

In other words, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls for the special figure entrance 64 at the present time is less than four, which is the upper limit value (that is, whether the number of reserved balls is stored up to the upper limit value). When it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S903: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (904), and the sound lamp control device 113 Then, set a reservation ball number command for notifying the reservation number of the starting port (lottery right reservation number of special symbols) (S905).

Then, each value of various counter values (first hit random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, variation type counter CS1) is read out (acquired) from the counter buffer, and the special symbol holding ball execution area of RAM 203 corresponds. Each ball is reserved (stored) in the storage area for the number of balls to be held (S906).

Next, prefetch processing is executed (S907), and then this processing ends. This look-ahead processing (S907) will be described later with reference to FIG. is executed. In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured to execute a process for determining the result of determination, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, etc. based on each counter value newly stored, but this is not the only option. without, for example, when there is a new start winning, for all the reservation memory stored (stored) in the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a, the winning judgment result, the determined variation pattern, the stop type It may be configured so as to execute a process of determining such as.

In addition, in this embodiment, when new information (winning information) is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, that is, when the special symbol lottery right is newly acquired, the special symbol lottery right (winning prize information ) is determined in advance, but without being limited to this, for example, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, or according to the lottery result of the normal design, the lottery right (winning information) of the special design may be configured to determine the contents of the in advance.

Also, when it is determined that the ball has not entered the special figure entrance 64 in the processing of S901 (S901: No), or in the processing of S903, the number of reservations for the special figure entrance 64 at the present time is the upper limit If it is determined to be a value (S903: No), the process of adding the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is skipped, and this process ends.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is added, the prefetching process (S907) based on the information (winning information) on the added winning is executed. However, without being limited to this, for example, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is the upper limit number (4) in the process of S903 (S903: No), that is, It may be configured so that the prefetching process (S907) can be executed when the ball is entered into the special symbol entrance 64 while the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has reached the upper limit. As a result, even in a state where the number of reserved balls of special symbols has reached the upper limit, the player can continue to play the game in order to execute the look-ahead process. In addition, since added value can be given when a ball is entered into the special symbol entrance 64 in a state where the number of reserved balls of special symbols has reached the upper limit, the number of reserved balls of special symbols is the upper limit. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the willingness to play when the ball enters the special figure ball entrance 64 in the state of reaching .

Next, referring to FIG. 47, the look-ahead process (S907), which is one process of the starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 46), will be described. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing this prefetching process (S907).

In the look-ahead process (S907 in FIG. 47), first, various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the special symbol reservation storage area 203a, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the variation type counter Each value of CS1 is read (S1001). Then, the read data is stored in the area with the lowest winning order among the vacant storage areas of the prefetch pending storage area (S1002).

Next, based on each counter value newly stored in the prefetching reservation storage area, the result of determination is determined. In addition, here, both the right/wrong determination when the special symbol is in a low probability state and the right/wrong determination when the special symbol is in a high probability state are discriminated. This is based on the timing when new pending memory is generated (the timing when new pending (winning information) is stored in the special symbol pending storage area 203a) and the winning information newly reserved this time. It is difficult to predict the game state (probability state of special symbols) set at the timing of execution of the jackpot determination based on the winning information newly reserved this time, because a time lag occurs between the timing of is.

Next, it is determined whether or not the winning determination result is a jackpot (S1003). When it is determined that the determination result is a big win (S1003: Yes), a winning command indicating the conditions for winning the big win (game state set at the time of lottery) and the type of big win when winning is set (S1004). , and then terminate this process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the determination result in the process of S1003 is not a big hit (S1003: No), a prize winning command indicating failure is set (S1005), and then this process ends.

Here, the winning command set in the process of S1004 or S1005 includes the above-described information for indicating the winning/failure determination result (information that has a different meaning based on the winning/failure determination result), as common information of S1001. The setting includes information for indicating the values of various counter values read out by the process. Then, the winning command set in this process is output to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S1801) executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 55).

On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when the winning command is received, the display mode of the pending ball is varied based on various information included in the winning command (for example, the color of the pending ball is changed to a color different from usual). It is possible to execute an effect (pre-reading effect) in which a notice pattern or the like is displayed before the start of the fluctuation to suggest the result of the determination to the player.

In addition, in the present embodiment, since there is only one probability state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol), the information to be set in the winning command (results of winning or not determination) can be set regardless of the game state. , For example, in a gaming machine having a plurality of probability states of special symbols (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of special symbols), the determination result in the case of the high probability state of special symbols and the low probability of special symbols It may be configured to determine the success or failure determination result in the case of the state and set the winning command based on the result of each determination, or even if the special symbol is in a high probability state or a low probability state A judgment value (value of the first winning random number counter C1) for judging a big win may be defined, and a winning command indicating a special symbol big win may be set only when the judgment value is read.

By configuring in this way, only when it is determined in advance that it is a specific jackpot to the audio lamp control device 113 side, a winning command indicating a jackpot is output, so a special symbol that does not execute a look-ahead effect It is possible to give a feeling of expectation of winning a jackpot against the fluctuation.

Further, the game state when the special symbol lottery is performed based on the reservation memory (winning information) stored (memorized) in the special symbol reservation storage area 203a is accurately discriminated, and the win/loss determination is made based on the game state. can be configured to run In this case, instead of changing the selection of the variation pattern depending on the number of retained balls, it is possible to determine by selecting a constant variation pattern regardless of the number of retained balls at the start of variation. When the look-ahead is executed, the game state at the time of start of variation can be determined by determining the variation order until the variation of the retained ball starts based on the information retained and stored.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a new reservation memory (winning information) is stored (stored) in the special symbol reservation storage area 203a, the prefetching process based on the winning information is executed, and in the prefetching process Although a configuration that predicts the determination in advance is used, without being limited to this, in the pre-reading process of the main control device 110, the winning information (reserved memory) newly stored (stored) in the special symbol reserved storage area 203a Information indicating the content (each counter value) may be set as a prize winning command, and the winning judgment result may be predicted based on the information included in the prize winning command received by the audio lamp control device 113 side.

With this configuration, the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced. In addition, on the audio lamp control device 113 side, a process for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect is executed, and when it is determined to execute the look-ahead effect, the information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110 It is preferable to configure it so as to perform analysis (prediction of acceptance/rejection determination result). As a result, when the look-ahead performance is not performed, the specific look-ahead processing (prediction of the success/failure determination result) is not performed, so that the Pachinko machine 10 can be prevented from performing useless control. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from illegally obtaining the result of the prefetching process executed without a title.

Next, referring to FIG. 48, the normal symbol variation process (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol), the opening time of the electric accessory 640a, and the like.

In this normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 48), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting. (S1101). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a is performed after the second symbol display device 83 displays the winning (after the winning symbol is stopped and displayed). Until the middle (until the winning game is completed) is included. When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of winning (S1101: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hitting (S1101: No), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being variably displayed (S1102). When it is determined that the normal symbol variation is not being displayed, that is, it is in a state where a new normal symbol variation (lottery) can be executed (S1102: No), next, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d A value (M) is obtained (S1103), and it is determined whether the value is greater than 0 (S1104).

When it is determined in the process of S1104 that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S1104: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S1104: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S1105). That is, when it is determined that the condition for executing a new normal symbol variation (that winning information for use in the normal symbol variation is retained and stored) is satisfied in the processing of S1104, the retained and stored 1 is subtracted from the value of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203d in order to execute the normal design variation using the winning information.

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S1106). In the process of S1106, the data stored in the normal design reservation 1 to the normal design reservation 4 of the normal design reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of normal symbol reservation 1→execution area. After shifting the data, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S1107).

Next, it is determined whether or not the time saving counter 203h is ON, that is, whether or not the current state is the normal pattern high probability state (S1108), and when it is determined that the time saving counter 203h is set to ON. (S1108: Yes), based on the hit determination value of the second hit random number table 202b for high probability (see FIG. 23 (c)) to acquire the winning determination result (lottery result), the process proceeds to S1111. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving counter 203h is off (S1108: No), the second hit random number table 202b for low probability (see FIG. 23 (c)) based on the hit determination value, the success or failure determination result is obtained (S1110), and the process proceeds to S1111.

In the process of S1111, it is determined whether the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is a hit (S1111), and if it is determined to be a hit (S1111: Yes), the display mode of "○" at the time of the hit is displayed. The display mode is set (S1112), and the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter is used to determine the normal pattern fluctuation time based on the normal pattern fluctuation pattern (S1114). On the other hand, in the process of S1111, if it is determined that the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is not a win (no) (S1111: No), the display mode of "x" is set as the display mode when losing (S1113), and proceeds to the processing of S1114 described above.

As described above, in this embodiment, regardless of the set game state, the variable time is always set to 3 seconds. By configuring in this way, at the timing when the game state is switched, specifically, from the normal state (normal pattern low probability state) in which a long variation time is easily set, a short variation time is easily set Short time. At the timing of the end of the jackpot game when the game state switches to the state (high probability state of the normal pattern), the normal pattern fluctuation of the long fluctuation time is executed, and the time saving state is set. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the normal symbol lottery is not executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured so that a special electric game (V rush) aiming for a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed with a normal symbol lottery during the time saving state (V rush) ) is configured so that the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 also displays an effect based on the normal symbol lottery. In this way, when performing the production based on the normal symbol lottery (fluctuation), the amount of production data can be reduced by unifying the fluctuation time.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a normal game is executed during the normal state, and even if the ball wins the general electric winning device 640, to the special electric activation port 643 that triggers the execution of the accessory per game And it is configured to make it difficult for the ball to win. Therefore, even if it is configured so that only the same variation time (3 seconds) is set, it is possible to eliminate the merit of performing the game by measuring the execution timing of the game per normal pattern.

In addition, regarding the setting method of the fluctuation time of the normal pattern, it is not limited to the configuration of this embodiment. The variation time may be changed according to the acquired predetermined value. For example, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol variation is set to the normal symbol probability state (high probability state, low probability state ) and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of normal pattern reserved balls). Further, it may be configured such that the easiness of the ball entering the general electric prize winning device 640 is different depending on the fluctuation time of the set normal symbol.

In this way, by configuring so as to vary the state of entry of the ball into the general electrical winning device 640 according to the length of the set normal symbol variation time, the ball entering the general electrical winning device 640 can be changed. Since the easiness of ball entry can be easily changed according to the game state, various game characteristics can be created.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1102, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not displayed in a variable manner (S1102: No), the variation time of the normal symbol being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S1115), and if it is determined that the variation time has not passed (S1115: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has passed in the process of S1115 (S1115: Yes), next, stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S1116). In the process of S1116, when the normal symbol lottery of this time is a win, the second symbol display device 83 is set to stop display (illuminate display) the "O" symbol. On the other hand, when the lottery for the normal symbol is lost, the second symbol display device 83 stops displaying (lights up) the "x" symbol. That is, a setting is made to stop and display the display mode set in the processing of S1112 or S1113 described above.

When the stop display is set by the process of S1116, the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed as the second symbol in the display mode set by the process of S1112 or the process of S1113. The symbol display device 83 stops displaying (lighting display).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a hit (S1117). When it is determined that the current normal symbol lottery result is a hit (S1117: Yes), a process for setting the opening/closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the crying normal symbol is not a win (no) (S1117: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the opening/closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a in this embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol set at the timing of determining whether the normal symbol is correct (timing of processing S1108 to S1111) Probability of normal symbols set at the timing (timing determined that the fluctuation time has passed in the process of S1115) to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a by executing the judgment of normal symbols. It is configured to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a based on the state (high probability state, low probability state).

That is, in the present embodiment, the variation processing (lottery processing) for normal symbols and the variation processing (lottery processing) for special symbols are configured to be executed independently, and further, the variation processing for special symbols ( Lottery processing) based on the result of normal design probability state (high probability state, low probability state) is configured to vary. Therefore, depending on the result of the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding the special symbols that is executed in parallel during the period when the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding the normal symbols is performed, the normal symbols are usually at the timing of judging whether the symbols is set, and at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a, there is a case where the normal symbol low probability state is set.

In such a situation, for example, based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol that is set at the timing of determining whether the normal symbol is appropriate, the opening control mode (open pattern) is set, the electric accessory 640a is long open in a state where the normal symbol low probability state is set (an open pattern executed when the normal symbol high probability state is set ) was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is determined, and based on the determination result, the electric role It is configured to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the object 640a. Thereby, the electric accessory 640a can be opened in an opening pattern according to the set game state.

In the process of S1117, if it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a win (S1117: Yes), then the probability state of the current normal symbol (high probability state, low probability state) is determined. Then, it is determined whether the time saving counter 203h is on (S1118), and if it is determined that the time saving counter 203h is not on (is off), that is, the current state is a normal symbol low probability state (S1118: No), set the scenario operation per normal normal map (S1119).

On the other hand, in the processing of S1118, if it is determined that the time reduction counter 203h is set to ON (S1118: Yes), scenario operation per normal figure for time reduction is set (S1120).

Next, based on the scenario set in the process of S1119 or S1120, the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set (S1121), and this process ends.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the normal design propriety determination is executed based on the probability state of the normal design at the timing of performing the normal design propriety determination, and the opening control mode of the electric accessory 640a to be moved in the normal design winning game. Although it is configured to set the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of setting (opening pattern), it is not limited to this, for example, the normal symbol is determined. A high-probability state of normal symbols is set at the timing, and a high-probability state of normal symbols is also set at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a to be moved in the winning game of the normal symbols. The electric accessory 640a may be configured to open for a long time only when the electric accessory 640a is open. It may be configured to set

Also, although detailed description is omitted, various information (normal design lottery results, normal design fluctuation fluctuation time, normal design per scenario, etc.) determined in the normal design fluctuation process (see S106 in FIG. 48) , commands indicating the contents of various information are set, and output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output processing (see S1801 in FIG. 55) of the main processing (FIG. 55) of the main control device 110. FIG.

Next, referring to FIG. 49, through gate passing processing (S107) executed in the first embodiment is executed. This process is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, and if the ball has passed, the second hit. This is a process for acquiring the value indicated by the random number counter C4 and storing it in the execution area.

In the through gate passing process (S107 in FIG. 49), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S1201). Here, the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S1201: Yes), then the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S1202), and then , determines whether the value (M) of the acquired normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 1 (whether the normal symbol reserved ball number has reached the upper limit) (S1203).

In the process of S1203, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 1 (it is the upper limit of 1) (S1203: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not greater than 1 (is 0) (S1203: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to 1. is added (S1204), the normal pattern reserved ball number command (command for indicating the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d) is set (S1205), and the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is set to the normal symbol Stores in the reserved ball storage area 203b (S1206), and terminates this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the special electric starting prize winning process (S108) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing the special electric starter winning process (S108) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39). The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. It is constructed so as to execute a role-winning game that is opened by a predetermined variable pattern. In this special electric start opening winning process (S108), various processes are executed when a ball wins the special electric starting opening 643. FIG.

When the special electric starting opening winning process (S108) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special electric starting winning, that is, the game ball has won the special electric operating opening 643 (S1301). In the process of S1301, it is determined whether or not a detection signal indicating that a ball has been detected is output from a detection switch (not shown) capable of detecting a ball that has won the special electric activation port 643. In the process of S1301, when it is determined that the game ball has not won the special electric activation opening 643 (S1301: No), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the special electric operation port 643 (S1301: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current normal symbol winning game is in progress (S1302). If it is determined that the game is not currently in the normal pattern winning game (S1302: No), since the ball cannot enter the special electric operation opening 643, an error command is set (S1309), and then this processing is performed. exit. By performing the processing of S1309, a state in which the game ball has entered the special electric operation opening 643 outside the game period per normal pattern, that is, when a game is performed to illegally enter the game ball in the special electric operation opening 643, or It is possible to quickly notify the outside when a malfunction occurs in a member attached to the special electric operation port 643 (for example, the electric accessory 640a, the second movable valve 642).

In the process of S1302, when it is determined that the normal symbol winning game is currently in progress (S1302: Yes), next, it is determined whether the special electric current is in operation (accessory winning game in progress) (S1303). If it is determined that the special electric current is currently in operation (playing a role game) (S1303: Yes), it is in a state where a new role game cannot be executed, so this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special electric current is not in operation (playing per character) (S1303: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the special symbols are currently changing (S1304). If it is determined that the current special symbol is fluctuating (S1304: Yes), the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is set to ON (S1305), the special figure temporary stop command is set (S1306), and the accessory The winning flag 203k is set to ON (S1307), and the process proceeds to S1308.

That is, in the process of S1304, when it is determined that the special symbol is currently fluctuating, the processes of S1305 and S1306 are executed to interrupt the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation that is being executed. As a result, the special symbol variation being executed is interrupted when the accessory winning game is executed. Further, the temporary stop command set in the process of S1307 is output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) of the main process (FIG. 55) of the main controller 110.

On the other hand, in the process of S1304, when it is determined that the special symbol is not currently changing (S1304: No), the processes of S1305 and S1306 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1307. In the process of S1308, a special electric operation command is set (S1308), and then this process ends.

As described above, the special electric start opening prize processing (S108) includes, when a ball has won the special electric operation opening 643, whether or not the prize is normally won, and based on the prize. A determination processing means for determining whether or not a new role winning game can be executed, and processing for special symbol variation (processing to interrupt the special symbol variation being executed, new special symbol variation not being executed during the role winning game and a means for executing a winning game.

Next, the V entrance passage process (S109) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing the V entrance passing process (S109) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39).

In the V entrance passage processing (S109), it is first determined whether the storage sensor 65s (see FIG. 6) is on (S1401). finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the storage sensor 65s is ON (S1401: Yes), next, it is determined whether the V winning opening is open, that is, whether the winning game is in progress (S1402). In the process of S1402, when it is determined that the V winning opening is open (during the game per accessory) (S1402: Yes), the V entrance pass command is set (S1403), and the process ends. If it is not during the V winning opening opening period (S1402: No), it means that the game ball has entered the V winning device 65 even though the winning game is not in progress, so an error command is set (S1404). ), the process ends.

The V entrance passage command set in the process of S1403 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1801) of the main process (see FIG. 55). , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V entrance passage command, it counts the number of game balls that have passed through the V entrance, and transmits a command for executing an effect based on the V entrance passage to the display control device 114 . As a result, it is possible to execute an effect during the winning game based on the entry of the ball into the V winning device 65 .

Next, the V passing process (S110) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing the V passing process (S110) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39).

When the V passing process (S110) is executed, first, it is determined whether there is V passing, that is, whether a game ball has entered the V winning opening 165 (S1501), and the game ball has entered the V winning opening 165. If it is determined that there is no (S1501: No), this processing ends. When it is determined that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 165 (S1501: Yes), it is then determined whether the current V valid period is in effect (S1502). In the processing of S1502, it is determined that the period in which the action scenario related to the accessory winning game is set is within the V valid period, and in other cases, it is determined that it is not during the V valid period.

In the process of S1502, when it is determined that it is during the V valid period (S1502: Yes), next, it is determined whether or not the character winning game is currently in progress (S1503). (S1503: Yes), the V passing time jackpot type value corresponding to the game per this time is acquired (S1504), the V flag corresponding to the jackpot type is set to ON (S1505), and the value of the time saving counter 203h is changed. 0 is set (S1506), and the process proceeds to S1507.

That is, in the processing of S1504 to S1506, the processing for executing the jackpot game is executed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the V winning port 165 during the accessory winning game. On the other hand, in the process of S1503, if it is determined that the role winning game is not in progress (S1503: No), since there is no need to perform a process for newly executing the jackpot game, the processes of S1504 to S1506 are skipped. Then, the process proceeds to S1507.

In the process of S1507, a V pass command is set (S1507), and this process ends. The V passage command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 113 in the same manner as other commands set in the control processing of the main controller 110 . When the voice ramp control device 113 receives the V pass command, for example, when the V pass command is received during the role winning game, the effect during the V rush executed during the role winning game is successful, and the role Following the hitting game, an effect is executed to indicate that the big winning game is to be executed. Further, when the V passing command is received during the jackpot game, the same performance as when the V passing command is received during the role winning game is executed.

On the other hand, if the V pass command is not received at a predetermined timing during the jackpot game, a disappointing performance is executed to indicate that the V challenge has failed, and the V pass command is issued at a predetermined timing during the jackpot game. When it is not received, the resurrection performance from the disappointing performance is executed, and the player is notified that the jackpot game will be continuously executed.

In this embodiment, only the command (V passing command) for indicating that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 165 is set. It may be configured to set a command (for example, V non-passing command) to indicate that. In this case, for example, in the present embodiment, the game ball that can enter the V winning port 165 is only the game ball (for example, one) retained by the retention valve 66a. A number discriminating means for discriminating the presence or absence (number) of game balls in the game ball and a detecting means for detecting passage of the game balls to the hemorrhoid 2-out height 163b are provided, and the number of game balls discriminated by the number discriminating means is provided. is detected by the detecting means, the above-described V non-passing command may be set. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 can execute an appropriate effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, by using the above-described configuration, it is possible to quickly determine that the game balls are jammed in the V winning device 65 .

On the other hand, in the process of S1502, if it is determined that the V valid period is not currently in effect (S1502: No), an error command is set (S1508), and this process ends. By performing the processing of S1508, a state in which the game ball enters the V winning hole 165 outside the V valid period, that is, when a game is illegally entered into the V winning hole 165 by the game ball, or when the V winning It is possible to quickly notify the outside of a case where a member attached to the port 165 (for example, the V opening/closing door 65a, the storage valve 66a, the first movable valve 66b) is malfunctioning.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 26(b), the operation scenario is defined so that the timing at which the ball can enter the V winning port 165 in the role winning game is the ending period of the role winning game. Therefore, the processing of S1506 to S1508 is configured to be executed in the V passage processing (S110), that is, to be executed at the timing when the ball enters the V winning opening 165. Without limitation, for example, if the operation scenario of the role winning game is defined so that the ball can always enter the V winning opening 165 during the role winning game, then in the V passing process (S110) , S1505 only, and S1506 to S1508 are performed when the V flag is set to ON in the control process for winning a character (see S1805 in FIG. 58). Good to configure. As a result, even if the ball enters the V winning port 165 immediately after the performance of the role winning game, the time saving state can be continued until the big winning game is started, giving the player a sense of incompatibility. You can play the game without worrying about it.

Next, referring to FIG. 53, NMI interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as power-off occurrence information setting (S1601), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing this startup process.

This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 54), first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1701). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S1702). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1703).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 10) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1704), and if it is turned on (S1704: Yes), the process proceeds to S1712. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1704: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1705), and if not stored (S1705: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to S1712.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1705: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1706). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power-off, the backed-up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203 . Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1712, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1712). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 (S1713, S1714).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 is initialized (S1713, S1714).

Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S1713, S1714) is executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S1713, S1714), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1713), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1714). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1710.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1704: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S1705: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S1707: Yes), while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is retained, the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S1708). Next, the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) transmits a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning to the game state at the time of drive power interruption (S1709), and the process proceeds to S1710. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1710). After that, the interrupt is permitted (S1711), and the operation based on the first movable valve operation scenario is set (S1715). Then, the process shifts to the main process, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing this main process. This main process is roughly divided into a counter update process and a power-off process.

In the main process (see FIG. 55), first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 is transmitted to each control on the sub side. External output processing for transmission to the device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1801). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the payout control device 111 receives a prize corresponding to the number of winning balls. Send a sphere command. In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 40) and the start winning process (see FIG. 46). Furthermore, by this external output processing (S1801 in FIG. 55), various commands set by various processing of the main control device 110 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and various commands displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Information for setting effects (variation effects, decorative effects, etc.). Also, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 56) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Further, various commands set in other control processing are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1802). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1803), and then in the case of a special symbol jackpot state, the voice lamp control device 113 A command setting for executing a jackpot effect and a jackpot control process for opening the specific prize winning opening (large open opening) 650a of the variable winning device 650 are executed (S1804).

Details of the jackpot control processing (S1804) will be described later with reference to FIGS. etc.) is opened, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the winning opening (specific winning opening 650a) has elapsed, or whether a specified number of balls have entered the winning opening (specific winning opening 650a). Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the prize winning opening (the specific winning opening 650a) is closed. The opening and closing of the winning opening (specific winning opening 650a) are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, in this embodiment, although the jackpot control process (S1804) is executed in the main process, it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the control processing for the accessory per game related to the accessory per game that is executed when the ball wins the special electric operation opening 643 is executed (S1805). In this prize winning control process (S1805), a period for opening and a period for closing the V opening/closing door 65a for the V winning device 65, which is operated to be opened during the winning prize game, are set according to a predetermined scenario. A process for setting based on the (movement scenario per role) is executed. note that. Details of the winning control process (S1805) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, an electric role product opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric role product 640a associated with the general electric prize winning device 640 is executed (S1806). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product is set by the processing of S1121 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 48), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product is started. The open/close control of the electric accessary product is continued until the period set by the processing of S1119 and the processing of S1120 in the normal symbol variation processing ends.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1807). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the special symbol variation start process (S205 in FIG. 41), variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is started in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. . In this embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, the first symbol display update process is executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 41) has ended. After ending the variable display, the stop symbol is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set in S507 of the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 43) by the special symbol variation stop process (see S208 in FIG. 45). The devices 37A and 37B are displayed to be stopped (displayed by lighting).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when one of the special symbols is stopped and displayed in a display mode (jackpot pattern) indicating a big hit, the other special pattern is stopped and displayed in a display mode (outgoing pattern) indicating a loss. A stop display for that purpose is also performed.

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1808). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S1114 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 48), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. As a result, in the second pattern display device, a variable display is performed in which the second pattern "O" pattern and the "X" pattern are alternately lit. Also, in the second symbol display update process (S1808), when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S1116 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 48), it is executed in the second symbol display device. After finishing the variation display, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the processing of S1112 or S1113 of the normal symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 48). (lit display).

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1809). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1810). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1810: Yes), the process proceeds to S1801, and the above-described processes after S1801 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S1810: No), during the time until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing, the second The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1811, S1812).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1811). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479, 232 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1811 (S1812). In addition, in the process of this S1812, the value of the normal figure fluctuation classification counter CS2 is updated similarly to the value of the fluctuation classification counter CS1.

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1801 to S1808 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first per random number counter C1, the initial value of the second per random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and the values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the general figure fluctuation type counter CS2 are also randomly updated. can do. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the processing contents for updating the judgment value related to the lottery of special symbols and normal symbols, and it is possible to prevent the execution of fraudulent games aiming at the timing when the judgment value corresponding to the win is acquired. can be suppressed.

In addition, in the processing of S1809, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1809: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 53 has been executed, so the power-off process after S1813 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S1813), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) power off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S1814). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1815), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1816), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 203 .

It should be noted that the process of S1809 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S1801 to S1808, or at the time of the end of one cycle of the processes of S1811 and S1812 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1801. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1801, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process at power-off, the stack pointer is By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the processing can be started from S1801. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1804) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S1804). This jackpot control process (S1804) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 55), and information (command ), and processing for opening or closing a winning opening (specific winning opening (large open opening) 650a).

In the jackpot control process (S1804), first, it is determined whether it is time to start the jackpot of the special symbol (S1901). Specifically, the process of S806 of the special symbol variation stop process (see S208 in FIG. 45) is executed, and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, or the control process for the role (S1805 in FIG. 58 ) is executed, and when the start of the jackpot is set, the action counter is set corresponding to the jackpot action scenario table 202e1 included in the various action scenario tables 202e. Then, when the value of the action counter coincides with the jackpot start timing defined in the jackpot action scenario table 202e1, it is determined that the jackpot is started. In the processing of S1901, when it is determined that it is time to start a special symbol jackpot (S1901: Yes), an opening command is set (S1902), and this processing ends.

It should be noted that the opening command may be configured to be delayed (variable) and transmitted according to the game state and the jackpot type. Specifically, an opening counter that is periodically updated (every 4 ms) is provided. Then, when the special pattern jackpot or accessory win is started, the opening counter is initialized to 0, and then the opening counter is a predetermined value (for example, 2500 for jackpots A and B, and 2500 for jackpot C). 5000), the opening command may be transmitted. By doing so, for example, in a left-handed game, when a special lottery results in a big win, the time until the start of the big win (the specific winning opening 650a is opened) is shortened and left-handed. In a game, when a special electric game results in a jackpot in a role winning game, the time until the start of the jackpot (the specific winning port 650a is opened) can be lengthened. By configuring in this way, it is possible to secure a period for making preparations for the jackpot game for the player who has been watching the ball flow situation during the role-winning game.

On the other hand, in the process of S1901, when it is determined that it is not the jackpot start timing (S1901: No), it is then determined whether the jackpot is currently in progress (S1903). In the processing of this S1903, determination is performed by reading the game information relating to the winning game stored in the game state storage area 203g.

During the jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and after the jackpot game is over. Including in the middle of time. It also includes the time when a display indicating that the ball has won a prize is being displayed in the V prize opening 165 . If it is determined in the process of S1903 that the jackpot is not in progress (S1903: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S1903: Yes), then it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (S1904).

When it is determined that it is time to start a new round in the process of S1904, that is, when it is determined that the value of the acquired action counter is the time to start a round game defined in the jackpot action scenario table 202e1 (S1904 : Yes), the specific winning opening solenoid 209a is turned on (S1905), a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1906), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1904, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1904: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the round (S1907). When it is determined that it is the end timing of the round, that is, when it is determined that the value of the acquired operation counter is the end timing of the round game defined in the jackpot operation scenario table 202e1 (S1907: Yes), The specific winning opening solenoid 209a is turned off (S1908), and the value of the winning number counter 203e is cleared to 0 (S1909). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1907, when it is determined that the round is not finished (S1907: No), it is determined whether it is the ending effect start timing (S1910). The start timing of the ending production is the final round of the jackpot game (fourth round in the case of jackpot A) is completed, the specific winning port 650a is closed, and the standby time (this embodiment Then, when 3 seconds have passed, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect. When it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S1910: Yes), an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set (S1911), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1910, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1910: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1912). The end timing of the big win is specifically the end timing of the big win game in which the value of the acquired operation counter is defined in the big win operation scenario table 202e1. In the process of S1912, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the big win (end timing of the ending effect) (S1912: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the type of the big win is the big win B (S1913). When it is determined that it is a jackpot B (S1913: Yes), 15 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h (S1914), and the process proceeds to S1916. In the process of S1913, when it is determined that the type of the jackpot is not the jackpot B (the jackpot A or the jackpot C) (S1913: No), the process proceeds to S1915.

In the process of S1915, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 4 (S1915), then the state command corresponding to the game state after the big win is set (S1916), and the end of the big win is set for setting the end of the big win. After setting (S1917), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1912, when it is determined that it is not the time to end the jackpot (S1912: No), the winning process is executed (S1918), and then this process ends. Here, with reference to FIG. 57, the winning process (S1918) will be described in detail. FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing the contents of this winning process (S1918).

In the winning process (S1918 in FIG. 57), first, it is determined whether or not the round is valid (S2001). The round valid period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period during which the specific winning opening 650a is open. If it is determined that it is outside the round valid period (S2001: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is valid (S2001: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the specific winning opening 650a (S2002). If it is determined that the ball has passed through the specific winning hole 650a (S2002: Yes), the value of the winning number counter is updated by adding 1 (S2003), and a command indicating the number of winning balls after the addition is set ( S2004). On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball has not passed through the specific winning hole 650a (S2002: No), this process is terminated.

After executing the process of S2004, it is then determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter is 10 (S2005). If it is determined that the value of the winning number counter is 10 (S2005: Yes), the value of the operation counter is updated to one before the value indicating the end of the current round (S2006), and then the process ends. do. In the process of S2005, if it is determined that the value of the winning number counter is not 10 (S2005: No), the process of S2006 is skipped and the process ends.

By configuring in this way, as the end condition of the round game, the end condition that is established with the passage of time (elapsed 30 seconds) and the end condition that is established with the winning of a prize (10 winning balls). In the case of providing, even if any end condition is satisfied, the operation control of the big winning game can be executed based on the same operation scenario. Therefore, the control processing of main controller 110 can be simplified.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 58, the winning control process (S1805) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing this winning control process (S1805). This prize winning control process (S1805) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 55), and the special electric prize winning process (see S108 in FIG. 50) turns on the prize winning flag 203k. Various control processes are executed based on the update status (acquired value of the action counter) of the action scenario (the action scenario defined in the action scenario table 202e2 for the role) that is set with the setting as a trigger.

In the role winning control process (S1805), first, it is determined whether or not it is time to start winning a role (S2101). Here, it is determined whether the action counter value corresponding to the action scenario table 202e (see FIG. 26(b)) is 1 or not. When it is determined that it is time to start winning a role (S2101: Yes), an opening command for winning a role is set (S2102), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2101, if it is determined that it is not the time to start winning the role (S2101: No), then it is determined whether the current time is during the winning of the role (S2103). If it is determined that the player is not in the middle of winning the role (S2103: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the prize is in progress (S2103: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the timing of the opening operation (S2104). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the action counter value corresponding to the action scenario table 202e for the role item is 26 or not. When it is determined that it is time for the opening operation (S2104: Yes), the opening solenoid (V winning opening solenoid 209b) is set to ON (S2105), and then this process is terminated. Although illustration is omitted, processing for closing (setting off) the opening solenoid (V winning opening solenoid 209b) according to the value of the operation counter corresponding to the prize winning operation scenario table 202e of the V winning device 65; , a process for turning on the storage solenoid 209c is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S2104, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S2104: No), next, it is determined whether it is the timing of ending the prize winning (S2106). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the action counter value corresponding to the action scenario table 202e for the role item is 750 or not. When it is determined that it is time to finish winning the role (S2106: Yes), the role winning flag 203k is set to OFF (S2107), and then it is determined whether or not the V flag 203p is ON. (S2108). If it is determined that the V flag 203p is off (S2108: No), this process is terminated. When it is determined that the V flag 203p is on (S2108: Yes), the start of the jackpot is set (S2110), the V flag 203p is set off (S2111), and then the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2106, if it is determined that it is not the time to end winning the role (S2106: No), the V passage detection process is executed (S2112), and then this process ends.

<Regarding control processing executed by the sound ramp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 72. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into startup processing that is activated upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 59, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is ON, the power-off processing in S4117 (see FIG. ) is started during execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 60, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives power-off occurrence information from the main control device 110 (see S4114 in FIG. 60), it executes power-off processing in S4117. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S4117 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S4002: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S4117. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), it will transfer to S4004 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). from), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S4117 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S4003: No), and the process proceeds to S4008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off process in S4117, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If it is determined that the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S4006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the process of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4117 is executed (see S4116 in FIG. 60). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S4117 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S4117 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared (S4009) to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010), an interrupt Permission is set (S4011), and the process proceeds to main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009, which is processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4010 to set the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010).

The reason why the clearing process of S4009 is skipped is that when the process of S4008 is reached from S4004 via the process of S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S4004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, referring to FIG. 60, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has passed since the main process was started or since the process of S4101 was last executed (S4101). If the time has not elapsed (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4112 without performing the processes of S4102 to S4111. In the processing of S4101, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed because S4102 to S4111 are processing related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). , S4112, and S4113. By executing the process of S4112 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S4112 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, the setting regarding the variable display effect can be performed without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4103 to S4113 are sent to the display control device 114. Output processing is executed (S4102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S4105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed. 114.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is the process of setting to perform production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is finished, the lamp editing processing is executed (S4108), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S4109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S4110), and then the effect update process is executed (S4111). Details of this rendering update process (S4111) will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S4111, the process proceeds to S4112. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. Lamp edit processing of S4108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring processing. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S4109 is also executed at the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

After the processing of S4111, command determination processing (S4112) for performing processing according to the command received from the main controller 110 is executed, and the processing shifts to S4113. The details of this command determination process (S4112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S4113, in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a variable pattern command for display is generated based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110, and the command is sent to the display controller 114. Executes a variable display setting process, which is a process for setting to transmit to. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S4113 is finished, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S4114 (S4114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S4116), and the power-off processing is executed (S4117). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in-progress flag is turned off (S4118), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4114 (S4114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4115: No), the process returns to S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4115: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinitely looped, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S4112). This command determination process (S4112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. . Details of the command determination process (S4112) will be described below.

In the command determination process (S4112), first, from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read out and analyzed. It is determined whether or not a movable valve operation command has been received (S4201). If it is determined that the first movable valve operation command has been received (S4201: Yes), update of the operation scenario is set based on the received first movable valve operation command (S4202), and then this process is executed. finish.

In other words, in the present embodiment, when a command (first movable valve operation command) relating to operation control of the first movable valve 66b executed when power is turned on in the pachinko machine 10 is received, the operation scenario is updated without delay. , a process for judging reception of the first movable valve command is provided in the highest priority judging order of the command judging process. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily synchronize the operation control contents on the main controller 110 side and the status grasp contents on the sound lamp control device 113 side.

In the present embodiment, only when a command (first movable valve operation command) related to operation control of the first movable valve 66b that is executed when power is turned on in the pachinko machine 10 is received, the operation scenario (first movable valve 66b However, without being limited to this, for example, the main controller 110 can be set every predetermined period (every hour) A command indicating the operation control contents of the first movable valve 66b may be output from the side, or a command indicating the operation control contents of the first movable valve 66b may be output each time a jackpot game is executed. good. Then, the contents of the received command and the contents of the updated operation scenario may be compared, and a process of correcting the updated contents of the operation scenario may be executed. As a result, it is possible to further improve the accuracy with which the sound lamp control device 113 grasps the details of the operation control on the main control device 110 side. Further, the operation scenario update process of the sound lamp control device 113 may be executed in consideration of the time lag required until the command output from the main control device 110 is received.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4201, if it is determined that the first movable valve operation command has not been received (S4201: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4203). Here, the special figure variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol. In the processing of S4203, when it is determined that the special figure variation pattern command is received (S4203: Yes), the special figure variation start processing is executed (S4204), and this processing ends. The details of this special figure fluctuation start process (S4204) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S4203, when it is determined that the special figure variation pattern command is not received (S4203: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure stop type command is received (S4205). If it is determined that the special figure stop type command is received (S4205: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is set to ON (S4206), and the stop type is extracted from the received special figure stop type command (S4207), After that, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4205, if it is determined that the special figure stop type command has not been received (S4205: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4208). Here, if it is determined that the pending ball number command has been received (S4208: Yes), the symbol type (special symbol, normal symbol) of the received pending ball number command is analyzed, and stored in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 The value of the provided corresponding counter is updated (S4209). Specifically, when a special symbol reserved ball number command is received, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 included in the reserved ball number command (that is, the special symbol variable display is reserved The number of balls) is extracted, and the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is updated according to the extracted counter value.

Also, when a normal symbol reserved ball number command is received, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 included in the reserved ball number command (that is, the normal symbol reserved ball number of variable display) is extracted, and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is updated according to the extracted counter value.

Here, the pending ball number command is when the ball enters (starts winning) into various ball entrances (special ball entrance 64, through gate 67) and the value of the various pending ball counters is added, or , When executing various fluctuation start processing, when the value of the various reserved ball counters is subtracted, it is transmitted from the main controller 110, so each time the start winning prize or the fluctuation display is set, S4209 Through the processing, the values of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c and the normal symbol reserved ball number counter of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed to the values of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c and the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. can be matched.

Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c possessed by the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the values of the various reserved ball number counters 203c and 203d of the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, At the time of start winning, at the time of variable display setting, that is, when the number of reserved balls command is notified based on the change of the number of various reserved balls, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected. , the values of various reserved ball number counters 203 c and 203 d of the main controller 110 can be matched.

Also, in the process of S4208, if it is determined that the command for the number of reserved balls has not been received (S4208: No), it is determined whether or not the winning command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4210). In the process of S4210, if it is determined that the winning command has been received (S4210: Yes), the winning command process is executed (S4211), and this process ends. This winning command process (S4211) analyzes the symbol type (special symbol, normal symbol) corresponding to the winning information included in the received winning information command, and the storage area corresponding to the analysis result (sound lamp control device 113 It performs processing for storing (storing) in the prize winning information storage area 223b) in the RAM 223 and processing for executing an effect (prefetch effect) based on the received prize winning information. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S4210, if it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S4210: No), then it is determined whether or not the status command has been received from main controller 110 (S4212). If it is determined that a status command has been received (S4212: Yes), status command reception processing is executed (S4213), and this processing ends. Details of this state command reception processing (S4213) will be described later with reference to FIG. , the process of setting the winning game state (during the jackpot, during the accessory winning) in the sub-state setting area 223g is executed.

Next, when it is determined in the process of S4212 that the status command has not been received (S4212: No), it is determined whether a stop-related command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4214). If it is determined in the process of S4214 that the stop-related command has been received (S4214: Yes), the stop-related process is executed (S4215), and this process ends. A detailed description of this stop-related processing (S4215) will be given later with reference to FIG. And processing for setting the display mode of the variable effect using the fourth symbol is executed.

In this embodiment, as the period during which the special symbol variation display is executed, the variation pattern (variation time) is set in advance when performing the special symbol variation, but the preset variation pattern Even in the midst of executing the special design variation based on, there is a case where the process of forcibly stopping the special design variation is executed according to the result of other special design variation. Therefore, the stop-related processing (S4215) is executed on the audio lamp control device 113 side, and the variation display (variation effect) of the third and fourth symbols can be stopped corresponding to the timing when the special symbol variation is stopped. It is configured so that As a result, it is possible to synchronize the fluctuation state of the special symbols and the situation of the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and to provide the player with an easy-to-understand display mode.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4214, if it is determined that the stop-related command has not been received (S4214: No), it is determined whether the normal map-related command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4216), and the normal map-related command is received (S4216: Yes), the general map related process is executed (S4217), and this process ends. The details of the normal map related process (S4217) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S4216, if it is determined that the command related to the normal figure has not been received (S4216: No), it is determined whether the command related to winning is received from the main controller 110 (S4218), and the command related to winning is received. If so (S4218: Yes), hit-related processing is executed (S4219), and this processing ends. Details of the hit-related processing (S4219) will be described later with reference to FIG. It performs processing for causing the third symbol display device 81 to perform display.

In the processing of S4218, if it is determined that the win-related command has not been received (S4218: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S4220), and this processing ends. In the process of S4220, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, the process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is processed. to the display control device 114 .

The command determination processing (S4112 in FIG. 61) executed by the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment has been described above. , It is possible to use an order other than the order shown in the present embodiment, for example, the process of determining whether or not the state command is received than the process of determining whether or not the special figure variation pattern command is received The order of determination may be defined so that it is executed first.

By configuring in this way, when the variation pattern command and the state command are simultaneously output from the main controller 110, that is, during the special symbol variation start processing of the main controller 110 (see S205 in FIG. 41), Special symbol variation pattern selection processing (see S307 in FIG. 43) is executed, a special symbol variation pattern command is set, and then a state command indicating that the game state has changed is set. The game state currently set on the device 113 side can be determined prior to the special figure variation pattern command.

Next, with reference to Drawing 62, special figure fluctuation start processing (S4204) performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 is explained. Figure 62 is the flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation start processing (S4204). This special figure fluctuation start processing (S4204) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice ramp control device 113, and is set according to the gaming state Then, a process of setting a display mode (main variation variation pattern, slave variation variation pattern) corresponding to the special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

Then, the display control device 114 displays the third pattern based on the display mode (display command) set here and the display variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 71) described later. The display mode displayed in the display area of the display device 81 is set. Hereinafter, the details of the special figure fluctuation start processing (S4204) will be described.

When special figure fluctuation start processing is set, first. Set the special figure fluctuation start flag 223d to ON (S4301), extract the fluctuation pattern from the received special figure fluctuation pattern command (S4302), and select the detailed display mode using the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a (S4303) .

Next, the information (information indicating the current game state) set (stored) in the sub-state setting area 223g is read to determine whether the current game state is the time saving state (S4304). In the processing of S4304, when it is determined that the current state is not the time saving state (normal state) (S4304: No), the command for display in the normal state is set (S4305), and this processing ends. When the display command is set in the processing of S4305, it is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output processing (S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main processing (see FIG. 60) of the sound lamp control device 113, and is sent to the display control device 114 (see FIG. 11 ( A performance mode for showing the result of the special symbol lottery is set in the main display area Dm as shown in b).

On the other hand, in the processing of S4304, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the time saving state (S4304: Yes), the command for display during the time saving state is set (S4306), and the value of the notified pending number storage area 223s is decremented by 1 (S4307), the value (fluctuation time) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern received this time is set in the fluctuation time counter 223r (S4308), and this processing is terminated.

Next, the winning command process (S4211) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing the winning command process (S4211). This winning command process (S4211) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the received winning command type (special symbol, normal symbol) and the current game state, processing for setting an effect (so-called prefetch effect) to be executed when a winning command is received is executed.

When the winning command process (S4211) is executed, first, based on the information included in the received winning command, it analyzes which symbol type it corresponds to, and sets (stores) it in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b. (S4401). Then, it is determined whether the V rush flag 223q is set to ON (S4402), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S4402: No), the process proceeds to S4412, and then this process ends. do. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is set to ON (S4402: Yes), the variation time information included in the received winning command is extracted (S4403).

Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the prefetch counter 223h is 1 or more (S4404). If it is determined that the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is smaller than 1 (is 0) (S4404: No), the fluctuation time (special symbol fluctuation time) included in the winning information received this time is used as the remaining period of the V rush. Since the additional notification is not possible, the extracted fluctuation time is stored in the unreported period storage area 223j (S4410), the value of the unreported pending number storage area 223k is incremented by 1 (S4411), and the process of S4412 is performed. Move to

On the other hand, in the processing of S4404, if it is determined that the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is 1 or more (S4404: Yes), the variation time included in the winning command received this time (the variation time of the special symbol) is changed to V Rush. Since it is possible to make an additional notification as the remaining period, it is then determined whether or not the interruption flag 223m is ON (S4405). In the processing of S44405, it is determined whether or not the current time is the timing at which the additional notification can be executed. In this embodiment, during the V rush, during the accessory winning game period and during the jackpot game period, the remaining period of the V rush is not additionally notified. By configuring in this way, the player can be made to concentrate on various winning games and play the game.

In the processing of S4405, if it is determined that the interruption flag 223m is off (S4404: No), then it is determined whether or not the special hit flag 223n is on (S4406). If it is determined that the special hit flag 223n is off (S4406: No), the current state is in a state where the additional notification can be executed, so the value of the short time counter 223i corresponds to the variable time extracted in the process of S4403. (S4407), 1 is added to the value of the notified number of reservations storage area 223s, and the process proceeds to S4409.

Although illustration is omitted, when the variable time is added in the processing of S4407, a display command corresponding to the added value is set and an additional notification effect is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (Fig. 15 ( a) see) is performed. In addition, in the present embodiment, as the additional notification effect, all the values added in the processing of S4407 are configured to be notified, but the added value is not limited to this. It may be configured to execute an additional notification effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand what triggers the remaining period (short remaining time) of the V rush to be added, so that the player does not get bored early. can be executed.

In addition, until the value added in the processing of S4407 reaches a predetermined value, or until the value of the short time counter 223i is subtracted to a predetermined value, the value added in the processing of S4407 is notified. Instead, it may be configured to add up the variable times (variable times of special symbols) included in a plurality of winning commands and notify them. As a result, the length of the remaining short time added in one additional notification performance can be made unexpected. Also, in this case, for example, when the variable time (for example, 50 seconds) of the length set at the time of winning the special symbol is added to the short time counter 223i for the same variable time, in the additional notification effect It is preferable to configure so as to execute an additional notification effect for 50 seconds. By constructing in this way, the player can be made to think that he or she has won a special symbol jackpot, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

On the other hand, in the process of S4405, when it is determined that the interruption flag 223m is ON (S4405: Yes), and in the process of S4406, when it is determined that the special hit flag 223n is ON (S4406: Yes), extraction The calculated variable time is stored in the unreported period storage area 223j (S4410), and the process proceeds to S4411 described above.

After completing the processing of S4411, the value of the prefetch counter 223h is decremented by 1 (S4409), then other processing is executed (S4412), and then this processing ends.

Next, the state command reception processing (S4212) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing this status command reception process (S4212). This state command reception process (S4212) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is executed according to the set game state. A process for setting different display modes to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed. Details of the state command reception processing (S4213) will be described below.

When the status command reception process (S4213) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the currently set game status is to be changed (S4501). Here, it is determined whether or not the game state set in the sub-state setting area 223g is different from the game state indicated by the state command received this time. In the process of S4501, when it is determined that there is no change in the game state (S4501: No), the processes of S4502 to S4508 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S4509. When it is determined that there is a change in the game state (S4501: Yes), it is determined whether the game state after the change is the normal state (S4502).

In the processing of S4502, if it is determined that the game state after the change is the normal state (if the state command received this time is a command indicating the normal state) (S4502: Yes), then the current is the normal symbol. It is determined whether or not the game is winning (S4503). If it is determined that the normal pattern is not winning (S4503: No), the display command indicating the normal mode is set (S4504), and the information indicated by the state command received this time is stored (set) in the sub-state setting area 223g. ) (S4509), and the process ends.

Here, by notifying the display control device 114 of the command set in the process of S4504, the variable effect display in the normal state is executed. Thus, in the present embodiment, in the audio lamp control device 113, based on the state command output from the main control device 110, the types of various display modes displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 ( mode, background), and outputs a command indicating the type to the display control device 114 .

By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to eliminate the need to set the display mode of the variable effect display for each game state set on the sound lamp control device 113 side. In other words, a command (type command) indicating the type of various display modes corresponding to the currently set game state and a variation pattern command (common command) corresponding to the variation display of the special symbols are output to the display control device 114. display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a display mode corresponding to the current gaming state and the received variation pattern based on the type command received by the display control device 114 side and the common command. can be set. Therefore, the processing load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

In addition, as described above, when the display data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is set by combining a plurality of commands received from the sound lamp control device 113 on the display control device 114 side, Information (confirmation information) indicating the content of display data after setting is output from the display control device 114 side to the audio lamp control device 113 side, and the confirmation information received by the audio lamp control device 113 side is correct. If it is determined that the determination result is not appropriate, a simple display variation pattern command indicating appropriate information is set, and the contents of the already set display data are set. It is preferable to configure so as to rewrite to simple display data.

By configuring in this way, when appropriate display data is not set for various commands received by the audio lamp controller 113 from the main controller 110, simple display data indicating appropriate information is set. It is possible to display a variable effect display based on the simple display data. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the execution of a variable effect display with contents different from the actual game result (lottery result of special symbols). In addition, the simple display data described above includes, for example, display data for displaying a special mode (for example, black background mode) that does not correspond to any game state, and display data for executing variable display of the fourth symbol. For example, display data having a smaller amount of data than the display data used in normal variable effect display may be used.

In addition, in this embodiment, the configuration described above is used, but it is not limited to this, and the current game state and the received variation pattern are set by the voice lamp control device 113 side. It may be configured to

Returning to FIG. 64, the description continues. In the processing of S4502, if it is determined that the game state after the change is not the normal state (if the state command received this time is not a command indicating the normal state) (S4502: No), then the game state after the change It is determined whether it is a time saving state (S4507), and if it is determined that the gaming state is a time saving state (the state command received this time is a command indicating a time saving state) (S4507: Yes), V rush mode is indicated A display command is set (S4508), and the process proceeds to S4509 described above. If it is determined that the game state does not have a time saving state (S4507: No), the process of S4508 is skipped and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4503, if it is determined that the current is in the middle of the normal design (S4503: Yes), the command for display indicating the extension mode is set (S4505), and the extension flag 223p is set to ON ( S4506), and shifts to the processing of S4509 described above. When the display command is set in the processing of S4505, it is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output processing (S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main processing (see FIG. 60) of the sound lamp control device 113, and is sent to the display control device 114 ( A display mode showing the extended screen shown in b) is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the stop-related process (S4215), which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing the contents of the stop related process (S4215). This stop-related processing (S4215) sets the display mode when a stop-related command (a command set when stop display is performed based on the lottery result of another special symbol lottery) is received from the main controller 110. process is executed.

When the stop-related processing (S4215) is executed, first, it is determined whether the stop-related command received this time is a special figure determination command (S4601). When it is determined that it is a special figure confirmation command (S4601: Yes), a display command for stopping fluctuation is set (S4602), and the process proceeds to S4603. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure confirmation command has not been received (S4601: No), the process of S4602 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4603.

In the processing of S4603, it is determined whether the stop related command received this time is a special figure temporary stop command (S4603). When it is determined that the special figure temporary stop command is received (S4603: Yes), the interruption flag 223m is set to ON (S4604), and the display command indicating the temporary stop mode of the special symbol is set (S4605), S4606. Go to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure temporary stop command has not been received (S4603: No), the processing of S4604 and S4605 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S4606.

When the display command indicating the temporary stop mode of the special symbol is set in the process of S4605, the display mode (characters of "STOP") indicating that the game is temporarily stopped is displayed as shown in FIG. 13(b). At the same time, the subtraction display of the timer 812 for indicating the remaining period of the special symbol variation is interrupted.

In the processing of S4606, it is determined whether the stop related command received this time is a special figure fluctuation restart command (S4606). This special symbol variation resume command is a command set when the special symbol variation resumes in the special symbol variation executing process (see S206 in FIG. 44) of the main control device 110 (see S702 in FIG. 44). . When it is determined that the special figure fluctuation resume command is received (S4606: Yes), the interruption flag 223m is set to OFF (S4607), and the display command indicating the special figure fluctuation restart is set (S4608).

Then, it is determined whether or not the unreported information was updated during the period when the interruption flag 223m was set to ON (S4609). In this process, it is determined whether or not information indicating a new fluctuation time is stored in the unreported period storage area 223j and the unreported pending number storage area 223k. In the process of S4609, if it is determined that there is no update (S4609: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an update (S4609: Yes), the value of the time short period counter 223i is added in correspondence with the update contents (S4610), the uninformed period storage area 223j, the uninformed pending number storage area 223k, The information in the notified pending number storage area 223s is updated, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation restart command is not received (S4606: No), this process is terminated as it is.

In addition, the value added by the processing of S4610 is the timing when the interruption flag 223 is set to OFF, that is, the special figure fluctuation is resumed, and the numerical value of the timer 812 displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is collectively added at the timing when starts subtraction. By configuring in this way, in a state where the subtraction of the variable time of the special symbols is stopped, various winning games are made to pay attention, and after the completion of various winning games, an additional notification effect is executed collectively, so that various winning It is possible to make the player expect that the remaining period of the V rush will be added in large amount even after the game is over.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the general map related process (S4217) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing this general-purpose map-related processing (S4217). This normal figure related process (S4217) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. Hereinafter, the details of the normal map related processing (S4217) will be described.

When the general pattern related processing (S4217) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the general pattern related command received this time is the general pattern variation pattern command (S4701). When it is determined that the received command is the general pattern variation pattern command (S4701: Yes), the small hit start command for display is set (S4702), and then this process is terminated.

In the processing of S4701, if it is determined that the received command is not a general pattern fluctuation pattern command (S4701: No), then the general pattern related command received this time is a normal pattern per start command. (S4703). When it is determined that the received command is a general pattern per start command (S4703: Yes), a small per winning command for display is set (S4704), and then this process is terminated.

In the processing of S4703, if it is determined that the received command is not a general map per start command (S4703: No), then the general map related command received this time is a special electric operation command It is determined (S4705 ). If it is determined that the received command is a special electric operation command (S4705: Yes), the display V winning command is set (S4706), and then it is determined whether the extension flag 223p is set to ON (S4707 ), when it is determined that it is set to ON, that is, at the end timing of the time saving state, the ball is entered into the special electric operation port 643 in the general figure winning game being executed at the end timing. If it is determined that there is (S4707: Yes), the extension flag 223p is set to OFF (S4708), and then this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4707 that the extension flag 223p is not ON (S4707: No), the process of S4708 is skipped and this process ends.

In the process of S4705, if it is determined that the received command is not a special electric operation command (S4705: No), then it is determined whether or not the normal map related command received this time is a normal map per end command (S4709 ). If it is determined that the received command is not the end command per normal pattern (S4709: No), this process is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the received command is a general pattern per end command (S4709: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the extension flag 223p is ON (S4710). If it is determined that the extension flag 223p is on (S4710: Yes), the extension flag 223p is set to off (S4711), a display command indicating the end of the V rush is set (S4712), and the V rush flag 223q is set. It is set to off (S4713), and then the process ends.

In the process of S4710, if the extension flag 223p is off (S4710: No), a display command indicating the end of the normal pattern is set (S4714), and then this process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the general pattern per game is executed in a state where the final variation of the special symbols in the time saving state is stopped, the extension flag 223p is set to extend the V rush effect. set to on. Then, the end timing of the V rush performance is varied according to the progress of the special electric game executed based on the normal game. Specifically, if the ball does not enter the special electric activation port 643 in the normal per game, the V rush effect is terminated at the end timing of the normal per game, and the ball is moved to the special electric activation port 643. When a prize is won and an accessory winning game is executed, the V rush performance is terminated at the end timing of the accessory winning game. Incidentally, when the ball enters the V winning opening 165 in the role winning game, the effect based on the big winning game (V big winning game) is preferentially executed.

With this configuration, the player can be notified of the period during which the player can aim for the V jackpot game regardless of the game state, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the hit-related process (S4219), which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing the details of the win-related process (S4219). In this winning-related process (S4219), as a result of the lottery of the special symbols, the effect display corresponding to the jackpot game or the role winning game to be executed when the jackpot or the role winning game is won is executed on the third symbol display device 81. When a jackpot or prize is won, processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main controller 110 is executed.

In addition, when receiving a prize ball number command for indicating the number of prize balls won during a winning game (jackpot game, accessory winning game), the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command is accumulated, A process of setting the number-of-balls-for-display command based on the cumulative result is executed.

In the hit related process (S4219), first, it is determined whether the command received by the command determination process (see FIG. 61) is a jackpot related command (S4801). When it is determined that the received command is a jackpot-related command (S4801: Yes), a jackpot-related process is executed (S4802), and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 68, the jackpot related processing (S4802), which is one of the winning related processing (S4219 in FIG. 67) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot related process (S4802). In the jackpot-related processing, processing is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game to be executed when the jackpot is won. Processing corresponding to various commands sent from 110 is executed.

In the jackpot-related processing (S4802), first, it is determined whether or not the hit-related command received by the hit-related processing (S4801 in FIG. 67) is a jackpot start command (S4901). When it is determined that it is a jackpot start command (S4901: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S4902). The display jackpot start command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output processing (S4102) of the main processing (see FIG. 60). It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 .

Next, it is determined whether or not the V rush flag 223q is on (S4903). When it is determined that the V rush flag 223q is ON (S4903: Yes), it is determined whether the current big win is a special win (jackpot B) (S4911), and it is determined to be a special win (jackpot B). In the case (S4911: Yes), the special hit flag 223n is set to OFF (S4912), and the process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4911 that the current big win is not a special win (big win B) (S4911: No), the process of S4912 is skipped and the process ends as it is.

In the processing of S4903, if it is determined that the V rush flag 223q is off (S4903: No), the number of times of reduced working hours given in the big hit to be executed this time is extracted (S4904), and stored in the winning information storage area 223b. The special figure winning information is read (S4905), the target is selected with the upper limit of the number of times of time reduction extracted from the read special figure winning information (S4906), and the number of selected special figure winning information is stored in the unnotified pending number storage area 223k (S4907), calculate the fluctuation time included in the selected special figure winning information (S4908), store the calculated fluctuation time in the unannounced period storage area 223j (S4909), turn on the V rush flag 223q set (S4910), and then terminate this process.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4901, when it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4901: No), it is then determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S4913). If the round number command has been received (S4913: Yes), the round number command for display is set based on the round number (S4914), and this process ends. In this embodiment, information indicating the number of rounds is transmitted from the main controller 110 as the number-of-rounds command. In order to reduce the amount of command data to be transmitted from the control device 110, when information for indicating that a new round has started is transmitted from the main control device 110 as a round update command, an audio lamp control device The RAM 223 of 113 is provided with a round number accumulation counter for accumulating the number of received round update commands when a round update command is received. It may be configured to calculate the number and set the number-of-rounds command for display.

On the other hand, in the process of S4913, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S4913: No), it is determined whether the jackpot end command has been received (S4915). When it is determined that the jackpot end command has not been received (S4915: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot end command has been received (S4915: Yes), the jackpot end processing is executed (S4916), and this processing ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 69, the jackpot ending process (S4919), which is one process in the jackpot related process (S4802 in FIG. 68) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot ending process (S4919).

In the jackpot end processing (S4919), the time saving number given in the jackpot executed this time is set in the look-ahead counter 223h (S5001), and the value of the notified pending number storage area 223s is subtracted from the value of the look-ahead counter 223h ( S5002), and then the value stored in the unreported pending number storage area 223k is read out (S5003). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the unreported pending number storage area 223k is 1 or more (S5004). When it is determined that the value of the unnotified pending number storage area 223k is smaller than 1 (is 0) (S5004: No), an additional notification effect is executed on the ending screen of the jackpot game (see FIG. 15(a)). (because there is no variable time information to be added), a command for display without addition is set (S5014), and then this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5004, if it is determined that the value of the unnotified pending number storage area 223k is 1 or more (S5004: Yes), that is, information indicating the variable time that can be added to the notification (used for the additional notification If there is no special symbol fluctuation time information), the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is subtracted in correspondence with the read value (S5005), and among the values stored in the unreported pending number storage area 223k, S5005 The value corresponding to the value subtracted in the process is cleared (S5006), and the fluctuation time stored in the unreported period storage area 223j is read (S5007).

After that, it is determined whether the winning information (special figure reservation information) contained in the winning information storage area 223b includes the winning information indicating the winning of the special win (jackpot B) (S5008). If it is determined that there is not (S5008: No), an additional command for display corresponding to the read variable time period is set (S5009), and out of the variable time stored in the unannounced period storage area 223j, the current time The period corresponding to the variable time used for the additional effect is cleared (S5010), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5008, when it is determined that the winning information indicating the winning of the special winning (jackpot B) is included in the winning information storage area 223b (S5008: Yes) A display command corresponding to the variable time is set (S5011). In other words, when the special symbol variation executed one after another is the special symbol variation corresponding to the special hit winning, even if the variation time for four special symbol reservations is added as an additional notification effect, it is possible to notify. Even if it is, only the fluctuation time of the next special design fluctuation, the fluctuation time of the next special design fluctuation, and the fluctuation time of the special design fluctuation (special hit fluctuation) corresponding to the special winning election Is used in the additional notification effect.

Furthermore, a display command indicating a special mode (heaven mode) is set (S5012), the special win flag 223n is set to ON (S5013), and the process proceeds to S5010 described above.

As a result, at the end of the jackpot game, if there is prize winning information indicating the winning of the special win (jackpot B) in the reserved special symbols, the special mode (heaven mode) is entered as shown in FIG. and the variation time "220 seconds" until the end of the special hit variation is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player of the period until the special winning game (the big winning game in which the big winning B is set) is executed in an easy-to-understand manner. Further, after the end of the special winning game, the time saving state is set again, so that the player can play the game in the heaven mode with peace of mind. Furthermore, since the player is not notified of the time of the variation of the special symbols retained and stored after the special winning variation, the time saving state (V rush) period set after the end of the big winning game is kept until the end of the big winning game. It can be difficult for a player to understand.

Returning to FIG. 67, the description is continued. In the processing of S4801, when it is determined that the received command is not a jackpot related command (S4801: No), it is determined whether the received command is a role related command (S4803). When it is determined that the received command is a role-hitting related command (S4803: Yes), the role-hitting related process (S4804) is executed, and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 70, the winning-related process (S4804), which is one of the winning-related processes (S4219 in FIG. 67) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing the contents of the role-related process (S4804). In the role winning related process, a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the role winning game to be executed when the role winning is executed. is executed, processing corresponding to various commands sent from the main controller 110 is executed.

In the award-related processing (S4804), first, it is determined whether the winning-related command received by the winning-related processing (S4219 in FIG. 67) is the award-winning start command (S5101).

In the processing of S5101, when it is determined that the accessory winning start command is received (S5101: Yes), the display accessory winning start command is set (S5102), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5101, if it is determined that the received command is not the start command for winning the role (S5101: No), then it is determined whether the received command is the V entrance passing command (S5103). .

In the processing of S5103, when it is determined that the V entrance passage command is received (S5103: Yes), the prize winning command for display accessories is set (S5104), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5103 that the received command is not the V entrance pass command (S5103: No), then it is determined whether the received command is the V pass command (S5105).

In the process of S5105, when it is determined that the V passing command is received (S5105: Yes), the display V hit command is set (S5106), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5105 that the received command is not the V passing command (S5105: No), then it is determined whether the received command is the ending command (S5107). If it is determined that the received command is not the ending command (S5107: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is an ending command (S5107: Yes), an ending command for display is set (S5108), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 67, the description is continued. In the processing of S4803, when it is determined that the received command is not the command related to the winning of the role (S4803: No), it is determined whether or not the prize ball command has been received (S4805). If it is determined that the received command is not a prize ball command (S4805: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the received command is determined to be a prize ball command (S4805: Yes), the value corresponding to the received command is added to the value of the prize ball number counter (not shown) (S4806), A prize ball number command for display corresponding to the value of the prize ball number counter after addition is set (S4807), and this process is terminated.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls command received during the period (advantageous continuation period) during which the V rush flag 223q is set to ON are accumulated by the prize ball number counter. Information indicating the number of prize balls corresponding to the cumulative value of the counter for the number of prize balls is displayed during the winning game (jackpot game, accessory winning game) or during the V rush production (FIG. 12). See display area HR2 in (c)).

By constructing in this way, the player is notified in an easy-to-understand manner of the total number of balls obtained during the period (advantageous continuation period) from when the time saving state (V rush) is set until the V rush ends. can be done.

In this embodiment, the cumulative value of the number of prize balls obtained during the advantageous continuous period is displayed during the advantageous continuous period. For example, during the advantageous continuation period, the number of prize balls obtained in the jackpot game and the number of prize balls obtained in the role winning game may be displayed separately. . In this case, the winning game state at the time of receiving the prize ball command (during jackpot, during prize winning) is determined based on the information set in the sub-state setting area 223g, and the number of prize balls is accumulated for each determination result. It is good to have a means to do so. As a result, the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period can be easily sorted.

In addition, the number of prize balls acquired in one game period (a period of a period of the jackpot game period and a latent state period until the next jackpot game is executed) within the advantageous continuation period is accumulated and displayed. It may be configured as follows. In this case, it is preferable to provide storage means for storing the cumulative number of prize balls won during one game period as history information, and to display the history of the information stored in the storage means.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of V jackpot games executed based on the special electric game during the V rush period is cumulatively displayed (see display area HR1 in FIG. 12(c)). However, as described above, when the configuration for cumulatively displaying the number of prize balls acquired within the advantageous continuous period is used, the number of times the lottery result (jackpot) in which the lottery result of the special symbol is advantageous to the player or the lottery probability that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes the lottery result (jackpot) that is advantageous to the player may be displayed.

By constructing in this way, it becomes possible for the player to analyze the lottery result of the special symbols executed during the advantageous continuation period and the number of prize balls obtained during the advantageous continuation period, and to play the game enthusiastically. can be done.

Next, the variable display setting process (S4113) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S4113). This variable display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 71) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. As described above, the variable display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 71) is based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to display the variable display effects on the third symbol display device 81. A process of setting a display variation pattern command and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. In addition, based on the extracted stop type (jackpot A to jackpot C), a process of setting a display special figure stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

In the fluctuation display setting process (S4113), first, it is determined whether the special figure fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5201). And, if it is determined that the special figure fluctuation start flag 223d is off (S5201: No), since the special figure fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, the process of S5205 is performed. . On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation start flag 223d is ON (S5201: Yes), the special figure fluctuation start flag 223d is set to OFF (S5202).

Then, in the process of S4302 of the special figure fluctuation start process (see S4204 in FIG. 62) executed in the command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 61), the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 Based on the variation pattern, set a special symbol display variation pattern command (S5203), subtract 1 from the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (S5204), and proceed to the processing of S5205.

The display variation pattern command set in the process of S5203 is output to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S4102 in FIG. 60) executed in the main process (see FIG. 60) of the audio lamp control device 113. be. The display control device 114 creates display data to be displayed in the display area (display screen) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the received display variation pattern command and various display commands for indicating the game state.

In the process of S5205, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223e is set to ON (S5205), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S5205: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is set to ON (S5205: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is set to OFF (S5206), the extracted stop type is set as it is (S5207), and the special figure stop for display A type command is set (S5208), and this processing ends.

Next, the rendering update process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing this effect update process (S4111). This effect update process (S4111) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and updates the values of various counters set during the V rush period. , a process for setting a presentation mode based on the updated counter value.

In the effect update process (S4111), first, it is determined whether the interruption flag 223m is set to ON (S5300), and if the interruption flag 223m is set to ON (S5300: Yes), the process proceeds to S5309. and terminate this process. On the other hand, if the interruption flag 223m is not set to ON, that is, if the special symbol fluctuation is not interrupted (S5300: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time counter 223r is greater than 0. (S5301). If it is determined that the value of the variable time counter 223r is not greater than 0 (it is 0) (S5301: No), the process proceeds to S5309. If it is determined that the value of the variable time counter is greater than 0 (S5301: Yes), the value of the variable time counter is updated (S5302), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the short period counter 223i is greater than 0. (S5303). If it is determined that the value of the time short period counter 223i is 0 (S5303: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5303, if it is determined that the value of the short period counter 223i is greater than 0 (S5303: Yes), the value of the short period counter 223i is updated (S5304), and then the updated short period counter 223i is 0 (S5305). If it is determined that the updated value of the short period counter 223i is not 0 (S5305: No), a display command corresponding to the value of the short period counter 223i is set (S5306). The display command set here is sent to the display control device 114 in the command output processing (see S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main processing (see FIG. 60) of the audio lamp control device 113, like other display commands. is output. Then, image data is created by the display control device 114 and displayed as a display mode of the timer 812 displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 during the V rush (see FIG. 13(a)).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable time counter indicates a remaining period of 5 seconds (S5307). In the processing of S5307, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time counter 223r indicates a remaining period of 5 seconds (S5307: Yes), a display command indicating that the remaining fluctuation time is short is set (S5308), The process proceeds to S5309. When the display command is set in the processing of S5308, it is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output processing (S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main processing (see FIG. 60) of the sound lamp control device 113, and is sent to the player. On the other hand, an effect mode (for example, unlucky effect) is set to show that the remaining time of the special symbol variation being executed is short. Thereby, the player can play the game while selecting whether or not to execute the special electric game for executing the V jackpot game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed is 5 seconds (S5307: Yes), it is configured to set a display command indicating that the remaining variation time is short. However, without being limited to this, for example, before executing the process of S5308, a lottery process is executed to determine whether or not to set a display command indicating that the remaining fluctuation time is small, and the lottery process A display command indicating that the remaining fluctuation time is short may be set only when it is determined to set the display command. By configuring in this way, the effect mode (for example, unlucky effect) for indicating that the remaining time of the special symbol variation being executed is short (unlucky effect in the third symbol display device 81 is not executed), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed is long or short.

In addition, in the process of S5307, if it is determined that the value of the variable time counter 223r indicates that the remaining period is 5 seconds and is not a value (S5307: No), the variable time of the next The value obtained by adding 10 seconds to the number of seconds indicated by the value of the variation time counter 223r (remaining number of seconds of the special symbol variation being executed) is obtained by the processing of S5313. It is determined whether it is larger (longer) than the number of seconds indicating the read fluctuation time of the next fluctuation (S5314).

In the processing of S5314, the value obtained by adding 10 seconds to the number of seconds indicated by the value of the variation time counter 223r (remaining number of seconds of the special symbol variation being executed) indicates the variation time of the next variation read out in the processing of S5313. If it is determined to be greater (longer) than the number of seconds (S5314: Yes), the current situation is advantageous to the player, that is, when the V jackpot game is executed, V is set after the V jackpot game ends. A display command indicating a lucky time for informing the player that the rush period is likely to become longer is set (S5315), and the process proceeds to S5309. On the other hand, in the processing of S5314, the value obtained by adding 10 seconds to the number of seconds indicated by the value of the variation time counter 223r (remaining number of seconds of the special symbol variation being executed) is the variation time of the next variation read in the processing of S5313 (S5314: No), the process of S5315 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5309.

When the display command is set in the processing of S5315, it is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output processing (S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main processing (see FIG. 60) of the audio lamp control device 113, and is sent to the display control device 114 ( The display mode of the lucky time effect shown in b) is set. By configuring in this way, the player can grasp the period during which the player is more advantageous during the V rush period, so that the game during the V rush period can be suppressed from becoming monotonous. In the present embodiment, as a trigger for executing the lucky time production, the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed is set to be longer than the variation time of the next special symbol variation by 10 seconds or more. Without limitation, it suffices if the player can be notified of the period in which the remaining fluctuation time becomes long when the special symbol fluctuation is interrupted by the lucky time production, for example, regardless of the fluctuation time of the next special symbol fluctuation, Execution of the lucky time effect may be triggered by determining that the remaining period of the special symbol variation is equal to or longer than a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 50 seconds).

Also, in the present embodiment, in the processing of S5314, the value obtained by adding 10 seconds to the number of seconds indicated by the value of the variation time counter 223r (remaining number of seconds of the special symbol variation being executed) is read in the processing of S5313. Although it is configured to always execute the processing of S5315 when it is larger (longer) than the number of seconds indicating the fluctuation time of the next fluctuation, for example, before executing the processing of S5315, it is not limited to this. A lottery process for determining whether or not to set a display command indicating that the remaining variation time is long is executed, and the remaining variation time is long only when the result of the lottery process determines to set the display command. It may be configured to set a display command indicating that. By configuring in this way, the effect mode (for example, lucky time effect) for indicating that the remaining time of the special symbol variation being executed is long is not set (the third symbol display device 81 can perform the lucky time effect is not executed), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed is long or short.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5305 that the value of the short time counter 223i after updating is 0 (S5305: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the prefetch counter 223h is greater than 0 (S5310). If it is determined that the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is greater than 0 (S5310: Yes), although the conditions for ending the time saving state are not satisfied, the special symbol variation is not executed, so V rush A display command indicating continuation "???" is set (S5311), and the process proceeds to S5309. The display command set in the process of S5311 is output to the display control device in the command output process (see S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main process (see FIG. 60) of the sound lamp control device 113, like other display commands. 114. Then, image data is created by the display control device 114, and a display mode (see FIG. 19A) indicating that it is a period during which the time saving end condition is not updated during the V rush is displayed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5310 that the value of the prefetch counter 223h is 0 (S5310: No), a display command indicating the end of the V rush is set (S5312), and the V rush flag 223q is set to off. and the process proceeds to S5309. In the process of S5309, another effect update process is executed (S5309), and this process ends.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 87. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the command pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, thereby speeding up the NOR ROM. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, referring to FIG. 74, the boot processing (S6001) will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S6001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled is executed. Of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101.

By setting the command pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 73) is completed. By setting the top address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and this boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S6001) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding a NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 74, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a in step S6101. and the processing of S6102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 stores a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instruct execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing in S6003, the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 85(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 85A).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this period, the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)) can be simplified so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) (not shown) is drawn. Command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 75B) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 75B) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entering the special figure entrance 64 (start winning), and the command to start the variable effect is voice lamp control from the main control device 110 When received via a device 113, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, a power-on variation image can be immediately displayed during the variation performance period, and a simple variation performance can be performed. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third pattern display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, and it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 75(a). FIG. 75(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 75(b), V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 75(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 75(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301). If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display on the display device 81, command determination processing (S6302) is executed, and then display setting processing (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81. FIG.

In the display setting process (S6303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302), etc., an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84. FIG.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S6304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S6303) or the simple display setting processing (S6309). The type of sprite (display object) to be displayed is specified, and various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236 , even when a continuous notice command or a back image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 , the image controller 237 is continuously instructed to A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice images used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.例文帳に追加Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305), , generates the drawing list shown in FIG. 38, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list (S6306). Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, front-rear out reach, reach other than front-rear out, complete out) The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop design after the variable effect displayed on the third design display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81, simple command determination processing (S6308) is executed, then simple display setting processing (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81, the details of the command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 76, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). Then, if there is a variation pattern command for display (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the variation pattern command process (S6405) will now be described with reference to FIG. 77(a). FIG. 77(a) is a flow chart showing the variation pattern command process (S6405). This variation pattern command processing (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation display data table actually has a longer variation than the set display data table. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6505, the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501 , extracts the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set to 1, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. image storage area 236a.

Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S6503 is used to measure the time for the variable presentation specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third design display device 81 .

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S6406), If there is a stop type command for display (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the stop type command process (S6407) will now be described with reference to FIG. 77(b). FIG. 77(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (any one of jackpots A to G, small hits A to C, reach out, complete out, etc.) Stop type table corresponding to is determined (S6601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device Finally, the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed in 81 is set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each of the stop symbols, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. It is set to ON (S6603) and returns to the command determination processing.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started, the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified as the type information. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S6602. In the above-described task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop design set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop design determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S6601, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of line, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S6602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out". A stop pattern corresponding to the "big win" is displayed, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has "a special pattern big win", and there is a risk of degrading the reliability of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, in fact, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete loss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "jackpot of special symbols", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description is continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6408), and the command is displayed. If there is an opening command (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the opening command process (S6409) will now be described with reference to FIG. 78(a). FIG. 78(a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and based on the set opening display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description is continued. In the process of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the If there is a round number command for use (S6410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the round number command processing (S6411) will now be described with reference to FIG. 78(b). FIG. 78(b) is a flow chart showing the round number command processing. The number-of-rounds command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the number-of-rounds command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description continues. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no command for the number of rounds for display (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6412). If there is an ending command for (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the ending command process (S6413) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command process is to execute the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description is continued. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display fluctuation stop command among the unprocessed commands (S6414), and display If there is a fluctuation stop command (S6414: Yes), the fluctuation stop command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the fluctuation stop command process (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80(a) is a flow chart showing the fluctuation stop command process. This fluctuation stop command process is for executing a process corresponding to the display fluctuation stop command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

This display fluctuation stop command is the end timing of the display fluctuation pattern command set in the fluctuation display setting process (see S4112 in FIG. 73) of the audio lamp control device 113, that is, each special symbol in the main control device 110 At the end timing of the variation pattern (variation time) set in the variation pattern setting process (the timing at which the main controller 110 sets the stop command), the stop command for display output from the audio lamp control device 113 ( normal stop command) and various display commands set in the fluctuation stop processing (see S4217 in FIG. 70) of the audio lamp control device 113. FIG.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed independently (in parallel), and further , When one of the special symbols is stopped (fixed) in a pattern indicating a specific lottery result (for example, a big win), the other special symbol during fluctuation is displayed at the end of a predetermined fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). Regardless of the presence or absence of , it is configured to forcibly stop display with a symbol indicating the disconnection.

And, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command set when forcibly stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol from the main control device 110, the fluctuation stop processing (see S4217 in FIG. 70) is executed. , a display command (forced stop command).

In this embodiment, even if the above-described normal stop command has already been received, if the third symbol or the fourth symbol is not stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, It is configured to execute a stop indication based on a forced stop command received later. That is, the forced stop command is processed with priority over the normal stop command. As a result, the third pattern and the fourth pattern can be reliably displayed in a display mode corresponding to the control contents of the main controller 110 .

In addition, the fluctuation stop command for display includes a display command indicating a temporary stop set in the fluctuation stop processing (see S4217 in FIG. 70) of the sound lamp control device 113. When a (temporary stop command for display) is received, a data table in which display data in which a symbol to be stopped and displayed slightly fluctuates is set as fluctuation stop display data is determined.

In the fluctuation stop command process, first, the fluctuation stop data table indicated by the display fluctuation stop command is determined, and the decided fluctuation stop data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d ( S6931). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents thereof are cleared (S6932).

Next, based on the fluctuation stop data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6931, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6934). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6935), the fluctuation stop command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description is continued. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no fluctuation stop command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display notification command among the unprocessed commands (S6416), and the display notification If there is a command (S6416: Yes), the notification command process for display is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the additional effect command process (S6415) will now be described with reference to FIG. 80(b). FIG. 80(b) is a flowchart showing notification command processing. In this notification command processing, processing corresponding to the notification command (for display) received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

This notification command is output to the display control device 114 among various notification commands set when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command for indicating various abnormal states set by the main controller 110. This process is executed when the display control device 114 receives the display notification command.

In the notification command process, first, the display (notification) data table corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the notification command is determined, the determined display (notification) data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and stored in the display data table buffer. 233d (S6951). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents thereof are cleared (S6952).

Next, based on the display (notification) data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6951, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6954). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6955), the notification command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the present embodiment, among the various notification commands set by the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 discriminates only the display command indicating that the notification target is the third pattern display device 81 (display device). However, it is not limited to this, and related commands other than the display command, such as a light emission command, a voice output command, and a character object driving command, are once received and processed by the display control device 114. It may be configured such that the related command is output to the corresponding control device in a state in which information for indicating the data content (display mode) set in 1 is added.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description is continued. In the process of S6416, if it is determined that there is no display notification command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6418). If there is a change command (S6418: Yes), back image change command processing is executed (S6419), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the back image change command process (S6419) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing back image change command processing. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag 233w for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S7503) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001). ). Then, among the bits of the back image determination flag 233x provided for each back image type (back surface A, B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to ON, and the other bits are set to ON. The bit corresponding to the back image type is set to OFF (S7002), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 233w set by the process of S7001 is turned on, the back image type after change is selected from the back image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S7002. Identify.

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified to display one of the back faces A and B according to the back face type of the back face image defined in the display data table, from the back face image determination flag 233x set in S7002, The type of background image to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the background image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type ( Resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more background image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S6418, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S6418: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6420). Otherwise (S6420: Yes), the error command process is executed (S6421), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the error command processing (S6421) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. In this error command processing, processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7102). End the processing and return to the command determination processing.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S7102, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S7102 sets on error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6416 that there is no error command (S6420: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6422), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

In the process of S6401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is again determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes ), and the processing of S6402 to S6422 is executed again. Then, the processing of S6401 to S6422 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image, that is, the fluctuation pattern command for display and the stop type command for display, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. It extracts and executes fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77(a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 77(b)), which are processing corresponding to each command, and for other commands, A process to discard the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77(a)) executed in this case, in the processing of S6501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image which are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, details of the display setting process (S6303), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84. FIG. FIG. 82 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 82, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201). ), it is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of S7202 to S7204 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is ON (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S7202), S7203-S7204 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S7203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S7204).

Details of the warning image setting process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S7301).

In task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image are specified, and the display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing such as

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7204), or if it is determined in the process of S7203 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S7203: No), then the process proceeds to S7205.

In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S7401, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403). The time data corresponding to the performance time of the display data table for demonstration set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S7405), and this processing ends. and return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7403 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S7406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. is always expanded, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S7402: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 82, the description is continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are obtained from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task processing (S6304), the type of the sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the processing of S7206 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., and each sprite , determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S7209).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S7209: No), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. The transfer data table buffer 233e is set (S7210), and then the content is cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S7214), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), returns to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. In addition, only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114 .

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before. Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before is described. In the task processing (S6304), until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, from the last stop design determination flag set by S7215, the stop design of the fluctuation production performed one before is specified, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7209, if the fixed display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S7216). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect. After that, a process for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demonstration display data table is obtained and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents thereof are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the fixed display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加, you can set the drawing contents.

In the process of S7216, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S7216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is finished, and that demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is finished as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

The simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variable images corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the stop type command for display is displayed for a predetermined time after the effect time of the power-on variable image ends. A process of setting a display data table specifying that the image is to be displayed still in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86, the details of the transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 85(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. Processing is executed (S7502), the transfer setting processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of S7501, that is, if it is turned off (S7501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, resident image transfer setting processing (S7502), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 85(b). FIG. 85B is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been given to the image controller 237 (S7601). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7602). In the processing of S7602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing has ended. . If it is determined by the processing in S7602 that the transfer processing has not ended (S7602: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to S7603. Also, as a result of the processing of S7601, even if a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S7603). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this processing ends.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information about the resident target image data that has not been transferred, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the process of S7603, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75B), the command is executed instead of the simple command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. Since determination processing (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 displays A normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) (see S7501: No in FIG. 85(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 , the image drawing process can be performed. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be immediately drawn and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some kind of image.

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303) is used. Information described in the indicated address is obtained (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7703), furthermore, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer is to be started in the ON state, is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

In addition, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the process of S7703 and S7704 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S7706 that the transfer process has not ended (S7706: No), the image transfer process continues in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to S7707. Also, as a result of the process of S7705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S7705: No), the process proceeds to S7707.

In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), image data to be transferred exists, so is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on, but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709). Then, if the back image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the back image determination flags 233x, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7711). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination ( The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is obtained (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

As a result of the process of S7713, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S7713 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the image to be transferred, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the processing of S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal transfer setting processing ends. The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

By executing the normal image transfer processing in this way, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing. When the displayed stop type information is determined to be a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the image data used for the back image is stored in the back image of the resident video RAM 235 . Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, the transfer data table stores the image data to be transferred so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, thereby obtaining the predetermined address according to the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, details of the drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 87 is a flow chart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), a drawing list (FIG. 38) is generated (S7801). That is, in the processing of S7801, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). Then, parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination top address of the normal video RAM 236 when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Further, while expanding the image drawn in one of the frame buffers, the image drawn from one of the frame buffers can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and drawing processing and display processing are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

In the rendering process, after the process of S7802, the rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process of the loading process (see FIG. 75(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to perform display processing of an image for one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing processing for an image for one frame is being performed.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 107. FIG. In the second embodiment, part of the configuration of the game board 13, part of the configuration of the main controller 110, and part of the configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 are different from the first embodiment. are doing.

In the above-described first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, a special electric operation opening 643 and an out opening 644 are provided as ball entrances into which winning balls of the general electric winning device 640 can enter. was Then, when the ball wins the special electric activation port 643, the accessory winning game is executed. However, in the above-described first embodiment, there is only one operation port for executing the role winning game, and the game cannot be given variations, so the game becomes monotonous. In addition to getting tired of the game early, since the role game is executed with the same operation pattern every time, the role game is executed at a timing that makes it easy for the ball to enter the V winning opening 165 (special electric call) There is a problem that the game (making the ball win in the operation port 643) is easily executed.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, a second special electric operation opening 1643 is newly provided in the general electric prize winning device 640, and the winning ball of the general electric prize winning device 640 is the special electric operation opening 643, the second special electric operation opening 1643 or out port 644 is configured to win.

Furthermore, when the ball wins the special electric activation opening 643 and when the ball wins the second special electric activation opening 1643, different opening patterns of the role winning game are executed. The role winning game that is executed when the ball wins in the second special electric operation opening 1643 is more likely than the role winning game that is executed when the ball wins. 165 (see FIG. 6) to facilitate winning.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player more interested in the flow state of the ball that has won the general electric prize device 640 during the general figure per game. In addition, when the ball wins the special electric operation opening 643 and when the ball wins the second special electric operation opening 1643, different action patterns of the role winning game are executed, so the ball is made to win the V winning opening 165. It is possible to make it difficult to execute a game (a ball is awarded to the special electric operation opening 643) to execute the accessory game at an easy timing.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, for various effects executed in the first embodiment described above, in the remaining variation time of the normal symbol being executed in the case where the role game is executed during the time saving state The first game method suggesting effect executed based on and the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) that is interrupted when the role winning game is executed during the time saving state. The difference is that 2 game method suggesting effects are newly configured to be executable.

In the above-described first embodiment, as described above with reference to FIGS. 12 to 19, as an effect for showing the game content of the game (special electric game) during the time saving state, the remaining duration of the time saving state, the normal symbol The display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to display the performance for notifying the result of lottery, the execution status of the game for the normal figure, and the execution status of the game for the accessory, and the game during the time saving state is performed. It was intended to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

However, in the effect content executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, it is possible to inform the player of the game situation during the time saving state (during the V rush) in an easy-to-understand manner, but during the V rush , it was not possible to allow the player to select a game method in order to allow the player to perform a better game. In other words, when the role per game that interrupts the subtraction of the remaining variation time of the special symbol variation that is the remaining period of the V rush (the period until the special symbol variation that satisfies the time saving end condition is completed) is executed, the current situation However, by causing the V winning device 65 to win a plurality of balls, it is better to finish the accessory winning game as soon as possible while aiming for the winning of the ball to the V winning opening 165. It is not possible to suggest (notify) the player whether it is better to give up winning the ball and continue the accessory winning game for as long as possible.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, since the above-described first game method suggesting effect and second game method suggesting effect are executable, various suggestions to be executed to the player It is possible to select the game method of the role winning game based on the performance contents of the performance. Therefore, the game during the V rush is executed according to the game method arbitrarily selected by the player, and the advantage during the V rush can be varied according to the selection result of the game method. In contrast, it is possible to make the player interested. Also, since the degree of advantage during the V rush can be varied according to the selection result of the player, the player can actively participate in the game, and the interest in the game can be improved.

First, with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89, the configuration of the general electric prize winning device 640 used in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 88 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the general electrical winning device 640 in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a winning ball in the device 640 can flow down to the second special electric activation opening 1643. The configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment differs from that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above in that the configuration inside the electric winning device 640 is different. are identical. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 88, the general electric prize winning device 640 of the second embodiment is different from the general electric prize winning device 640 of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 3) on the lower end side of the second partition 640k2 (the second partition wall 640k2). In order to form a fourth flow path 641d through which a ball can flow from an opening formed by the cutout, a second partition wall 640k2 is formed. The difference is that a fourth partition wall 640k4 connected to the lower end side of is provided.

In order to cause the second flow path 641b to flow down toward the special electric operation opening 643 without the balls flowing down the first flow path 641a flowing into the fourth flow path 641d, the second flow path 641b and the fourth flow The normal position (see FIG. 88) that shields the passage 641d, and the passage that the ball flowing down the first passage 641a flows down the second passage 641b and enters the special electric activation port 643 is blocked, and the fourth The difference is that a variable third movable valve 1643 is provided to the operating position (see FIG. 89) leading to the flow path 641d.

Although detailed description will be given later, the third movable valve 1643 is configured to be variably operated by driving the third movable valve solenoid 209f connected to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110. It is variably operated to the normal position and the operating position described above with a predetermined variable pattern when the operation control of the game per normal figure by the control device 110 is started. The third movable valve 1643 is at the operating position when the third movable valve solenoid 209 is turned on (when energized), and when the third movable valve solenoid 209d is turned off (when not energized). ) in the normal position. Therefore, in the state in which the normal figure per game is not executed, it is positioned at the normal position. In addition, in the second embodiment, the game content (operation Patterns) are different, and the ball is made to enter the V winning hole 165 more easily during the role winning game when the ball enters the second special electric activation hole 1643.例文帳に追加Therefore, when the third movable valve solenoid 209d is set to OFF, by positioning the third movable valve 1642 in the normal position where the ball cannot enter the second special electric operation opening 1643, the ball is illegally placed in the third position. The act of making the 2 special electric operation opening 1643 win a prize can be suppressed.

Further, the movable range of the third movable valve 1643 is the second state in which the ball flowing down the first flow path 641a is guided to the third flow path 641c (see FIG. 88). It is designed so that it does not come into contact with the movable valve 642 . By configuring in this way, the third movable valve 1642 can be moved without considering the movable state of the second movable valve 642 .

Then, when the second movable valve 642 is positioned in the first state and the third movable valve 1642 is positioned in the operating position, as shown in FIG. It is received by the upper surface of the valve 1642 and guided to the second special electric activation opening 1643 . Although the detailed description will be given later, the third movable valve 1642 is variably operated in a predetermined variable pattern triggered by the start of a normal game. It is configured to repeatedly execute a variable operation in which the position is maintained for 0.2 seconds and the normal position (see FIG. 88) is maintained for 1.5 seconds. In other words, about 85% of the balls passing through the second movable valve 642 positioned in the first state enter the special electric operation opening 643, and about 15% enter the second special electric operation opening 1643. are doing. Therefore, during the game per normal pattern, the special electric operation opening 643 becomes an operation opening in which the ball is more likely to win than the second special electric operation opening 1643.

Furthermore, when the ball wins in the second special electric operation opening 1643, it is easier for the ball to enter the V winning opening 165 in the executed accessory winning game than when the ball wins in the special electric operation opening 643. It is configured as follows. Therefore, in the second embodiment, unlike the above-described first embodiment, in the special electric game aiming at the V jackpot game triggered by the normal pattern lottery, the game result during the game per normal pattern (the ball is in any operation port Since the ease of winning the ball into the V winning port 165 during the role game is different depending on whether the player wins, the player can play both the normal figure winning game and the role winning game. It is possible to improve the amusement of the game by watching.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, in the normal figure per game that is executed during the time saving state, whether the operation opening in which the ball wins becomes the special electric operation opening 643 or the second special electric operation opening 1643 is the third movable Since it is determined by the variable operation of the valve 1642, the operation port where the ball is likely to win does not change depending on the normal game to be executed, and it is always expected that the ball will win to the second special electric operation port 1643. However, it is possible to make the player willingly execute the game per normal pattern, but not limited to this, for example, as a normal pattern per type set when winning in the normal pattern lottery, the first Approximately 85% of the balls passing through the second movable valve 642 located in the state enter the special electric operation opening 643, and approximately 15% enter the second special electric operation opening 1643. The normal normal pattern per type to be played, and the advantageous normal pattern per type in which the advantageous normal pattern per game is executed with a higher percentage of the balls entering the second special electric operation port 1643 than the normal normal pattern per game. It may be configured to be configurable.

By configuring in this way, for the player aiming for the V jackpot game by the special electric game, in all of the lottery result of the normal pattern (the set normal pattern per type), the general pattern per game, and the accessory per game, The player can be made to pay attention, and the special electric game can be played more enthusiastically.

<Regarding the contents of the effect executed in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 90 and 91, characteristic contents of various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described. Figure 90 (a), in the time-saving state (V rush), the normal figure long per game and the role per game, out of the state in which the game is executed in duplicate, the remaining period of the general figure long per game is predetermined It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content displayed when it is less than the period (less than 15 seconds), FIG. Schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed when the remaining time of the normal figure long winning game is a predetermined period or more (15 seconds or more) in the state in which the hitting game and the hitting game are performed in duplicate. is. It should be noted that the same display modes as the display modes displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 explained in the above-described first embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. do.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, it is configured so that the time saving state continues until the special symbol variation that satisfies the end condition of the time saving state is completed, and during the time saving state (special symbol variation When the role per game is executed during (in), the special symbol variation being executed is interrupted (the process of subtracting the variation time of the special symbol variation is interrupted). That is, while the accessory-per-game is being executed, it becomes a period during which the remaining period of the time saving state is not subtracted. Therefore, the game can be played without worrying about the remaining period of the time-saving state until the ball enters the V winning port 165 (V winning) after the role winning game is executed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in order to execute many jackpot games (V jackpot games) during the time saving state (during the V rush), a long fluctuation time is required as the special symbol fluctuation executed during the time saving state. By setting, the method of lengthening the period of the time saving state (the period until the time saving end condition is satisfied) and shortening the interval at which the game per role is executed. There is a way to interrupt. The former method is based on the result of the special symbol lottery and is set regardless of the skill of the player. I was afraid that I would lose my motivation.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is possible to vary the length of the period from which the remaining period of the time saving state is subtracted depending on the skill of the player. It is possible to play the game voluntarily.

Here, a method of interrupting the subtraction of the remaining period of the time saving state as much as possible by shortening the interval at which the accessory winning game is executed will be described. The game during the time saving state in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is the same as that of the above-described first embodiment, and first, a lottery of normal symbols is executed, and a normal pattern winning game is executed based on the normal pattern winning. . Then, during the general figure winning game, the ball is entered into the special electric operation opening 643 and the second special electric operation opening 1643 in the general electric winning device 640, the accessory winning game is executed, and the V winning device is performed during the accessory winning game. A game (special electric game) aiming at a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed by making the ball enter the V prize opening 165 in 65 (V prize).

And, the normal symbol lottery which is the trigger for the start of the special electric game is configured not to be newly executed in the state where the normal symbol lottery is already executed or during the normal pattern winning game. In other words, the accessory winning game and the lottery of normal symbols are configured to be executable in duplicate. In addition, a plurality of end conditions are set for the role winning game, and if a predetermined number (three) of balls wins the V winning device 65 during the role winning game, or if a predetermined period of time The period during which the action scenario of the game is updated until the end timing of the role winning game ends with the elapse of the time.

Therefore, by lengthening the execution period of the game per character that is executed in overlap with the period during which the normal pattern drawing period (fluctuation period), that is, the normal pattern per game is not executed, the normal pattern per game is executed It is possible to shorten the execution period of the special symbol variation in the period when it is not performed. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the execution interval of the winning game due to the execution of the special symbol variation during the normal symbol lottery period (during the variation period).

In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured to be able to execute a plurality of open operation patterns as a game per normal pattern, and an open state (electric accessory 640a open state) is set to be relatively long, and an unfavorable normal pattern winning game in which the open state is set shorter than the advantageous normal pattern winning game can be executed. there is Furthermore, in the unfavorable general pattern winning game, after the open state that allows the ball to enter the general electrical winning device 640 is set, the closed state that makes it difficult for the ball to enter the general electrical winning device 640 is maintained for a long period of time ( 15 seconds).

Even in the long-term closed state in this disadvantageous normal pattern per game, as in the above-described normal symbol fluctuation period, it is substantially impossible to execute a new per role game. When the game and the game with the unfavorable standard pattern are executed in duplicate, the execution period of the game with the character object is extended to execute the special symbol variation in the period when the new game with the character object is not executed. period can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution interval of the accessory per game from becoming longer due to the execution of the special symbol variation during the closing period during the normal per per game.

As described above, a new accessory per game is not executed during the V rush (difficult to do) disadvantageous period (ordinary figure fluctuation period, normal figure per game closed period) is determined, and the disadvantageous period and special figure fluctuation It is possible to shorten the execution period of the special symbol variation during the unfavorable period by lengthening the execution period of the role-winning game being executed when the period of the game-per-accessory during which the subtraction is interrupted overlaps. In the present embodiment, when the unfavorable period overlaps with the accessory winning game, the player is configured to be notified of this fact.

That is, the content of the effect displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 makes it possible for the player to visually recognize the game situation of the normal figure winning game during the role winning game. Then, it is configured to vary the performance mode according to the game situation of the normal figure winning game during the accessory winning game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 90 (a), during the execution of the per-accessory game (the state in which the special figure variation is interrupted), a long period of time (15 seconds) in the game per disadvantage normal figure If it is during the closed period, in the display area HR10, as information indicating the remaining period until the end of the game per unfavorable normal pattern (remaining period until the end of the closed period), "10 seconds until the end of the normal normal pattern" is displayed. comment is displayed. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of "continue STOP with non-winning role" is displayed as a notification mode for informing the player of the advantage of lengthening the playing period of the game with the role. Since other display elements are the same as those in FIG. 13B of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, by allowing the player to grasp the display mode of the display area HR10 and the display mode of the sub-display area Ds, the player can send the ball to the V winning device 65 for the role winning game being executed. A game aiming at a V prize by winning a prize, that is, the end condition of the role winning game based on the ball winning is likely to be established, and the playing period for the role is likely to be shortened, but the V winning leads to a jackpot game (V jackpot game). Execution of the target first game or giving up the execution of the jackpot game (V jackpot game) due to the V winning, and lengthening the role-winning game period by establishing conditions for ending the role-winning game based on the passage of time. It is possible to select whether to execute the second game (a game in which balls are not shot).

Also, as shown in FIG. 90(b), even when the role winning game and the long-term variation of the normal symbols overlap, the game method ( Information for selecting the first game, second game) is displayed. Specifically, during execution of the game per role (state in which the special figure fluctuation is interrupted), when the remaining period of the normal symbol fluctuation during execution is a predetermined period (15 seconds) or more, In the display area HR11, a comment "15 seconds until normal pattern fluctuation ends" is displayed as information indicating the remaining period of the normal pattern fluctuation. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of "continue STOP without winning a prize" is displayed as a notification mode for informing the player of the advantage of lengthening the playing period of the winning role game. Since other display elements are the same as those in FIG. 13B of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the length of the period during which the special symbol fluctuation is interrupted depending on the player's skill (game content to be executed), so that the player is during V rush (time saving) (during state) can be actively executed. In addition, regardless of which game the player selects, a game result that may be advantageous to the player in different respects can occur. The game result can be greatly changed, and the game method can be selected more positively.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as the operation pattern of the game per normal pattern to be executed during the time saving state, at least the game per advantageous normal pattern and the game per disadvantage normal pattern are configured to be executable, and are executed during the time saving state. The variation time of the normal pattern is also configured to be settable for a long time variation and a short time variation. Then, when the accessory winning game is executed during the advantageous normal pattern winning game and when the accessory winning game is executed during the short-time fluctuation of the normal pattern, the ball wins V during the accessory winning game. It is constructed such that the player is more advantageous when the game (first game) that causes the device 65 to win a prize is executed.

In this way, the timing (presence or absence of a disadvantageous period) of a disadvantageous period (a period in which a new accessory winning game cannot be executed) during the time saving state (during the V rush) is varied according to the lottery result of the normal symbol. Thus, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous during the time-saving game (during the V rush).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as the role winning game, there is an advantageous role winning game in which the ball that has won the V winning device 65 easily enters the V winning opening 165 (V winning), and an advantageous role winning game. A game with a disadvantageous handicap, and a game with an advantageous handicap can be executed, and when the game with an advantageous handicap is executed, it is possible to win the ball at a rate of about 100% during the game with the handicap. It is possible, and the probability of winning a V prize is about 1/11 when a game with a disadvantage is executed.

Therefore, when the role winning game executed overlapping with the disadvantage period described above is the advantageous role winning game, the effects shown in FIGS. 90(a) and 90(b) are not executed. ing. By configuring in this way, a game (second game) not aiming at execution of the V jackpot game is executed even though a situation occurs in which the player can easily win the V jackpot game. , it is possible to prevent the player from playing an excessively disadvantageous game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 91(a) and (b), the effect executed based on the length of the remaining period (remaining variation time) of the special symbol variation interrupted in the winning game will be described. do. FIG. 91(a) schematically shows the display contents of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 when the remaining period of the interrupted special symbol variation is shorter than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). FIG. 91(b) schematically shows the contents displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 when the remaining period of the interrupted special symbol variation is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). It is a schematic diagram schematically shown.

In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, when a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed during the time saving state (V rush), the time saving state set after the jackpot game ends As the period, the period obtained by adding the remaining period of the special symbol variation during interruption to the number of times of time reduction (for example, four times of time reduction) set corresponding to the jackpot type of the jackpot game to be executed is set. are doing. That is, after the special symbol variation restarted after the end of the big winning game (the special symbol variation interrupted during the execution of the big winning game), the subtraction of the number of times of time saving is started.

Therefore, even when a jackpot game (V jackpot game) in which the same jackpot type is set is executed, according to the remaining period of the special symbol variation at the time of the jackpot game (V jackpot game), after the jackpot game ends The period of the new time-saving state to be set will be different. Like the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it has a game property aiming at a big hit by a game different from the special symbol lottery during the time saving state, and an element for ending the special symbol lottery during the time saving state. In the pachinko machine 10 used as (an element for setting the continuation period of the time saving state), it is desirable to execute a jackpot game (V jackpot game) in a state where the remaining period of the special symbol variation is long. However, as in the first embodiment described above, the remaining short time mode 801 (see FIG. 12(a)) indicating the duration of the time saving state does not indicate the remaining period of each special symbol variation, and the time saving state Information corresponding to the total time until the special symbol variation that satisfies the end condition ends is displayed, and the timer 812 (see FIG. 12 (b)) until the special symbol variation that satisfies the end condition of the time saving state ends It is configured so that the time is counted down.

That is, in the effect mode described in the first embodiment described above, the player cannot grasp the remaining period of the special symbol variation that is interrupted by the execution of the role winning game. It was something. On the other hand, in this embodiment, in addition to the effect mode of the first embodiment described above, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the remaining period of the special symbol variation during interruption. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 91(a), when the remaining period of the special symbol variation during interruption during the per-accessory game is 0.1 seconds (see FIG. 91(c)), the secondary In the display area Ds, the comment "Better chance to get VGET with the next winning prize" is displayed, and as shown in FIG. In the case of 20.1 seconds (see FIG. 91(d)), the sub-display area Ds is configured to display a comment "If you win VGET this time, you have a great chance".

That is, in the present embodiment, the remaining period of the interrupted special symbol variation is discriminated, and if the discrimination result is shorter than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), the current role winning game is executed. When the ball is entered into the V winning opening 165 and the V jackpot game is executed, there is an effect indicating that the period of the time saving state (V rush period) set after the V jackpot game is likely to be shortened. When the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed and interrupted is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), the balls are entered into the V winning opening 165 in the current role winning game, and the V jackpot game is executed. When executed, an effect is executed to indicate that the time-saving state period (V rush period) set after the V jackpot game is likely to become longer. Therefore, it is possible for the player to select (select whether or not to allow the ball to enter the V winning opening 165) based on the content of the effect executed during the V jackpot game. It is possible to greatly vary the game result during the V rush period based on the game method arbitrarily selected by the player.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, in order to execute the production shown in FIG. 91(a), other production execution conditions are provided. The first condition that is established when the winning information that has been won is included in the winning information of the ordinary symbols), and the special symbol variation during the interruption that will establish the time-saving end condition ( It has a second condition that is satisfied when it is not time saving final fluctuation). By setting the effect execution conditions in this way, the time saving state is terminated immediately after selecting a game in which the ball is not allowed to win during the role winning game being executed according to the comment displayed in the sub-display area Ds. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where

91(a) and (b) described above may use the execution conditions used in the present embodiment. A comparison means is provided for comparing the variation time of the special symbol variation to be performed, and when the comparison result determines that the remaining period of the special symbol variation during interruption is longer, V during the current accessory winning game. If it is determined that the remaining period of the special symbol variation during the interruption is shorter, the effect that suppresses the V winning during the current role game 91 (see (a)) may be configured to be executed.By this, for the period of the special symbol variation that is actually performed (the period of the special symbol variation that will be performed next), during the interruption Since it is possible to relatively discriminate the remaining period of the special symbol variation, it is possible to execute (set) a highly accurate performance for the player and enhance the performance effect.

As described above, as shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, in the present embodiment, during the V rush during the role per game (interruption of the special symbol variation), the normal symbol fluctuation situation, the normal symbol per game game situation, And, based on the remaining period of the interrupted special symbol variation, the player is made to select a game method by executing an effect suggesting a game method that can be advantageous to the player. Although it is configured to be able to provide fun, it is not limited to this, for example, the normal pattern fluctuation situation during the role per game, the game situation of the normal pattern per game, and is interrupted It is also possible to execute an effect suggesting each of the remaining periods of the special symbol variation, that is, execute only the situation suggesting effect suggesting various situations during the V rush period. By constructing in this way, the player who has grasped the situation suggesting performance analyzes the game situation during the V rush period, predicts the most advantageous game method by himself, and provides the enjoyment of selecting the game method. can be done.

<Regarding the flow of the game during the time saving state in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG.92 and FIG.93, the flow of the game in a time saving state in 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. In the second embodiment, the period of the normal pattern per game is short, and the period of the normal pattern per game is short as the normal pattern per game that is executed when the normal pattern lottery in the time saving state is won. It is configured to be executable with a long normal figure per game. Then, the normal electric winning device 640 for the length of the entire period of the game per normal pattern is open for the normal pattern per game with a longer period of the normal pattern per game than the normal pattern per game with a shorter period of the normal pattern per game. It is configured so that the ratio of the length of the period in which it is in the state is low. In other words, the game per normal pattern with a short period of the game per normal pattern can win the ball to the general electric winning device 640 during the game per normal pattern, and in a short period (about 3.5 seconds). It becomes an advantageous normal game in which the game ends, and the normal game with a long period of the normal game per game can win the ball to the normal electric winning device 640 during the normal game. The period until the game per figure ends is long (about 17.5 seconds), and it becomes a game per disadvantageous normal figure.

Furthermore, although the detailed description will be described later, the above-described disadvantageous general pattern winning game opens the general electric winning device 640 in the same variable operation as the advantageous general drawing per game, and then the general electric winning device 640 is in a closed state. This period is a game per normal pattern set for 15 seconds, and the 15 seconds is a disadvantageous period in which the remaining period of the special symbol variation is wastefully subtracted.

Therefore, the timing at which the above-described disadvantageous period is set and the game contents of the winning-accessory game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the game per unfavorable normal pattern (per normal pattern B) is executed. When a normal pattern lottery wins and a game with a disadvantageous normal pattern is executed, the general electric winning device 640 opens for 1 second, closes for 0.5 seconds, opens for 1 second, closes for 15 seconds, and opens for 0.1 seconds. A per-figure game is executed. Then, when the winning ball in the general electric prize winning device 640 during the first 1-second opening period wins the special electric operation opening 643, the prize winning game is executed.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 96(b), but as shown in FIG. , If it is terminated with the passage of time, since the game per role ends 8.1 seconds after the game per role is started, during 8.1 seconds, the special symbol fluctuation (special symbol fluctuation) Subtraction of variable time is interrupted. Therefore, since it is possible to overlap a part of the disadvantageous period set when the game per unfavorable normal figure (per normal figure B) is executed with the state where the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is not subtracted, during the unfavorable period It is possible to reduce the variation time of the special symbol variation to be subtracted.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 92(b), during the operation of the special electric power (accessory winning game), a predetermined number (three) of balls are won into the V winning device 65, and the accessory winning game is ended based on the winning of the ball. 92(a), the period of the role-per-game (the subtraction of the variation time of the special symbol variation is suspended) period) is shortened, the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation to be subtracted during the unfavorable period is lengthened.

In such a situation, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 90(a), the period until the end of the game per normal pattern is displayed in the display region HR10, and furthermore, the special pattern variation is displayed in the sub display region Ds. Since the game method for continuously interrupting the subtraction of the variable time is displayed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to select the game method during the role-winning game. In addition, when the ball enters the V winning port 165 during the accessory winning game and the V jackpot game is executed, the jackpot game period and the disadvantageous normal game (normal game B) are executed. Since it overlaps with the disadvantageous period set in the case where the game is played, the player is not disadvantaged by setting the disadvantageous period.

Therefore, the player should select a game method that prevents the player from ending the role winning game being executed with the lapse of time and wastefully subtracting the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation. It is possible to provide the enjoyment of selecting a game method aiming at a V jackpot game by winning a ball into a V prize opening 165 in a hitting game (the winning probability is about 1/11).

Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the flow of the game when the long time variation (15 seconds) disadvantageous to the player is selected as the variation time of the normal symbol variation executed during the time saving state will be described. do. FIG. 93 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the game when a long time variation (15 seconds) disadvantageous to the player is selected as the variation time of the normal symbol variation executed during the time saving state. be.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, a short variation of 1 second and a long variation of 15 seconds are selected as the variation time of the normal symbol variation executed during the time saving state. . Here, during the fluctuation period of the normal symbols in the time saving state, the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is executed, and since it is a period in which the game per normal pattern is not executed, it becomes a disadvantageous period disadvantageous to the player. . Therefore, similar to the closed state period during the normal per game described above with reference to FIG. The game can be executed efficiently during the time-saving state by overlapping the variation period of the symbol variation and preventing the variation time of the special symbol variation from being wastefully subtracted during the unfavorable period.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 96(b), but as shown in FIG. , and when the accessory winning game is ended based on the ball winning, the period of the accessory winning game ( Since the period during which the subtraction of the variation time of the special symbol variation is interrupted is shortened, the variation time of the special symbol variation to be subtracted during the disadvantage period is lengthened.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 93(b), when the ball is not entered into the V winning device 65 during the special electric operation (game for the role) and is terminated after the passage of time, the game for the role is executed. 8.1 seconds after the start of the game, the per-accessory game ends, so the subtraction of the variation time of the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) is interrupted for 8.1 seconds. Therefore, since the fluctuation period of the long normal symbol fluctuation (15 seconds) can be overlapped with the state where the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is not subtracted, the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation that is subtracted during the disadvantage period is reduced. be able to.

In such a situation, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 90(b), the period until the variation per normal pattern ends is displayed in the display area HR11, and furthermore, the special symbol variation is displayed in the sub display area Ds. Since the game method for continuously interrupting the subtraction of the variable time is displayed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to select the game method during the role-winning game. In addition, when the ball enters the V winning port 165 during the role winning game and the V jackpot game is executed, the jackpot game period and the long period of normal pattern fluctuation (15 seconds) are changed. are overlapped, the player is not disadvantaged by setting the disadvantageous period.

Therefore, the player should select a game method that prevents the player from ending the role winning game being executed with the lapse of time and wastefully subtracting the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation. It is possible to provide the enjoyment of selecting a game method aiming at a V jackpot game by winning a ball into a V prize opening 165 in a hitting game (the winning probability is about 1/11).

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 99. FIG. In the second embodiment, part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 and part of the configuration of the RAM of the sound lamp control device 113 are different from those of the above-described first embodiment. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 94, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 and the RAM of the sound lamp control device 113 are replaced with the electrical configuration (see FIG. 21) of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above. 2 in that a new solenoid is added to the solenoid 209 connected to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the second embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 88 and FIG. The difference is that a 3-movable valve solenoid 209f is added. Although detailed description will be given later, this third movable valve solenoid 209f is controlled to switch between an ON state and an OFF state at predetermined intervals upon execution of a game per normal pattern. As a result, the third movable valve 1642 is varied between the normal position (see FIG. 88) and the operating position (see FIG. 89) during the normal game. Therefore, when the second movable valve 642 operates during the normal game, and the ball that wins the general electric winning device 640 flows down toward the special electric operation port 643, depending on the situation of the third movable valve 1642 , and whether the ball wins the special electric activation opening 643 or the second special electric activation opening 1643 is switched. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the state of the winning ball flowing down in the electric prize winning device 640 .

Next, contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 95(a). FIG. 95(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, in place of the various operation scenario table 202e, various operation scenario 2 tables 202aa are provided in the ROM 202 (see FIG. 23) in the above-described first embodiment, and a normal figure per type selection table 202ab is newly provided. , It is different in that a normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202ac is provided. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, per general pattern type selection table 202ab will be described with reference to FIG. 95(b). FIG.95(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content prescribed|regulated to per normal figure classification selection table 202ab. Unlike the above-described first embodiment, the second embodiment provides a plurality of types in the general pattern per game executed during the time saving state, and is configured to be able to execute the general pattern per game with different operation patterns. ing. Although the specific description is omitted, in the normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 48), when the normal symbol variation that is won per normal pattern stops (S1117: Yes), the ball has passed through the through gate 67. Based on the value of the second per type counter C9 (0 to 99) acquired at the time and the set game state, the type per normal pattern is selected with reference to the normal per pattern selection table 202ab. It is configured as follows.

When specifically explaining the contents defined in the per normal pattern type selection table 202ab, the game state that is set is a time saving state (low probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design), acquired In the range where the value of the second per type counter C9 is "0 to 89", "per normal pattern A" is defined as the type per normal pattern, and in the range of "90 to 99", as the type per normal pattern " B" per normal figure is stipulated. Specific operation contents of the game per normal pattern will be described later, but when "per normal pattern A" is selected (selection rate 90%), multiple times over the entire game period per normal pattern (twice ), the electric accessary 640a is in an open state, and a normal figure winning game is executed in which it is relatively easy to win the ball to the general electric prize winning device 640. On the other hand, when "per normal pattern B" is selected (selection rate 10%), after the same general pattern per game as "per normal pattern A" is executed (in the latter half of the game period per normal pattern), A normal figure per game is executed in which a period in which the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state is set for a long period of time (15 seconds).

As described above, the game per normal pattern is executed without interruption of the special symbol variation, so "per normal pattern A" is the special electric activation port 643 or the ball throughout the game per normal pattern. It is possible to execute a game aiming at the accessory winning game by making it win to the second special electric operation port 1643, but "normal figure winning B" is to win the ball to the general electric winning device 640 in the latter half of the general figure winning game. Since the difficult period is set for a long time, the remaining period of the special symbol variation is wastedly subtracted, resulting in a game with a disadvantageous normal symbol that is disadvantageous to the player.

In the present embodiment, in the case where such a normal figure per game that is disadvantageous to the player is executed, if the player is executing the role per game, it is possible to continue the per role game for a long time. , It is configured to execute an effect (see FIG. 90(a)) that allows the player to select a game that reduces the remaining period of the special symbol to be subtracted during the execution period of the game per disadvantageous normal symbol. there is As a result, it is possible to change the period during which the time saving state continues based on the player's skill, so that the player's willingness to play can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG.95(c), the content of normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202ac is demonstrated. FIG.95(c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content prescribed|regulated by normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202ac. This normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202ac is a data table for selecting a normal pattern variation pattern that is executed when a ball passes through the through gate 67, and is a normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 48 Reference), it is usually referred to when selecting the fluctuation time of the design.

In the above-described first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, the fluctuation time of the normal design was unified to 3 seconds, so in the process of selecting the fluctuation pattern of the normal design (see S1114 of FIG. 48), 3 seconds Only the fluctuation time (variation pattern) is set. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, different variation patterns can be selected based on the set game state and the value of the variation type counter CS2 referred to when selecting the variation type of the normal symbol. It consists of

Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal state, the normal variation with a variation time of 3 seconds is selected for the entire range (0 to 198) of the acquired variation type counter CS2. . In other words, in the normal state, the normal pattern variation for 3 seconds, which is the same as in the first embodiment, is executed. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the time saving state, the value of the variation type counter CS2 is defined as a variation pattern with a variation time of 1 second in the range of "0 to 179", and a short variation is defined. A long variation is defined as a variation pattern with a variation time of 15 seconds in the range of "180 to 197".

Thus, in this embodiment, the length of the period during which the normal pattern is fluctuating largely differs depending on the normal pattern fluctuation pattern selected during the time saving state. During the fluctuation period of the normal symbols in this time saving state, it is a period in which the game per normal pattern is not executed, and furthermore, it is a period in which the remaining period of the special symbol fluctuation is subtracted, so during the time saving state. , It becomes a normal pattern fluctuation pattern that is disadvantageous to the player.

In the present embodiment, when the normal symbol variation is executed in the disadvantageous normal symbol variation pattern that is disadvantageous to the player, if the player is executing the role per game, the per role game is executed. By continuing for a long time, an effect (see FIG. 90 (c)) that allows the player to select a game that reduces the remaining period of the special symbol to be subtracted during the execution period of the unfavorable normal figure fluctuation is executed. It consists of As a result, it is possible to change the period during which the time saving state continues based on the player's skill, so that the player's willingness to play can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96(a), contents of each operation scenario table 202e that are different from those of the first embodiment described above will be described. FIG. 96(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of each operation scenario table 202e in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, a part of the action scenario table 202e3 for the normal figure is changed from the action scenario table 202e (see FIG. 26) of the first embodiment described above, and the action for the second role is changed. The difference is that a scenario table 202e5 is added. Other than that, they are the same, and the same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the action scenario table 202e5 for the second role will be described with reference to FIG. 96(b). FIG. 96(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the action scenario table 202e5 for the second prize. This second prize winning motion scenario table 202e5 is a data table that defines the motion scenario of the winning prize game to be executed when the ball wins in the second special electric activation opening 1643 in the normal winning game. .

Specifically, at the timing when the value of the scenario counter is "1", that is, immediately after the performance of the role winning game, the accumulation solenoid 209c is turned off, and the state in which the accumulation solenoid 209c is turned off is the winning state of the role winning game. is stipulated to continue until the Then, the value of the scenario counter is "25", that is, the opening period (the period during which the V opening/closing door 65a is closed) continues until 0.1 seconds after the start of the winning-accessory game. An operation scenario is defined in which the value ranges from "26" to "400", that is, the V winning opening solenoid 209b is turned on (a round period is set) for 1.5 seconds. When the V winning opening solenoid 209b is set to ON, the V open/close door 65a is opened, and the ball can enter the V winning device 65. A ball that enters the V winning device 65 during this round period passes through the storage valve 66a that is moving to the ball non-storage state (retracted state) and reaches the first movable valve 66b. Therefore, since a plurality of balls can be made to flow into the first movable valve 66b during one role-winning game, it is possible to increase the V winning probability during the role-winning game.

When the value of the scenario counter reaches "400", the V winning opening solenoid 209b is turned off, and the V open/close door 65a is closed until the value of the scenario counter reaches "1650". , the operating scenario is defined to last for 5 seconds. After that, when the value of the scenario counter reaches "1650", the value of the scenario counter reaches "2025" until "1675", that is, after the V winning opening solenoid 209b is set to ON for 0.1 second. During , the V winning opening solenoid 209b is set to OFF.

In this embodiment, an operation scenario for the storage valve 66a defined in the above-described operation scenario table 202e2 for the role and an operation scenario for the storage valve 66a defined in the second operation scenario table 202e5 for the role are used. , the contents of operation of the storage valve 66a are made different, but this is not the only option. It may be configured to vary the winning ratio of balls to 165.

Specifically, the operation scenario of the storage solenoid 209c is set such that the storage solenoid 209c is turned off for 3 seconds after the start of the per-accessory game, then the storage solenoid 209c is set on for 2 seconds, and then stored again. It is specified to set the solenoid 209c to OFF, and when the ball wins the second special electric activation opening 1643, the opening period (the period in which the V open/close door 65a is closed) 0.1 seconds, the round period (V open/close The operation scenario is defined so that the role-winning game is executed with a period of 1.5 seconds during which the door 65a is open and an ending period of 1.5 seconds (a period during which the V open/close door 65a is closed).

On the other hand, when the ball wins the special electric activation opening 643, the opening period (the period in which the V opening/closing door 65a is closed) is 3.1 seconds, and the round period (the period in which the V opening/closing door 65a is in the open state) is 1.5 seconds. , the action scenario may be defined so that the winning-accessory game is executed with an ending period (the period during which the V opening/closing door 65a is in a closed state) of 1.5 seconds. By configuring in this way, in the role winning game that is executed based on the winning of the ball in the second special electric activation port 1643, the storage valve Since ball 66a is in a retracted state (ball non-storage state) in which balls cannot be stored, a plurality of balls that have entered the V winning device 65 flow into the first movable valve 66b, and enter the V winning port 165. can increase the odds of doing so.

In addition, in the role winning game executed based on the winning of the ball in the special electric activation port 643, the storage valve 66a protrudes so that the ball can be stored during the period in which the ball can be entered into the V winning device 65. Since the state (ball storage state) is reached, only the balls stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 66a, out of the balls that have won the V prize device 65, flow into the first movable valve 66b, resulting in a V prize. The probability of winning the prize to the mouth 165 can be reduced.

By configuring in this way, in the case of varying the ease of winning the ball into the V winning opening 165 during the role winning game (V winning rate) according to the type of the role winning game to be executed. , the opening pattern of the V opening/closing door 65a, and the operation pattern of the storage valve 66a, only the length of the period (opening period) until the V opening/closing door 65a is first opened is changed to vary the V winning rate. Since it is possible, it is possible to simplify the operation control in the role-winning game. In other words, only during the period from the start of the winning role game to the end of the opening period, the operation scenario is set for each type of the winning role game, and after that, the operations of various devices are controlled based on the common operation scenario. can be executed, operation control can be simplified.

Further, according to the above example, the role winning game that is advantageous to the player (the role winning game that is executed when the ball enters the second special electric activation port 1643) is disadvantageous to the player. Making the ball enter the V winning device 65 at an earlier stage after the start of the role winning game than the role winning game (the role winning game executed when the ball wins in the special electric activation port 643). It is configured so that As a result, it is possible to efficiently execute a game that is advantageous to the player. In addition, as the contents of operation of the storage valve 66a, an operation that is advantageous to the player (an operation to turn off the storage solenoid 209c) is made to win the ball to the V winning device 65 by a role winning game that is disadvantageous to the player. Since it is set before the timing at which it becomes possible, the ball that has won the V prize winning device 65 during the role winning game that is disadvantageous to the player is clogged in the V prize winning device 65, or Even if the ball is intentionally retained, an operation advantageous to the player (operation to turn off the storage solenoid 209c) is not executed thereafter, so that the act of illegally winning the ball into the V winning opening 165 is suppressed. can be done.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, the action scenario defined in the action scenario table 202e2 for the role item is different from that in the above-described first embodiment. Specifically, Similar to the second prize winning action scenario table 202e5 described with reference to FIG. 96(b), a closing period of 15 seconds and an opening period of 0.1 seconds are defined in the second half of the winning prize game. The difference is that

That is, in the present embodiment, when the role winning game is executed, the role winning game is terminated based on the ball winning and the role winning game is terminated based on the passage of time. It is configured so that the game period of the hitting game can be greatly varied. As a result, the game result during the time saving state can be greatly changed according to the selection result of the game method during the accessory winning game, and the player can be motivated to play the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 97(a), the difference from the above-described first embodiment will be described in the action scenario table 202e3 for the normal figure of the second embodiment. FIG. 97(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the per-universal figure operation scenario table 202e3 of the second embodiment. The second embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the operation contents of the game per normal pattern executed during the time saving state are different, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 97(a), in the second embodiment, the operation scenario of the game per normal pattern executed during the time saving state is different from that in the above-described first embodiment, and 2 per normal pattern for reducing working hours. It has a scenario 202e33 and a three-scenario 202e33 per normal diagram for reduced working hours.

First, with reference to FIG. 97(b), the contents of the 2 scenarios 202e33 per standard diagram for reducing working hours will be described. FIG. 97(b) is a model that schematically shows the contents stipulated in the two scenarios 202e33 per standard diagram for reducing working hours. This time-saving normal pattern per 2 scenario 202e33 defines the operation scenario of the normal pattern per game that is executed when "normal pattern per A" is selected as the normal per pattern type, and the normal per pattern game as a whole is defined. The operation scenario has a length of 3.6 seconds, and the ratio of the period in which the electric accessory 640a is in the open state to the entire game period per normal pattern is defined in 3 scenarios per normal pattern for reduced working hours 202e34, which will be described later. A higher normal figure per game is executed.

Specifically, when the value of the scenario counter is "1", an operation scenario is defined in which the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to ON, and an operation scenario is defined in which the third movable valve solenoid 209f is set to ON. stipulated. It should be noted that the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to the ON state until the normal game per game ends (the value of the scenario counter becomes "900"). In other words, in the normal game per game executed corresponding to the "per normal pattern A", the ball that has won the electric accessory 640a always wins the special electric operation opening 643 or the second special electric operation opening 1643. Configure.

In addition, the third movable valve solenoid 209f has an ON period of 0.2 seconds (a period during which the third movable valve 1642 is positioned at the operating position where the ball can enter the second special electric operation opening 1643) and 1.5 seconds. off period (a period in which the third movable valve 1642 is positioned at a normal position in which the ball can win a prize in the special electric operation port 643) is set repeatedly. In other words, the ratio of balls that pass through the second movable valve 642 to the second special electric operation opening 1643 is about 11%, and the ratio of the balls that have passed through the second movable valve 642 to the special electric operation opening 643 is about 11%. It is configured to be 89%.

Then, the value of the scenario counter is "25", that is, the opening period (the period in which the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state) continues until 0.1 seconds after the normal game is started, and then the scenario counter The value ranges from "26" to "274", that is, for 1 second, the general electric solenoid is set to ON (the electric accessory 640a is in an open state), and the range from "275" to "400", That is, the general electric solenoid is set to OFF for 0.5 seconds (the electric accessory 640a is closed). Then, the normal solenoid is set to ON again in the range from "401" to "649", that is, for one second, and then the normal solenoid is set to ON again in the range from "650" to "900", that is, for one second. An operating scenario is defined in which the electric solenoid is set to OFF. That is, when the normal pattern per game based on the action scenario defined in the normal pattern per 2 scenario 202e33 for time saving is executed, the opening operation in which the electric accessory 640a is opened for 1 second is executed twice per normal pattern. The game is executed, and the total open state period of the electric accessory 640a in which the ball can enter the general electric prize winning device 640 is 2 seconds with respect to the entire period (3.6 seconds) of the game per normal figure. Therefore, about 40% of the game period per normal pattern is an advantageous period for the player (it is possible to progress the special electric game (special electric operation opening 643, or the second special electric operation opening 1643 It is possible to win the ball to ) period).

Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the contents of the 3 scenarios 202e34 per standard diagram for reducing working hours will be described. FIG. 98 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents stipulated in the 3 scenarios 202e34 per standard diagram for reducing working hours. This time-saving normal pattern per 3 scenario 202e34 defines the operation scenario of the normal pattern per game executed when "normal pattern per B" is selected. Since the contents specified in the 3 scenarios 202e34 per time-saving normal diagram are the same as the above-described 2 scenarios 202e33 per time-saving normal diagram until the value of the scenario counter reaches "650", the details detailed description is omitted.

The scenario counter value is in the range of "650" to "3500", that is, the general electric solenoid is set to OFF for 15 seconds, and then the scenario counter value is in the range of "3501" to "3524", that is, The common solenoid is set to ON for 0.1 seconds, and then the common solenoid is set to OFF when the value of the scenario counter is "3525".

In other words, the general pattern per game defined in the 3 scenarios 202e34 for reducing working hours has a total length of the general pattern per game period of 17.7 seconds, and the ball is received during the general pattern per game. It is configured so that the total period during which the device 640 can win a prize is 2.1 seconds. Therefore, the total open state period of the electric accessory 640a in which the ball can enter the general electric prize winning device 640 is 2.1 seconds with respect to the entire game period (17.7 seconds) per general pattern. , Approximately 12% of the game period per normal figure is an advantageous period for the player (it is possible to progress the special electric game (special electric operation opening 643, or it is possible to win the ball to the second special electric operation opening 1643) period). Furthermore, when the second electric accessory 640a opening operation is completed, the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state for fifteen seconds.

Therefore, when the 3 scenario 202e34 for the time saving normal pattern is set during the time saving state, the period in which the ball cannot win the general electric prize winning device 640 is set long, which is disadvantageous to the player. It becomes a game. Also, in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, when the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, four times) (the fourth special symbol variation ends If you do), it is configured so that the time saving state is terminated, and during the general pattern per game, the remaining period of the special symbol variation is subtracted. That is, even during the closed state of 15 seconds, since the remaining period of the special symbol variation is subtracted, it becomes a game per normal pattern that is disadvantageous to the player.

Next, referring to FIG. 99, the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 99 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the sound ramp control device 113. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 99, in the second embodiment, for the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the first embodiment described above, a normal pattern fluctuation time counter 223aa, a normal pattern per time counter 223ab, and a firing prohibition The difference is that the suggestion flag 223ac and the effect set flag 223ad are added. Other elements are the same, and the same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The normal pattern fluctuation time counter 223aa is a counter for measuring the normal pattern fluctuation time, and when the normal pattern fluctuation pattern command is received, the fluctuation time corresponding to the received command is set, and the sound lamp control device In the main process of 113 (see FIG. 60), the value of the counter set in the effect update process periodically (every 1 millisecond) is decremented. It is configured to be referred to when the role-winning game is executed, and to execute various effects based on the counter value.

The time counter 223ab per normal pattern is a counter for measuring the game period in which the game per normal pattern is executed, and when the start command per normal pattern is received, the game period per normal pattern corresponding to the received command is set, and the value of the counter set in the effect update process that is executed periodically (every 1 millisecond) in the main process (see FIG. 60) of the audio lamp control device 113 is decremented. are doing.

The launch prohibition suggestion flag 223ac is set to ON when executing a puncture suggestion effect for puncturing the role winning game (terminating the role winning game with the lapse of time). It is set to OFF when the hitting game ends. When the role-winning game ends, the display mode of the ending screen of the role-winning game is changed based on the setting status of the flag and the termination conditions of the established role-winning game (end of prize winning, end of elapsed time). referred to when

The effect setting completion flag 223ad includes a puncture suggesting effect suggesting that the role winning game is to end based on the lapse of time, and an effect suggesting that the ball is awarded to the V winning device 65 during the role winning game. It is for indicating that it has been set, and is set to ON when a dedicated effect is set during the role winning game.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main controller in the second embodiment>
In the second embodiment, in contrast to the above-described first embodiment, different per-accessory games depending on the operation opening (special electric operation opening 643, second special electric operation opening 1643) in which the ball wins during the game per normal figure is significantly different in that it is configured to be executable. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, in the normal symbol lottery, the variation time of the normal symbol is the game state, and based on the value of the acquired variation type counter CS2, the normal symbol variation pattern selection table 202ac (Fig. 95 (c) (see), and the difference is that it is configured to be able to execute a normal figure per game with different operation contents as a general figure per game executed during the time saving state. The control processing executed by the main controller 110 is the same except for the contents described above, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 100, the contents of the special electric starting gate winning process 2 (S108) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special electric starting gate winning process 2 (S108). This special electric starting opening winning process 2 (S108) is different from the special electric starting opening winning process (see S108 in FIG. 50) of the above-described first embodiment. The difference is that the hit type corresponding to the special electric activation port 1643) can be set, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same control contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 101 to 107, control processing executed by the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. The explanation will focus on the differences from the processing. The control processing executed by the audio ramp control device 113 of the second embodiment is different from the control processing executed by the audio ramp control device 113 of the first embodiment described above in contrast to the command determination processing (S4112 in FIG. 61). (see S4217 in FIG. 66), instead of the normal figure related process 2 (see S4217 in FIG. 101), the role to be executed in the hit related process (S4219 in FIG. 67) The performance update process 2 (S4151 in FIG. 105) replaces the performance update process (S4111 in FIG. 72) in place of the performance update process 2 (S4851 in FIG. 103) in place of the object hit related process (S4804 in FIG. 70). See) is different in that it executes Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 101, the contents of the general-purpose map related process 2 (S4217) will be described. FIG. 101 is a flow chart showing the contents of the normal map related process 2 (S4217). This general figure related process 2 (S4217) is, for the general figure related process (see S4217 in FIG. 66) of the first embodiment described above, the process executed when the general figure fluctuation pattern command is received, and the general The difference is that the processing executed when a start command is received per figure is changed, and the rest is the same.

When the general pattern related process 2 (S4217) is executed, first, it is determined whether the general pattern variation pattern command is received (S4701), and if it is determined that it is received (S4701: Yes), the general pattern variation start process is executed (S4751), and then the process ends. In addition, the regular pattern fluctuation start processing (S4751) executed in the processing of S4751 will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 102, but the processing for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation is executed. In this embodiment, it is configured to be able to select a plurality of variation times as the variation pattern of normal symbols (see FIG. 95 (c)), and the advantage of the game executed during the time saving state according to the selected variation pattern It is configured to vary the degree.

In the process of S4701, if it is determined that the normal pattern fluctuation pattern command is not received (S4701: No), it is determined whether the normal pattern per start command is received (S4703), and if it is determined that it is received ( S4703: Yes) Based on the received command, the time per normal pattern (END time of the corresponding game operation scenario per normal pattern) is set in the time counter per normal pattern (S4752), and the start command per normal pattern for display is set. It is set (S4704), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the start command per normal pattern is not received in the process of S4703 (S4703: No), the same S4705 to S4714 as the normal pattern related processing (see FIG. 66) of the first embodiment described above Execute the process and terminate this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the contents of the normal pattern fluctuation start process (S4751) will be described. Figure 102 is the flowchart which shows the contents of normal figure fluctuation start processing (S4751). When normal figure fluctuation start processing (S4751) is executed, first, it is determined whether the present is in time saving (in time saving state) (S4771), and if it is determined that it is not in time saving (S4771: No), The normal figure fluctuation command for display is set (S4771), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not in the time saving process in S4771 (S4771: Yes), the normal pattern fluctuation time is extracted from the received normal pattern fluctuation pattern command (S4772), and the extracted value is the normal pattern fluctuation time counter 223aa (S4773), the above-described processing of S4774 is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the content of the role-related process 2 (S4851) will be described. FIG. 103 is a flow chart showing the contents of the role-related process 2 (S4851). This award-winning related process 2 (S4851) is different from the above-described award-winning related process (S4804) in that the content of the processing to be executed when the winning-access start command is received and the ending command is received. The elements are the same except for the points that have been changed, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the role winning related process 2 (S4851) is executed, it is first determined whether or not a role winning start command is received (S5101), and if it is determined that the command has been received (S5101: Yes), the role winning start The process is executed (S5151), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it has not been received in the processing of S5101 (S5101: No), the processing of S5103 to S5107, which is the same as the above-described accessory per related processing (S4804), is executed, and the ending command is issued in the processing of S5107. If it is determined that it has been received (S5107: Yes), then it is determined whether the firing prohibition suggestion flag 223ac is set to ON (S5152).

In other words, in the processing of S5152, it is determined whether or not an effect is being executed to suggest that it is more advantageous to prohibit the player from shooting the ball. If it is determined in the processing of S5152 that the firing prohibition suggestion flag 223ac is not ON (S5152: No), the processing of S5108 to S5109, which is the same as the processing related to the winning of the prize (S4804) described above, is executed, and this processing ends. do. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is set to ON in the processing of S5152 (S5152: Yes), the firing prohibition suggestion flag 223ac is set to OFF (S5153), and the end condition of the game per normal pattern is that time has elapsed. It is determined whether there is (S5154).

If it is determined that it is the end of the normal figure per game based on the passage of time (S5154: Yes), the display command indicating "success" is set (S5155), and it is not the end of the normal figure per game based on the passage of time That is, when it is determined that the normal game per game based on the winning ball is finished (S5154: No), a display command indicating "sorry" is set (S5156). In this way, it is predicted whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player to shoot the ball based on the game content of the normal game in the time saving state, and the player is given a game based on the prediction result. When a performance suggesting a method is executed, it is determined whether or not the normal pattern winning game is finished based on the content of the suggestion, and the display mode of the end screen of the normal pattern winning game is varied based on the determination result. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner whether or not the current game method was the correct selection.

It should be noted that, unlike the present embodiment, for example, based on the game content of the normal figure per game in the time saving state, it is predicted whether it is an advantageous state or a disadvantageous state for the player to shoot the ball, and the prediction result In order to predict and select a game method that is really advantageous to the player, an effect that suggests a game method different from the actual prediction result (so-called Gus effect) is also configured to be executable, in the process of S5154, it is determined whether the game corresponding to the actual prediction result (elapsed time, ball winning) ended the game per normal figure, and the determination result Based on this, the display mode of the end screen may be varied. As a result, it is possible to execute an unexpected performance for the player.

In addition, in this case, in addition to the above-mentioned effect of suggesting the game method to the player, a situation notification effect (for example, effect of suggesting the type of game per normal pattern) is executed to make the player predict the actual game situation. good to do Thus, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting whether or not the effect suggesting the game method to the player is a false effect. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the normal figure winning game and the accessory winning game are executed in duplicate, it is configured to execute an effect suggesting the game method to the player, but this is not the only option. Instead, if the player is in a state where the player can select the game method, it may be constructed such that an effect suggesting the game method to the player is executed in the same manner.

Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the contents of the role winning start process (S5151) will be described. FIG. 104 is a flow chart showing the contents of the prize winning start process (S5151). In the role winning start process (S5151), various processes for varying the effect mode to be executed are executed according to the game situation at the start timing of the role winning game.

When the accessory winning start process (S5151) is executed, first, the type of the winning special electric activation opening is extracted based on the received command (S5301). Then, it is determined whether the current role winning game is a role winning game to be executed when the ball enters the special electric activation port 643 (special electric activation port 1) (S5302), and the special electric activation port 1 is entered. If it is determined that the result is not based on winning (S5302: No), a display command for indicating an advantageous prize is set (S5303), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5301, if it is determined that it is based on winning the special electric activation gate 1 (S5301: Yes), then read the value of the normal pattern fluctuation time counter (S5304), the read value It is determined whether the value indicates 10 seconds or longer (S5305). If it is determined that the value indicates 10 seconds or longer (S5305: Yes), a display command is set to suggest that the time has passed for each character (S5306), and the firing prohibition suggestion flag 223ac is set to ON. (S5307), the process proceeds to S5310. Based on the display command set in the process of S5306, a display mode (corresponding to a comment in the secondary display area Ds) for suppressing (prohibiting) the ball from being shot is displayed as shown in the display screen shown in FIG. 90(a). ) is displayed.

If it is determined in the process of S5305 that the value does not indicate 10 seconds or more (S5305: No), then it is determined whether the value read in the process of S5304 indicates 5 seconds or less ( S5308), when it is determined that it is 5 seconds or less (S5308: Yes), by ending the role per game early, it is possible to execute the per role game again by the next general figure per game. Therefore, a display command is set to indicate the end of winning a prize (S5309), and the process proceeds to S5310. Here, based on the display command set by the process of S5309, the display mode of prompting the ball to be shot (for example, "Early shoot the ball and hit the character" is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 When the game ends, a chance") is displayed.

If it is determined in the processing of S5308 that the value does not indicate 5 seconds or less, that is, the value indicates 5 to 10 seconds, the display command for indicating the winning character is displayed without setting a dedicated display command. A command is set (S5310), the effect setting completion flag 223ad is set to ON (S5311), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the first game method suggesting effect and the second game method suggesting effect are executable. It is possible to select the game method of the accessory winning game based on the performance contents of various suggestive performances. Therefore, the game during the V rush is executed according to the game method arbitrarily selected by the player, and the advantage during the V rush can be varied according to the selection result of the game method. In contrast, it is possible to make the player interested. Also, since the degree of advantage during the V rush can be varied according to the selection result of the player, the player can actively participate in the game, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the present second embodiment, according to the situation of the normal pattern variation and the normal pattern per game executed during the per role game, so that the player can select the game method of the per role game Although it is configured to execute a suggestive effect, it may be configured to execute a similar suggestive effect when a plurality of games are executed in duplicate, for example, the end of a jackpot game. When a time-saving state is set later, a suggestive performance is executed that allows a player to select the end timing of the big winning game based on the length of the remaining period of the normal symbol variation being executed. You can By configuring in this way, when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the normal pattern variation executed during the normal state (normal pattern low probability state) is executed for a long time, and during the time saving state It is possible to suppress the situation in which the period in which the normal symbol variation is not executed becomes long and the desire to play is lowered.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 113. FIG. In the above-described first embodiment and second embodiment, the special electric operation opening (special electric operation opening 643 or second special electric operation opening 1643) is based on the fact that the ball has won, and the per-accessory game is executed, It was configured to interrupt the subtraction of the special symbol variation being executed. In other words, it is configured such that the more the role-winning game is executed, the more advantageous the player is. Therefore, the game method during the time-saving state (during the V rush) becomes monotonous, and there is a risk that the player may become bored with the game.

On the other hand, the third embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment and second embodiment in that the contents of the processing for the special symbol variation being executed in the case where the accessory winning game is executed are different. Specifically, according to the type of game per role that is executed (set), the process of interrupting the special symbol fluctuation being executed and the process of discarding (discarding the remaining fluctuation time, Regardless of the lottery result, forcibly stop the process, and in addition to discarding, the process of ending the time saving state is configured to be executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to greatly vary the game situation during the time saving state based on the execution of the role-winning game, so that the player can be provided with a game that does not get bored.

Furthermore, based on the performance executed during the time-saving state (V rush), it is configured to execute the performance that allows the player to select whether or not to execute the role winning game. As a result, for example, when a role winning game in which the time saving state ends is executed, it is possible to suppress the distrust of the player due to the sudden end of the time saving state. can. In addition, since the player himself/herself can select whether or not to execute the role-winning game based on the content of the effect to be executed, the player can be motivated to participate in the game, and the interest in the game is improved. can be made

<Regarding production content in the third embodiment>
First, with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109, the contents of characteristic effects among the effects executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 in the third embodiment will be described. The effect executed in the present embodiment is different from each of the above-described embodiments, in that the duration of the time saving state (the duration of the V rush) is displayed in addition to the timed subtraction display of the value displayed on the timer 812. Reduction display in which the value displayed on the timer 812 is greatly reduced when the special symbol variation being executed is discarded by executing the winning game, and reduction in time by executing the accessory winning game. The major difference is that it is configured to be able to execute disappearance display that terminates the state.

Furthermore, when the special symbol variation being executed has won a jackpot (during the jackpot variation), a suggestive effect is provided to suggest that the jackpot variation being performed will be discarded by executing the role winning game. It differs greatly in that it is configured to run. Other display contents are the same except that the size and position of the display area are changed in order to display the differences described above. The same display contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 108(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents executed when the remaining period of the special symbol jackpot variation reaches a predetermined period (10 seconds), and FIG. 108(a) is a schematic diagram showing a state of holding each symbol when the display screen shown in 108(a) is displayed. FIG. As shown in FIG. 108 (a), when the remaining period of the jackpot fluctuation reaches 10 seconds, the display mode of "entering danger time" is displayed, and until the danger time ends (until the jackpot fluctuation is displayed to stop) "10 seconds" is displayed as the period display mode 851 indicating the period. Similar to the value displayed on the timer 812 , the period display mode 851 is periodically subtracted (counted down) by the effect update processing of the sound lamp control device 113 .

Furthermore, in the V rush variation area 811, in addition to the "V" pattern corresponding to the success of the game during the V rush (execution of the V jackpot game), a "skull" indicating a game result that is disadvantageous to the player is displayed. A pattern imitating the is displayed. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, characters of "During Danger Time, it's a big pinch" are displayed.

In other words, when entering the danger time, it is suggested to the player that there is a possibility that the big winning variation will stop (execution of the big winning game based on the special drawing) after a predetermined time (10 seconds). On the other hand, although the details will be described later, this danger time is configured to be executed even in some cases where the lottery result of the special symbol is lost.

Therefore, when entering the danger time, the player either does not execute the special electric game aiming at the role game (does not shoot the ball) until the end of the danger time, or executes the special electric game even during the danger time. Then, it will be selected whether to go for the V winning game willingly.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is assumed that the remaining period of the special variation being executed reaches a predetermined period (10 seconds) as the entry condition of the danger time, but is not limited to this. Depending on whether the lottery result is a jackpot or a loss, the conditions for entering the danger time may be different. It may be configured so that it can enter the danger time when it reaches "7 seconds", and it can be configured so that it can enter the danger time only when the remaining period is "10 seconds" during the deviation fluctuation. As a result, it is possible for the player to predict the lottery result of the special symbol variation being executed based on the display of the remaining period of the danger time displayed when the danger time is entered.

In addition, in the above-described example, an example was shown in which a condition for entering a danger time exclusively for the duration of the jackpot fluctuation was provided, but this is not the only option. It may be configured so that the danger time can be entered when the remaining period of is "14 seconds". As a result, it is possible to motivate the player who understands that the ball is fluctuating to play the game without shooting the ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 108(b), the display contents when the role winning game is executed during the danger time and the big winning variation is discarded will be described. FIG. 108(b) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents when the accessory winning game is executed during the danger time and the big winning variation is discarded. As shown in FIG. 108(b), when the prize winning is executed during the danger time, the characters "end" are displayed in the period display mode 851 to notify that the danger time has ended. Then, in the V rush variation area 811, a pattern resembling a "skull" is stopped and displayed in a grid pattern to indicate that the jackpot variation that was being executed has been discarded. Furthermore, a comment "Unfortunately... pull back" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

On the other hand, since the accessory winning game is being executed, a display mode for aiming for a V prize in the accessory game is displayed.

Also, since the special symbol variation being executed has been discarded, only "10 seconds", which is the variation time of the next variation, is displayed in the display area HR4 indicating the remaining period of the time saving state (V rush). By displaying such a display screen, it is possible to notify the player that the big winning variation has been discarded in an easy-to-understand manner.

Also, when the accessory winning game in which the variation of the jackpot is interrupted is executed during the danger time, as shown in FIG. 109, after continuing the danger time, it is notified that the V jackpot game has been executed. A performance is performed.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 110, the electrical configuration of the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, in contrast to the above-described first embodiment, when the ball wins the special electric activation opening 643, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is acquired, and the acquired first winning Based on the value of the type counter C2, the type (jackpot type) of the jackpot game (V jackpot game) to be executed when winning the V winning port 165 can be selected, and the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 The difference is that the configuration of is partially changed. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 110(a), the contents of the V jackpot type selection 3 table 202c3 will be described. FIG. 110(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the V jackpot type selection 3 table 202c3. As shown in FIG. 110(a), three types of jackpot types are defined in the V jackpot type selection 3 table 202c3. The game state (number of times of time saving) set after the end of the jackpot game is configured to have different effects on the special symbols being executed when the accessory winning game is executed.

Specifically, the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 79", the jackpot C is defined, in the range of "80 to 94", the jackpot D is defined, "95 to 99 ”, the jackpot E is defined in the range.

"Jack C" (selection rate 80%) is the same content as the V jackpot game executed in each embodiment described above, 10 rounds (R) jackpot game, time saving 4 times, special symbol being executed is set. "Jack D" (selection rate 15%) is set with 10 rounds (R) of jackpot games, 4 times of time saving, and contents of discarding the special symbol variation being executed. "Jack E" (selection rate 5%) is set to 15 rounds (R) of jackpot games, 15 times of time saving, discarding the special pattern variation being executed, and ending the time saving state.

As described above, when the "jackpot E" that is most disadvantageous to the player in terms of the effect of the special symbol variation during execution is set, when the player wins V during the role-per-game, it is most advantageous to the player. Since the jackpot game and the game state after the jackpot game ends (the number of times of time reduction) are set, the last chance can be given to the player. Also, for example, if the final variation of the time saving state is off, and if it is just before the end of the off variation, that is, if the time saving state ends in a few seconds without doing anything, this "jackpot E" can be the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player.

Next, referring to FIG. 110(b), the contents of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 110(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 110(b), this embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that a danger time selection table 222ca is added. Other than that, they are the same, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The danger time selection table 222ca is a data table that is referred to when determining whether to actually execute the danger time performance when the conditions for entering the danger time are established, and the result of the lottery for the special symbol variation being executed. It is configured to vary the execution probability based on

Here, the contents of the danger time selection table 222ca will be described with reference to FIG. 110(c). FIG. 110(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the danger time selection table 222ca. As shown in FIG. 110(c), when the special symbol variation being executed is a jackpot variation, the danger time effect is more likely to be executed than when it is a losing variation. Thus, when the danger time presentation is executed, the game can be played while expecting that the big win is fluctuating.

Specifically, if the special symbol lottery result (special symbol determination result) is a big hit, regardless of the value of the acquired production counter 223f, execution of danger time is selected, and the special symbol lottery result (special symbol If the judgment result) is out, it is selected not to execute the danger time production when the value of the production counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 89", and the danger time production is executed in the range of "90 to 99". is configured to be selected.

By configuring in this way, even if the special drawing lottery result being executed is not successful, the danger time effect can be executed, so that the game of the player during the danger time has game characteristics related to prediction and selection. Since it can be held, the amusement of the game can be improved.

<Contents of control processing in the third embodiment>
Next, control processing contents in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In this embodiment, the content of the control processing executed by the main controller 110 and the content of the control processing executed by the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. are identical. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same elements, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 111, the special electric starting gate winning process 3 (S158) executed by the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 111 is a flow chart showing the details of the special electric starting gate winning process 3 (S158). This special electric starting prize winning process 3 (S158) selects a different jackpot type when the ball wins the special electric working opening 643 in contrast to the special electric starting prize winning process (see S108 in FIG. 50) of the first embodiment described above. It is different in that it is configured to be possible and the process corresponding to the selected jackpot type is executed, but other than that, it is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the special electric starting prize winning process 3 (S158) is executed, the same processes of S1301 to S1303 and S1305 to S1309 as the special electric starting winning process (see S108 in FIG. 50) are executed. Then, in the processing of S1303, it is determined that the special electric is in operation (during the game per character), and if it is determined that the special electric is in operation, then the jackpot type selected this time is "jackpot E". (S1371), and when it is determined that it is a "jackpot E" (S1371: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 0 (S1373), and special symbol variation stop processing is executed (S1374) , S1375. In addition, since the content of the special symbol variation stop processing (S1374) is the same as the special symbol variation stop processing (see S208 in FIG. 45) of the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1371, if it is determined that it is not a "jackpot E" (S1371; No), then it is determined whether it is a "jackpot D" (S1372), and if it is determined that it is a "jackpot D" (S1372: Yes), the process of S1374 is executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S1375. If it is determined in the process of S1372 that it is not the "jackpot D", that is, that it is the "jackpot C" (S1372: No), the processes of S1305 and S1306 are executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S1375.

In the process of S1375, the role winning flag is set to ON (S1375), the command corresponding to the current winning type (“jackpot C” to “jackpot E”) is set (S1376), and the special electric activation command is set. (S1308), this processing ends.

Next, the effect update process 3 (S4171) executed by the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 112 is a flow chart showing the content of effect update process 3 (S4171). This effect update process 3 (S4171) replaces the effect update process 2 (see S4151 in FIG. 105) of the above-described second embodiment with the danger time setting process (S5371) regarding the setting of the danger time effect, and the process of S5306. The only difference is that it is configured to run after the . The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the danger time setting process (S5371) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 113 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the danger time setting process (S5371). In this danger time setting process (S5371), when the conditions for executing the danger time effect are satisfied, it is determined whether or not the danger time effect is actually executed, and the process for setting the danger time effect is executed based on the determination result. be done.

When the danger time setting process (S5371) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the variable time counter 223r indicates 10 seconds of the remaining period (S5601), and it is determined that the value does not indicate 10 seconds of the remaining period. If it does (S5601: No), it means that the conditions for executing the danger time are not met, so this processing ends.

In the process of S5601, when it is determined that the value indicates the remaining period of 10 seconds (S5601: Yes), the lottery result of the special symbol variation being executed (special figure lottery result), the value of the acquired effect counter 223f and , the danger time selection table 222ca is referenced to select whether or not to execute the danger time effect (S5602).

In the processing of S5603, based on the processing result (selection result) of S5602, it is determined whether or not to execute the danger time production (S5603). A command is set (S5604), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5603, if it is determined not to execute the danger time effect (S5603: No), this processing ends.

The display command set in the process of S5604 executes the danger time effect shown in FIG. 90(a).

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 137. FIG. In the fourth embodiment, the configuration of the game board 13 and the configuration of the main controller 110 are different from those of the first embodiment.

In the above-described first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, in the normal game state, the special figure game that makes the ball enter the special figure entrance 64 is executed, and when the game state shifts to the time saving state, the electric accessory 640a is easier to open, the game ball is entered into the special electric operation opening 643 in the general electric winning device 640, and the special electric game aiming to enter the game ball into the V winning opening 165 in the V winning device 65 is a game It was configured to be a game method that is advantageous to players. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, instead of the special electric operation opening 643, a ball opening (second ball opening 1645) that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol is provided (see FIG. 114). As a result, the opening of the V open/close door 65a associated with the V winning device 65 is triggered by the entry of the ball into the second ball entrance 1645, not by the winning of the accessory due to the entry of the ball into the special electric operation opening 643. It is a case where a small hit is won by lottery of the second special symbol.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are executed at the same time (so-called simultaneous variation). During the time-saving state, the lottery for the second special pattern is set so that the fluctuation time is shorter than the lottery for the first special pattern so that the lottery for the second special pattern is easily executed. there is

In addition, as a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, when the total of the number of times of lottery of the first special symbol (number of fluctuations) and the number of times of lottery of the second special symbol (number of fluctuations) is 100 times The cumulative time-saving end condition that is established in 1 and the special figure 1 time-saving end condition that is established when the number of lotteries (number of fluctuations) of the first special symbol reaches 4 times are set, and the cumulative time-saving end condition or special figure 1 It is configured so that the time saving state ends when the time saving end condition is satisfied.

In the fourth embodiment having the configuration described above, the variation pattern of the first special symbol set during the time saving state is the variation of the special symbol set during the time saving state in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above. It is configured to have the same content as the pattern, and the playability during the time saving state (during the V rush) is different from the above-described first embodiment by entering the ball into the special electric start port 643 and hitting the role. A small winning game (V Winning game that opens the winning device 65) is used, and before the number of times of variation of the first special symbol (the number of lotteries) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 4 times), the cumulative time saving end condition is It is different in that it uses a game in which the time saving state ends even when it is established.

That is, in the fourth embodiment, the period for indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol (fluctuation period of the second special symbol) can be variably set in contrast to the above-described first embodiment. , For example, as the fluctuation period of the second special symbol, a short fluctuation period (for example, 0.1 second fluctuation time) and a long fluctuation period (for example, 10 second fluctuation time) can be set. , The interval of the small winning game executed during the time saving state can be greatly changed according to the fluctuation period of the set second special symbol. Therefore, since it is possible to enrich the variation of the game during the time saving state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the accumulation time saving end condition can be established based on the execution of the lottery for the second special symbol, it is possible to set an upper limit to the number of small winning games to be executed during the time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given a privilege (V jackpot game) excessively during the time-saving state. Furthermore, by making it difficult to set a short variation period (for example, 0.1 second) as the variation period of the second special symbol set during the time saving state, small winning games are frequently executed during the time saving state. can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessive amount of benefits (prize balls) in a short period of time.

The characteristic configuration and gameplay of the fourth embodiment will be mainly described below. First, the timing of updating the number of times of time saving and the determination processing timing for ending the time saving state in the fourth embodiment will be described. As in the fourth embodiment, in a simultaneous variation type game machine capable of executing the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol in parallel, the variation of the special symbol executed during the time saving state. In order that the number of times does not exceed a specified number (for example, 100 times), at the timing of starting fluctuation of each special symbol, update processing of the number of times of shortening of working hours and determination processing for ending the state of shortening of working hours are configured to be executed. was As a result, the time saving state can be ended at the timing when the special symbol variation of the specified number of times is executed, so that the 101st special symbol variation exceeding the specified number of times (for example, 100 times) can be reliably performed in the normal state. It was possible to execute it, and it was suppressed that the privilege (special symbol fluctuation in the time saving state) was excessively given to the player. However, before the final variation of the time saving state (100th special symbol variation) is stopped and displayed, specifically, immediately after the 100th special symbol variation is started, the time saving state ends. Depending on the determination (variation) timing of the special symbol, there is a problem that the period in which the time saving state is set is shortened and the player feels uncomfortable.

Specifically, for example, as the determination (variation) of the first special symbol, immediately after the special symbol variation of the 100th rotation (the final time of the number of times of time saving) is executed, the determination (variation) of the second special symbol, that is , If the special figure variation of the 101st rotation is performed, the time saving state can be terminated at the timing when the special figure variation of the 100th time is performed (immediately before the special figure variation of the 101st rotation is performed) , Although it does not give the player a sense of discomfort, if the special figure variation of the 101st rotation is not performed in a state where the special figure variation of the 100th rotation (the final time of the number of times of time saving) is performed, for example, the 100th rotation In the case where the 101th special figure variation is started after the special figure variation is completed, the time saving state ends at the timing when the 100th special figure variation is executed, so the 100th rotation There was a problem that the state of the normal pattern during the special pattern fluctuation gave the player an unpleasant feeling.

On the other hand, in the present fourth embodiment, when the number of special figure fluctuations (for example, 100 times) is set as the time saving end condition for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol, the time saving end condition is established. Tokuzu fluctuation (e.g., 100th rotation Tokuzu fluctuation) end timing and the start timing of Tokuzu fluctuation (e.g., 101st rotation Tokuzu fluctuation) that is executed first after the time saving end condition is established and can be determined, and the time saving state is terminated based on the timing executed first among any of the timings.

By configuring in this way, the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal design is maintained until the timing when the specified number of special symbol variations are stopped and displayed, or the timing when the special symbol variations of the number exceeding the specified number of times are executed. It is possible to provide the player with a short working time state for the maximum period of time, thereby increasing the player's desire to play.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, as the timing at which the special figure variation of the 101st rotation is executed, the timing at which the condition for executing the special figure variation of the 101st rotation is established can be determined. It is configured so that the time saving state ends before the special symbol is discriminated. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which a time saving state is set in a range exceeding the predetermined number of times of time saving, and a lottery for a special symbol is executed in the time saving state.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the end timing of the special figure fluctuation that the time saving end condition is established and the timing that the special figure fluctuation is executed next to the special figure fluctuation that the time saving end condition is established, of which is established first Although it is configured to terminate the time saving state based on the timing, it is not limited to this. It may be configured to end the state.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the variation of the first special symbol (processing for subtracting the variation time of the first special symbol) is temporarily stopped (suspended). Configure. Then, when a V winning (a ball entering the V winning port 165) occurs during the small winning game and a big winning is awarded, the temporarily stopped special symbol variation is resumed after the big winning game ends. It is configured as follows. In the fourth embodiment, the timing for subtracting the number of times of time saving is configured to be subtracted when the variation of the special symbol that has started to change during the time saving game is stopped.

By configuring in this way, since the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped special symbols is the fluctuation started before the jackpot game, when the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped special symbols resumes and stops, The number of time reductions is not subtracted. In other words, in this embodiment, when a jackpot is awarded by winning a V prize, in addition to the number of times of time reduction given by the jackpot, the period until the temporary stop of the special symbol fluctuation is stopped. Set as game state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set the most advantageous time-saving state for the player as long as possible.

Here, in the fourth embodiment, the game characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 described in the above-described first to third embodiments (special symbol lottery and winning of balls to the special electric activation opening 643) It is shown as an example for realizing the game property aiming at the game by another method, and each technical idea described in the above-mentioned first to third embodiments, the content of the effect to be executed, etc. You can transfer it. Detailed descriptions of the technical ideas and effects that are used in the same manner as in the above-described first to third embodiments will be omitted.

<Regarding the game board configuration of the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment>
First, referring to FIG. 114, the configuration of the game board 13 used in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described. The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is different from the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above in that a second ball entrance unit 1640 is added in place of the general electrical winning device 640. It is different in that it is provided and that a second entrance 1645 is provided in place of the special electric operation opening 643 .

In the above-described first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the lottery for the first special symbol is executed based on the ball entering the special figure entrance 64 by executing the left-handed game, and the through By passing through the gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is configured to be in an open state in which the game ball can enter the ordinary electric prize winning device 640 when the lottery for the ordinary symbol is executed and won. Then, when the game ball enters the special electric operation opening 643, the winning of the accessory is executed, and the V open/close door 65a attached to the V winning device 65 is opened.

On the other hand, the fourth embodiment is greatly different in that a second ball entrance 1645 serving as a second special symbol lottery opportunity is provided in place of the special electric operation opening 643 described above. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the opportunity to open the V open/close door 65a is not the prize winning to the special electric operation port 643, but based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 1645. This is a trigger for opening the V opening/closing door 65a.

When the game state is the normal state, the player shoots the game ball toward the left area of the game board 13 in the same manner as in the above-described first embodiment, and enters the special figure ball entrance 64, A game is played while desiring to win a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol. When a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, the game state shifts to a time-saving game state (special pattern high probability state, normal pattern low probability state) at a rate of 100%.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, if a game is executed aiming at the left side area of the game board 13, the game ball can pass through the through gate 67 at a rate of 100%. , When the lottery of the normal symbol executed with the passage of the game ball through the through gate 67 is won, the second electric accessory 1640a attached to the second ball entering unit 1640 is in the open state (the game ball is A state in which a ball can be entered into the second ball entering unit 1640) is set.

A second ball entrance 1645 is provided in the second ball entry unit 1640, and when a game ball enters, a lottery for a second special symbol is executed. And, in this embodiment, it is configured to win a small hit in the lottery for the second special symbol. When a small win is won, the V opening/closing door 65a in the V winning device 65 is set to an open state, and when the game ball wins the V winning opening 165, a big win is awarded.

In this embodiment, the probability of winning a small prize in the second special symbol lottery is defined to be 396/400 (approximately 9/10), although the details will be described later. The time-saving state in which the game ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 1645 is the state in which the V prize is likely to occur, which is the most advantageous state for the player.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 115 to 118, the electrical configuration of the fourth embodiment will be described. In the fourth embodiment, the method of the special symbol lottery is different from the above-described first embodiment. I'm letting

First, with reference to FIG. 115, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 115 is a schematic diagram schematically showing counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. These counters, etc. are the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display in the first design display device 37, the setting of the display in the second design display device 83, and the setting of the display in the third design display device 81. etc., it is used in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type. The first hit type counter C2 used for , the stop type selection counter (not shown) used to select the stop type of the special symbol, and the small type used to select the small hit type of the special symbol A winning type counter C5, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 used to select a variation pattern are used.

In addition, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used to set the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4, and the variation used for selecting the variation pattern of the normal symbols. A type counter CS1 is used. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 55). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . The RAM 203 has a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da corresponding to the ball entering the special figure entrance 64 consisting of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and four holding areas (holding 1st to 4th areas), and a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db corresponding to the ball entering the second ball entrance 1645 is provided, and the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da The values of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the special figure entrance 64. .

Then, when the starting condition (fluctuation condition) of the first special symbol is established, the various values stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da are shifted to the first special symbol execution area. , Special symbol variation based on various values stored is started.

Similarly, in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db, a first hit random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, Each value of the small hit type counter C5 and the variation type counter CS1 is stored.

Then, when the start condition (fluctuation condition) of the second special symbol is established, various values stored in the first reserved area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db are shifted to the second special symbol execution area. , Special symbol variation based on various values stored is started.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be capable of simultaneously (parallelly) executing the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol. The reserved ball storage areas (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da, second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db) are each configured to have an execution area. Thereby, when the starting condition of each special symbol is satisfied, the next special symbol variation can be quickly executed.

In this embodiment, only the second special symbol is configured to have a small hit as a lottery result, so that the value of the small hit type counter C5 is not stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da. However, for example, it is configured to have a small hit as a lottery result of the first special symbol, and the value of the small hit type counter C5 is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da. may be configured.

In addition, as in the present embodiment, even in the reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da) corresponding to the special symbol type (first special symbol) that does not have a small winning as a lottery result, the small winning is also possible. It may be configured to store the value of the type counter C5. In this way, regardless of the special symbol lottery specification (whether or not there is a small hit), the ball enters the starting port (special symbol entrance 64, second entrance 1645) that triggers the special symbol lottery. All the counter values acquired by are stored, and when the starting condition (fluctuation condition) of the special symbol is established, only the necessary value among the acquired counter values is used to draw a special symbol. By configuring to execute, the same configuration can be used for multiple gaming machines with different special symbol lottery specifications (whether or not there is a small win), so parts and technology can be shared. It is possible to reduce costs.

Furthermore, in the RAM 203 of the present embodiment, as with the above-described special symbols, there are normal symbol holding corresponding to the ball entering (passing of the ball) into the through gate 67 consisting of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). A ball storage area 203dc is provided, and in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203dc, each value of the second hit random number counter C4 and the normal pattern variation type counter CS2 is set in accordance with the timing of entering the through gate 67. stored respectively.

Then, when the starting condition (fluctuation condition) of the normal symbol is established, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203dc are shifted to the normal symbol execution area, and the stored various Normal design variation based on the value is started.

In this embodiment, each counter value acquired based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 1645 is reserved and stored, and each counter value acquired based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 is stored. Although it has a configuration to hold and store the value, it is not limited to this, and the function (holding storage function) to store each counter value acquired for each pattern (special pattern, normal pattern) is not provided. It may be configured as follows.

By constructing in this manner, in a game machine in which a lottery advantageous to a player and a lottery disadvantageous to a player are switched as a lottery for one special pattern type according to a set game state, an advantageous lottery is executed. It is possible to suppress a situation in which a different game state is set and a disadvantageous lottery is executed with one special symbol in a state in which many reserved memories of one special symbol are acquired.

Next, referring to FIG. 116, the configuration of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. ROM202 of the main control unit 110 in the fourth embodiment is replaced with the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 24(a)) for the ROM202 of the MPU201 of the main control unit 110 in the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the big hit type selection 4 table 202db is replaced with the fluctuation pattern selection table 202e and a fluctuation pattern selection 4 table 202dc is provided, and the small hit random number table da is newly provided. In addition, since the rest is the same, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to Drawing 117 (a), small hit random number table 202da provided in ROM202 of main control unit 110 in a 4th embodiment is explained. FIG. 117(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small winning random number table 202da. This small hit random number table 202da is a table in which a random number (determination value) determined as a small hit is defined in the second special symbol lottery.

Specifically, in the small hit random number table 202da, the determination value determined to be a small hit is defined for each type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), and the state of the special symbol (low A predetermined range of determination values is defined regardless of the probability state or high probability state. As shown in FIG. 117(a), when the symbol type is the first special symbol, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 corresponding to the small winning is not defined, and the first special symbol lottery It is stipulated that there is no chance of winning.

On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 corresponding to the small winning is defined within the range of "4 to 399". That is, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the first special symbol lottery is 0 (no winning), and the probability of winning a small win in the second special symbol lottery is 396/400 (approximately 9/10). ).

Furthermore, as described above, in this embodiment, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 for winning a big win and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 for winning a small win are different. (process for determining whether or not there is a hit) to execute the big hit win/loss decision and the small hit win/fail decision in succession (simultaneously).

By configuring in this manner, a big win or a small win lottery can be executed with a predetermined probability for one acquired counter value (first winning random number counter C1 value).

In this embodiment, when a small win is won, the V opening/closing door 65a attached to the V winning device 65 is opened for a certain period of time (a state in which a game ball can enter the V winning device 65). It is configured as follows. A big win is awarded by causing a game ball to enter a V winning port 165 in a V winning device 65 within a period in which the V opening/closing door 65a is open. Therefore, the player executes the game while desiring to win many small prizes.

In the present embodiment, the V opening/closing door 65a is configured to be opened for a predetermined period when a small win is won. The period during which the V opening/closing door 65a is opened may be varied based on the winning type. In the case of such a configuration, it is preferable to provide a small hit type table, refer to the table, and determine the small hit type. With this configuration, the player can be interested not only in winning the small win but also in the type of the small win, and the small win in which the V open/close door 65a is open for a longer period of time. A game is played while desiring to win a prize. Therefore, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are defined with different probabilities of winning a small hit. By configuring in this way, the privilege given to the player can be made different between the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol. In addition, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game in order to execute more advantageous special symbol lotteries. As described above, in this embodiment, unless a specific game state (time saving state) is set, the second special symbol lottery that is advantageous to the player is not frequently executed. On the other hand, it is possible to voluntarily play a game so that a specific game state is set.

In addition, in this embodiment, a table (first winning random number table 202a) that is referenced when executing a big winning lottery and a table (small winning random number table 202da) that is referenced when executing a small winning lottery are provided. Although they are configured separately, they are not limited to this, and one table may be used to execute the big winning lottery and the small winning lottery. In this case, for example, the first winning random number table 202a may be configured so as to define the range of counter values for small winnings for each type of special symbol. By configuring in this way, the number of data tables that the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 has can be reduced.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained, the type of the special symbol, and the state of the special symbol, the jackpot according to the predetermined determination value Although it is configured to execute the determination of winning or small winning, it is not limited to this, for example, according to the number of winning big wins or the number of small winnings within a specific period until a predetermined condition is established, The value of the first winning random number counter C1 specified for winning the big win or winning the small win may be varied, or the big win lottery and the small win are executed in a state where a predetermined abnormal condition is established. A data table that does not define a judgment value corresponding to a big win or a judgment value corresponding to a small win may be provided as a data table for abnormal times referred to in the lottery.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to simultaneously (parallelly) execute the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol. is set so as not to win a jackpot at the same time (in parallel) (so that a jackpot game is not executed). In the pachinko machine 10 having such restrictions, for example, a lottery of one special pattern is won, and during the period until the jackpot game corresponding to the winning of the jackpot is executed, a lottery of the other special pattern is executed. A lottery for a special pattern is executed by referring to a dedicated data table in which only the judgment value corresponding to the small prize is prescribed without defining the judgment value corresponding to the big prize so as not to win the big prize. may be configured.

Next, referring to FIG. 118, the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 118 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 118, the RAM 203 of the fourth embodiment has a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db, and a normal symbol in contrast to the RAM 203 of the first embodiment described above. Reserved ball storage area 203dc, first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd, second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cf, small hit flag 203dg, special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh, special figure 1 The difference is that the variable time counter 203di, the special figure 2 variable time counter 203dj, the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk, the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl, and the time saving end waiting flag 203dm are added. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da, up to the upper limit number (4 in this embodiment), various counter values acquired based on the ball entering the special symbol entrance 64 (start winning) is a storage area for storing In addition, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db is acquired based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 1645 (start winning) up to the upper limit number (4 in this embodiment). This is a storage area for storing various counter values set.

The first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area for storing various counter values for starting the variable display of the first special symbol. When various counter values are stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da, this is a storage area in which the various counter values are shifted and stored. The second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the second special symbol are stored. not shown).

The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db, the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown), and the second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) are started. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the small hit type counter C5 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 115) along with the detection of winning is stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the special figure entrance 64 (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39), each counter C1 to C2, C5 from the counter buffer , CS1 are acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has entered the second ball entrance 1645 (start winning), similarly to the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da, each counter C1 to C2, C5, CS1 from the counter buffer A value is obtained and stored in each corresponding area (not shown) as well.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the special symbol variation (lottery), the big winning lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81 are executed. Among the data corresponding to each start winning stored in the above-described first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da and second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db (values of counters C1 to C2, C5, CS1), one The data corresponding to the start winning prize is shifted to this special symbol holding ball execution area. It should be noted that the shift in this embodiment means moving data stored in one area to another area.

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203dc includes a second winning random number counter C4 and a normal pattern variation type counter CS2 obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 115) upon detection of the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 (start winning). A storage area in which values are stored. When the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (started winning) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39), the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is detected from the counter buffer. , Acquire the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2, and store it in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203dc. The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203dc has four reserved areas so that data (values of counters C4 and CS2) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (reserved) up to four times. In the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203dc, the data of the reserved balls are stored in the order of passing through the through gate 67 (start winning), among the reserved areas where the data is vacant, in order from the reserved area with the earliest digested order. .

In addition, when the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) detects that it is the execution start timing of the variable display effect of the normal symbol based on the start winning, each counter value is stored, and the normal symbol winning lottery Also, it is a memory for storing data (values of counters C4 and CS2) to be referred to in processing such as setting of display (variation pattern) of the first pattern display device 37 or the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, when the MPU 201 detects that it is the timing to start executing the variable display effect of the normal symbols, the above-described normal symbol reservation is performed in order to execute processing such as winning lottery and setting of display of the second symbol display device 83. Of the data corresponding to each starting prize stored in the ball storage area 203dc (the value of the second winning random number counter C4 and the value of the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2), the data corresponding to one starting prize is Shift to a symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). It should be noted that the shift in this embodiment means moving data stored in one area to another area.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de are timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. Based on the winning to the ball opening 64 or the second ball entrance 1645, the number of pending balls (number of standby ) is counted up to four times. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de are set to zero as initial values by the initial setting processing of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S1701 in FIG. 54). Then, each time the starting winning prize is detected and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de are decremented by one each time the variable display effect is executed.

Also, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd (that is, the number of reserved balls) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball based on the ball entering the special symbol entrance 64 (start winning). When the counter value is stored in the area 203da, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the first special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110 . The first special symbol reserved ball number command is a command sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 each time the starting winning is detected and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is incremented by 1. is.

In addition, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de (that is, the number of reserved balls) is based on the fact that the ball entered the second ball entrance 1645 (start winning), and the second special symbol reserved ball is stored. When the counter value is stored in the area 203db, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110 . The second special symbol reserved ball number command is a command sent from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 each time the start winning is detected and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de is incremented by one. is.

The MPU 201 stores the values of the counters C1 to C2, C5 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown). are respectively stored, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) are transferred to the first special symbol variation start process. (See S255 in FIG. 123) or refer to in the second special symbol variation start process (S260 in FIG. 126), perform a jackpot lottery based on the reference data, and determine the variation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result do. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main controller 110, variation display is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

In addition, the variation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or special figure 2 variation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is a flag indicating that the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed while the second special symbol is fluctuatingly displayed. It is set to ON when the jackpot of the symbol is executed. This special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to ON in S852 of the 1st special design fluctuation stop processing (refer to S257 of Drawing 124) which MPU201 of main control unit 110 performs. Also, in the process of S952 of the second special symbol variation start process (see S260 in FIG. 126), it is set to OFF.

As a result, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern and the jackpot pattern is stop-displayed, the second special pattern forcibly stop-displayed as the lost pattern is prevented from executing the lottery again. be able to.

In addition, in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, within one special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119), after executing the process related to the first special symbol, By configuring to execute the processing, it is configured to execute the variation processing for each special symbol without delay.

Then, in the special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119), when any special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big win, the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 55) carries out the big win control. The processing (S1804 in FIG. 56) is configured to be executed. In addition, the special symbol variation processing 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119) is, when the current state is the big win state or the small win state (S251 in FIG. 151: Yes), the variation processing for each special symbol (S254 in FIG. 119 to S263) are skipped.

That is, in the present embodiment, while the big winning game or the small winning game is being executed based on the special symbol lottery result, it is configured so that the new special symbol variation (lottery) is not executed, The first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode to indicate that the lottery result is a big hit by the variation process for the first special symbol executed earlier in the special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119). In this case, the special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119) is configured to perform a new variation process for the second special symbol.

In this embodiment configured in this way, by using the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode for indicating that the lottery result is a big hit, that It is possible to suppress execution of a new variation process for the second special symbol within the special symbol variation process 4 (see S154 in FIG. 119).

The small hit flag 203dg is a flag indicating that the result of the determination of whether or not the second special symbol is a small hit, and is set to ON when a small hit is won. This small hit flag 203dg is set to ON when the result of the judgment of whether or not the second special symbol is a small hit (see S1151 in FIG. 128), and when the special symbol variation in which the winning result is a small hit is stopped and displayed. is set to off (see S1655 in FIG. 128).

Special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is a flag indicating a period to stop updating (subtracting) the fluctuation time of special figure 1, and stops updating (subtraction) of the fluctuation time when it is set to ON, When the ON state is changed to OFF, the stopped update (subtraction) of the variable time is restarted.

This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON when stopping the variation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) where the lottery result is a small hit (S1652 in FIG. 133), special symbol variation processing 4 ( See FIG. 119) (S252 in FIG. 119). If it is set to ON in the process of S252, the process of updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1) in the same manner as during fluctuation is executed (Fig. 119 of S253). That is, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the variable time is stopped, but the first symbol display device is in a state where the variable display is continuously executed. Become. Thereby, it is possible to notify that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped by setting the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh to ON. Then, when it is determined that it is set to ON in the first special symbol variation in-execution process (see FIG. 123) (S751 in FIG. 123: Yes), it is set to OFF (S753 in FIG. 123).

In addition, in the present embodiment, only the lottery of the second special symbol is configured so that the small winning can be won, so the special symbol whose variable display is temporarily stopped based on the winning of the small winning is the first special symbol. Although it is only the pattern, if it is configured so that the lottery of the first special pattern can also win a small hit, a special figure 2 temporary stop flag may be provided to temporarily stop the variable display of the second special pattern. good.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a jackpot, based on the fact that one of the special symbols has stopped in a combination indicating a jackpot (based on the execution of the jackpot game ), the process of forcibly stopping the fluctuation display of the other special symbol by being out, and when the lottery result of one special symbol is a small hit, the combination indicating the small hit stops the one special symbol. Based on this, the variable display of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (stopped until the small winning game ends).

That is, according to the lottery result of one special symbol, the variable display of the other special symbol can be processed in various modes. By configuring in this way, the lottery result of one of the special symbols becomes the most advantageous game result (for example, a big win) for the player, and while the variable display for showing the game result is being executed, the other (lottery result is a small win) is stop-displayed and the big win is erased by the small win.

The special figure 1 variation time counter 203di is a counter for measuring the variation time of the first special symbol, and corresponds to the variation pattern selected in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S357 in FIG. 122). A value indicating the fluctuation time is set (see S559 in FIG. 122). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) every time the first special symbol variation in-execution process (see S255 in FIG. 123) is executed, and the value is 0 in the special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119). is determined (see S256 in FIG. 119). Here, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203di is 0 (S256 in FIG. 119: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop processing ( (see S257 in FIG. 119) is executed.

Furthermore, the value of this special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is cleared to 0 when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big hit (see S1555 in FIG. 132). As a result, when the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a failure at the time of the second special symbol jackpot stop display, the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di remains. After the stop display, it is possible to suppress the restart of the fluctuation of the first special symbol again based on the value left in the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj.

The special figure 2 variation time counter 203dj is a counter for measuring the variation time of the second special symbol, and corresponds to the variation pattern selected in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S956 in FIG. 129). A value indicating the fluctuation time is set (see S1260 in FIG. 129). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) every time the second special symbol variation in-execution process (see S261 in FIG. 131) is executed, and the value is 0 in the special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119). is determined (see S262 in FIG. 119). Here, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203dj is 0 (S262 in FIG. 119: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop processing ( (see S263 in FIG. 119) is executed.

Furthermore, the value of this special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is cleared to 0 when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big hit (see S855 in FIG. 124). As a result, when the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating the loss at the time of the jackpot stop display of the first special symbol, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj remains, forcibly After the stop display, it is possible to suppress the restart of the variation of the second special symbol again based on the value left in the special figure 2 variation time counter 203dj.

The special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is a flag indicating whether or not the variation should subtract the value of the time saving counter 203h when the variation is stopped in the variation of the first special symbol. This special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is the first special symbol variation start process (see S258 in FIG. 120), when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S358 in FIG. 120: Yes) , is set to ON (S359 in FIG. 120), and the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is ON in the time saving update process (see S863 in FIG. 125) of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see S257 in FIG. 124) When it is determined (S2101 of FIG. 125: Yes), after subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203h (S2102), the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to OFF (S2103).

It should be noted that, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the first special symbol variation stop processing (see S257 in FIG. 124) is set to OFF. Similarly, in the lottery of the second special symbol, when the jackpot is won, the second special symbol variation stop processing (see SS263 in FIG. 132) is set to OFF. In addition, by setting the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk to OFF when winning the jackpot in the lottery of the special symbols, when the variation of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped after the jackpot game is completed, the variation is stopped. When it is determined that the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is off (S2101 in FIG. 125), and the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is off (Figure 125 S2101: No), the process of subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203h (see S2102 in FIG. 125) is skipped, and the process of stopping the variation is executed.

By constructing in this way, the jackpot game is finished, the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped first special symbol is resumed, and the remaining time reduction frequency is not updated (subtracted) when the fluctuation is stopped. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the time-saving game after the end of the jackpot game awarded by the V winning is, in addition to the number of lotteries of the special symbols defined by the jackpot, the remaining variation of the temporarily stopped first special symbol. The time is also in the time-saving game state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a longer time-saving gaming state, which is an advantageous period for the player.

The special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl is a flag for indicating whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203h should be subtracted when the variation is stopped in the variation of the second special symbol, this special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl , In the second special symbol variation start process (see S260 in FIG. 126), it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (see S960 in FIG. 126), and the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0. value (that is, during time saving) (S960: Yes), it is set to ON (see S961 in FIG. 126). Then, it is referred to in the time saving update process (S1661) of the special figure 2 out stop process (S1564), and when it is on, the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted, and the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl is set to off. . Also, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the first special symbol variation stop processing (see S257 in FIG. 124) is set to OFF (see S860 in FIG. 124), and the second special symbol is set to OFF. When the jackpot is won in the lottery, the second special symbol variation stop processing (see S263 in FIG. 132) is set to OFF (see S1560 in FIG. 132).

In addition, in this embodiment, in the lottery of the first special symbol, when the big hit is won, if the second special symbol is fluctuating, the fluctuation is out and forced to stop. As described above, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, this special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl is configured to be set to OFF, so when the fluctuation stopped forcibly due to the deviation , the process of updating the value of the time saving counter 203h can be skipped. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced.

The time saving end standby flag 203dm is a flag indicating that the special figure variation in which the end condition of the time saving state is established has started. Specifically, in the present embodiment, after the end of the jackpot game, as a prescribed period of the time saving state, the special symbol is changed 4 times or 15 times, and the time saving state is completed. This time-saving final variation is started, indicating that the time-saving state is in a waiting state to end.

This time saving end standby flag 203dm determines whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 in the first special symbol variation start process (see S258 in FIG. 120) (that is, it is the final variation of the specified number of times in the time saving state). (S360), when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 (S360: Yes), it is set to ON (see S361 in FIG. 120). Also, in the second special symbol variation start process (see S260 in FIG. 126), when the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 (S962: Yes), it is set to ON (see S963 in FIG. 126).

Then, when the time saving update process (see S862 in FIG. 125), which is the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol, is executed, or when the determination of a new special symbol is performed (first special symbol jackpot determination process (in FIG. 121 Refer to S356)), second special symbol jackpot determination processing (see S955 of FIG. 127)), and when the time saving end waiting flag 203dm is set to ON, the time saving end waiting flag 203dm is set to OFF .

By configuring in this way, when the time saving end waiting flag 203dm is set to ON (that is, the standby state), when any time saving end timing arrives, surely according to each timing can be made to execute time-saving end processing.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main controller in the fourth embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 119 to 136. FIG. In the fourth embodiment, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are duplicated (in parallel) with respect to the control processing of the main controller 110 in the first embodiment described above. The difference is that they are configured to be executable, and the contents of the control processing corresponding to the above-described differences are different. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 119, the special symbol variation process 4 (S151), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 119 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process 4 (S151). Special design variation processing 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), the first special design and the second special design, based on each counter value obtained, various determinations (appropriate determination) and determination, by predetermined control that Various commands for controlling the first symbol display device 37 to be able to perform variable display in the determined variable display mode, and for causing the third symbol display device 81 to perform variable display effects of the third and fourth symbols. is set, and control is executed to stop and display in a display mode showing the determination result (positive/denial determination result). The special symbol variation process 4 (S151 in FIG. 119) will be described below.

In the special symbol variation process 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), first, it is determined whether it is during the big winning game (during the big winning) or during the small winning game (during the small winning) (S251). Here, based on the information stored in the game state storage area 203g, it is determined whether the present is during the big winning game (during the big winning) or during the small winning game (during the small winning).

In the process of S251, when it is determined that it is during the big hit or during the small hit (S251: Yes), next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON (S252), ON If it is determined that it is set to (S252: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 83 corresponding to the temporarily stopped special symbol (first special symbol (special symbol 1) in this embodiment) It is updated (S253), and the present process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S252, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is not set to ON (S252: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

Here, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in a display mode indicating small hit winning. In this embodiment, while the small winning game is being executed, it is configured so that the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation display (special figure fluctuation display) for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is not updated (subtracted). During that period, the first symbol display device 83 is configured to display a temporary stop display mode for indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player that the variable display of the first special symbol, which was being executed with the start of the small winning game, is temporarily stopped, so that the execution It is possible to suppress distrust given to the player if the first special symbol variation in the inside disappears. In addition, as a display mode for indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, for example, a display mode for indicating that the normal variable display is in progress (for example, at intervals of 0.2 seconds It may be the same display mode as the blinking display mode that repeats lighting and extinguishing), or a display mode with a slower blinking interval than the display mode for indicating that the variable display is in progress (for example, lighting and extinguishing at intervals of 0.5 seconds) may be used. Furthermore, when the display mode of the first pattern display device 83 is configured to be able to display a plurality of colors, a blinking display mode using a dedicated color that can be displayed only during temporary stop is used. Also good.

On the other hand, in the process of S251, when it is determined that the present is not during the big hit or during the small hit (S251: No), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is greater than 0, that is, the first It is determined whether or not the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (S254). When it is determined that the first special symbol is being displayed while the variation is being displayed (the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203di is greater than 0) (S254: Yes), the first special symbol variation executing process is executed ( S255).

In this first special symbol variation in-execution process (S255), in order to change (update) the variation display mode of the special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 83 during the period when the first special symbol is varying. process is executed. Then, when the processing of S255 is completed, next, it is determined whether the value of the first variation time counter 203a2 updated in the first special symbol variation in-execution processing (S255) is 0 (S256). When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is 0 in the process (S256: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process is executed (S257), and the process proceeds to S259 which will be described later.

In the first special symbol variation stop process (S257), when the variation time defined for the first special symbol being displayed in variation has passed, the process of stopping the variation display with the symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol. is executed. In addition, in the first special symbol variation stop process (S257), when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the second special symbol being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a loss. is executed. Furthermore, when the second special symbol being executed wins a jackpot, a process for erasing the information about the jackpot is executed. The details of this first special symbol variation stop process (S257) will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is not 0 in the process of S256 (S256: No), the process of S257 is skipped and the process proceeds to S259.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation time counter 203di is not greater than 0 (is 0) in the process of S254 (S254: No), that is, when it is determined that the special figure 1 is not currently varying Next, the first special symbol variation start process is executed (S258). In this first special symbol variation start process (S258), a process for executing a new lottery (variation) of the first special symbol is performed, and a new lottery (variation) can be executed. If it is determined whether a new lottery (variation) can be executed, a process of performing a new lottery (variation) is executed. This first special symbol variation start process (S258) will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 120 to 122. FIG.

After executing the first special symbol variation start processing (S258), after determining that the special figure 1 is being varied in the processing of S256 (S256: No), or after performing the first special symbol variation stop processing (S257) After execution, next, variation processing (S259 to S263) relating to the second special symbol is executed.

First, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is greater than 0 (S259). That is, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol (special figure 2) is currently displayed in a variable manner. If it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203dj is not greater than 0 (is 0) in the process of S259 (S259: No), it is not currently in the special figure 2 variation, so the following Then, a second special symbol variation start process for executing a new lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is executed (S260), and this process is terminated.

In the second special symbol variation start process (S260), if the retention data (various counter values) is stored in the second special symbol retention ball number storage area 203b, the big hit determination and variation pattern selection based on the retention data Processing is performed. Also, in the second special symbol variation start process (S260), when the lottery result is a big win (or a small win), the big win flag 203i (or the small win flag 203y) is set to ON.

On the other hand, in the process of S259, the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203dj is greater than 0, that is, if it is determined that the current special figure 2 variation is (S259: Yes), then the second A special symbol variation executing process is executed (S261). The contents of this second special symbol variation in-execution process (S261) will be described later with reference to FIG. is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol and executed.

Then, when the second special symbol variation executing process (S261) is finished, it is determined whether the value of the current special figure 2 variation time counter 203dj is 0 (S262), and if it is determined to be 0 (S262 : Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process is executed (S263), and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is not 0 in the process of S262 (S262: No), the process of S263 is skipped and the process ends.

The second special symbol variation stop processing (S263) will be described later with reference to FIG. 132, but as with the first special symbol variation stop processing (S257), it is defined in the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner. When the fluctuation time has passed, the process of stopping the fluctuation display with the symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is executed. In addition, in the second special symbol variation stop processing (S263), when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the first special symbol variation being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a failure. Processing is performed. Furthermore, when the second special symbol being executed wins a jackpot, a process for erasing the information about the jackpot is executed. In addition, in this embodiment, since it is configured to be able to win a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a big hit, it corresponds to a small hit or a loss. process is executed.

As described above with reference to FIG. 119, in the present embodiment, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time (in parallel). , the variation processing (S254 to S258) regarding the first special symbol and the variation processing (S259 to S263) regarding the second special symbol are executed in one special symbol variation processing. Therefore, when it becomes possible to execute a new lottery (change) for each special symbol, the change process can be executed without delay, and a smooth game can be provided.

Further, in this embodiment, in one special symbol variation process, the variation process regarding the first special symbol is configured to be executed prior to (preferentially) the variation process regarding the second special symbol. Thus, by clearly setting the processing order of each special symbol, even if the variation stop timing of the first special symbol and the variation stop timing of the second special symbol are the same, priority is given to the second special symbol. 1 special symbol fluctuation stop processing will be executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the variation processing regarding the first special symbol is configured to be executed with priority over the variation processing regarding the second special symbol, but the variation regarding the second special symbol is not limited to this. The processing may be configured to be executed with priority over the variation processing regarding the first special symbol.

In addition, it may be configured to preferentially execute the variation processing for the special symbol type in which a lottery that is advantageous to the player is executed in the set game state, and the player can choose according to the set game state. If the pachinko machine 10 switches the special symbol types for which the lottery that is advantageous to the game is executed, it is preferable to provide a means for switching the order of the special symbol types for executing the variation processing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the lottery result of the lottery that is advantageous to the player from disappearing (discarding) due to the lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player.

Next, referring to FIG. 120, the first special symbol variation start process (S258), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), will be described. FIG. 120 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S258).

In the first special symbol variation start process (S258 in FIG. 120), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is acquired (S351), and the value of the acquired first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is It is determined whether the value (N1) is greater than 0 (S352). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is greater than 0 (S352: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is subtracted by 1 (S353 ).

Then, set the number of reserved balls command indicating the number of reserved balls after subtraction (S354), the data stored in the reserved area 1 to the reserved area 4 of the first special symbol reserved number of balls storage area 203a, the execution area A process for sequentially shifting to the side is performed (S355). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area 1→execution area, reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, and so on.

Next, a first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S356). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356 in FIG. 120) will be described later in detail. Based on the game state that has been set, a big win determination is executed as to whether or not a big win has occurred.

Next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S357). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S357), which will be described in detail later, is based on the result of the success/failure determination based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown). This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on each counter value.

A first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S357) is executed, and then it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, whether the current game state is in time saving (S358). ). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S358: Yes), the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to ON (S359), and the process proceeds to S360. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S358 that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (S358: No), the game state is the normal state, so this process ends. Thus, if the value of the time saving counter 203h is a value greater than 0, that is, if it is in the time saving, by setting the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk to ON, it is started during the time saving when the fluctuation stops It is possible to determine whether it is a fluctuation or not, and update the time saving end condition (subtract the value of the time saving counter 203h) when the fluctuation stops.

After executing the process of S359 mentioned above, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 (S360). That is, it is determined whether it is the final variation which is the end condition of the time saving state. When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 (S360: Yes), the time saving end standby flag 203dm is set to ON (S361), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S360, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 1, this process is terminated as it is because it is not the final variation of the time saving game state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S258 in FIG. 120), will be described. FIG. 121 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356 in FIG. 121), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S451). Then, in order to determine whether the time saving end condition is satisfied and waiting state, that is, whether the final variation of the time saving is being executed by the lottery of the second special symbol, the time saving end It is determined whether the standby flag 203dm is set to ON (S452). When it is determined that the time saving end standby flag 203dm is ON (that is, the second special symbol is in the final fluctuation of the time saving) (S452: Yes), the period of the time saving state set this time is terminated. Therefore, the normal state is set in the game state storage area 203g (S453), and the time saving end waiting flag 203dm and the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl are set to OFF (S454). Next, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 0 (S455), a state command indicating that the game state has switched to the normal state is set (S456), and the process proceeds to S457. On the other hand, in the process of S452, if it is determined that the time saving end waiting flag 203dm is not on (S452: No), since the final variation of the time saving state is not being executed, the processing of S453 to S456 is skipped, The process proceeds to S457.

Thus, in the state of waiting for the end of the time saving state (the state in which the final variation of the time saving state is started in the other special symbol), before obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the game By setting the state to the normal state, even though the time saving game state has ended, the time saving game state with the other special symbol until the variation of the special symbol in which the final variation of the time saving state is executed ends It is possible to eliminate the problem of executing a game based on. Therefore, a proper game can be provided to the player.

After completing the process of S452 or S453, it is next determined whether or not the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the jackpot determination value based on the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 23(b)). , the lottery result (judgment result) is obtained (S457). Then, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a big win (S458), and if it is determined to be a big win (S458: Yes), the big win flag 203i is turned on so as to indicate that the first special symbol is a big win. (S459). In this embodiment, the jackpot flag 203i is configured to be able to store (set) information indicating the type of special symbol that has won the jackpot in addition to the information indicating whether or not the jackpot has been won. Information indicating the presence or absence of a big hit can be set for each symbol type. Therefore, in the process of S459, information indicating a big win is set for the area corresponding to the first special symbol among the big win flags 203i.

Then, the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a big win (S460), and the big win symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the value of the acquired winning type counter C2 ( S461), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S458 that the lottery result of this time is not a big hit (S458: No), the first special symbol is set in the first symbol display device 37 (S462), and this process is terminated. do.

Next, referring to FIG. 122, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S357), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S258 in FIG. 120), will be described. FIG. 122 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S357).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S357 in FIG. 236), first, in the first special symbol big hit determination process (S356 in FIG. 121), whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, that is, It is determined whether or not the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S551). Here, whether or not the big win is determined is determined by whether or not the big win flag 203i is turned on for the first special symbol. This jackpot flag 203i is set to ON in the processing of S459 in the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 121).

In the process of S551, if it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S551: Yes), the jackpot type selection 4 table 202db and the value of the first hit type counter C2 that has been acquired Based on, the jackpot type is determined (S552). Next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the first special symbol execution area is acquired (S553), and the current game state (normal state, latent state) corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203g , probability variation state) is read out the variation pattern selection 4 table 202dc (S554).

Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S553 and the variation pattern selection 4 table 202dc read in the process of S554 (S555), and the variation pattern selected in the process of S555 Based on, to set the special figure 1 variation pattern command (S556).

Next, a special figure 1 stop type command indicating the stop symbol of the first special symbol is set (S557), the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of variation of the first special symbol (S558), and the selected variation pattern A value indicating the fluctuation time of is set to the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di (S559), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S551, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out (that is, the big hit flag 203i for the first special symbol is off) (S551: No), the process of S552 is performed. It skips and moves to the process of S553.

Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the first special symbol variation executing process (S255), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (S151 of FIG. 119), will be described. FIG. 123 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation executing process (S255). In this first special symbol variation in-execution process (S255), a process for updating the variation time of the special symbol variation being executed and a special interrupted by winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery A process for resuming symbol variation is executed.

In the first special symbol variation executing process (S255), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON. This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. In this embodiment, at the time when a small hit is won in one special pattern, if the other special pattern is being displayed in a variable manner, the other special pattern fluctuation is displayed for a predetermined period (from the small winning to the small winning game). is terminated), and the other special symbol variation is resumed again after a predetermined period of time (after the end of the small winning game).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game that is difficult for the player to understand due to the end of the special symbol variation of the other during the small winning game of one. Furthermore, since the lottery result of the other special symbol lottery is not discarded based on the winning of the small winning game in one special symbol lottery, for example, winning the small winning results in a big winning. It is possible to prohibit (suppress) the occurrence of a situation in which a lottery result (a lottery result that is more advantageous to the player than winning a small prize) is discarded.

In the process of S751, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON (S751: Yes), set the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command (S752), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag It is set to OFF (S753), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is subtracted by 1 (S754), the display of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S755), and this process is terminated. .

In this embodiment, within the special symbol variation processing 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119) executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39) executed every 2 milliseconds, the first special symbol variation executing process (See S255 in FIG. 119) is configured to be executed, and the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is updated (1 subtraction) within the first special symbol variation executing process (see S255 in FIG. 123) It is configured to Therefore, for example, when the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, "15000" is set as the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di, and the value is 1 every 2 milliseconds. It is configured to be subtracted.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is not set to ON in the process of S751 (S751: No), that is, when it is determined that the small hit is not won in the lottery of the second special symbol skips the processes of S752 and S753 and proceeds to the process of S754.

Next, referring to FIG. 124, the first special symbol variation stop process (S257), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), will be described. FIG. 124 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation stop processing (S257). This first special symbol variation stop processing (S257) is performed when it is determined that the current value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203di is "0", that is, the variation time of the first special symbol (special figure 1) This is a process that is executed when the period has elapsed.

When the first special symbol variation stop process (S257 in FIG. 124) is executed, it is first determined whether the big hit flag 203i is set to ON for the first special symbol (special figure 1) (S851). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203i is set to ON for the first special symbol (S851: Yes), next, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to ON (S852), and the special figure Set a special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df has been turned on (S853).

Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed in the off symbol (S854), and the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is set to 0 (S855). As a result, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the jackpot, the variable display of the second special symbol (special figure 2) being executed is stopped and displayed in the display mode (outgoing symbol) indicating the loss. (confirmed display).

After finishing the processing of S855, next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203i for the second special symbol is set to ON (S856), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S856: Yes), the above-described In order to apply the lottery result of the second special symbol to the second special symbol that is forcibly removed and stopped in the process of S854, the big hit flag 203i for the second special symbol is set to OFF (S857 ), deletes the stored information for the special figure 2 jackpot (S858), and proceeds to the processing of S859. On the other hand, in the process of S856, when it is determined that the jackpot has not been won in the second special symbol lottery, the processes of S857 and 808 are skipped and the process proceeds to S859.

In the process of S859, first, the jackpot scenario won in this special symbol variation is set (see 809), then the jackpot flag 203i corresponding to the first special symbol, the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk, the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl, the time saving end standby flag 203dm is set to OFF, and the value of the time saving counter 203h is reset (S860). Then, information indicating that the current game state is during the jackpot (during the jackpot game) is stored in the game state storage area 203g (S861). The game state storage area 203g is configured to be able to separately store the game state (normal state, time saving state) regarding the lottery game and the game state (during the big win, during the small win) regarding the winning game. By executing the process of S861, the game state (normal state, time-saving state) related to the lottery game at the timing of winning the jackpot and the game state indicating that the jackpot is in progress are stored.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine the game state set at the timing of winning the big win at the end of the big win game.

When the processing of S861 is finished, next, a special figure 1 confirmation command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to decide and stop the first special symbol is set (S863), and the first special symbol display device A process for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is displayed in 37 is executed (S864), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S851, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203i is not set to ON for the first special symbol (S851: No), the time saving update process (S862) is executed, and the above S863 Go to processing. A detailed description of the time saving update process (S862) will be given later with reference to FIG.

Thus, in the first special symbol variation stop process (S257), the process (S859 to S864) of stopping the variation display with the symbol indicating the result of the first special symbol lottery (first lottery game) is executed. In addition, when the lottery result of this time is a big hit (S851: Yes), the second special symbol that is fluctuating is forcibly stopped and displayed so that the lottery result is lost (S854). In this way, in the process of stopping and displaying (confirmed display) one of the special symbols with a symbol indicating a big win, by executing the process of forcibly stopping the other special symbol during variation, Appropriate processing can be executed for a plurality of special symbol variations that are executed.

In other words, like the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the configuration in which the variation processing regarding the first special symbol and the variation processing regarding the second special symbol are executed in order, it is executed based on the lottery result of the first special symbol. By executing the variation processing (forced stop processing) of the second special symbol within the variation processing regarding the first special symbol, the second special symbol is forcibly stopped at the timing when the variation processing regarding the second special symbol is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the processing related to the second special symbol from being duplicated and to execute the processing smoothly.

In addition, in this embodiment, at the timing when one special symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol indicating a big win, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped as a symbol indicating a failure. For example, if it is determined that one special symbol has won the jackpot, that is, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a jackpot in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356 in FIG. 121) ( In S458 of FIG. 121: Yes), the fluctuation of the other special symbol may be forcibly stopped at the off symbol. In this case, it is preferable to execute a special variation that does not win a jackpot for the period until the big winning variation of one special symbol ends for the other special symbol that is forcibly lost and stopped. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that when one special symbol wins a jackpot, the other special symbol variation is forcibly stopped. Therefore, it is possible to discriminate that the other special symbol variation has been forcibly stopped and displayed, and to prevent the player from grasping whether or not the big win has been won.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when one special symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol indicating a big win, the result of the lottery for the variation of the other special symbol being executed is discarded. For example, until the big winning game based on one special symbol ends, the other special symbol variation may be interrupted, and after the big winning game ends, the interrupted special symbol variation may be resumed. good. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from having a distrust of the pachinko machine 10 due to the game result of the lottery game executed by the player being discarded.

In addition, when controlling the variation of the other special symbol during execution based on the result of the lottery of one special symbol, the content of variation control is varied according to the result of the lottery of the other special symbol being executed. For example, at the timing when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, if the lottery of the second special symbol is fluctuating (losing fluctuation) to indicate that the lottery is lost, the lottery The result is discarded, and a forced stop process is executed to forcibly stop the deviation fluctuation, and the result of the lottery of the second special symbol is a win (big win, small win) during the fluctuation (win fluctuation). In some cases, after the jackpot game of the first special symbol is finished, the interruption process may be executed so that the variation of the second special symbol can be resumed.

In this case, after the jackpot game with the first special symbol is finished, the player is interested in whether the second special symbol variation is newly executed or the interrupted second special symbol variation is resumed. You can play games. Furthermore, when such a configuration is used, it is configured to execute a suggestive effect for suggesting to the player the situation of the second special symbol during the jackpot game of the first special symbol (whether it is interrupted or not). good to do

Next, referring to FIG. 125, one process of special symbol variation stop processing (first special symbol variation stop processing (see S151 in FIG. 119), second special symbol variation stop processing (see S263 in FIG. 132)) The time saving update process (S862 (S1661)) will be described. FIG. 125 is a flow chart showing the contents of this time saving update process (S862 (S1661)). In this time saving update process (S862 (S1661)), when the game state is the time saving state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is updated when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, and when the end condition is satisfied, the game state is changed to normal. Execute the process to transition to the state. In addition, in the explanation to be given later, the processing when the variation of the first special symbol is stopped will be explained, but the same processing is executed when the target is the second special symbol.

When the time saving update process (S864 (S1661)) is executed, first, whether the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is ON, that is, the fluctuation of the special symbol being executed this time starts fluctuation during the time saving game It is discriminated whether or not it has been executed (S2101). The special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is ON, that is, when it is determined that fluctuation is started during the time saving game (S2101: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted (S2102). Then, the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to OFF (S2103), and the process proceeds to S2104. On the other hand, in the process of S2101, if it is determined that the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is not ON (S2101: No), since it is not a fluctuation stop that triggers the update of the time saving state, the processing of S2102 to S2106 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2107.

As described above, when the special symbols start to fluctuate, if the gaming state is the time saving state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted when the fluctuation stops by setting the subtraction flag of the corresponding symbol type to ON. can be done. Therefore, the time saving game state can be set until the final variation of the time saving game state stops. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a time-saving gaming state that is advantageous to the player for the longest possible period.

In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special pattern, the fluctuation of the first special pattern is temporarily stopped, and the period until the small hit game is completed does not change. It is configured not to restart. Then, a V prize is generated during the small win game, a big win is awarded, and after the big win game ends, the temporarily stopped variation of the first special symbol is resumed. Further, details will be described later with reference to FIG. 137, but since the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to OFF before the jackpot game is started, when the temporarily stopped fluctuation resumes and stops, Since the FIG. 1 subtraction flag 203dk is off, the value of the time saving counter 203h is not subtracted. That is, it is configured so that the number of remaining time reductions is not subtracted when the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped special symbol after the end of the big winning game by the V winning is stopped. By configuring in this way, in addition to the time-saving prescribed period set according to the jackpot type, the remaining fluctuation time of the temporarily stopped special figure is also set to the time-saving game, so it is an advantageous period for the player. The time saving state can be set to be the longest possible period. Therefore, the interest in the game is improved.

In the process of S2104, it is determined whether the time saving end standby flag 203dm is ON (S2104). When it is determined that the time saving end standby flag 203dm is on (S2104: Yes), that is, the fluctuation of the special pattern of this time is the final fluctuation of the time saving, and in the second special pattern (the other special pattern), the time saving If the next variation has not started from the last variation, it is the timing to shift the game state to the normal state, so the time saving end standby flag 203dm is set to OFF (S2105), and the game state is stored A normal state is set in the area 203g (S2106). Then, the process proceeds to S2107.

On the other hand, in the process of S2104, if it is determined that the time saving end waiting flag 203dm is not ON (S2104: Yes), the state where the final variation of the time saving game is not executed, that is, the state where the time saving state continues Therefore, the processing of S2105 and S2106 described above is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2107. In this way, in the simultaneous variation type gaming machine, when the variation that is the final variation of the time saving game is stopped, the other special symbol is changed beyond the specified number of times of the time saving game state (from the final variation to the next variation). If not, the game state is shifted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a game that does not cause discomfort.

When one of the processes of S2101, S2104, and S2106 is completed, the process proceeds to S2107. In the process of S2107, a command indicating the value of the time saving counter 203h and the game state is set (S2107), and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 126, the second special symbol variation start process (S260), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), will be described. FIG. 126 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation start process (S260).

When the second special symbol variation start process (S260) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203df is set to ON (S951). That is, the first special symbol lottery (first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356 of FIG. 121 See))) to determine whether or not the jackpot has been won.

In the process of S951, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to ON (S951: Yes), various processes for starting the variation of the second special symbol are skipped, special figure 2 The fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to OFF (S952), and this process is terminated. That is, in the present embodiment, by using the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S356 in FIG. 121), the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the jackpot symbol, and the second It is prohibited to execute a new second special symbol variation after forcibly stop-displaying the special symbol with the deviating symbol. As a result, even if the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed within the variation process relating to the first special symbol, the control process can be executed without causing any trouble.

In this embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to ON in the process of S951 (S951: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is configured to be set to OFF Therefore, by setting the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df, the second special symbol fluctuation start process (S260 in FIG. 126) can be skipped only once.

This is the first special symbol lottery (first special Only when the jackpot is won in the symbol jackpot determination process (see S356 in FIG. 121), if the second special symbol variation start process (S260 in FIG. 126) to be executed immediately after is skipped, then the first special symbol A jackpot game is started based on the jackpot information (jackpot scenario) set in the jackpot determination process (see S356 in FIG. 121), and by the process of S251 of the special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119), the jackpot game This is because the second special symbol variation start process (S260 in FIG. 119) is not executed until the is completed.

By configuring in this way, based on the lottery result of one of the special symbols, it is possible to simplify the process of skipping the variation processing of the other special symbol, control processing executed by the main controller 110 processing load can be reduced.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (big hit winning), the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed (stopped with a missing symbol), and one special symbol is displayed. A special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to prevent a new variation (lottery) of the other special symbol from being executed until a big winning game based on the lottery result of the symbol is executed, and variation processing of the other special symbol is performed. is skipped once, other configurations may be used.

In other words, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (jackpot winning), the other special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is not won in the other special symbol lottery (fluctuation) until the jackpot game based on the jackpot winning ends. For example, when a jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 56) for executing a jackpot game is executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) of the main control device 110, which will be described later, special figure 2 Alternatively, the fluctuation stop flag 203df may be set to OFF.

By configuring in this way, even if the timing to turn on the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set before the timing at which the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the jackpot pattern, until the jackpot game is executed. It is possible to prohibit execution of a new variation (lottery) of the second special symbol.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the second special symbol variation start processing (see S260 in FIG. 126) is executed in a state where the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203df is set to ON, variation of the second special symbol Skip the process, that is, it is configured not to start a new variation (the second special symbol is kept stopped), but not limited to this, the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203df is turned on It may be configured to execute the variable display of the second special symbol dedicated to the case where it is set.

In this case, a lottery for the second special pattern is carried out using a special lottery that does not win the jackpot, and the variation display of the second special pattern is executed during a period corresponding to the variation pattern determined based on the result of the special lottery. Alternatively, the period until the jackpot game based on the jackpot winning of the first special pattern is executed without executing the lottery of the second special pattern, the period until the specific timing during the jackpot game is reached. Alternatively, the second special symbol may be variably displayed until the jackpot game ends. This makes it difficult for the player to understand that the special symbol variation has been forcibly stopped.

It should be noted that the content of the variation processing for each special symbol described above is configured to be appropriately output to the sound lamp control device 113 side by setting a command indicating the content, and the third symbol display device The variable display of the third and fourth symbols displayed in the main display area Dm of 81 can be synchronized with the display mode of each special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 described above. However, while the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is forcibly stopped, the voice lamp control device 113 side receives a command indicating that the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. In this case, the third symbol or the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is used to execute the variable effect during the forced stop. Also good.

In this way, by using each symbol (third symbol, fourth symbol) which is variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 which is easy for the player to visually recognize, the actual second special symbol is displayed. It is possible to make it difficult for a player to understand that the special symbol variation is forcibly stopped even when the variation performance is executed while the symbol is forcibly stopped.

In the process of S951, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is not set to ON, that is, the first special symbol is not stopped and displayed in the jackpot symbol (S951 of FIG. 126: No), The processing of S953 to S959 is executed, and the process proceeds to the processing of S960, which will be described later. The processing of S953 to S959 is different from the processing of S351 to S357 of the above-described first special symbol variation start processing (S258 in FIG. 120). The value of the number of balls counter (N1), the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S355), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S356), the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de, second special symbol reserved ball number counter value (N2), second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db, second special symbol jackpot determination process (S958), second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S959) Since they are the same except for the changed points, the description thereof will be omitted.

Furthermore, after executing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S909), the processes of S960 to S963 are executed, and this process ends. The processing of this S960-S963 changes the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk to the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl for each process of S358-S361 of the first special symbol variation start process (S258 in FIG. 120). Since they are the same except for the point, the description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the gaming machine simultaneously executes the variation of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol, the same processing can be executed when both special symbols start to vary. In the other special pattern, it is possible to prevent problems such as the number of remaining time reductions not being subtracted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S955), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S260 in FIG. 126), will be described. FIG. 127 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S955). This second special symbol jackpot determination process (S955) is different from the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356 in FIG. 121) in that the target special symbol type is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. , and some other processing was added.

The second special symbol jackpot determination process (S955 in FIG. 127) differs from the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356 in FIG. 121) in the following points. That is, in the process of S1051 corresponding to the process of S451, the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is changed to the second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown), S452 to S461 In the processing of S1052 to S1061 corresponding to the processing of, when the target is changed from special figure 1 (first special symbol) to special figure 2 (second special symbol), and the lottery result of the special symbol is out The difference is that the process to be executed is changed. Since other points are the same, description thereof is omitted.

In the second special symbol big hit determination process (S955 in FIG. 127), if it is determined that the lottery of this time is not a big hit (S1058: No), special figure 2 loss variation process is executed (S1062), and this process ends do.

This special figure 2 loss fluctuation processing (S1062) is the processing which is executed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is other than the big win, that is, the small win or the loss. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 128, but if the lottery result is a loss, the same processing as S462 of the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination processing (S356 in FIG. 121) is executed, If the result of the lottery is a small win, processing corresponding to winning a small win is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 128, the contents of the special figure 2 deviation process (S1062) will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 deviation process (S1062).

In the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation process (S1062), first, the lottery result of this time (lottery result obtained in the process of S1057 of the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S955 in FIG. 127)) determines whether it is a small hit. (S1151).

When it is determined that the small hit is won in the process of S1151 (S1151: Yes), the small hit flag 203dg is set to ON (S1152), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to the small hit (S1153 ), and then set the small winning symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S1154), and terminate this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S1151, if it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a small hit, that is, it is out (S1151: No), the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. It is set (S1155), and this processing ends.

As described above, the second special symbol variation start processing (see S260 in FIG. 126) is executed as one process special figure 2 deviation variation processing (S1062 in FIG. 128), that is, variation in special symbols (lottery) By setting the small hit flag 203dg to ON when it is determined that the small hit is won in the process executed at the start timing, the setting status of the small hit flag 203dg at the fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol It is possible to easily execute the processing corresponding to the winning of the small prize.

Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S959), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S260 in FIG. 126), will be described. FIG. 129 is a flow chart showing this second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S959).

The second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S959 in FIG. 129) differs from the above-described first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S357 in FIG. 122) in the following points. In the process of S1251 corresponding to the process of S551, the special figure 1 lottery result (lottery result of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 lottery result (lottery result of the second special symbol), S552 to S559 S1252 ~ S1256, S1258 ~ S1260 each process corresponding to each process up to, special figure 1 variation pattern command (variation pattern command of the first special symbol) is changed to special figure 2 variation pattern command, The difference is that the processing of the deviation variation pattern selection processing (S1257) in FIG. 2 is added. Since other points are the same, detailed description is omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 130, the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern executed in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S959) which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S260 in FIG. 126) The content of the selection process (S1257 in FIG. 130) will be described.

When the second special symbol variation start process (S260 in FIG. 126) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small hit (S1351). In the process of S1351, determination is performed based on the lottery result obtained in the process of S1057 of the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S959 in FIG. 127).

In the process of S1351, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a small hit (S1351: Yes), then the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired (S1352), and the obtained small hit type counter C5 A small hit type is selected based on the value (S1353). In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since there is only one type of small hit type, different small hit types are not set based on the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5, but for example, a plurality of If the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to set the small winning type, a small winning type selection table that defines different small winning types for the range of values of the obtained small winning type counter C5 is provided, S1352 and S1353. It may be configured to select a different small hit type depending on the processing.

As in the present embodiment, although there is only one type of small win type, by configuring to use the processing of S1352 and S1353, for example, the game specifications may change during the development period of the pachinko machine 10. Even if it is changed, it can be easily adapted to the change.

When the processing of S1353 is finished, next, the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the current gaming state is read (S1354), and based on the read variation pattern selection table and the value of the variation type counter CS1 obtained, small winning Select a variation pattern (small hit variation pattern) (S1355). Then, the special figure 2 variation pattern command indicating the small hit variation pattern selected in the process of S1355 is set (S1356), and the process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1351 that the current lottery result is not a small win (no) (S1351: No), the process (S1357 to S1359) for the case where the lottery result is a loss is executed. In the process of S1357, first, the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the gaming state is read (S1357), a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the acquired variation type counter CS2 (S1358), and a special feature is selected based on the selected variation pattern. The FIG. 2 variation pattern command is set (S1359), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the contents of the second special symbol variation executing process (S261), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (S151 of FIG. 119), will be described. FIG. 131 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation in-execution process (S261). In this embodiment, since it is configured so as not to win a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, in this second special symbol variation in-execution process (S261), the above-mentioned first special symbol variation in-execution process ( (See S255 in FIG. 123), the flag (special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh) set when winning a small hit in the other special symbol (executing a small winning game) is set to ON The difference is that the process for determining is omitted, and other than that, the process target is the same except that the process is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol, so detailed description thereof is omitted. .

In addition, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to win a small prize in the lottery of the first special symbols, the winning of the small prize in the lottery of the first special symbols (execution of the small prize game) is confirmed. A flag for indicating (for example, special figure 2 temporary stop flag) is provided, and in this second special symbol variation in-execution process, the above-described first special symbol variation in-execution process (see S255 in FIG. 123) and similar processing should be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the second special symbol variation stop process (S263), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (S151 of FIG. 119), will be described. FIG. 132 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation stop processing (S263). In the second special symbol variation stop process (S263), the processing target is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol in contrast to the first special symbol variation stop process (see S257 in FIG. 124). The difference is that the content of the process executed when the lottery result is other than the big hit is changed and the process of setting a flag for stopping the fluctuation of the other special symbol is omitted.

That is, the point of deleting the processing of S852 in the first special symbol variation stop processing (see S257 in FIG. 124) and the point of changing the processing target of S851 and S853 to S864 to the second special symbol (S1551 and S1553 to S1513) And, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a big hit (S1551: No), the difference is that the special figure 2 out stop processing (S1558) is executed. Since other points are the same, detailed description is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the contents of the special figure 2 out stop processing (S1564) executed in the second special symbol variation stop processing (see FIG. 132) will be described. Figure 133 is the flowchart which shows the contents of special figure 2 omission stop processing (S1564). This special figure 2 loss stop processing (S1564) is a special symbol corresponding to the case where the lottery result obtained in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S955 in FIG. 127) is other than the jackpot (small hit or off). This is to execute a change stop process.

When the special figure 2 out stop processing (S1564) is executed, it is first determined whether the small hit flag 203dg is set to ON (S1651), and if it is determined that the small hit flag 203dg is set to ON (S1651: Yes), set the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh on (S1652), and set the special figure 1 temporary stop command to indicate that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh was set on ( S1653). The special figure 1 temporary stop command set here is output to the audio lamp controller 113 by the external output process (S1801) executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 55). Then, when the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received on the voice lamp control device 113 side, the temporary stop mode for indicating that the first special symbol (special figure 1) is temporarily stopped (is being done) A display command for displaying on the third pattern display device 81 is set and output to the display control device 114 . The display control device 114 executes processing for displaying the temporary stop mode display of the special figure 1 on the third symbol display device 81 based on the received display command. By configuring in this way, the player can easily grasp that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped.

Returning to FIG. 133, the description continues. When the processing of S1653 is finished, next, a small winning scenario corresponding to the small winning game (open operation scenario for small winning) is set (S1654), the small winning flag 203dg is set to OFF (S1655), and the game state The winning information indicating that the small winning game is being played (during the small winning) is stored in the storage area 203g (S1656), and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) with the symbol indicating the small winning (small winning symbol). A special figure 2 confirmation command for indicating that is set (S1657), and the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (determined display) with a small hit symbol (S1658). Then, a time saving update process (S1661 (S863)) for performing a process such as subtraction of the number of remaining time saving times is executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, when the small hit flag 203dg is set to OFF in the process of S1651 (S1651: No), it is to indicate that the second special symbol is a symbol (off symbol) that indicates the loss and is stopped (determined display). The special figure 2 confirmation command is set (S1659), and the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is deviated and the fluctuation is stopped (determined display) with the symbol (S1660). And a time saving update process is performed (S1661 (S863)), and this process is complete|finished.

In addition, for the time saving update process (S1661 (S863)), the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk referred to in the processing of S2101 and S2104 of the time saving update process (S863 (S1661)) described above with reference to FIG. Since the only difference is that the 2-subtraction flag 203dl is changed, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel. The special pattern and the second special pattern can be variably displayed at the same time. Therefore, lottery games with more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined period of time, and the probability that a player will receive a big win within the predetermined period of time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

Further, even in a configuration in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time and the lottery game is executed, when a jackpot game occurs with one of the first or second special symbols, the other Since the variable display of the special symbols is stopped, the player can play the game while concentrating on the big winning game.

In the present embodiment, when a symbol indicating a big win (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed in one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the other special symbol is forcibly removed and stopped at the symbol. Although it is configured to be displayed, it is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be configured to be variably displayed in a state where the temporary stop or the measurement of the variability time is interrupted. In such a case, the temporarily stopped special symbols are stopped in a display mode or a notification mode in which the player can understand that the temporary stop is being performed, so that the player can see that the lottery game that was in the middle of the variable display disappears. It is possible to grasp that the player is not in the game, and the player can play the jackpot game with peace of mind.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134, start winning process 4 (S152), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 39) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process 4 (S152). The starting winning process 4 (S152 in FIG. 134) determines whether the ball has entered (starting winning) in either the special figure entrance 64 or the second entrance 1645, and if it has started winning, Each counter value obtained up to the upper limit number of reservations (up to 4 in each of the special symbol entrance 64 and the second entrance 1645) is stored in the first special symbol retention ball storage area 203da or the second special symbol retention ball storage area. 203db.

Further, when each counter value obtained based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db, respectively, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da is stored. Or based on each counter value stored in each of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db, a process (so-called look-ahead process) is executed to predict the result of determination in advance, the variation pattern to be selected, etc. . The starting winning process 4 (S152 in FIG. 134) will be described below.

In the starting winning process 4 (S152 in FIG. 147), first, it is determined whether or not the ball entered (starting winning) into the special figure entrance 64 which is the first starting opening (S1751). Here, the entry of the ball to the ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the special figure entrance 64 is detected. It is determined that the ball entered the special figure entrance 64 (there was a starting prize) (S1751: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is acquired (S1752), and the It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1753).

In other words, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls for the special figure entrance 64 at the present time is less than four, which is the upper limit value (that is, whether the number of reserved balls is stored up to the upper limit value). When it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1753: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd (S1754), and the sound lamp control device 113 To set a reserved ball number command for notifying the reserved number of special figure entrance 64 (lottery right reserved number of the first special symbol) (S1755).

Then, each value of various counter values (first per random number counter C1, first per type counter C2, variation type counter CS1) is read out (acquired) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol reserved ball execution area of RAM 203 Each is reserved (stored) in the storage area of the number of reserved balls corresponding to 203a (S1756).

Next, the first prefetching process is executed (S1757). This first look-ahead processing (S1757) will be described later with reference to FIG. , a process for discriminating the stop type and the like is executed. In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured to execute a process for determining the result of determination, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, etc. based on each counter value newly stored, but this is not the only option. Without, for example, when there is a new start winning prize, the result of winning or not determination for all the reserved memories stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da, the determined fluctuation pattern, It may be configured to execute a process of determining the stop type or the like.

Also, in this embodiment, when new information (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da, that is, when the lottery right for the first special symbol is newly acquired, the first special symbol Although it is configured to determine the contents of the lottery right (winning information) in advance, without being limited to this, when the lottery right for the first special design is newly acquired, the lottery right for the second special design (winning information ) may be determined in advance.

After the processing of S1757 is executed, the processing of S1758 is executed next. Also, if it is determined that the ball has not entered the special figure entrance 64 in the process of S1751 (S1751: No), or in the process of S1753, the number of reservations for the special figure entrance 64 at the present time is the upper limit If it is determined to be a value (S1753: No), the process of adding the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1758.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is added, the first look-ahead processing (S1757) based on the information (winning information) on the added winning is performed. However, without being limited to this, for example, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is the upper limit number (4) in the process of S1753 (S1753 : No), that is, when the ball is entered into the special symbol entrance 64 in a state where the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, the first look-ahead process (S1757) can be executed. It may be configured so that As a result, even in a state where the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, the player can continue to play the game in order to execute the look-ahead process. In addition, since added value can be given when the ball is entered into the special symbol entrance 64 in a state where the number of retained balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, the first special symbol is retained. It is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation to play when the ball enters the special figure ball entrance 64 in a state where the number of balls reaches the upper limit.

Next, each process from S1758 to S1764 is the same as the process performed for the winning of the ball to the first start port (special figure entrance 64) executed in each process from S1751 to S1757 The only difference is that the processing of 2 is executed for the second ball entrance 1645, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, in this embodiment, since it is configured so that a small hit can be won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is also acquired in the process of S1763.

Next, referring to FIG. 135, the first look-ahead process (S1757), which is one process of the starting winning process 4 (S152 in FIG. 134), will be described. FIG. 136 is a flow chart showing this first prefetching process (S1757).

In the first look-ahead process (S1757 in FIG. 135), first, various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area 203a, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2 , each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is read (S1821). Then, the read data is stored in the area with the lowest winning order among the free storage areas in the prefetching reserve storage area (S1822).

Next, based on each counter value newly stored in the prefetching reservation storage area, the result of determination is determined. In addition, here, both the right/wrong determination when the special symbol is in a low probability state and the right/wrong determination when the special symbol is in a high probability state are discriminated. This is based on the timing when new pending memory is generated (timing when new pending (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol pending storage area 203a) and the winning information newly reserved this time. Since there is a time lag with the timing of execution, it is possible to predict the game state (probability state of special symbols) set at the timing of executing the jackpot judgment based on the winning information newly reserved this time. Because it is difficult.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol are executed simultaneously (in parallel). And, since the variable time set corresponding to the lottery result of each special symbol is set to be variable by the number of reserved memories (the number of reserved symbols) at the time of lottery of special symbols, each special symbol This is because it is difficult to determine in advance the timing at which the fluctuation (lottery) of .

Then, if it is determined that the determination result in the processing of S1823 is a jackpot (jackpot only in the low probability state, jackpot only in the high probability state, jackpot in both the low probability state and the high probability state) (S1823: Yes), the jackpot A winning condition (game state set at the time of lottery) and a first winning command indicating the jackpot type in the case of winning are set (S1824), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the determination result in the processing of S1823 is not a big hit (the special symbol is out even in a high probability state or a low probability state) (S1823: No), the first winning command indicating the loss is set. (S1825), this processing ends.

Here, the first winning command set in the process of S1824 or S1825 includes the above-described information for indicating the success/failure determination result (information that has a different meaning based on the success/failure determination result), as common information, The setting includes information for indicating the values of various counter values read by the processing of S1821. Then, the winning command set in this process is output to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S2401) executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 54).

On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when the winning command is received, the display mode of the pending ball is varied based on various information included in the winning command (for example, the color of the pending ball is changed to a color different from usual). It is possible to execute an effect (pre-reading effect) in which a notice pattern or the like is displayed before the start of the fluctuation to suggest the result of the determination to the player.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, when executing the look-ahead process, the determination result in the case of the high probability state of the special design, the determination result of the case of the low probability state of the special design is determined, the result of each determination However, without being limited to this, for example, even if the special symbol is in a high probability state or a low probability state, the determination value that is determined to be a big hit ( The value of the first winning random number counter C1) may be defined, and a winning command indicating a special symbol jackpot may be set only when the determination value is read.

By configuring in this way, only when it is determined in advance that it is a specific jackpot to the audio lamp control device 113 side, a winning command indicating a jackpot is output, so a special symbol that does not execute a look-ahead effect It is possible to give a feeling of expectation of winning a jackpot against the fluctuation.

Furthermore, the game state when the special symbol lottery based on the reservation memory (winning information) stored (stored) in the first special symbol reservation storage area 203a is accurately discriminated, and based on the game state It may be configured so as to execute the suitability determination. In this case, instead of changing the selection of the variation pattern depending on the number of retained balls, it is possible to determine by selecting a constant variation pattern regardless of the number of retained balls at the start of variation. When the look-ahead is executed, the game state at the time of start of variation can be determined by determining the variation order until the variation of the retained ball starts based on the information retained and stored.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a new reserved storage (winning information) is stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved storage area 203a, the prefetching process based on the winning information is executed, and during the prefetching process , but not limited to this, in the pre-reading process of the main control device 110, the winning information newly stored (stored) in the first special symbol reservation storage area 203a ( Information indicating the content (each counter value) of the pending memory) may be set as a winning command, and the result of winning/failing determination may be predicted based on the information included in the winning command received by the audio lamp control device 113 side. good.

With this configuration, the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced. In addition, on the audio lamp control device 113 side, a process for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect is executed, and when it is determined to execute the look-ahead effect, the information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110 It is preferable to configure it so as to perform analysis (prediction of acceptance/rejection determination result). As a result, when the look-ahead performance is not performed, the specific look-ahead processing (prediction of the success/failure determination result) is not performed, so that the Pachinko machine 10 can be prevented from performing useless control. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from illegally obtaining the result of the prefetching process executed without a title.

Next, referring to FIG. 136, the second look-ahead process (S1764), which is one process of the starting winning process 4 (S152 in FIG. 134), will be described. FIG. 136 is a flow chart showing this second look-ahead processing (S1764). The second look-ahead process (S1764 in FIG. 134) is based on the above-described first look-ahead process (S1757 in FIG. 133) when the ball enters the first start port (special figure entrance 64) (start winning) While it is a process of determining (pre-reading) the pending data (winning information) in advance and making various judgments, the object to be judged is started at the first start gate. The only difference is that the winning information is based on the starting winning at the opening (second ball opening 1645), and since otherwise the same processing is executed, detailed description will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the details of the V passing process 4 (S153) in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 137 is a flow chart showing the contents of this V passing process 4 (S153). In the V passing process 4 (S153) in the fourth embodiment, in contrast to the V passing process in the first embodiment (see S153 in FIG. 52), a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the small hit When V winning occurs during the game, the process of setting off the time saving end waiting flag 203dm and the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is added. Since the other processes are the same, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the V passing process 4 (S153), first, the processes of S1501 to S1502 described above are executed, and if it is determined that it is during the V valid period (S1502: Yes), it is determined whether it is during a small hit (S1571 ). When it is determined that it is in the middle of a small hit (S1571: Yes), the processes of S1504 to S1506 described above are executed, and the process proceeds to S1572. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not in the small hit (S1571: No), the processing of S1504-S1506 and S1572-S1575 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1509.

In the process of S1572, it is determined whether the time saving end standby flag 203dm is ON (S1572). When it is determined that the time saving end waiting flag 203dm is on (S1572: Yes), after the end of the jackpot game given from this V prize, a new time saving state period is set, so the time saving end waiting flag 203dm is set to off (S1573). In this way, when a small win is won in the final variation of the time saving game, a V prize is generated, and a big win is given, a new time short time is given. Therefore, when a V prize is won, by setting the short time end standby flag 203dm to off, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of shifting to a normal game state immediately after a new short time period is set.

After executing the process of S1572 or S1573, the process proceeds to S1574. In the process of S1574, it is determined whether the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is ON (S1574). That is, the variation of the first special symbol is executed in parallel with the variation of the second special symbol this time, and it is determined whether the variation of the first special symbol is not yet stopped and is temporarily stopped. . When it is determined that the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is on (S1574: Yes), the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to off (S1575), and the process proceeds to S1509. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is off (S1574: Yes), the process of S1575 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1509.

In this embodiment, it is configured to win a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol. Then, when the lottery for the first special symbol is being executed at the time of winning the small hit, the variation of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped. Then, after the end of the small winning game, the temporarily stopped variation of the special symbols is restarted, but in this embodiment, there is a case where V wins are made during the small winning game and a big winning is awarded. The lottery for the first special symbol is temporarily stopped even during the jackpot game. Then, after the jackpot game is over, the variation of the special symbol temporarily stopped is resumed, but in this embodiment, the remaining time reduction number is subtracted when the variation is stopped, so even with this temporarily stopped variation, the remaining time short period There was a problem that the

Therefore, in this embodiment, when a V winning occurs during a small hit, the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to OFF, so that the time period is not subtracted when the temporarily stopped variation is stopped. Therefore, the player can set the remaining variation time of the temporarily stopped symbols as a time saving period in addition to the time saving period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a longer period of time that is advantageous to the player, and to provide pleasure for a longer period of time.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is won in the lottery of the other special symbol, it is configured to forcibly stop (discard) the fluctuation of the other special symbol. Furthermore, when a small win is won, the variation of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped, but this is not the only option, and when a small win is won, the other special symbol varies. may be configured to discard By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent a player from winning a big win by temporarily stopped fluctuation and giving an excessive privilege to a player after a big win game is awarded by winning a V prize.

Also, when winning a big win that is disadvantageous to the player with one special symbol, the disadvantageous big win variation can be discarded by winning a small win with the other special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a wider variety of playability.

As described above, the fourth embodiment is a gaming machine in which the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed in parallel, and is configured to temporarily stop the other symbol when a small hit is won. Then, when a V prize is generated during the small winning game and a big winning is given, the temporarily stopped symbols resume fluctuation after the big winning game is finished. Further, in the present embodiment, at the start of the fluctuation, if the gaming state is a time saving state, by setting to ON a flag indicating that the value of the time saving counter is scheduled to be subtracted at the start of the fluctuation, the fluctuation The value of the time saving counter 203h is updated at the time of stop.

Therefore, the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped special symbols is resumed by setting the subtraction flag to OFF when the V winning occurs, and when the fluctuation is stopped, the time saving counter is not decremented. That is, when the temporarily stopped symbols resume fluctuation and stop, the short period of time is not updated, so the player can obtain the remaining special symbols temporarily stopped in addition to the preset short period of time. A variable period can also be set. Therefore, it is possible to set the short period of time advantageous to the player to the maximum length.

In the present embodiment, one type of jackpot is provided by winning a V prize. In such a configuration, it is preferable to provide a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player and a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player. With this configuration, the player can play the game while having an interest not only in whether or not the V prize is generated, but also in the type of jackpot to be awarded.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured to have one small hit type to be elected, but it is not limited to this, and a plurality of small hit types may be provided. Furthermore, it may be configured to win a small hit even in the lottery of the first special symbol. In this way, by providing a plurality of types of small wins, the player can play the game while expecting small wins that are more likely to generate a V prize.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be changed in parallel, but the invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to be executed (so-called winning order change). In addition, when configured in this way, it is preferable to configure the advantage degree of the winning jackpot type to be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. By constructing in this way, the player can play the game while desiring to win a big win when the lottery for the special figure that is more advantageous is being executed, so that there is a sense of tension. Games can be provided.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the lottery of the second special symbol, when a small hit is won, the variation of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, but by providing a plurality of small hit types, the first special A small win that discards the variation in the pattern (forcibly stops due to a loss) and a small win that temporarily stops may be set separately. In the case of such a configuration, when the player wins a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player due to the variation of the other special symbol, it is preferable to execute an effect to urge the player to discard the prize. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a variety of playability.

In the present embodiment, the game state to be set is two types (normal state, time saving state), but it may be three types (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state), four types (normal state, time saving state, definite variable state, latent definite state). Moreover, it is good also as two types or less.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, regardless of the game state, the game is executed by aiming for the game ball to flow down the left side area of the game board 13. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the right side area of the game board 13 You may execute the game method aiming at. Then, the switching of the game method may be configured to be set based on the game state. Furthermore, in the case of such a configuration, it is preferable to execute a guide display mode for showing the current game method to the player. The player can grasp not only the game method but also the current game state by this guidance display mode.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the timing of updating the time saving state, that is, the timing of subtracting the number of time saving times, and the timing of determining whether the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied, As a configuration, after updating the time saving state, it uses a configuration that determines whether the conditions for ending the time saving state are satisfied. It may be configured to execute the time saving state update process when it is determined and the end condition is not satisfied. Moreover, although the process of subtracting the time saving frequency is performed after performing the special figure lottery, the special figure lottery may be performed after subtracting the time saving frequency.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, even if a small hit is won in the special symbol final variation in the time saving state (special symbol variation executed in the state where the time saving end condition is satisfied), special symbol variation is configured to end the time saving state at the timing when is stopped and displayed, but without being limited to this, for example, when a small win is won in the final variation of the special symbol, the time saving until the small win game ends It may be configured so that the state does not end. That is, when the time saving end condition is satisfied, at the timing of determining whether the time saving end condition is satisfied, if the switching condition (the result of the special symbol lottery is a small winning) is satisfied, the time saving end condition It is preferable to configure so as to switch the timing for determining establishment (delay at the end of the small winning game). As a result, the period during which the time-saving state continues can be varied based on the result of the special symbol lottery during the time-saving state, so that the player can play the game with a sense of expectation until the end. .

In addition, it may be possible to use other than the above-mentioned contents (small hit winning) as the above-mentioned switching conditions, for example, in the state where the time saving end condition is satisfied, at the timing of determining the establishment of the time saving end condition, normal symbol fluctuation It may be set as a switching condition that the game is being executed or that the game per normal pattern is being executed, and at the timing of determining the establishment of the time saving end condition, the special pattern hold or normal pattern that is held and stored It may be set as a switching condition that specific information (hit information) is included in the winning information included in the hold. By providing a plurality of switching conditions in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the time saving state ends, and the interest in the game can be improved.

<Combination Modification of General Electric Prize-winning Device 640>
Next, a modified example will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described first embodiment, the special electric operation opening 643 is provided in the general electric prize winning device 640, and when the ball that wins the general electric prize winning device 640 during the general figure per game wins the special electric prize winning device 643 Configured to perform a winning game. Further, in the above-described second embodiment, in order to solve the problem that can occur in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, that is, the problem that the game becomes monotonous during the time saving state and the motivation to play decreases. , A plurality of special electric operation openings (special electric operation opening 643, second special electric operation opening 1643) are provided in the general electric prize winning device 640, and according to the special electric operation opening in which the ball has won, the V jackpot game is easily executed. A game and an accessory winning game in which a V jackpot game is difficult to be executed are executable.

Furthermore, in the above-described first embodiment or second embodiment, the special symbol variation being executed is interrupted (interruption of the process of subtracting the variation time of the special symbol variation) triggered by the execution of the game per role. Since the period of the time-saving state was configured to be long, it was more advantageous for the player to execute a large number of role-winning games during the time-saving state, and there was a problem that the game during the time-saving state became monotonous. rice field. On the other hand, in the third embodiment described above, it is configured to select the V jackpot type based on the fact that the ball has entered the special electric activation opening 643, and according to the selected V jackpot type. Any one of a pattern of interrupting the special pattern variation being executed, a pattern of discarding it, and a pattern of discarding it and then ending the time saving state is executed, and the accessory is executed during the time saving state. By providing a new game feature that allows the player to select whether or not to execute a winning game, the game during the time saving state is suppressed from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in the first embodiment to the third embodiment described above, the special electric operation opening 643 is provided in the general electric prize winning device 640, and when the ball wins the special electric operation opening 643, the configuration for executing the accessory per game On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, a second ball entrance 1645 that triggers the execution of the second special symbol lottery is provided in the general electric winning device 640, and the above-described first embodiment to the third embodiment A similar game property is realized by a so-called simultaneous variation type specification in which the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are executed in parallel.

On the other hand, in this modification, as shown in FIG. 138, the second special electric operation opening is based on the configuration of the general electric winning device 640 that the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment described above has (see FIG. 88) Instead of 1643, a second ball entrance 1645 is provided so that the winning ball in the general electric prize winning device 640 can enter the special electric operation opening 643 or the second ball entrance 1645. is different from other embodiments.

Then, a small win game executed when a small win is won in a second special pattern lottery executed based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 1645, and the ball wins the special electric operation opening 643. The V winning device 65 is configured to be opened with the same content in the winning game executed based on this.

By configuring in this way, when the V winning device 65 is opened by the small winning game, the second special symbol lottery is executed, so the end condition of the time saving state is the same as the above-described fourth embodiment While the fulfillment element of the cumulative time saving end condition is updated, when the V winning device 65 is opened in the role winning game, the element related to the time saving end condition is not updated. Therefore, since the number of times the V winning device 65 is opened does not match the number of times the elements of the time saving end condition are updated, the player is made to grasp the period until the time saving state ends. can be made difficult.

In addition, in this modification, as the end condition of the time saving state, an example of setting the same end condition as the above-described fourth embodiment is shown, but not limited to this, for example, a role per game is executed It may be configured such that the time-saving end condition is established even when the number of times of the number reaches a specific number of times (for example, 50 times). By configuring in this way, it is first to satisfy the time saving end condition based on the lottery of the second special symbol, or is it first to satisfy the time saving end condition based on the execution of the role winning game. can be played while the player predicts the

Also, in this case, as the effect executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the time saving end condition established based on the lottery of the second special symbol and the performance of the accessory winning game are performed. Suggestion production for suggesting to the player which of the time-saving end conditions is likely to be established among the time-saving end conditions (for example, production that suggests the number of times until each time-saving end condition is established) should be configured to run By constructing in this way, the player can grasp the period until one of the time saving end conditions is satisfied, so that the player can be happy and sad about the destination of the winning ball of the general electric prize winning device 640.例文帳に追加

As shown in FIG. 138, in this modification, the special electric operation opening 643 and the second ball entrance 1645 are provided in the general electric prize winning device 640, but the second special electric operation opening 1643 is also It may be configured such that a winning ball in the general electrical winning device 640 wins any one of the above three.

Furthermore, in the case of using the configuration of this modification, when a small winning game is executed based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 1645, and when the ball wins the special electric activation opening 643 The processing content for the special symbol variation being executed may be different from the case where the accessory winning game is executed based on, for example, when the small winning game is executed, the accessory winning game is executed. To make it easier to discard the special symbol variation being executed than in the case of the game, and to make it easier to interrupt the special symbol variation being executed when the accessory winning game is executed than when the small winning game is executed. should be configured to

It should be noted that, in this modified example, the ball may enter the special electric operation opening 643 while the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation are being executed. In this case, both the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation are interrupted. After the accessory winning game ends, the interrupted first special symbol variation and second special symbol variation are restarted. Then, when the second special symbol variation after the restart has won a small win, when a small winning game is executed based on the small win winning, the first special symbol variation being executed is interrupted, or , configured to discard.

In this way, the first special symbol variation (lottery), the second special symbol variation (lottery), the ball winning prize to the special electric operation port 643, and the present modification configured to be able to execute three types of games at the same time are in a time saving state. Among them, it is possible to interrupt the first special symbol variation, which is likely to be selected for a longer variation time than the second special symbol variation, with a plurality of opportunities. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game with unexpectedness to the player regarding the timing when the first special symbol variation is interrupted and the period during which the first special symbol variation is interrupted during the time saving state.

In addition, in this modification, it is configured so that the ball that wins in the general electric prize winning device 640 can win the special electric operation opening 643 or the second ball entrance 1645, but it is not limited to this, for example , the configuration of the game board 13 may be changed so that the player can aim at the second ball entrance 1645 or the special electric activation opening 643 to play the game. A port 643 may be provided, and a second ball entry port 1645 may be provided in the right area of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2). With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of selecting a game method.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 143. FIG. In contrast to the above-described first embodiment, the fifth embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that a method of setting various commands for outputting the contents of control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 side. It is different in that it is different and that part of the control processing executed when various commands output from the main controller 110 are received on the sound lamp controller 113 side is changed. be. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same control contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the above-described first embodiment, the production mode of the production (V rush) according to the special symbol variation in the time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is changed to the remaining period of the time saving state (time saving In order to variably set according to the remaining period of the special symbol fluctuation executed during the state, the voice lamp control device based on the information (state command) output from the main controller 110 when the time saving state is set The period until the time saving state ends on the 113 side, that is, the time saving number of times set as the end condition of the time saving state (the number of times of fluctuation of the special design) is stored, and information indicating the start of the fluctuation of the special design (variation pattern command) When it is received, by executing a process of updating the number of times of time saving, the remaining period of the time saving state can be determined on the audio lamp control device 113 side.

By configuring in this way, the timing of updating the number of times of time saving (at the time of special symbol fluctuation start) and the timing of determining whether the time saving condition is satisfied (at the time of special symbol fluctuation stop) are different 1st embodiment , without setting a dedicated command on the main control device 110 side, that is, a special symbol lottery such as a state command to be set when the game state is changed, or a variation pattern command to be set when the variation of the special symbol is started. Using only the command indicating the content of the game using , the remaining period of the time saving state can be grasped on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and the effect according to the lapse of the period during the time saving state can be set. It was something.

However, in the control content used in the above-described first embodiment, the update status of the game state in the time saving state is managed (temporarily stored) in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 that does not have a backup function. Therefore, for example, when the power supplied to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off during the period when the time saving state is set (power failure occurs), and then the power supply is restarted, the voice lamp control device Various information temporarily stored in the RAM 223 on the 113 side is cleared (initialized), and there is a problem that the update status of the game state in the time saving state cannot be determined on the voice lamp control device 113 side. .

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, a command indicating the update result of the number of times of saving time (time saving number command ) can be set, and a command (time-saving continuation command) to indicate the end determination result of the time-saving state when executing the process of stopping the special symbol variation in progress (processing to set the confirmation command) is set. It is configured as follows.

Then, the fluctuation pattern command and the time saving command can be output at the same timing, and the determination command and the time saving continuation command are configured to be output at the same timing. Furthermore, when receiving the variation pattern command on the side of the voice lamp control device 113, it is determined whether or not the time saving number command is received at the same time, and based on the determination result, the current time saving situation can be determined, and furthermore, it is confirmed. When the command is received, it is determined whether or not the time saving continuation command is received at the same time, and the current time saving situation can be determined based on the determination result.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine the situation of the time saving state on the side of the audio lamp control device 113 by the combination of each command set by the main control device 110 and received by the audio lamp control device 113. Even if a power failure occurs during the variable display of patterns, it is possible for the audio lamp control device 113 side to determine the status of the time saving state based on the command output from the main control device 110 .

In addition, since it is configured to determine the situation of the time saving state by the combination of commands received at the same timing, compared to setting individual commands to indicate the situation of the time saving state on the main controller 110 side Also, the types of commands set in main controller 110 can be reduced, and the processing load of control processing in main controller 110 can be reduced.

<Regarding control processing contents of the main controller in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 139 to 141, among the control processing contents of the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, points different from those of the above-described first embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, in place of the special symbol variation start process (see S205 in FIG. 41), the special symbol variation start process 5 (see S235 in FIG. 139) is replaced with the special symbol variation stop process in the first embodiment described above. Special symbol variation stop processing 5 (see S238 in FIG. 140) instead of processing (see S208 in FIG. 45), and normal symbol variation processing 5 (see S136 in FIG. 141) instead of normal symbol variation processing (see S106 in FIG. 48) ) are provided, and the rest are the same. The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

In the above-described first embodiment, when the time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, when starting the fluctuation of the special symbols, the number of time saving times (the value of the time saving counter 203h ) for updating (subtracting) (see S205 of FIG. 139), and processing for determining whether the conditions for ending the time saving state are satisfied when stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol (FIG. 45 (see S208)).

Furthermore, in the above-described first embodiment, in order to manage the situation of the time saving state on the audio lamp control device 113 side, the state command output from the main controller 110 (the state command set in the processing of S1916 in FIG. 56 ) and the variation pattern command (the special figure variation pattern command set in S506 of FIG. 43), the remaining period of the time saving state can be determined.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, when the special symbol variation starts or when the special symbol variation stops, in addition to the command indicating the start and stop of the special symbol variation, etc.), and when the information for managing the status of the time saving state stored on the audio lamp control device 113 side is erased (due to a power failure, etc., the audio lamp control device Even if the information stored in the RAM 223 of 113 is erased), the status of the time saving state on the audio lamp control device 113 side based on various commands output from the main control device 110 side (Remaining time saving number of times) It is configured so that it is possible to grasp

First, with reference to FIG. 139, the contents of the special symbol variation start process 5 (S235) will be described. FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol variation start process 5 (S235). In this special symbol variation start processing 5 (S235), the processing for updating the time saving state at the time of starting the special symbol variation with respect to the special symbol variation start processing (see S205 in FIG. 41) of the first embodiment described above. are different and otherwise identical. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the first embodiment described above, information for indicating the processing content (update result) of the processing for updating the time saving state executed by the main control device 110 is output to the audio lamp control device 113 Since there is no need to do so, processing (time saving updating process of the value of the counter 203h, and setting process of the time saving end flag 203j).

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, a command for indicating the number of times of time saving (remaining time saving times) of special symbols is set, and is configured to be output to the voice lamp control device 113 .

The processing contents of the special symbol variation start processing 5 (S235) will be specifically described with reference to FIG. The processing of S301 to S308 is executed. Then, in the process of S308, the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, if it is determined that the present is in the time saving state (S308: Yes), then the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted (S371 ), it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h after the subtraction is 0 (S372).

If it is determined in the process of S372 that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 0 (is 1 or more), the value of the time saving counter 203h after subtraction, that is, a time saving number command indicating the number of remaining time saving times is set (S373). , the process ends. Time saving frequency command set in the process of S373 is the same timing as the special figure variation pattern command (see S506 in FIG. 43) set in the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 43), the main control It is output to the audio lamp controller 113 in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process of the device 110 (see FIG. 55).

Although detailed description will be described later, in the fifth embodiment, in the control processing of the audio lamp control device 113, when receiving a variation pattern command (special figure variation pattern command) during the time saving state, the time saving number command is also It is configured to determine whether or not it is received, and based on the determination result, determine the number of times of shortening of working hours (number of remaining shortening of hours) corresponding to this special symbol variation.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, in the processing of S372 in FIG. 139, only when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h after updating (after subtraction) is 1 or more (S372: No), the time saving number command is issued. Since it is configured to set, in the control process of the voice lamp control device 113, when the variation pattern command (special figure variation pattern command) is received during the time saving state and when the time saving number of times command is not received can be determined to be the final variation of the special symbol in the time saving state.

Returning to FIG. 139, the description is continued. In the process of S372, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h after updating is 0 (S372: Yes), that is, when the special symbol variation executed this time is the final variation of the time saving state, as described above. As in the first embodiment, the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON (S311), and this process is ended.

Although a detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, in addition to the case where the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (1 or more), even if the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0, the time saving end flag While 203j is set to ON, it is configured such that the high probability state of normal symbols is set. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 139, when the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0 at the timing of starting fluctuation of the special symbol (S308: Yes), the process of subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203h is always executed. Control processing can be shared.

Further, as described above, in the fifth embodiment, the time saving counter 203h value after subtraction (after updating) is greater than 0 (1 or more) to set the time saving number command, after subtraction (after updating) When the time saving counter 203h value is 0, it is configured not to set the time saving number command. In addition, the process of setting the special symbol variation pattern command (special symbol variation pattern command) (see S506 in FIG. 43) and the same process (special symbol variation start process) so that the time saving command is set 55) in the main process (see FIG. 55) of the main controller 110, and is configured to be output to the audio lamp control device 113 at the same timing. .

By configuring in this way, on the side of the audio lamp control device 113, when the variation pattern command is received in a state where the time saving state is set, it is determined whether or not the time saving number command is received at the same time. By doing so, it is possible to determine whether or not the special symbol variation executed this time is the final variation of the time saving state. In addition, when a time saving number command is received at the same time, it is possible to determine the remaining period of the time saving state (remaining time saving number) to be updated by executing the special symbol variation this time.

In addition, when the value of the time saving counter 203h after updating is 0, that is, when the special symbol variation executed this time is the final variation of the time saving state, the time saving number command is not set, On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when the variation pattern command is received in the state where the time saving state is set, when the time saving number command is not received at the same time, it is determined that it is the final variation of the time saving state. , to set the effect mode corresponding to the final variation of the time saving state. In this way, when the final variation of the special symbol in the time saving state (time saving final variation) is executed, the time saving number command is not set instead of setting the time saving number command indicating the remaining time saving number 0 times as the time saving number command. By configuring as above, if it is not possible to receive the time saving number command set by the main controller 110, for example, if the command cannot be received normally due to noise etc., at the time of the time saving final fluctuation will be executed.

Therefore, without using dedicated performance data when the command output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 cannot be received normally, and the number of times of remaining time reduction is less than the actually set number Since it is possible to execute the performance corresponding to the number of times of shortening remaining time of 0, the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced and the performance can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed during the time saving state reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times) Time saving end established Only the conditions are provided, but not limited to this, for example, in addition to the end conditions that are established based on the number of special symbol fluctuations, the end conditions that are established based on the special symbol lottery results (specified by the special symbol lottery (for example, a small win) may be provided with an end condition that is established when the lottery wins a predetermined number of times (for example, twice).

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of termination conditions for terminating the time-saving state, which of the plurality of termination conditions is satisfied varies according to the game contents of the player. It is necessary to determine the update status until the termination condition is satisfied for the termination condition. However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the final variation of the time saving state is executed, the time saving number command is not set. Therefore, even if any of the time-saving end conditions are established among a plurality of possible time-saving end conditions, the voice lamp control device 113 side can easily determine that the special symbol variation of this time is the final variation of the time-saving state. can be done.

Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the contents of the special symbol variation stop processing 5 (S238) will be described. FIG. 140 is a flow chart showing the contents of special symbol variation stop processing 5 (S238) in the fifth embodiment. This special symbol variation stop processing 5 (S238) differs from the special symbol variation stop processing (see S208 in FIG. 45) in the above-described first embodiment in updating the time saving state when the special symbol variation is stopped. are different, and otherwise identical. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the special symbol variation stop process 5 (S238) is executed, first, the same S801 and S802 processes as the special symbol variation stop process (see S208 in FIG. 45) in the first embodiment described above are executed, and S802 If it is determined that the time saving end flag 203j is not turned on in the process (S802: No), then it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (1 or more) (S871), is large, that is, if it is determined that the special symbol variation to be stopped and displayed this time is not the final variation of time saving (S871: Yes), a time saving continuation command indicating that the time saving state continues is set (S872), and the above-described The processes of S809 and S810, which are the same as the special symbol variation stop process (see S208 in FIG. 45) in the first embodiment, are executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S871, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (S871: No), that is, if the current gaming state is the normal state, the processing of S872 is skipped and S809 to process. Also, in the process of S802, if it is determined that the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON, that is, if it is determined that the special symbol variation to be stopped and displayed this time is the final time saving variation (S802: Yes), The processing of S804 and S805, which are the same as the special symbol variation stop processing (see S208 in FIG. 45) in the first embodiment described above, are executed, then the processing of S809 and S810 are executed, and this processing ends.

In addition, in the process of S801, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S801: Yes), the processes of S806 to S810 are executed, and this process ends.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, a special symbol determination command is set in the special symbol variation stop processing 5 (see S238 in FIG. 140) for stopping display (confirmation display) of the special symbol variation. Together with, it is configured to set a time-saving continuation command. Then, the special figure confirmation command set in the special symbol variation stop processing 5 (see S238 in FIG. 140) and the time saving continuation command are the main processing of the main controller 110 (FIG. 55) External output executed in In the process (see S1801 in FIG. 55), the signal is output to the sound lamp control device 113 at the same timing. Voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the special figure confirmation command in a state in which the time saving state is set, determines whether the time saving continuation command is received at the same time, based on the determination result, this stop is displayed. It will be determined whether the special symbol variation is the final variation of the time saving state (final time saving variation) and the production mode will be set.

Specifically, in a state in which the time saving state is set, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure confirmation command and the time saving continuation command at the same timing, it indicates that the time saving state continues. A production mode for is set, and when only a special figure confirmation command is received, a production mode for indicating that the time saving state ends is set. In this way, by combining a plurality of commands output from the main controller 110 at the same timing, the state of the current time saving state can be grasped by the audio lamp controller 113 side, so that the main controller 110 The types of commands set by main controller 110 can be reduced as compared with the case of setting individual commands to indicate the situation of the time saving state.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, it is configured to set the special figure confirmation command and the time saving continuation command within the special symbol variation stop processing 5 (see S238 in FIG. 140), but the main controller 110 It is sufficient if each command is output at the same timing in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) executed in the process (FIG. 55), and the main process of main controller 110 (see FIG. 55) In the external output process (S1801) is executed within the interval of 4 milliseconds special figure determination command, and the time saving continuation command, and may be configured to be settable, respectively.

Further, in the present embodiment, when executing the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process (FIG. 55) of the main controller 110, after the previous external output process is executed Various commands set for 4 milliseconds are configured to be output to the audio lamp control device 113 at once (output as serial data). When the special figure decision command is set, it may be configured to wait the output of the special figure decision command until the external output process (see S1801) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times). By configuring in this way, it is possible to output to the audio lamp control device 113 at the same timing even if the special figure determination command and the time saving continuation command are not set in the same process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 141, the contents of the normal symbol variation process 5 (S136) will be described. FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing the contents of the normal symbol variation process 5 (S136). This normal symbol variation process 5 (S136) determines whether or not the current game state is a normal symbol high probability state with respect to the normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 48) of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the processing for The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the fifth embodiment, the state in which the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (the state in which the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 or more) and the state in which the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON are the normal symbols. It is configured to be managed as information indicating a high probability state, and only a state in which the value of the time reduction counter 203h is greater than 0 (a state in which the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 1 or more) indicates a normal pattern high probability state. It is different from the first embodiment managed as information.

That is, unlike the first embodiment in which the process of subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203h is skipped when the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1, in the fifth embodiment, the special symbol variation start process 5 (Fig. In S235 of 139), the value of the time saving counter 203h is configured to be subtracted until it becomes 0, thereby simplifying the updating process of the time saving counter 203h, and when the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted to 0 However, the difference is that the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON in order to continue the high probability state of the normal symbol until the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed. .

Therefore, when the normal symbol variation process 5 (S136 in FIG. 141) is executed, first, the same S1101 to S1108 processes as the normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 48) of the first embodiment described above are executed. , When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (is 0) in the process of S1108 (S1108: No), the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON, that is, the time saving final special symbol It is determined whether it is in fluctuation (S1171), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S1171: Yes), since it is in the high probability state of the normal design, the normal design fluctuation of the first embodiment described above The process of S1109, which is the same as the process (see S106 in FIG. 48), is executed, then the processes of S1111 to S1114 are executed, and this process ends.

Also, in the process of S1171, if it is determined that the time saving end flag 203j is not set to ON (S1171: No), since the current is a low probability state (normal state) of normal symbols, the above-described first implementation The processing of S1110 to S1114, which is the same as the normal pattern variation processing (see S106 in FIG. 48) of the form, is executed, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1102, when it is determined that the normal symbol is fluctuating (S1102: Yes), S1115 to S1118, which are the same as the normal symbol fluctuation process (see S106 in FIG. 48) of the first embodiment described above, Execute the process, in the process of S1118, if it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is greater than 0 (1 or more) (S1118: Yes), set the scenario operation per normal figure for time reduction (S1120) , set the start of opening and closing control of the electric accessory (S1121), and terminate this process.

In the process of S1118, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S1118: No), then it is determined whether the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON ( S1172), when it is determined that it is set to ON (S1172: Yes), since the present is in the high probability state of normal symbols, the normal symbol variation processing of the first embodiment described above (see S106 in FIG. 48) ) are executed, and the process ends. In addition, in the processing of S1172, when it is determined that the time saving end flag 203j is not set to ON (S1172: No), since the present is a normal design low probability state, the normal design of the first embodiment described above The processes of S1119 and S1121, which are the same as those of the variation process (see S106 in FIG. 48), are executed, and this process ends.

That is, in the fifth embodiment, similarly to the above-described first embodiment, the length of the period (dynamic display period) for stopping and displaying the lottery result of the normal symbol (the length of the dynamic display period), Alternatively, the contents of the normal pattern winning game (opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a) to be executed when winning is won in the normal pattern lottery (normal pattern lottery) are set differently according to the probability state of the normal pattern. In order to determine the probability state of normal symbols, in addition to the value of the time saving counter 203h, the setting status of the time saving end flag 203j is referred to. By configuring in this way, it is possible to appropriately determine the probability state of normal symbols.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the fifth control example>
Next, referring to FIGS. 142 and 143, control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. The control process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is the control executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above. For the process, the special figure fluctuation start process 5 (see S4254 in FIG. 142) instead of the special figure fluctuation start process (see S4204 in FIG. 62), the stop related process (see S4215 in FIG. 65) instead of the stop related The difference is that process 5 (see S4265 in FIG. 143) is executed, and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same processing contents is omitted.

In the fifth embodiment, the types of commands output from the main controller 110 are added to the first embodiment described above, and based on various commands output from the main controller 110, the time saving state It is configured to be able to determine the middle situation (remaining time reduction count) on the audio lamp control device 113 side. By configuring in this way, the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted due to a power failure or the like during the time saving state, and the data temporarily stored in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is erased. Even if it is, after the supply of power is restored, it is possible to set an appropriate presentation mode according to the actual situation of the time saving state (remaining time saving number of times).

First, with reference to FIG. 142, the contents of the special figure fluctuation start processing 5 (S4254) will be described. Figure 142 is the flowchart which shows the contents of special figure fluctuation start processing 5 (S4254). This special figure fluctuation start process 5 (S4254) is a process executed when a special figure fluctuation pattern command is received in the command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 61), and is the feature of the first embodiment described above. With respect to the figure fluctuation start process (see S4204 in FIG. 62), it is different in that the contents of the process during the time saving state are changed, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the special figure fluctuation start processing 5 (S4254) is executed, the same S4301 to S4305 processing as the special figure fluctuation start processing (see S4204 in FIG. 62) of the first embodiment described above is executed, and this processing ends. do. It should be noted that, in the process of S4304, if it is determined that the current gaming state is a time saving state, that is, if the special figure variation pattern command is received in a state where the time saving state is set (S4304: Yes), this time reception It is determined whether or not the number of working hours command is included in the command (S4351).

In this embodiment, in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 60) executed in the main process (see FIG. 60) of the main controller 110, voice lamp control is performed using serial data capable of storing a plurality of commands. It is configured to output commands to the device 113 . Therefore, in the special symbol variation start processing 5 (see S235 in FIG. 139) executed by the main controller 110, when the special symbol variation pattern command and the time saving command are set within the same process , At least a special figure variation pattern command and a time saving command are stored in the same serial data and output to the voice lamp control device 113 .

In the process of S4351, whether there is a time saving number command in the command received this time, that is, in the serial data in which the special figure fluctuation pattern command is stored, it is determined whether the time saving number command is also included (S4351), time saving If it is determined that the number command is included (S4351: Yes), the time saving state is set, and the special symbol variation corresponding to the special figure variation pattern command received this time is the final variation of the time saving state Since it is not (time saving final variation), the display command for indicating that it is in the time saving state is set (S4306), and the special figure variation start processing of the first embodiment described above (see S4204 in FIG. 62 ) are executed, and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4351, if it is determined that there is no time saving number command in the received command (S4351: No), the special symbol variation corresponding to this special figure variation pattern command is the time saving final variation, so time saving A display command indicating the final change is set (S4352), and after proceeding to the processing of S4307 described above, the processing of S4308 is executed and this processing ends.

By configuring in this way, when the special figure variation pattern command is received in the time saving state, by determining the type of the command received at the same time as the received special figure variation pattern command, the situation of the time saving state (remaining time short number of times) can be easily determined on the audio lamp control device 113 side.

Next, with reference to FIG. 143, the contents of stop-related processing 5 (S4265) will be described. FIG. 143 is a flow chart showing the contents of stop-related processing 5 (S4265). In this stop-related processing 5 (S4265), the processing contents to be executed when the special figure confirmation command is received are changed with respect to the stop-related processing (see S4215 in FIG. 65) of the first embodiment described above. are different. Other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the stop related process 5 (S4265) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure confirmation command is received (S4601), and if it is determined that the special figure confirmation command is not received (S4601: No), The processing of S4602 to S4611, which is the same as the stop-related processing (see S4215 in FIG. 65) of the first embodiment described above, is executed, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4601, if it is determined that the special figure confirmation command is received (S4601: Yes), then it is determined whether the time saving continuation command is received (S4631), and it is determined that the time saving continuation command is received If so (S4631: Yes), a display command for stopping the fluctuation indicating the continuation of the time saving is set (S4632), and the process proceeds to S4602.

In the process of S4631, if it is determined that the time saving continuation command has not been received, then it is determined whether the time saving end command has been received (S4633), and if it is determined that the time saving end command has been received (S4633: yes ), and set a display command for stopping fluctuation indicating the end of the time saving state.

Thus, in the case of receiving the special figure confirmation command, since it is configured to be able to receive the time saving continuation command or the time saving end command at the same time, by executing stop related processing 5 (see S4265 in FIG. 143) , When the display mode (production mode) displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is received when the time saving continuation command is received, when the time saving end command is received, When neither command is received, It can be set variably. Therefore, the process for setting the display mode for the fluctuation stop to be executed when the special figure confirmation command is received, the process for setting the display mode for showing the status of the time saving state (remaining time saving number of times), can be executed within the same process, and the processing load of the control process can be reduced.

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 155. FIG. In the above-described first embodiment, the general pattern per game that is executed when the lottery of the normal pattern is won Aiming to win the ball to the provided special electric operation opening 643), during the game for the role (within the period in which the V winning device 65 is opened), to the V winning opening 165 provided in the V winning device 65 The player is made to execute a game (special electric game) aiming to execute a jackpot game (V jackpot game) by winning a ball.

Then, the time saving state in which the special electric game is executed is until the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (4 times or 15 times) (until the special symbol variation of the predetermined number of times is stopped and displayed), or the predetermined number of times is reached. It is configured to continue until a big win is won in a special pattern lottery (until the special pattern is stopped and displayed to indicate that the lottery result is a big win), and the fluctuation of the special pattern during the time saving state. The longer the time is, the longer the period (short time period) in which the short working time state is set, and the more times the normal pattern lottery is executed during the short time period.

Furthermore, when the ball hits the special electric activation port 643 during the normal per game, when the per role game is executed, the special symbol variation being executed is interrupted (the variation time of the special symbol variation is subtracted The interrupted special symbol variation (processing for subtracting the variation time of the special symbol variation) is performed after the end of the role game or the jackpot game ( After the end of the V jackpot game), that is, when the condition for executing a new special symbol variation is established, the game is restarted.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, the length of the execution period (short period of time) of the special electric game is changed by the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation and the interruption period due to the game per role, so that the special electric game It is possible to make middle players willingly play the game so as to make them select as long a variation time as possible as the special symbol variation and to perform many role winning games. .

However, during the special electric game, for example, during the fluctuation period of the normal design, or during the general design per game, the ball can not be won to the general electric winning device 640 (difficult to win) period (electric role 640a Closed period) is a period in which the performance of the accessory winning game cannot be performed and the variation time of the special symbol variation is subtracted, so the ball can be won to the electric accessory 640a. The period during which the electric role product 640a is released during the winning game, that is, the period during which the variation time of the special symbol variation is subtracted, is a disadvantageous period that is more disadvantageous to the player than the period during which the role winning game can be executed. becomes.

In addition, the prize-winning game in which the special symbol variation is interrupted is an end condition (winning end condition) that is established when the number of winning balls to the V winning device 65 reaches a predetermined number (three), or a winning end condition. It is configured to end when any one of the termination conditions (time termination conditions) established when a predetermined period (1.6 seconds) has passed since the start of the hitting game is satisfied. According to the content of the game played by the player (whether or not the ball is shot) during the role winning game, the role winning game is terminated when any of the termination conditions is established.

That is, in the above-described first embodiment, in consideration of the normal pattern fluctuation situation and the game situation of the general pattern per game during the special electric game, it is determined which end condition is to be established for the accessory per game being executed. It had a playability to make you choose. By configuring in this way, depending on the skill of the player, the above-mentioned disadvantageous period during the special electric game (normal symbol fluctuation period, electric role product 640a closing period of the game per normal pattern) and the execution period of the game per role It is possible to vary the length of the period in which the two overlap each other, and to motivate the player to play the game.

However, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, a plurality of end conditions are set. The ball does not win as expected and the time end condition is satisfied, or the ball that has been shot in advance enters the V winning device 65 in spite of the game being played in an attempt to satisfy the time end condition. There is a problem that a winning ending condition is satisfied due to winning, and the ending condition desired by the player cannot be satisfied.

On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, the player can select either the prize-winning end condition or the time end condition as the end condition of the winning-accessory game. In other words, when the prize ending condition is selected, the time ending condition will not be satisfied even if the period in which the time ending condition can be satisfied has passed. Even if the number of winnings reaches the number for which the winning end condition can be satisfied, the winning end condition is not satisfied. By configuring in this way, it is possible to end the role winning game when the end condition desired by the player is established, so that the player can be made to actively play the game during the special electric game. .

In the sixth embodiment, when the prize ending condition is selected, the role winning game does not end based on the elapsed time during the role winning game, and when the time ending condition is selected, It is configured so that the winning prize game is not ended based on the number of winning balls to the V winning device 65 during the winning prize game, but it is not limited to this, and for example, a prize ending condition is selected. In this case, a forced time end condition or a time end condition that is satisfied when a longer time (e.g., 10 seconds) than the elapsed time (e.g., 1.6 seconds) set as a normal time end condition has passed is selected, set a forced win end condition that is met when the number of wins (e.g. 10) greater than the number of wins set as a normal win end condition (e.g. 3) is reached. can be configured to By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the performance of the accessory winning game for a long period of time.

First, with reference to FIG. 144, a characteristic configuration of the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 144 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, operation means (switching button 22za, first selection button 22zb, second 2 selection button 22zc) is newly provided, and the rest is the same. Identical configurations are denoted by identical reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 144, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, a switching button 22za is provided on the right side of the return button 43 provided in the ball rental operation unit 40 (on the right side in front view of FIG. 144). A first selection button 22zb and a second selection button 22zc are provided on the right side of the upper plate 17 (the right side when viewed from the front in FIG. 144). When the player presses the switching button 22za, the first selection button 22zb, and the second selection button 22zc (hereinafter also referred to as the group of end condition switching buttons 22z), a detection switch (not shown) detects the pressing and outputs the detection result. is output to the input/output port 205 (see FIG. 21) of the main controller 110 .

Specifically, when the switching button 22za is pressed, a switching button detection switch (not shown) detects the pressing of the switching button 22za, and when the first selection button 22zb is pressed, the first selection button 22zb is pressed. When the first selection button detection switch (not shown) detects that the first selection button 22zb has been pressed and the second selection button 22zc is pressed, the second selection button detection switch (not shown) switches to the second selection button. It is configured to detect pressing of the 2 selection button 22zc, and each detection switch is configured to output the detection result to the main controller 110 respectively.

That is, the switching button detection switch, the first selection button detection switch, and the second selection button detection switch are included in the various switches 208 described above with reference to FIG.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the end condition switching button group 22z described above is spaced apart from the frame button 22 by about 10 centimeters. With this configuration, in order to make the player interested in various effects executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the operation effects using the frame button 22 are executed and the game is played. It is possible to prevent the player from erroneously operating the end condition switching button group 22z when making the player operate the frame button 22.例文帳に追加

As described above, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 includes operation means for effect (frame button 22), operation means (end condition switching button group 22z) that affects game performance, is provided, and the player can arbitrarily select the content in terms of both performance and game performance. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to participate in the game.

<Regarding production content in the sixth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 145 and FIG. 146, the characteristic effect content executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment will be described. In contrast to the above-described first embodiment, the sixth embodiment provides a selection effect for allowing the player to operate the group of end condition switching buttons, and a switching effect for indicating the result of the player's operation of the group of end condition switching buttons. It is configured to be executable.

First, with reference to FIG. 145(a), the display contents of the ending screen in the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 145(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents displayed on the jackpot ending screen in the sixth embodiment. The display screen shown in FIG. 145(a) is different from the jackpot ending screen (see FIG. 12(a)) in the first embodiment described above in a display mode for prompting the player to operate the switching button 22za. They are different in that they are added, and are otherwise the same. The same display contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 145(a), in the secondary display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, the characters "V rush will start after the jackpot ends!" are displayed, and the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends It is shown in an easy-to-understand manner for the player to shift to the V rush mode indicating that the game will be completed. Then, in the main display area Dm, a comment "Get 40 seconds of V rush period" with a short remaining time mode 801 of "40 seconds" is displayed to indicate the period during which the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot game continues. be done. It should be noted that when the display screen of FIG. 145(a) is displayed, the display screen of FIG. Since it is the same as the state of reserved storage of the special symbol (see FIG. 12(c)), the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, a display area HR20 is formed on the lower left side of the main display area Dm (lower left side in the front view of FIG. 145), and the display mode for prompting the operation of the switching button 22za is "Select termination condition with button PUSH." ' and an icon imitating the switching button 22za are displayed.

In the sixth embodiment, the player operates (presses) the switching button 22za while the ending screen of the jackpot game is displayed, so that the end condition of the accessory winning game can be selected. . That is, in the sixth embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed, the end condition of the role winning game is configured to be selectable, and during the time saving state (V rush) set after the jackpot game ends, the role winning It is configured so that the end condition of the game cannot be switched.

By configuring in this way, the conditions for ending the game per accessory are frequently switched according to the game situation during the V rush, that is, the fluctuation situation of the special symbol and the fluctuation situation of the normal symbol, and the player is overwhelmed. It is possible to suppress the provision of a game situation that is advantageous to the player. In addition, it is configured so that the end condition of the accessory winning game can be selected at the timing when the game of winning the ball in the variable winning device 650 in the jackpot game is finished and before the special electric game is executed. To provide a game easy for a player to understand without overlapping the game of shooting a ball and the act of selecting an end condition.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 145(a), in a state in which the time-saving state period (40 seconds) set after the end of the jackpot game is notified, the termination condition of the accessory winning game is configured to be selectable. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to select the end condition of the role-winning game while grasping the remaining short-time mode 801 displayed on the jackpot ending screen. Specifically, when a display mode indicating that the period of the time saving state is short (for example, 40 seconds) is displayed as the display mode of the remaining short time mode 801, the winning end condition is set as the end condition of the game per accessory. By selecting and arbitrarily adjusting the game period of the game per role, aiming for a special electric game that efficiently sets the period for interrupting the special symbol fluctuation, the period of the time saving state is long as the display mode of the remaining short time mode 801 (for example, 200 seconds) is displayed, select the time end condition, and increase the number of balls to be awarded to the V winning device 65 in one accessory game. It is possible to aim for a special electric game in which the amount of benefits (number of prize balls) per time increases.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the player is configured to be able to select the end condition of the accessory winning game during the period when the ending screen of the jackpot game is displayed. The end condition of the accessory winning game may be selectable at any timing during the jackpot game.

In addition, even when the standby screen (demonstration screen) displayed when the special symbol variation is not executed during the time-saving state, the end condition of the game per role can be selected. Alternatively, the end condition of the role winning game may be selectable during the period when the role winning game is being executed. Even in such a case, it is possible to select the termination condition of the game per role at the timing when the remaining time of the time saving state (short time) is not subtracted, so that the player can have time to spare. It is possible to select the end condition of the winning game.

On the other hand, different from the technical idea of the sixth embodiment, the end condition of the game per role may be selectable only during the period in which the remaining time of the time saving state (short time period) is subtracted. By configuring in this way, during the special electric game in which the remaining time of the time saving state (short time period) is subtracted, the operation of selecting the end condition of the game per role or playing the game by concentrating only on the special electric game It is possible for the player to select whether or not to execute the game, and the player can play the game while predicting the future game contents, and the interest in the game can be improved.

When the player presses the switching button 22za while the screen shown in FIG. 145(a) is displayed, the display screen shown in FIG. 145(b) is displayed. Next, with reference to FIG. 145(b), the display contents of the selection screen for allowing the player to select the termination condition of the accessory winning game will be described. FIG. 145(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed as the end condition selection screen.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the switch button detection switch (not shown) detects that the switch button 22za is pressed, the detection result is output to the main controller 110 . In the main controller 110, a command (during switching command) indicating that the switching button 22za is pressed is set, and the set command (during switching command) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 55). (See S1801 in FIG. 55). Then, the audio lamp control device 113 sets the display mode of the display screen shown in FIG. 145(b) based on the reception of the switching command.

Referring to FIG. 145(b), the display contents of the end condition selection screen for selecting the end condition of the winning role game will be described in detail. Please select an end condition." is displayed. By visually recognizing this comment, the player can easily understand that the currently displayed screen is a screen for selecting the end condition of the winning-accessory game.

In the main display area Dm, display areas (HR21, HR22) corresponding to a plurality of end conditions selectable by the player are partitioned, and the contents of the plurality of end conditions (winning end condition, time end condition) are defined. (contents for satisfying the termination condition) is displayed. More specifically, the display area HR21 displays the winning end condition as the end condition of the accessory winning game in association with the display area HR22, and displays the time end condition as the end condition of the accessory winning game in association with the display area HR22. .

In the display area HR21, a comment "It will end when three balls enter the V-attacker" is displayed as a requirement for establishing the winning end condition, and "winning end" is displayed to indicate the target ending condition. It is displayed in the display area HR21a. In addition, as a guide display mode 871 for guiding the selection button to be operated by the player when selecting the winning end condition, an icon imitating the first selection button 22zb (a circle with the number 1 attached) is displayed. is displayed.

On the other hand, in the display area HR22, a comment "It will end in 1.6 seconds from the start of winning the role" is displayed as a requirement for establishing the time end condition, and a comment " TIME END” is displayed in the display area HR22a. Also, as a guide display mode 872 for guiding the selection button to be operated by the player when selecting the time end condition, an icon imitating the second selection button 22zc (a circle with the number 2 attached) is displayed. is displayed.

Further, a display area HR23 is formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, and the character "time" is displayed to indicate the type of the end condition currently set as the end condition of the role winning game. It is That is, FIG. 145(b) shows a state in which the time end condition is set as the end condition of the accessory winning game. In addition, when a prize-winning end condition is set as the condition for ending the role-winning game, the characters "winning" are set in the display area HR23. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, as a guide display mode for guiding the operation to be performed by the player in order to select the end condition of the role-winning game, a comment "Please select with a button" and a second An icon indicating that the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc is operated (depressed) is displayed.

By displaying such a selection screen, it becomes possible for the player to easily make a selection while grasping the content of the conditions for ending the accessory winning game. In addition, in the display screen shown in FIG. 145(b), when the selection screen that allows selection of the end condition of the game per role is displayed, the time saving state period (short time period) set after the jackpot game ends 145(a)) is not displayed, but the selection screen is displayed without being limited to this. , the short remaining time mode 801 may be displayed. As a result, it is possible to easily select the end condition of the accessory winning game while referring to the length of the period of the time saving state set immediately after.

When the first selection button 22zb is operated (pressed) while the end condition selection screen (see FIG. 145(b)) is displayed, the first selection button 22zb is operated (pressed). A detection switch detects and outputs the detection result to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110 . Then, in the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, processing based on the operation of the first selection button 22zb (processing for storing the selected end condition) is executed, and the first A command (operation command) for indicating that the selection button 22zb has been effectively operated is set.

When the operation command is set in the control processing of main controller 110, the sound lamp control device in the external output processing (see S1801 in FIG. 55) executed in the main processing of main controller 110 (see FIG. 55) 113, and the audio lamp control device 113 sets the display mode after selecting the end condition based on the information included in the received operation command (information indicating the type of the selected button that was operated). be. Here, an example of the display screen displayed after selection of the termination condition will be described with reference to FIG. 146(a). FIG. 146(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed after selecting the prize ending condition as the condition for ending the winning-accessory game.

When the first selection button 22zb corresponding to the winning end condition is operated (pressed) while the end condition selection screen shown in FIG. 145(b) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 146(a), A display area corresponding to the selected end condition (winning end condition) is formed on the entire surface of the main display area Dm, and the word "OK" is displayed above the main display area Dm to indicate that the selection of the end condition has been completed. be done. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, as a guidance mode for informing the player of the timing at which the result of this selection will be reflected, a comment "The winning will end from the next prize winning" is displayed. In the region HR23, characters of "winning" are displayed to indicate that the currently set ending condition is the winning ending condition.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, it is possible to select the end condition of the role winning game multiple times within a period in which the end condition of the role winning game can be selected. The ending condition of the object winning game is set so that the ending condition selected at the time when the selectable period has passed is set as the ending condition of the accessory winning game. Therefore, even if the player selects the ending condition by mistake, he/she can select the ending condition again until the period during which the player can select the ending condition for the accessory winning game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc is operated in a state in which the end condition of the accessory winning game can be selected, the fact that the selection button has been operated is displayed. and the type of the selected button operated, and when the ending period of the jackpot game ends, that is, when the period in which the end condition of the accessory winning game can be selected ends, the final A command (end condition command) indicating the end condition of the randomly selected accessory winning game is set.

In other words, during the period in which the player can select the end condition of the game with the accessory, there are cases where the player selects the end condition multiple times. , the display mode according to the operation of the selection button is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, and only the end condition finally selected is output to the sound lamp control device 113. are doing. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent unnecessary commands from being output from main controller 110 to audio lamp controller 113 .

Then, when the jackpot game ends and the time-saving state is set, as shown in FIG. be done. FIG. 145(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed during the V rush. The display screen shown in FIG. 146(b) is the same situation (see FIG. 12(c)) in which the display screen shown in FIG. 12(b) of the first embodiment is displayed. 146(c)), in which a display area HR23 is formed for indicating the end condition of the currently set role winning game, in contrast to the above-described first embodiment. They are different in one respect and otherwise identical. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 146(b), on the display screen during the V-rush, the characters "WIN" are displayed, indicating that the prize-winning end condition is set as the condition for ending the role-winning game. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player of the end condition of the accessory winning game executed during the V rush in an easy-to-understand manner. Although not shown, the display area HR23 is configured to be always displayed during the V rush period. is structured so that it can be easily understood. It should be noted that, when the end condition is displayed during the prize-winning game in this way, the element for establishing the end condition (if the winning end condition is set, the V attacker (V winning device 65) The update status of the winning number of balls and the elapsed time from the start of the game for the role (if the time end condition is set) and the value that satisfies the end condition are displayed on the display surface. should be configured to By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is confused due to the abrupt end of the accessory winning game.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the main controller in the sixth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 147, the electrical configuration of main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 147 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 147, the RAM 203 of the sixth embodiment has an end condition storage area 203ea, a switchable flag 203eb, and a switching flag 203ec added to the RAM 203 of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 29). are the same except that The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The termination condition storage area 203ea is a storage area for storing the termination condition of the role winning game selected by the player. When it is determined that the second selection button 22zc) has been operated, an end condition corresponding to the operation content is stored. Then, when the jackpot game ends, the stored end condition is read, and is referred to when setting the end condition command corresponding to the read end condition. Further, when executing the accessory winning game, the accessory winning game is executed based on the read end condition.

In the sixth embodiment, the end condition storage area 203ea is configured to store information indicating the winning end conditions as initial data. Specifically, when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 10) has been operated (S1704 in FIG. As a part of the processing, information for indicating the winning end condition is stored in the end condition storage area 203ea.

In this way, at least one end condition is stored as the initial data in the end condition storage area 203ea as the end condition of the role winning game, so that the end condition of the role winning game can be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 having the above, it is possible to reliably prevent the occurrence of a situation in which none of the condition for ending the game with the accessory is set. In the present embodiment, as the initial data of the end conditions for ending the prize-winning game, information corresponding to the winning end conditions is stored (stored) in the end condition storage area 203ea. For example, as the initial data of the end condition of the accessory-winning game, at least the winning end condition and the time end condition may be set.

The switchable flag 203eb is a flag for indicating that it is a period in which it is possible to select the end condition of the jackpot game, and is set to ON when starting the ending period of the jackpot game, and the ending period of the jackpot game. is set to off when the

In the sixth embodiment, when the switch button 22za is operated while the switchable flag 203eb is not set to ON, the operation of the switch button 22za is disabled. With this configuration, even if the player erroneously operates the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc in a state in which the switchable flag 203eb is not set to ON, the processing based on the operation can be performed. You can prevent it from being executed.

The in-switching flag 203ec indicates that the switching button 22za is operated (pressed) during the period in which the end condition of the accessory winning game can be selected (the period in which the switchable flag 20eb is set to ON), and the first selection button 22zb. , or a flag for indicating that it is a period in which the end condition can be selected by operating the second selection button 22zc, and operating the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc It is set to ON when a period is set for which the end condition can be selected in .

When the switch button 22za is operated while the switchable flag 203eb is set to ON (see S2201: Yes in FIG. 151) in the switching process (see S171 in FIG. 151), the switching flag 203ec That is, when the switching button 22za is operated during the ending period of the jackpot game (S2203 in FIG. 151: Yes), it is set to ON (see S2204 in FIG. 151).

Then, when determining whether the setting state of the switching flag 203ec is a period in which the operation of the first selection button 22zb and the second selection button 22zc can be effectively determined in the switching process (see S171 in FIG. 151). (S2202 in FIG. 151), and when the end condition is selected based on the operation of the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc (see S2206 in FIG. 151), the (see S2209 of ). Further, when the selection operation is not performed by the player while the switching flag 203ec is set to ON, it is set to OFF at the end timing of the jackpot game (see S2303 in FIG. 153).

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the sound ramp control device in the sixth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 148, the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 148 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 148, in the sixth embodiment, the end storage area 223ea is stored in the RAM 223 (see FIG. 30(b)) of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first embodiment. They are different in that they are added, and are otherwise the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The end storage area 223ea is a storage area for storing the end condition of the selected accessory winning game. Based on the operation information included in the command (information indicating whether the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc has been operated), the corresponding termination condition is stored (see S5706 and S5707 in FIG. 155). ). Then, when the end condition command output at the end of the jackpot game is received (S5709 in FIG. 155: Yes), the content of the received end condition command (type of end condition set) and the end storage area 223ea The stored information (type of end condition stored in advance based on the operation command) is compared (S5710 in FIG. 155), and if the comparison result is different, the content of the end condition command is changed. A corresponding termination condition is stored.

In other words, when an operation command indicating that the selection button (the first selection button 22zb, the second selection button 22zc) is operated by the player is received, the end storage area 223ea is stored based on the received operation command. The end condition is stored, and the display mode of the switching effect executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 can be set based on the end condition stored in the end storage area 223ea. Then, when an end condition command for indicating the finally selected end condition is received, the end condition set by the audio lamp control device 113 based on the operation command, the actually set end condition, are compared, and if the comparison result is not the same, the termination condition corresponding to the content of the termination condition command is stored.

By configuring in this way, the pachinko machine 10 using a configuration in which a command (end condition command) indicating the finally selected end condition is set at the end of the jackpot game receives the end condition command. In the previous stage, the end condition selected by the player can be predicted based on the operation command, the performance mode based on the prediction result can be set, and the performance can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable. In this embodiment, the setting timing of the end condition command is the end timing of the jackpot game. It may be configured to set an end condition command in addition to the operation command when the operation is performed. When configured in this manner, the display mode to be executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is selected based on the received termination condition command, that is, based on the actually set termination condition. can be done.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the sixth embodiment>
Control processing of the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 to 153. FIG. In the sixth embodiment, in place of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39), the timer interrupt processing 6 (see FIG. 149) is replaced with the special electric starting gate prize processing (see FIG. 50) in the first embodiment described above. (See S108) instead of the special electric starting gate winning process 6 (see S178 in FIG. 150), and in place of the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 56), the jackpot control process 6 (see S1854 in FIG. 152) is executed. different, otherwise identical. The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

First, the contents of timer interrupt processing 6 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 149 is a flow chart showing the contents of timer interrupt processing 6. As shown in FIG. This timer interrupt process 6 is the special electric starting point winning process 6 (see S178 in FIG. 150) instead of the special electric starting point winning process (see S108 in FIG. 50) for the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39). ) is executed, and the switching process (see S171) is added, and the other processes (S101 to S107, S109 to S112) are the same as the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39). A detailed description thereof is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 150, the contents of the special electric starting gate winning process 6 (S178) will be described. FIG. 150 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special electric starting gate winning process 6 (S178). In this special electric starting gate winning process 6 (S178), the contents of the processing to be executed when the conditions for executing the game per accessory are satisfied are changed from the above-described special electric starting gate winning processing (see S108 in FIG. 50). They are different in one respect and otherwise identical. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the special electric starter winning process 6 (S178) is executed, first, the processes of S1301 to S1307, which are the same as the special electric starter winning process of the first embodiment (see S108 in FIG. 50), are executed, and then The end condition stored in the end condition storage area 203ea is read (S1381), and the read end condition is set (S1382). After that, a special electric operation command is set (S1308), and this processing ends. Also, when it is determined that it is not in the process of S1302 (S1302: No), an error command is set (S1309), and this process ends.

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, when the condition for executing a game with a role is satisfied, the information stored in the end condition storage area 203ea is read, and the end condition corresponding to the read information is set. By setting, it is configured to vary the end condition of the accessory winning game. As a result, when the end condition selected by the player is satisfied, the role winning game can be ended, so the player can select the size of the privilege given during the special electric game, and the game can be played. It can increase motivation. In this embodiment, each time the execution condition of the role winning game is established, the end condition of the role winning game to be executed is set. If the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to select the termination condition of the accessory winning game only after the completion of the jackpot game, the execution condition of the accessory winning game is set at the time when the jackpot game is finished or first after the jackpot game is finished. When established, the end condition stored in the end condition storage area 203ea is read out, and the action scenario corresponding to the end condition is set, until the next big win game is executed. It may be configured to execute a role winning game based on the scenario of winning a role action.

With this configuration, the role product corresponding to the end condition selected by the player does not need to read out information from the end condition storage area 203ea each time the condition for executing the game with the role object is satisfied. A winning game can be executed.

Further, unlike the sixth embodiment, even in the case of the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to select the end condition of the role winning game during the special electric game (during the time saving state), for example, A flag (termination condition switching flag) is provided to indicate that the termination condition has been switched, and only when the termination condition switching flag is set to ON, the information stored in the termination condition storage area 203ea is read and used. It is preferable to configure so as to switch the end condition of the hitting game. As a result, when a new role winning game is executed under the same end condition as the previous role winning game, the process of reading information stored in the end condition storage area 203ea can be skipped. It is possible to simplify the control processing when executing the game for winning the role.

Next, the contents of the switching process (S171) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 151 is a flow chart showing the contents of the switching process (S171). This switching process (S171) is a control process executed in the timer interrupt process 6 (see FIG. 149), and is executed based on the player's operation of the end condition switching button group 22z.

When the switching process (S171) is executed, first, it is determined whether the switchable flag 203eb is set to ON (S2201). If it is determined that it is not during the period (S2201: No), it is during the period in which the operation of the end condition switching button group 22z is disabled, so this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the switchable flag 203eb is set to ON in the processing of S2201, that is, when it is determined that the current time is during the ending period of the jackpot game (S2201: Yes), next, during switching It is determined whether the flag 203ec is set to ON (S2202).

In the process of S2202, when the switching flag 203ec is not set to ON, that is, during the ending period of the jackpot game, the switching button 22za is not operated (the display screen of FIG. 145(a) is displayed. (S2202: No), it is determined whether the switching button 22za has been operated (S2203). finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the switching button 22za has been operated (S2203: Yes), then the switching flag 203ec is set to ON (S2204), the switching command is set (S2205), and this processing is performed. exit.

Here, the determination processing of S2203 will be described. In this embodiment, when the player operates (presses) the switching button 22za, the switching button detection switch detects the pressed switching button 22za, and the detection result is sent to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110. It is configured to output as Then, in the determination processing of S2203, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is output from the switch button detection switch described above.

On the other hand, in the process of S2202, if the switching flag 203ec is set to ON, that is, during the ending period of the jackpot game, the switching button 22za has already been operated state (display of FIG. 145 (b) screen is displayed) (S2202: Yes), it is determined whether any of the selection buttons (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) is being operated (S2206). In the determination processing of S2206, when the first selection button 22zb is operated (pressed), the first selection button detection switch detects the pressed first selection button 22zb, and the detection result is output to the main controller. Since the signal is output to the input/output port 205 of 110, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is output from the detection switch for the first selection button. Further, when the second selection button 22zc is operated (depressed), the second selection button detection switch detects the depressed second selection button 22zc, and the detection result is the input/output port of the main controller 110. 205, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is being output from the detection switch for the second selection button.

In the process of S2206, if it is determined that either the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc has been operated (S2206: Yes), information indicating that the selection button has been operated and (S2207), stores the termination condition selected by the process of S2206 in the termination condition storage area 203ea (S2208), and turns off the switching flag 203ec. It sets (S2209) and terminates this processing.

Further, in the processing of S2206, if it is determined that neither the first selection button 22zb nor the second selection button 22zc is operated, that is, if the detection switch for the first selection button or the detection switch for the second selection button If it is determined that the detection signal has not been output (S2206: Yes), this processing ends.

As described above, in the switching process (see S171 in FIG. 151), at the timing when the operation of the selection buttons (the first selection button 22zb and the second selection button 22zc) is determined to be valid, any selection button When (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) is operated, information indicating the selected termination condition is stored in the termination condition storage area 203ea, and a command indicating the selected termination condition is set. An operation command including information indicating that the selection buttons (the first selection button 22zb and the second selection button 22zc) have been operated and information indicating the type of the operated selection button is set. are doing. In addition, since the switching flag 203ec is set to OFF in the process of S2209, if it is during the ending period of the jackpot game, the end condition switching button group 22z is operated, and the end condition can be selected again. ing.

That is, since the end condition is not determined until the ending period of the jackpot game is over, the command (end condition command) for indicating the selected end condition is not output to the sound lamp control device 113. ing. By configuring in this way, when the end condition command is received on the audio lamp control device 113 side, until the next jackpot game is executed, information included in the received end condition command (end condition type) You can set the production according to. Therefore, compared to the case where the end condition command is set each time the player operates the selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc), the control processing on the side of the sound lamp control device 113 is simplified. be able to.

In addition, since it is possible to set an operation command indicating that the selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) has been operated while the switching flag 203ec is set to ON, a big hit can be achieved. During the ending period of the game, an effect based on the received operation command can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect that does not make the player who operates the selection buttons (the first selection button 22zb and the second selection button 22zc) feel uncomfortable.

Next, with reference to FIG. 152, the contents of the jackpot control process 6 (S1854) will be described. FIG. 152 is a flow chart showing the content of jackpot control processing 6 (S1854). In this jackpot control processing 6 (S1854), in contrast to the jackpot control processing (see S1804 in FIG. 56) of the first embodiment described above, the processing executed at the start timing of the ending period and the jackpot game end timing are different from the processing executed by The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the jackpot control process 6 (S1854) is executed, first, the same S1901 to S1911 processes as the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 56) of the first embodiment described above are executed, and the process of S1911 is finished. After that, the switchable flag 203eb is set to ON (S1951), and the process ends. That is, in this embodiment, when the ending period set after the end of the last round game is set in the jackpot game, by setting the switchable flag 203eb to ON, the player's operation on the switch button 22za is configured to effectively determine

On the other hand, in the process of S1910, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending period (S1910: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing of the end of the jackpot, that is, the end timing of the ending period (S1912), If it is determined that it is time to end the jackpot (S1912: Yes), the same steps S1913 to S1917 as the jackpot control processing of the first embodiment (see S1804 in FIG. 56) are executed, and then the end condition Setting processing is executed (S1952), and this processing ends. Also, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the jackpot end in the processing of S1912 (S1912: No), the same S1918 processing as the jackpot control processing of the first embodiment (see S1804 in FIG. 56) is executed, End this process.

Next, referring to FIG. 153, the contents of the termination condition setting process (S1952) will be described. FIG. 153 is a flow chart showing the contents of the termination condition setting process (S1952). This end condition setting process (S1952) is executed in the jackpot control process 6 (see S1854 in FIG. 152), and selection of end condition selection of the accessory winning game executed during the ending period of the jackpot game. It executes processing based on the result.

When the end condition setting process (S1952) is executed, first, the switchable flag 203eb is set to OFF (S2301), then it is determined whether the switching flag 203ec is set to ON (S2302), and the switching flag 203ec is set to ON (S2302). When it is determined that it is set, that is, when the jackpot end timing is reached in a state where the selection screen for selecting the end condition (see FIG. 145(b)) is displayed (S2302: Yes), the switching flag 203ec is set to OFF (S2303), the information stored in the end condition storage area 203ea (finally selected end condition type) is read out (S2304), and the end condition is set based on the information read out from the end condition storage area 203ea. A command is set (S2305), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the switching flag 203ec is not set to ON in the process of S2302, that is, if the switch button 22za is not operated on the jackpot ending screen (see FIG. 145 (a)), or the end If a desired selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) is operated (pressed) on the condition selection screen (see FIG. 145(b)) (S2302: No), the process of S2303 is skipped. to the processing of S2304.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the end condition setting process (see S1952 in FIG. 153) executed at the end timing of the jackpot game, the end condition command for only the end condition finally selected is configured to set Furthermore, it is configured so that the period in which the end condition of the accessory winning game can be selected is only during the big winning game. By configuring in this way, the number of end condition commands output to the audio lamp control device 113 side in the wake of one jackpot game can be reduced to one, and the end conditions included in the end condition commands is applied at least until the next jackpot game is executed.

Therefore, on the side of the voice lamp control device 113, the effect based on the received end condition command can be continuously executed at least until the next jackpot game is executed, so that the end condition of the accessory per game In the case where the effect mode is varied accordingly, it is possible to prevent the processing for varying the effect mode from becoming complicated.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the sixth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 154 and 155, the contents of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. The sixth embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the command determination process 6 (S4172 in FIG. 154) is executed instead of the command determination process (S4102 in FIG. 61). are identical. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same processing contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 154, the contents of the command determination process 6 (S4172) will be described. FIG. 154 is a flow chart showing the contents of the command determination process 6 (S4172). This command determination process 6 (S4172 in FIG. 154) is different from the command determination process (S4102 in FIG. 61) in the first embodiment described above, and is a process for determining whether or not a command related to the conditions for ending the game with the accessory has been received. , and a process executed based on the result of the discrimination process are added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the command determination process 6 (S4172 of FIG. 154) is executed, first, the same processes of S4201 to S4219 as the command determination process of the first embodiment (see S4102 of FIG. 61) are executed. If it is determined in the process of S4218 that the win-related command has not been received (S4218: No), then it is determined whether or not the end condition-related command has been received (S4271). Here, the termination condition-related commands include a switching command and an operation command set in the switching process of main controller 110 (see S171 in FIG. 151), and an end condition setting process (see S1952 in FIG. 153). , and the end condition command to be set.

In the process of S4271, if it is determined that the end condition related command has been received (S4271: Yes), then the end condition related process is executed (S4272), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4271, if it is determined that the end condition related command has not been received (S4271: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S4220), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 155, the contents of the termination condition related process (S4272) will be described. FIG. 155 is a flow chart showing the contents of the termination condition related process (S4272). In this end condition related process (S4272), when the player executes a selection operation to select the end condition of the role winning game, various processes are executed for setting the effect mode corresponding to the selection operation. be.

When the end condition related process (S4272) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current jackpot game is in progress (S5701). finish. That is, in the present embodiment, since the termination condition of the accessory per game can be selected only during the jackpot game, when the end condition related command is received other than during the jackpot game, it corresponds to the received command. It is configured not to set the production to be done. Therefore, when an erroneous command is received due to noise or the like, it is possible to suppress execution of an effect not intended by the player.

In the process of S5701, if it is determined that the current jackpot game is in progress (S5701: Yes), then the switching command is received, that is, the player operates the switching button 22za during the jackpot ending period. (S5702). If it is determined in the processing of S5702 that the switching command has been received (S5702: Yes), a display command indicating the selection screen is set (S5703), and this processing ends.

When the process of S5703 is executed, a screen for switching the jackpot ending screen (see FIG. 145(a)) to a selection screen (see FIG. 145(b)) for selecting the condition for ending the game per role. A display command is set. The display command set here is sent to the display control device 114 in the command output processing (see S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main processing (see FIG. 60) of the audio lamp control device 113, like other display commands. is output. Then, when the display control device 114 receives the display command set in the process of S5703, it creates image data for displaying the end condition selection screen (see FIG. 145(b)) and displays the third pattern display device. A selection screen is displayed at 81 .

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5702 that the switching command has not been received (S5702: No), then it is determined whether an operation command has been received (S5704). This operation command is issued when it is determined that the player has operated (depressed) the selection buttons (the first selection button 22zb and the second selection button 22zc), that is, during the ending period of the jackpot. 22za to display the end condition selection screen and then select buttons (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc). This command includes information indicating the type of selection button.

In the processing of S5704, if it is determined that an operation command has been received (S5704: Yes), whether the operation command received this time is an operation command corresponding to the first selection button 22zb, that is, whether the information included in the operation command It is determined whether information indicating that the first selection button 22zb has been operated is included (S5705), and if it is determined to be the first selection button 22zb (S5705: Yes), A display command indicating the end of winning (condition), which is the corresponding end condition, is set (S5706). When the display command is set in the process of S5706, an end condition determination screen (FIG. 146(a)) indicating that the player has selected the winning end condition is displayed from the end condition selection screen (see FIG. 145(b)). reference) is displayed. After that, the set end condition (winning end condition) is stored in the end storage area 223ea, and this process is ended.

In the process of S5705, if it is determined that the operation command received this time is not the operation of the first selection button 22zb (S5705: No), the operation command received this time is the operation of the second selection button 22zc. Therefore, a display command indicating the end of time (condition) is set (S5707), and this processing is terminated. When the display command is set in the processing of S5707, an end condition determination screen indicating that the player has selected the time end condition is displayed from the end condition selection screen (see FIG. 145(b)). Specifically, on the display screen described above with reference to FIG. 146(a), instead of the display area HR21, the display area HR22 (see FIG. 145(b)) is enlarged and displayed, and "Time "end" is displayed, and the characters "time" are displayed in the display area HR23. After that, the set end condition (time end condition) is stored in the end storage area 223ea, and this process is ended.

If it is determined in the process of S5704 that no operation command has been received (S5704: No), then it is determined whether an end condition command has been received (S5709), and it is determined that no end condition command has been received. If so (S5709: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the termination condition command has been received (S5709: Yes), the information indicating the termination condition stored in the termination storage area 223ea is compared with the information included in the termination condition command received this time. , indicate the same termination condition (S5710).

If it is determined in the process of S5710 that the end condition is the same, that is, if the end condition set based on the received operation command and the end condition indicated by the end condition command indicate the same end condition (S5710: Yes), this process ends. If the termination condition set based on the received operation command and the termination condition indicated by the termination condition command do not indicate the same termination condition (S5710: No), the actually set termination condition, Since the selection result displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is different, the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 corresponds to the end condition indicated by the end condition command. A display command for switching to the display mode is set (S5711), and this processing ends.

When the display command is set in the processing of S5711, a display corresponding to the termination condition indicated by the termination condition command is displayed in the display area HR23 while displaying the comment "Ending condition switching" in the center of the main display area Dm. Aspects are displayed.

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the player can select either the prize-winning end condition or the time end condition as the condition for ending the winning-accessory game. In other words, when the prize ending condition is selected, the time ending condition will not be satisfied even if the period in which the time ending condition can be satisfied has passed. Even if the number of winnings reaches a number that can satisfy the winning ending condition, the winning ending condition is not established. By configuring in this way, the role winning game can be ended when the end condition desired by the player is established, so that the player can be made to actively play the game during the special electric game. .

In the sixth embodiment, when the prize ending condition is selected, the role winning game does not end based on the elapsed time during the role winning game, and when the time ending condition is selected, It is configured so that the winning prize game is not ended based on the number of winning balls to the V winning device 65 during the winning prize game, but it is not limited to this, and for example, a prize ending condition is selected. In this case, a forced time end condition or a time end condition that is satisfied when a longer time (e.g., 10 seconds) than the elapsed time (e.g., 1.6 seconds) set as a normal time end condition has passed is selected, set a forced win end condition that is met when the number of wins (e.g. 10) greater than the number of wins set as a normal win end condition (e.g. 3) is reached. can be configured to By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the performance of the accessory winning game for a long period of time.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the player operates (presses) the switching button 22za during the period when the ending screen of the jackpot game is displayed, so that the end condition of the role winning game can be selected. ing. That is, in the sixth embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed, the end condition of the role winning game is configured to be selectable, and during the time saving state (V rush) set after the jackpot game ends, the role winning It is configured so that the end condition of the game cannot be switched.

By configuring in this way, the conditions for ending the game per accessory are frequently switched according to the game situation during the V rush, that is, the fluctuation situation of the special symbol and the fluctuation situation of the normal symbol, and the player is overwhelmed. It is possible to suppress the provision of a game situation that is advantageous to the player. In addition, it is configured so that the end condition of the accessory winning game can be selected at the timing when the game of winning the ball in the variable winning device 650 in the jackpot game is finished and before the special electric game is executed. To provide a game easy for a player to understand without overlapping the game of shooting a ball and the act of selecting an end condition.

Furthermore, since the end condition of the role winning game is selectable in a state where the period (40 seconds) of the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot game is notified, the remaining condition displayed on the jackpot ending screen It is possible to make the player select the end condition of the accessory winning game while grasping the short period of time mode 801.例文帳に追加Specifically, when a display mode indicating that the period of the time saving state is short (for example, 40 seconds) is displayed as the display mode of the remaining short time mode 801, the winning end condition is set as the end condition of the game per accessory. By selecting and arbitrarily adjusting the game period of the game per role, aiming for a special electric game that efficiently sets the period for interrupting the special symbol fluctuation, the period of the time saving state is long as the display mode of the remaining short time mode 801 (for example, 200 seconds) is displayed, select the time end condition, and increase the number of balls to be awarded to the V winning device 65 in one accessory game. It is possible to aim for a special electric game in which the amount of benefits (number of prize balls) per time increases.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the player is configured to be able to select the end condition of the accessory winning game during the period when the ending screen of the jackpot game is displayed. The end condition of the accessory winning game may be selectable at any timing during the jackpot game.

In addition, even when the waiting screen (demonstration screen) that is displayed when the special symbol variation is not executed during the time saving state is displayed, the end condition of the game per role can be selected. Alternatively, the condition for ending the role winning game may be selected during the period in which the role winning game is being executed. Even in such a case, it is possible to select the end condition of the game per role at the timing when the remaining time of the time saving state (short time) is not subtracted, so that the player can have time to spare. It is possible to select the end condition of the winning game.

On the other hand, different from the technical idea of the sixth embodiment, the end condition of the game per role may be selectable only during the period in which the remaining time of the time saving state (short time period) is subtracted. By configuring in this way, during the special electric game in which the remaining time of the time saving state (short time period) is subtracted, the operation of selecting the end condition of the game per role or playing the game by concentrating only on the special electric game It is possible for the player to select whether or not to execute the game, and the player can play the game while predicting the future game contents, and the interest in the game can be improved.

<Second modification>
Next, with reference to FIG. 156, a second modification of each of the above-described embodiments will be described. In each of the above-described embodiments, when the normal state is set, when the time saving state is set, in all games such as winning games (games per role, small winning games, big winning games), on the game board 13 A game (left-handed game) in which a ball is shot so as to flow down the left side area (left side of the variable display unit 80) is executed.

As a result, since the game area in which the player shoots the ball is not changed, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. In addition, in each embodiment, as described above, in the middle of the game (for example, when the winning game is executed), since there is no need to change the game method, when the normal figure winning game is executed (FIG. 13 ( a)), and even when a role-winning game is executed (see FIG. 18(a)), a guidance notification (for example, a comment display of "right shot") for changing the game method is provided. In the display area HR3, the player is notified of the devices (for example, the electric winning device 640, the V winning device 65, etc.) that are open during the winning game to be executed.

However, in the display area HR3 (see FIG. 13(a)) in each of the above-described embodiments, there is simply an image display schematically showing the winning device (common electric winning device 640) corresponding to the winning game to be executed. There is a problem that the display is only displayed and is unnecessary for the player who understands the content of the winning game to be executed. In addition, since the area of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 provided in the pachinko machine 10 is limited, if an unnecessary display is displayed in the display area HR3 (see FIG. 13A), other There is a problem that the area for executing the performance display is narrowed and the performance effect of the pachinko machine 10 is lowered. On the other hand, if each display area of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is set for the purpose of widening the area for executing the other effect display and enhancing the effect of the effect, the display area of the display area HR3 becomes large. There is a problem that the space becomes narrower and a game that is difficult for the player to understand is provided.

On the other hand, in the second modification, the guide display mode (display area HR3 This embodiment is different from the above-described embodiments in that the display mode of the display image to be displayed can be variably set based on various conditions. The contents other than that are the same as those of the above-described embodiments, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, an example of the display screen displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the second modified example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 156(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents displayed when a game per normal pattern is executed during the V rush period, and FIG. 156(b) is a schematic diagram of FIG. A schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (frame button 22) while the display screen shown in (a) is displayed. It is a diagram.

In the second modified example, similarly to each of the first embodiments described above, when a game per normal pattern is executed, the ball enters a state in which the normal electric winning device 640 can win. A special electric operation port 643 is provided inside the general electric prize winning device 640, and when a ball enters the special electric prize winning device 643, the ball can enter the V prize winning device 65. configured to run. Furthermore, a V winning opening 165 is provided in the V winning device 65, and when a ball enters the V winning opening 165, the ball can enter the variable winning device 650 (V jackpot game). game) is configured to be executed. In other words, it is configured to be able to execute a plurality of possible winning games based on one winning game (normal figure winning game).

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, for example, the ball enters the special electric operation opening 643 during the normal pattern winning game, so that the accessory winning game is executed continuously with the normal pattern winning game. become. In this case, if the guidance display mode is displayed corresponding to the type of winning game being executed, the guidance display mode is displayed in the display area HR3 in accordance with the timing of switching from the normal drawing winning game to the role winning game. , there is a problem that the timing of displaying the guidance display mode for guiding the player to the prize winning device (V prize winning device 65) corresponding to the prize winning game is delayed. In addition, considering that the timing at which the guidance display mode is displayed is delayed, for example, when the game switches from the general figure per game to the role per game, specifically, the general figure per game is finished From (after the ball has won to the special electric activation port 643), it is also conceivable to set a waiting period (for example, 3 seconds) until the game is executed, but the waiting period is set As a result, there is a problem that the sense of speed of the special electric game aiming at the big win game (V big win game) in a series of flows is lowered, and the amusement of the game cannot be improved.

On the other hand, in this second modification, as shown in FIG. 156(a), it is a normal game, and an image display imitating the normal electric winning device 640 is displayed in the display area HR3 as a guidance display mode. In the state being executed, the winning game that can be executed next, that is, the winning game that is executed when the ball is entered into the special electric operation port 643 in the normal figure winning game being executed (accessory per game ), the second guide display mode for guiding the player in advance about the winning device (V winning device 65) that the player should aim for is displayed in the display area HR30.

By configuring in this way, when the game result of the game per normal figure is a specific game result (the game result of winning the ball to the special electric operation port 643), the next game to be executed Since the winning device to be aimed at can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, the game can be provided to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, by notifying in advance the game contents of the per-accessory game that can be executed next during the per-universal figure game, during the period from the end of the per-universal figure per game until the per-accessory game is executed, the role It is possible to eliminate the need to provide a waiting period for allowing the player to grasp the game contents (a winning device to be aimed at) of the hitting game (the length of the waiting period can be shortened). Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved by smoothly performing the special electric game aiming at the jackpot game (V jackpot game) in a series of flows.

In addition, as described above, since the game result of the normal figure per game being executed is configured so that the role per game is executed when the game result becomes a specific game result, the display area during the normal figure per game The comment "Aim" is not displayed in the second guidance display mode displayed in HR30. In addition, in a state in which execution of the accessory winning game has not been confirmed, that is, in a state in which the normal game is being played and the ball has not entered the special electric operation opening 643, a display imitating the V winning device 65 is displayed. Only part of the image (for example, the image displayed in the display area HR3 in FIG. 18A) is displayed. By configuring in this way, the player can easily understand the first guidance display mode indicating the game content of the winning game being executed and the second guidance display mode indicating the game content of the winning game that can be executed next. Since it can be identified, for example, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game aiming at the V winning device 65 during a normal game.

In the example shown with reference to FIG. 156(a), as the first guidance display mode and the second guidance display mode, an image display simulating a winning device that becomes open in the corresponding winning game is used. However, without being limited to this, the first guidance display mode and the second guidance display mode may be set using only characters, or may be set using both characters and images.

In addition, photographed data obtained by photographing each prize winning device actually provided in the pachinko machine 10 may be used as the image display imitating the prize winning device displayed in the first guidance display mode and the second guidance display mode. . As a result, since the image of the winning device can be used as the image displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to effect an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

On the contrary, it is also possible to use a simple display that displays only the minimum required display information among the prize winning devices corresponding to the winning game. In this case, since the simple display can be diverted to a plurality of pachinko machines 10, the cost of developing the game machine can be reduced.

Furthermore, although detailed description is omitted, in the second modification, when the first guidance display mode and the second guidance display mode are displayed in the display area HR3, the winning game currently being executed (for example, It is also configured to display a past history information mode for making it possible to notify the type of the winning game that triggered the execution of the jackpot game.

By configuring in this way, when the jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed, it is possible to look back on the past game contents, so that the jackpot game executed this time wins the jackpot in the lottery of the special symbols. To inform a player in an easy-to-understand manner whether the jackpot game is executed based on the fact or the jackpot game is executed based on the entry of a ball into a V winning port 165 during the role winning game. can be done.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the second guidance display mode displayed during the normal pattern per game is changed according to the progress of the normal per pattern game, that is, in the normal per pattern game being executed, the special electric activation port 643 It is configured to be variably set according to the change in the degree of expectation that the ball will win. Specifically, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a command indicating the start of a game per general pattern from the main control device 110, the first image data to be displayed as the first guidance display mode (universal electric winning prize A display command indicating the image data schematically showing the device 640) and a display command indicating the second image data (image data schematically showing the V winning device 65) to be displayed in the second guidance display mode. , and is transmitted to the display control device 114 .

The display control device 114 generates image display data for the first guidance display mode and image display data for the second guidance display mode shown in FIG. , is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 . That is, the display screen shown in FIG. 156(a) is displayed immediately after the game per normal pattern is started. Then, when a prize winning command indicating that the winning sensor 640s has detected that the ball has won the general electric prize winning device 640 during the general figure per game is output from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 A command indicating the progress of the game per normal figure is output to the display control device 114 .

As a result, an image simulating the V winning device 65 is displayed as the second guide display mode to indicate that the expectation that the ball will win in the special electric activation port 643 in the normal game that is being executed has increased (Fig. 156 ( Image display data that is more exposed than the display mode shown in a) (image display data in which about 3/4 of the image imitating the V winning device 65 is displayed) is created, and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 to display. Similarly, it indicates that the ball has passed through the second movable valve 642 and has been detected to flow down toward the special electric activation opening 643. When the command is output from the main controller 110, the entire image imitating the V winning device 65 is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 as the second guidance display mode.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the display mode (second guidance display mode) of the guidance display for the winning game that can be executed next according to the progress of the winning game being executed, that is, The higher the degree of expectation that the ball will win in the special electric operation port 643 in the normal figure winning game being executed, the more clearly the guidance display for guiding the winning game that can be executed next can be displayed.

It should be noted that the example shown with reference to FIG. 156(a) is merely an example, and in a gaming machine capable of executing a plurality of winning games in a series of flows, during the period in which one winning game is being executed, It is sufficient if it is possible to guide the game method of the winning game that can be executed next, for example, according to the type of one winning game (for example, general figure per game) to be executed, the next winning game (for example, accessories Per game) when using a configuration that varies the probability of being executed, according to the type of per game per normal figure to be executed, the first guidance display mode displayed during the per game per normal figure, or the second 2 The guidance display mode may be varied. Specifically, the display color and size of the first guide display mode are changed to a mode that stands out to the player as the probability of the next winning game (for example, the winning game for the role) increases. good to do In addition, the display mode of the second guidance display mode displayed at the start of the game per normal figure may be varied, for example, the probability that the next winning game (for example, the accessory per game) is executed is low. When the figure-winning game is executed, the second guide display mode is a display mode in which about half of the image of the V winning device 65 is displayed, and the advantage-normal game is more likely to be executed than the disadvantage-normal-game. It is preferable to display a display mode in which 3/4 of the image of the V winning device 65 is displayed as the second guidance display mode in the horse match in which the per-picture game is executed.

By configuring in this way, by visually recognizing the first guidance display mode and the second guidance display mode, not only can the game method of the winning game to be executed be easily grasped, but also the winning game being executed can Since the player can predict whether or not the winning game is advantageous to the game, the effect of the first guide display mode and the second guide display mode can be enhanced. In addition, as described above, the display mode is configured to vary step by step according to the game result and the degree of expectation that are advantageous to the player, By configuring the stage of the display mode that is initially set to be different, that is, by varying the timing of displaying the display mode indicating that the degree of expectation is high, it is possible to execute while using common image data. Since the player can be notified of the degree of advantage of the winning game, the amount of image data can be reduced.

In addition, in the above-described contents, the example is shown in which the normal figure per game and the accessory per game are executed as one example of the per game, but not limited to this, a plurality of per game is executed as a series of per game Of course, it may be used in all cases.

Next, with reference to FIG. 156(b), the display contents displayed when the player operates the operating means (frame button 22) during the regular game will be described. When the player operates (presses) the frame button 22 once while the display screen shown in FIG. Enlarged display. As a result, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player who wants to know the game method of the winning game being executed. When the frame button 22 is operated twice, the display area HR3 is displayed in a smaller size than shown in FIG. 156(a), and when the frame button 22 is operated three times, the display area HR3 is deleted from the display screen and the frame When the button 22 is operated four times, it is configured to return to the display screen shown in FIG. 156(a).

In this way, by varying the size of the guide display mode (first guide display mode) for guiding the playing method of the winning game being executed based on the operation of the player, the size desired by the player can be obtained. The guidance display mode can be displayed with . In addition, when the guide display mode is reduced or deleted, the display area of other effect displays (the effect displays such as reference numerals 811 and 812) displayed on the display screen overlapping the display timing of the guide display mode. is configured to be large. Furthermore, it has an effect display that is executed only when the display area of other effect displays becomes large. This allows the player to positively operate the frame button 22 .

In addition, without being limited to this, for example, by enlarging and displaying the first guidance display mode, the detailed display location of the first guidance display mode, for example, the second movable valve 642 in the electric prize winning device 640 is imitated. The display mode is configured so that the player can visually recognize that the display mode is a specific display mode different from usual, and the specific display mode is configured to be easily displayed when a winning game advantageous to the player is executed. good to do As a result, even a player who already understands the game method can be interested in the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 .

In the example described above, the player operates the operation means (frame button 22) so that the guidance display mode can be enlarged or reduced. can be varied, for example, if the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a direction operation means (cross switch) capable of performing an operation indicating at least the left-right direction or the up-down direction as the operation means, the direction operation By operating the means, an area other than the winning device targeted for the guide display mode (near the area where the winning device targeted on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged) is displayed. The guide display mode may be changed, or the guide display mode may be changed so as to rotate (horizontally rotate, vertically rotate) the prize-winning device targeted for the guide display mode. In this case, image data showing the entire game area of the game board 13 and three-dimensional image data (3D data) of the winning device are stored in advance in the display control device 114, and the operation details for the direction operation means are stored. When a command corresponding to the operation signal shown is received, image data corresponding to the command may be created and displayed. Furthermore, in this case, it is preferable to configure so that information advantageous to the player is displayed in the displayable area only when the direction operation means is operated. As a result, the player can be motivated to operate the operating means.

As described above, in the second modified example described above, as in the first embodiment described above, all games are configured to be executable in the left-handed game, but for example, a plurality of winning games as a series of games In a game machine that can be executed, when one winning game is executed as a left-handed game and the next winning game is executed as a right-handed game, the display area HR3 in which the first guidance display mode is displayed is changed to the third symbol. It is preferable to form the display area HR30 on the left side of the display surface of the display device 81 and to display the second guidance display mode on the right side of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 . By configuring in this way, it is possible to suggest a game method to the player also by the position of the display area formed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 . Further, in this case, the player may be configured to be able to operate the position where the display area HR3 or the display area HR30 is displayed by operating the above-described direction operation means.

As described above, in the second modified example described above, the case where a plurality of winning games are executed as a series of games has been described. can be applied. For example, a special symbol variation period and a jackpot game are set as a series of games, and during the special symbol variation period, an image aiming at the special symbol entrance 64 is displayed as a first guidance display mode, and a second guidance display mode is displayed. , an image showing the variable winning device 650 may be displayed. In this case, the first guidance display mode, which is less necessary to guide the player on the game method, may be deleted, and only the second guidance display mode may be displayed. Also, if a game machine is provided with a plurality of variable winning devices 650 that are opened when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, which variable winning device 650 is finally displayed as the second guidance display mode? may be constructed so as to be able to execute an effect that encourages the player.

In addition, in the second modification described above, the guide display mode in the case where the general pattern per game is being executed has been described, but for example, the normal pattern lottery is won and the general pattern per game is executed. Until then, only the first guidance display mode may be displayed. Also, at that timing, the guidance display mode is switched in order to show the flow of the game when all the examples of games are successful, that is, the flow of the normal game, the role game, and the big win game. It can be configured as follows.

Further, the variable content of the guidance display mode displayed during the winning game may be appropriately set. For example, in addition to enlarging, reducing, and rotating, the guidance display mode may be changed using flashing or color change. Alternatively, the guidance display mode may be varied by causing a character to appear in the vicinity of the guidance display mode. Also, the game method may be guided by combining a decorative structure imitating an actual winning device and the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 .

Furthermore, in each of the second modifications described above, in order to guide the player on the game method during the winning game in an easy-to-understand manner, an image display using an image simulating the real thing is executed. but not limited to, for example, where the target winning device is arranged in the game area, the location of the winning device where the ball can enter, and the area where the ball can pass through the winning device When the game machine is provided with an advantageous area and a disadvantageous area, a display image simplified to the extent that it is possible for the player to grasp at least one of the advantageous area location and the disadvantageous area is displayed. You can use it. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the minimum necessary information to the player and also to use common image data for different pachinko machines 10, so the development cost of the pachinko machine 10, Manufacturing costs can be reduced.

In the above-described first embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, or when the ball enters (wins) the specific area (V winning opening 165) during the role game, the jackpot game can be executed, and a time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set after the end of the jackpot game. In addition, as an end condition of the time saving state, a time saving end condition (time saving number of times) is established based on the execution of a predetermined number of special symbol lotteries (for example, four times) without winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery. configured to be set. Furthermore, when the game for winning the character is executed during the dynamic display period (variation period of special symbols) from when the special symbol lottery is executed until the lottery result is stopped and displayed, the dynamic display period is subtracted. , and is interrupted based on the end of the role winning game or the end of the jackpot game that is executed based on the fact that the ball passes through the specific area (entering the ball) during the role winning game. It is configured to restart the process for subtracting the dynamic display period.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the process of updating the number of times of the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state (the process of subtracting the number of times of remaining time reduction) is executed based on the fact that the special symbol lottery is executed. Specifically, it is executed during the period from when the special symbol lottery is executed until when the special symbol variation is performed, and after the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, it is determined whether the time saving end condition is established. there is

By configuring in this way, during the execution of the special symbol variation, the process for subtracting the dynamic display period is interrupted based on the execution of the winning game, and then the interrupted dynamic display period is interrupted. When the processing for subtracting the display period is restarted, the number of times of time saving can be prevented from being updated when the dynamic display period after the restart has passed and the special pattern is stopped and displayed. Therefore, for example, when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the remaining dynamic display period of the interrupted dynamic display is extremely short, and the number of times of time saving set after the jackpot game is restarted Special symbol fluctuation By stopping display of , it is possible to suppress the immediate subtraction.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the timing for determining whether or not the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied is the timing when the dynamic display period of the special symbol has passed. Therefore, the time-saving state can be continued until the lottery result of the special symbol lottery that satisfies the conditions for ending the time-saving state is stopped and displayed, so that the game state advantageous to the player can be maintained as long as possible. can be continued. Furthermore, since it is not determined whether the end condition of the time saving state is established during the dynamic display period of the special pattern, the game state is shifted from the time saving state to the normal state during the dynamic display period of the special pattern. There is no Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, you may apply the content mentioned above to the pachinko machine 10 of 4th Embodiment. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and lottery (variation) of the second special symbol. ) are duplicated and configured to be executable. Then, if the result of one special symbol lottery is a predetermined lottery result (small win, big win), when the lottery result is stopped and displayed, the other special symbol variation (movement of the special symbol) during execution processing for subtracting the target display period) is interrupted or discarded. Specifically, when one special symbol lottery wins a jackpot, the other special symbol variation being executed is discarded, and when a small winning is won, the other special symbol variation being executed is interrupted. It consists of

Then, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, when the time saving state is set, the cumulative number of lotteries obtained by adding the number of lotteries of the first special symbol and the number of lotteries of the second special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), or when the number of lotteries of the first special symbol reaches a specific number of times (for example, 4 times), the time saving end condition is established.

The pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment described above updates the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the time saving state (processing for subtracting the number of remaining time reductions) based on the special symbol lottery being executed. Execute, the timing of determining whether the time saving end condition is satisfied, the timing of performing the determination of whether the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied, the timing when the dynamic display period of the special symbol has passed, or one of As a result of the process of subtracting the number of remaining time reductions executed at the time of the special design variation, during the execution of the special design variation (the special design variation in which the time reduction end condition after subtraction is 0), the other The timing is when the conditions for executing the special symbol lottery are met and before the special symbol lottery is executed.

By configuring in this way, even in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) of the specified number of times or more is not executed during the time saving state, and it is advantageous to the player. It is possible to continue the game state (time saving state) as long as possible.

In the above-described first embodiment and fourth embodiment, the process of determining whether the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied, and the time saving state based on the processing result (shifting to the normal state ) process is the timing at which the special symbols are stopped and displayed (the timing at which the special symbols are stopped and displayed), but other timings may be used, for example, the special symbols are stopped and displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second). It may be the timing (the timing when it is confirmed and displayed), or if the special symbol variation (final variation of the time saving state) where the time saving end condition is established is won (small hit or big hit), that winning game is executed, a predetermined timing during the winning game (for example, 1 second after the winning game is started), and the end timing of the winning game. In other words, the process of updating the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the time saving state (processing of subtracting the number of remaining time saving) is executed, and the special symbol variation that is the target of the execution is stopped and displayed, and then the next special symbol. Any period until the lottery is executed is sufficient.

Furthermore, in the above-described first embodiment, as a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, a time saving end condition that is established when the number of times of lottery of special symbols reaches a specific number (for example, 4 times) is provided. , Without being limited to this, the number of times that the lottery result of the special pattern has become a specific lottery result (for example, a lottery result other than the jackpot winning, and a part of the lottery result when winning is lost) is a predetermined number of times (for example , 5 times), time-saving end conditions that are established when the number of balls that have passed through a specific end area in the time-saving state reaches a specific number (for example, 10), A time saving end condition that is established when the elapsed time after the time saving state is set exceeds a predetermined time (for example, 200 seconds) may be configured to be settable. Also, as in the above-described fourth embodiment, if the game machine is configured to be able to execute a winning game (small winning game) different from the big winning game, the number of times the small winning game is executed reaches a specific number of times It may be configured to be able to set the time-saving end condition that is established when it does.

In addition, when configuring to be able to set the end condition of the time saving state that is established under various conditions, it is preferable to configure so that different time saving end conditions are set according to the trigger for setting the time saving state. Specifically, when the time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the time-saving end condition may be set based on the game state when the jackpot is won or the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won. The time-saving end condition may be set based on the number of special symbol lotteries executed until the jackpot is won. Further, the time saving end condition may be set based on the number of times the game state (time saving state) advantageous to the player is continuously set across the jackpot game. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the time-saving end condition to be set.

In addition, it may be configured so that the player can select the time saving end condition set for the current time saving state from among a plurality of time saving end conditions that can be set as the time saving end condition. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game while making the player predict which time saving end condition is selected to execute the most advantageous game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of each embodiment described above, when the special symbol variation is interrupted during the time saving state, when the restarted special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, the time saving number of times is not subtracted. , Without being limited to this, when the restarted special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, the number of time reductions may be subtracted. Specifically, at the timing when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed. It may be configured to execute the update (subtraction) process of the number of times. Even if such a configuration is used, the length of the short period of time after resumption will differ depending on the length of the remaining variation period of the special symbol variation at the time of interruption, so At what timing the special symbol variation was interrupted (whether the jackpot game was executed) can be made interesting.

Furthermore, in each of the above-described embodiments, the process of updating (subtracting) the number of times of time saving is configured to be executed in the period from when the special symbol lottery is executed until the special symbol fluctuation is started, but this For example, it may be configured to be executed after a predetermined period of time (after 5 seconds) has elapsed since the special symbol variation was started. By constructing in this way, depending on the timing when the special symbol variation is interrupted, it is possible to provide a case where the number of times of shortening of working hours is updated (subtracted) based on the special symbol variation after resuming, and a case where it is not. Specifically, when the special symbol variation is interrupted 2 seconds after the special symbol variation is started, the update processing of the number of time reduction is executed 3 seconds after the special symbol variation is restarted. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation is interrupted after 10 seconds from the start of the special symbol variation, the number of time-saving update processing is not executed after the special symbol variation is restarted. Therefore, immediately after the special symbol variation is started, that is, even if the special symbol variation is interrupted in a state where the remaining variation time is long, a situation disadvantageous to the player may occur. On the other hand, it is possible to make the player interested in the game after the restart (the game during the time saving state). In addition, when configured to execute the update (subtraction) process of the number of times of saving time during the period when the special symbol is fluctuating, the variation pattern of the selected special symbol (fluctuation time, jackpot lottery result, stop type ), the timing of executing the update (subtraction) processing of the number of times of reduction in working hours may be configured to be different. By configuring in this way, it is advantageous to the player (the number of times of shortening of working hours is not updated by the special symbol variation after restarting, or the shortening of working hours state set at the time of restarting can be continued for a long period of time) Special symbol variation Since it is difficult for the player to understand the interruption timing of the game, the player can play the game while predicting the contents of the game to be executed later, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in each of the above-described embodiments, when the length of the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed satisfies a predetermined condition, an effect for informing the player of that fact is executed. there is Specifically, if the remaining period of the special symbol variation is longer than a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), or the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed is longer than the variation time of the special symbol variation to be executed next. is long, the lucky time effect can be executed. By constructing in this way, when the V winning game is executed during the lucky time, the next V rush period can be lengthened, so that the player can be motivated to play the game. can be done.

In addition, when determining the length of the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed, the method of determining whether the remaining period is longer than a predetermined length (for example, 30 seconds) (absolute determination) and a method (relative determination) of determining whether or not it is longer than the variation time of the special symbol variation to be executed next. As a result, the player can grasp the timing of advantageously interrupting the special symbol variation.

In each of the above-described embodiments, it is possible to execute an effect that can notify the player of the length of the remaining period of the special symbol variation that is being executed, but the special symbol variation that is advantageous to the player is interrupted. It is sufficient if the timing is an effect that the player can predict, and the effect may be executed with an execution condition other than the length of the remaining period of the special symbol variation. For example, if the pachinko machine 10 uses a configuration in which the processing for updating the number of times of saving time for special symbol variations is executed during special symbol variations, it is configured to execute an effect indicating that the processing for updating the number of times of saving time has been performed. can be

In each of the above-described embodiments, when a specific winning game (game per role, small winning game, big winning game) is executed during the execution of the special symbol variation, the special symbol variation being executed is interrupted or discarded. However, without being limited to this, when a condition other than a winning game is established, the special symbol variation being executed may be interrupted or discarded.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a general electric winning device 640 is provided that makes it easier for the ball to win when a normal design winning game is executed, and a prize is won in the general electric winning device 640. When the ball passes (entries) through a specific area (special electric activation opening 643, special electric activation opening 1643, second ball entrance 1645), a game advantageous to the player (accessory per game, small winning game), that is, , depending on the game result, a game in which a jackpot game can be executed can be executed. Furthermore, it is possible to set a game state (time saving state) in which the winning ball of the general electric prize device 640 easily passes through the above-mentioned specific area (time saving state) and a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult to pass.

By configuring in this way, even if the ball wins the general electric prize winning device 640 during the general figure winning game executed during the normal state, it is possible to suppress the ball from entering the specific area. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player who is playing a normal game from being provided with an excessively advantageous game.

In addition, in order to suppress the ball from entering the specific area during the normal state, special special equipment is provided to prevent the ball from winning the general electric prize winning device 640 by the general figure winning game executed during the normal state. Since there is no need to provide a configuration on the game board 13, the degree of freedom in designing the game board 13 can be increased. In each of the above-described embodiments, among the winning balls of the general electric winning device 640, the balls that did not pass through (enter) the specific area are configured to enter the out hole, However, without being limited to this, the first privilege that is granted when passing (entering a ball) through a specific area (provision of a game that can trigger a jackpot game ) may be configured to give a second privilege (a prize ball) different from the above.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the type of privilege given to the player according to the winning ball of the general electric prize winning device 640 according to the set game state. We can provide you with exciting games.

Furthermore, in the above-described second embodiment, a game state (time-saving state) in which the winning ball of the general electric winning device 640 easily passes through the above-described specific area (time saving state) and a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult to pass are set. After being configured as possible, the specific region where the winning ball enters the general electric prize winning device 640 during the time saving state is the first specific region for executing the accessory winning game in which the execution opportunity of the big winning game is likely to be established. (Second special electric operation opening 1643) and the second specific area (special electric operation opening 643) for executing the role winning game in which the execution opportunity of the jackpot game is less likely to be established than the first specific area A switching means (third movable valve 1642) for switching is provided.

By configuring in this way, the ratio (easiness of passage) of the winning ball passing through the specific area is changed according to the set game state, and the ball can easily pass through the specific area. In the state where the game state (time saving state) is set, the ball won in the general electric prize winning device 640 is either the first specific area advantageous to the player, or the second specific area more disadvantageous than the first specific area can pass through Therefore, even in a state (a state in which it is easy to be granted) that the first privilege is granted to the player by the winning ball of the general electric prize winning device 640, the ball enters (passes through) any specific area. ) can make them interested in what they do. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the general pattern winning game executed during the time saving state until the end.

In the above-described second embodiment, the ease of winning the ball into the V winning opening 165 in the executed role winning game is determined according to the type of the specific area (special electric activation opening) into which the ball enters. making it different. That is, although the execution probability of the V jackpot game executed via the accessory winning game is made different, it is not limited to this, and for example, the V jackpot game executed when the ball enters the V prize winning port 165. (the number of rounds, the game state (time saving number of times) set after the end of the jackpot game) may be configured to vary according to the type of the specific area (special electric operation opening) where the ball enters.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, when the ball wins the special electric activation opening 643, the special symbol variation being executed is interrupted (the subtraction process of the variation time is interrupted). However, as in the third embodiment described above, according to the conditions that are established when the ball wins the special electric activation opening 643, the special symbol variation being executed is discarded (the special symbol variation is forced to It may be configured to terminate the time saving state after discarding it.

Furthermore, as in the above-described fourth embodiment, for the pachinko machine 10 configured to overlap and execute a lottery for a plurality of types of special symbols (lottery for the first special symbol, lottery for the second special symbol) , the technical idea of the second embodiment described above may be applied. In the above-described fourth embodiment, the second ball entrance 1645 that triggers the execution of the second special symbol lottery is provided in the general electric prize winning device 640, and the ball wins in the general electric prize winning device 640 during the normal state. The winning ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 1645 when the ball wins in the general electric prize winning device 640 during the time saving state than when it is in the time saving state. In addition, the right first ball entrance that triggers the lottery of the first special symbol is provided in the general electric prize winning device 640, and the ball that wins the general electric prize winning device 640 during the time saving state is the second ball entrance 1645, or A switching means may be provided so that the ball enters either one of the right first ball entrances. In this case, the lottery that is more advantageous to the player when the ball enters the second ball entrance 1645 than the right first ball entrance that triggers the first special symbol lottery that can be executed even during the normal state. should be configured to run.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to entertain the player until the end of the result of the normal figure per game executed during the time saving state. In addition, in the case of using the configuration of each of the above-described embodiments in which the number of times of lottery (number of fluctuations) of the first special symbol is defined as the termination condition of the time saving state, the lottery of the first special symbol (variation) is used during the time saving state ) is not executed. Furthermore, in this case, the operation of the switching means provided in the general electric winning device 640 may be configured to be variable based on the execution status of the first special symbol lottery and the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, for example , When the time saving state is set, the state where the first special symbol lottery is not executed, or when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is small (for example, one), general electric winning prize The operation of the switching means may be controlled so that the winning ball in the device 640 can easily enter the right first ball entrance. By configuring in this way, the first special symbol lottery can be executed more reliably during the time saving state.

In addition, in each embodiment described above, the operation of each movable valve provided in the universal electric winning device 640 is configured to be executed with the start of the game per universal pattern, but it is not limited to this , For example, it may be configured to be executed based on the timing when the normal symbol indicating winning per normal pattern is stopped and displayed, or the timing when the stop display period has passed, or the normal pattern per game is started. It may be configured to be executed at timing after a period (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, or may be executed at any timing as long as it operates according to a predetermined rule.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when the time saving state is set, before the time saving state ends (by the end of the special symbol variation that satisfies the end condition of the time saving state), a specific game (game per role) The pachinko machine 10 having a game property aiming for a big win game (V big win game) via a small win game) has been explained.

In the pachinko machine 10 having such a game property, the longer the fluctuation time of the special symbols during the time saving state, the longer the period (short time period) in which the time saving state is set, and the longer the time saving state is set. It was possible to increase the number of game executions.

Furthermore, when the specific game is executed, the special symbol variation being executed is interrupted (the processing for subtracting the variation time of the special symbol variation is interrupted), and the interrupted special symbol Variation (processing for subtracting the variation time of special symbol variation) is performed after the end of the specific game or after the end of the jackpot game (V jackpot game), that is, when the conditions for executing a new special symbol variation are established. It is configured to restart at

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, the length of the short period of time varies depending on the variation time of the special symbol variation and the interruption period due to the specific game, so that the player is provided with special symbol variation as much as possible. While hoping that a long variable time will be selected, it is possible to motivate the player to play many specific games.

However, for example, the game period for executing a specific game (during the fluctuation period of the normal pattern or during the game per normal pattern, the ball cannot be won to the general electric winning device 640 (difficult to win) period ( The closing period of the electric role product 640a)) is a period in which the specific game cannot be executed and the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is subtracted, so the game period during which the specific game can be executed ( The electric role product 640a is released during the regular game in which the ball can be won to the electric role product 640a, that is, the period during which the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is subtracted, but the role game is performed. This is a disadvantageous period that is more disadvantageous to the player than the period during which the game can be executed.

In addition, the specific game in which the special symbol variation is interrupted is when the number of winning balls to the variable ball entry means (V winning device 65) that is opened during the specific game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3). Either the end condition (winning end condition) to be met, or the end condition (time end condition) to be met when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1.6 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the accessory winning game. It is configured to end when one of the end conditions is satisfied, and depending on the game content (whether or not the ball is fired) by the player during the role winning game, when one of the end conditions is satisfied This was the end of the hit-and-run game.

On the other hand, in each of the above-described embodiments, when the state in which the specific game is being executed and the above-described unfavorable period overlap, the effect mode of the specific game can be changed based on the length of the unfavorable period. Configure. As a result, it is possible for the player to select the content of the game (end condition to be established) during the specific game, so that the player can be motivated to play the game.

In each of the above-described embodiments, as shown in FIG. 3, FIG. 88, or FIG. 89, the general electric winning device 640 is provided with a special electric operating port 643 that serves as a trigger for interrupting the special symbol variation being executed. Also in the above-described fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 114, the general electric winning device 640 is provided with the second ball entrance 1645 that serves as a trigger for interrupting the special symbol variation being executed. In such a configuration, the game machine randomizes (delays) the period (ball flow period) until the winning ball of the general electric prize device 640 enters the special electric operation opening or the second ball entrance. A delay means should be provided.

That is, in each of the above-described embodiments, the period until the end of a plurality of special symbol variations is configured to be a short period of time, and a new time-saving state (time-saving number of times) is set by executing a jackpot game. In that case, the remaining period of the interrupted special figure fluctuation is configured to be added without subtracting the number of times of shortening time. Therefore, in the state where the remaining time reduction number remains, and than when the remaining period of the special figure fluctuation during execution is short, after that, with the remaining time number reduced, and the special during execution When the remaining period of figure fluctuation is long, executing a big winning game (executing a big winning game after a short period of time is shortened) may be advantageous to the player.

Thus, by providing a delay means in the general electric prize winning device 640 and delaying the timing at which the ball enters the special electric activation opening or the second ball entrance, it may be advantageous to the player. As a result, it is possible to entertain the player as to at what timing the winning ball of the general electric prize winning device 640 enters the special electric operation opening or the second ball entrance. In addition, it is possible to suppress the intentional execution of a game in which the ball is entered into the special electric operation opening or the second ball entrance while the remaining period of the special figure fluctuation is long.

In this case, as the delay means, a rollable ball member is provided, and when a plurality of balls flow into the rollon member, the balls easily flow into the passage opening provided in the center of the rollon member. It may be configured so that the ball passing through the passage port flows into the special electric operation port or the second ball entrance port. By configuring in this way, while providing the delay means, according to the game contents during the game per normal game (the degree of winning of the ball to the normal electric winning device 640), the ball is a special electric operation opening or a second ball entrance It is possible to operate the timing to enter the ball. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the game so that the ball enters the special electric activation opening or the second ball entry opening at an arbitrary timing.

In addition, when the ball flows into the delay means (clone member), a suggestive effect is executed to suggest to the player a period that is advantageous to the player (a period in which the remaining period of the special figure fluctuation is long), or the ball is A result notification means may be provided to notify whether the timing of entering the special electric operation opening or the second ball entrance is the timing advantageous to the player (the remaining period of the special figure fluctuation is long). Furthermore, in the above-described example, an example using a crew member as a delay means has been described, but any device that can vary the flow period of a ball that has landed in the general electric prize winning device 640 can be used. A plurality of flow paths are provided with different periods (flowing periods) from the time the ball enters the winning device 640 to the time the ball enters the special electric activation opening or the second ball entrance. Distributing means for distributing balls may be provided.

In each of the above embodiments, each time the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d in the main controller 110 is updated (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203 d in the main controller 110 increases, the main controller 110 transmits the reserved number command to the sound lamp controller 113 . Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by one when receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 . As a result, the number of times master controller 110 transmits a hold number command to audible lamp controller 113 and the number of times audible lamp controller 113 receives a hold number command can be reduced. The control load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above embodiments, the maximum number of winnings to the special figure entrance 64 is 4 times, and the maximum number of passing through the through gate 67 is 1 time. However, the maximum number of pending balls is limited to this. Instead, the number of times may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of pending balls for variable display based on the winning to the special figure entrance 64 is displayed numerically in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the area divided into four is displayed by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light-emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light-emitting member. can be configured to

Further, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. The pattern may be moved and displayed in the vertical direction or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. It also includes the production display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol. Further, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the display mode of the dynamic display of the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol and the display mode of the dynamic display of the decorative symbol for indicating the lottery result of the normal symbol. For example, each display mode may be set using common image data possessed by the display control device 114 .

In each of the above-described embodiments, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is performed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for displaying the main symbol to be displayed in an emphasized manner to the player and for displaying the sub-symbols. Also, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each of the above-described embodiments, in the case of the game state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player, and in the case of the game state (normal state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the time saving state, the left side of the game board 13 Although it is constructed such that a left-handed game aiming at the area is executed, it may be constructed so that the area targeted by the different game board 13 is changed according to the game state. For example, in the case of the normal state, the game board A left-handed game aiming at the left side area of 13 is executed, and in the case of the time saving state, a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 may be executed, and a left-handed game is played during the time saving state. may be executed, and a right-handed game may be executed during the normal state.

Furthermore, in each of the above-described embodiments, even when any game state is set and when a jackpot game is set, a left-handed game aiming at the left side area of the game board 13 is configured to be executed. However, without being limited to this, when the time-saving state is set, the right-handed game may be executed during the jackpot game, and the left-handed game may be executed only during the normal state. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to easily understand whether or not the player is in an advantageous state according to the game method (right-handed game, left-handed game) to be executed.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the frame button 22 is used as the operation means that can be operated by the player. may be used, and an operation means configured in a lever shape that can determine whether the player has operated it by tilting it left or right or front and back, or can determine whether it has been operated by the player touching or approaching it. A touch sensor type operating means, or a wireless operating means that can determine that an operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used. In addition, the frame button 22 is electrically connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and the frame button 22 is used to change the performance mode of the performance executed by the pachinko machine 10 based on the player's operation. However, it is only necessary to be able to change the effect mode of various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 based on the player's operation of the frame button 22. For example, the frame button 22 is displayed. It may be electrically connected to the control device 114, or an output signal from the operation means (the frame button 22) can be input, and the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113, the sound output device 226, the lamp display A controller capable of generating an effect setting signal that can be output to the device 227 may be provided. By configuring in this way, even when a plurality of operation means for effect are provided, the output signals (operation signals) output from the operation means for effect can be centrally managed. It is possible to smoothly set the effect mode for the player's operation of the means.

Further, in the above-described sixth embodiment, the switching button group 22z (switching button 22za, first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) for selecting the end condition of the role-winning game is provided, and the movable valve 750 and the second selection button 22zc are provided. Part of each operation control of the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), third frame button (release button) 22c or It may be constructed such that all are executed by the sound lamp controller 113 instead of the main controller 110 .

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area after the big winning pattern is displayed. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. In addition, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which a plurality of combinations of probabilities (commonly referred to as settings) relating to the jackpot lottery are provided, and the settings can be changed on the gaming parlor side. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined may be implemented.

In addition, as a pachinko machine with multiple stages of settings, the combination of jackpot probability (a combination of the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the jackpot probability in the variable probability state) can be set in multiple stages (for example, 6 stages) can be set as a representative example, but is not limited to this. In place of or in addition to combinations of jackpot probabilities, for example, a pachinko machine capable of varying the ratio of each jackpot pattern (each jackpot type) determined in the event of a jackpot according to settings. may That is, depending on the setting, the rate at which a jackpot type advantageous to the player is determined may be varied, or the rate at which a jackpot type disadvantageous to the player is determined may be varied. More specifically, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of rounds (eg, 16 rounds) is varied according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of rounds (eg, 2 rounds) is determined. A configuration may be adopted in which the degree of advantage for each setting can be varied by varying the ratio of each setting according to the setting. In addition, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of times of time reduction (for example, 100 times) after the end of the jackpot is varied according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of times of time reduction (for example, 0 times) may be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, after the end of the jackpot, the rate at which the jackpot that transitions to (or easily transitions to) an advantageous game state (eg, variable probability state) is determined can be changed according to settings, or a disadvantageous game state (eg, normal state) can be set. ) (or easily shifted) may be changed according to the setting. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which provides a big-hit classification in which the ratio determined only by specific setting increases significantly (almost never determined by other settings). Specifically, for example, six settings from 1 to 6 can be set, and setting 6 is the most advantageous setting. In setting 6, when a jackpot is won, a jackpot of 6 rounds is determined at a rate of 2%, while in other settings, a jackpot of 6 rounds is determined only at a rate of 0.01%. may be configured. By constructing in this way, when the big win ends in 6 rounds, the possibility that the setting is the most advantageous setting 6 is extremely high, so that the player is made to play the game paying attention to the number of rounds of the big win. be able to. Alternatively or in addition, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 times of time saving is given after the jackpot ends may be higher than other settings. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game by paying attention to the number of times the time saving state ends. Alternatively, or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot (or accessories inside the jackpot, etc.) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured such that the jackpot type is easily determined by a specific setting (the rate of determination is increased). In addition, in the case of varying the combination of the probability of a big win according to the setting, in the low probability state, the higher the probability of the big win, the more advantageous the setting is for the player, while in the variable probability state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. It is good also as a structure which makes a jackpot probability high so that it is. This configuration is particularly of the type in which, in the variable probability state, it is easier to increase the number of balls held as the number of special symbol lotteries increases (the number of prize balls paid out tends to be greater than the number of game balls fired). Effective in game machines. More specifically, for example, it is a configuration that continues until the next big hit is won in the variable probability state, and by applying it to a game machine of a type that becomes a small hit with a high probability in the variable probability state, the high setting advantage You can increase your sexuality. That is, if the probability of winning a big win in the variable probability state is low, the number of lottery times until the next big win tends to increase, so the chances of getting a small win and winning balls also increase. Therefore, when the probability variable state occurs, it becomes easier for the player to win more prize balls until the next big win, which is advantageous for the player.

In slot machines, for example, when a coin is inserted to determine a valid symbol line, the symbol is changed by operating an operation lever, and the symbol is stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to change, for example, due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is awarded to the player under the condition that the finalized symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall, so the game value as seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine due to separate handling of medals and balls.

All or part of the above-described embodiments and control examples may be combined. For example, the configuration of the passage detection sensor 228 of the right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment may be applied to other embodiments. For example, by applying it to the first embodiment, the gauge number of the chance meter CM during execution of the standby state effect can be accurately linked to the number of game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. More specifically, the passage number counter 223k in the sixth embodiment is also provided in the RAM 223 in the first embodiment, and the value of the passage number counter 223k is updated by the same method as in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 87). S4211, S4212, S4219, S4220). Then, during execution of the standby state effect, every time the value of the passage number counter 223k is updated, the aspect of the chance meter CM is updated so as to have the gauge number corresponding to the updated counter value. Thereby, the mode of the chance meter CM can be adapted to the actual state of the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. The configuration of the sixth embodiment can also be applied to other embodiments in a similar manner.

The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area after the big winning pattern is displayed. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. In addition, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which a plurality of combinations of probabilities (commonly referred to as settings) relating to the jackpot lottery are provided, and the settings can be changed on the gaming parlor side. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined may be implemented.

In addition, as a pachinko machine with multiple stages of settings, the combination of jackpot probability (a combination of the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the jackpot probability in the variable probability state) can be set in multiple stages (for example, 6 stages) can be set as a representative example, but is not limited to this. In place of or in addition to combinations of jackpot probabilities, for example, a pachinko machine capable of varying the ratio of each jackpot pattern (each jackpot type) determined in the event of a jackpot according to settings. may That is, depending on the setting, the rate at which a jackpot type advantageous to the player is determined may be varied, or the rate at which a jackpot type disadvantageous to the player is determined may be varied. More specifically, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of rounds (eg, 16 rounds) is varied according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of rounds (eg, 2 rounds) is determined. A configuration may be adopted in which the degree of advantage for each setting can be varied by varying the ratio of each setting according to the setting. In addition, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of times of time reduction (for example, 100 times) after the end of the jackpot is varied according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of times of time reduction (for example, 0 times) may be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, after the end of the jackpot, the rate at which the jackpot that transitions to (or easily transitions to) an advantageous game state (eg, variable probability state) is determined can be changed according to settings, or a disadvantageous game state (eg, normal state) can be set. ) (or easily shifted) may be changed according to the setting. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which provides a big-hit classification in which the ratio determined only by specific setting increases significantly (almost never determined by other settings). Specifically, for example, six settings from 1 to 6 can be set, and setting 6 is the most advantageous setting. In setting 6, when a jackpot is won, a jackpot of 6 rounds is determined at a rate of 2%, while in other settings, a jackpot of 6 rounds is determined only at a rate of 0.01%. may be configured. By constructing in this way, when the big win ends in 6 rounds, the possibility that the setting is the most advantageous setting 6 is extremely high, so that the player is made to play the game paying attention to the number of rounds of the big win. be able to. Alternatively or in addition, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 times of time saving is given after the jackpot ends may be higher than other settings. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the number of times the time saving state ends. Alternatively, or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot (or accessories inside the jackpot, etc.) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured such that the jackpot type is easily determined by a specific setting (the rate of determination is increased). In addition, in the case of varying the combination of the probability of the big win according to the setting, in the low probability state, the setting is more advantageous to the player, the higher the probability of the big win, while in the variable probability state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. It is good also as a structure which makes a jackpot probability high as it is. This configuration is particularly of the type that tends to increase the number of balls held as the number of special symbol lotteries increases (the number of prize balls paid out tends to be greater than the number of game balls fired), especially in the variable probability state. Effective in gaming machines. More specifically, for example, it is a configuration that continues until the next big hit is won in the variable probability state, and by applying it to a game machine of a type that becomes a small hit with a high probability in the variable probability state, the high setting advantage You can increase your sexuality. That is, if the probability of winning a big win in the variable probability state is low, the number of lottery times until the next big win tends to increase, so the chances of getting a small win and winning balls also increase. Therefore, when the probability variable state occurs, it becomes easier for the player to win more prize balls until the next big win, which is advantageous for the player.

In slot machines, for example, when a coin is inserted to determine a valid symbol line, the symbol is changed by operating an operation lever, and the symbol is stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

All or part of the above-described embodiments and control examples may be combined. For example, the configuration of the passage detection sensor 228 of the right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment may be applied to other embodiments. For example, by applying it to the first embodiment, the gauge number of the chance meter CM during execution of the standby state effect can be accurately linked to the number of game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. More specifically, the passage number counter 223k in the sixth embodiment is also provided in the RAM 223 in the first embodiment, and the value of the passage number counter 223k is updated by the same method as in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 87). S4211, S4212, S4219, S4220). Then, during execution of the standby state effect, every time the value of the passage number counter 223k is updated, the aspect of the chance meter CM is updated so as to have the gauge number corresponding to the updated counter value. Thereby, the mode of the chance meter CM can be adapted to the actual state of the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. The configuration of the sixth embodiment can also be applied to other embodiments in a similar manner.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the game machine of the present invention are shown.

<Characteristic group A> (The timing of updating the number of times of time saving and the timing of determining the end of time saving are different)
Discriminating means for executing discrimination when a discrimination condition is satisfied, dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discriminating means for a predetermined period, and the dynamic display means bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game when the dynamically displayed identification information is stopped and displayed with specific identification information for indicating a specific determination result; a first game state; a second game state different from the game state; An updating means capable of updating relevant first information, and an end determination means capable of determining whether the first information updated by the updating means satisfies a termination condition, wherein the game state setting means for setting the second game state when the end determination means determines that the end condition is satisfied while the first game state is set; A gaming machine A1 characterized in that the updating timing of the first information by the updating means is set to be different from the termination determination timing for determining whether the termination condition is satisfied by the termination determining means.

In recent years, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. If there was, a privilege game was executed that was advantageous to the player. Furthermore, a plurality of game states can be set, and when a specific game state is set, an advantageous state in which a game ball is likely to enter the starting hole is set until the number of lotteries reaches a specific number. There is a game machine configured in (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2001-033569). In such a gaming machine, the player can play the game while expecting the first game state to be set, thereby increasing the player's willingness to play. Furthermore, in the above-described gaming machine, the lottery number counting (subtraction) processing during the advantageous state and the advantageous state end processing executed based on the number of lotteries reaching a specific number are displayed while the lottery result is stopped. It is configured to be executed at the timing to be executed, and configured to provide the set advantageous state for a longer period of time to the player. However, in the above-described gaming machine, the lottery result is stopped and displayed after the counting (subtraction) process of the number of lotteries during the advantageous state and the termination process of the advantageous state which is executed based on the number of lotteries reaching a specific number. Since it is configured to be executed when the lottery is drawn, there is a problem that the number of processes executed at a predetermined timing (timing to stop and display the lottery results) increases. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the processing load by reducing the amount of processing executed at the same timing in the gaming machine described above.

In recent years, game machines such as pachinko machines are configured so that games for executing privilege games can be performed in duplicate (overlapping games are possible), and according to the game result of one game, a lottery in the other game is performed. There is a gaming machine configured to interrupt the subtraction of the variable period for indicating the result (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-12907). In such a game, since a plurality of games can be performed in an overlapping manner, a game aimed at executing a privilege game can be efficiently performed. Furthermore, according to the game result of one game, the other game can be temporarily interrupted, so that a plurality of games that are executed in duplicate will cause the bonus game to be executed in duplicate, resulting in On the other hand, it is possible to suppress the execution of an incomprehensible privilege game.

However, when the above-described advantageous state setting configuration is used in a gaming machine capable of executing overlapping games, the number of lotteries is measured (subtracted) during the advantageous state, and when the number of lotteries reaches a specific number. Since the end processing of the advantageous state executed based on is executed at the timing when the lottery result is stopped and displayed, for example, based on the award of the privilege game by one game, the lottery result in the other game If the subtraction of the variable time to indicate is interrupted, and if an advantageous state is set by the granted privilege game, the interrupted subtraction of the variable time is resumed and the lottery result is stopped. There is a problem that the number of lotteries is counted (subtracted) when the lottery is executed. That is, the number of lotteries during the advantageous state is counted (subtracted) based on the stopped display of the result of the lottery executed in a state other than the advantageous state. There was a problem that it could not be executed properly. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game by allowing a player to preferably execute the game in an advantageous state.

According to the gaming machine A1, updating of the first information by the updating means and determination of end by the end determining means can be executed at different timings. Therefore, when the termination condition is satisfied by updating the first information, it is possible to reduce the amount of processing executed at the same timing, thereby reducing the processing load.

In the game machine A1, the game machine A2 is characterized in that the update timing is the timing at which the determination is executed by the determination means.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1, since the update timing of the first information related to the determination by the determination means is the timing at which the determination is executed by the determination means, the first information corresponding to the determination content There is an effect that information can be reliably updated. Further, since the first information can be updated by the updating means by executing the determination by the determining means, the player is interested in both the determination by the determining means and the game state to be set. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. Further, when the discrimination by the discriminating means is executed, the first information is updated by the updating means, so that unnecessary update processing can be suppressed and the processing load can be reduced. There is

In the game machine A1 or A2, the game machine A3 is characterized in that the end determination timing is after the identification information is stopped and displayed.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the determination of the end condition is performed during the period when the identification information is not dynamically displayed, so that the player can grasp the determination result of the determination means. It is possible to prevent the game state from changing while watching the dynamic display of the identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In the game machine A3, the determination means executes determination corresponding to the game state set by the game state setting means, and the end determination timing is determined after the identification information is stopped and displayed. A game machine A4 characterized in that it is a period until the determination by the determination means is executed next time.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, even though the updating means has updated the first information to the first information that can satisfy the end condition, the determination by the determination means is executed before the second game state is set. can be suppressed. Therefore, even if the update timing of the first information and the end determination timing are made different, there is an effect that the determination performed by the determination means can be properly performed.

A gaming machine A5, wherein said first information is updated by said updating means based on the number of said determinations executed by said determining means in any of gaming machines A2 to A4.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the first information is updated each time the discrimination means executes discrimination. can be made easier to understand. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the first game state suddenly shifts to the second game state and the player is confused.

In the gaming machine A5, the updating means updates the first information during a period from execution of the determination by the determination means to execution of dynamic display for indicating the determination result of the determination. A game machine A6 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effects of the game machine A5, the first information is not updated while the identification information is dynamically displayed, so there is an effect that the processing load can be reduced.

In game machines A1 to A6, when an interruption condition is met while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, an interruption means for interrupting the dynamic display, and an interruption by the interruption means. resuming means for resuming the dynamic display that is currently being displayed when a resuming condition is satisfied; and when the dynamic display is suspended by the suspending means, the first information updated by the updating means can be varied. and information variable means.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the dynamic display is interrupted, the first information may be changed by the information changing means. Therefore, during the dynamic display of the identification information, the player can be entertained not only by the discrimination result of the discriminating means but also by the presence or absence of an interruption, which has the effect of enhancing the amusement of the game. .

In the game machine A7, the information changing means changes the first information to variable first information in which the end condition is less likely to be satisfied than the first information.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, during the dynamic display of the identification information, the player can play the game while anticipating that the dynamic display will be interrupted by the interrupting means, thereby improving the amusement of the game. .

In the gaming machine A7 or A8, the privilege game executing means executes the privilege game even when a second condition different from the first condition that can be satisfied based on the result of the determination performed by the determination means is established. A gaming machine A9 characterized in that it can be executed, and the interruption condition is established based on the establishment of the second condition.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A7 or A8, the interruption condition can be established when the second condition is established to allow the privilege game to be executed without using the discrimination by the discrimination means. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a game different from the one discriminated by the discriminating means, thereby improving the interest of the game.

The gaming machine A9, wherein the game machine has a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter, and the second condition is satisfied when the game ball enters the ball entry means. A10.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A9, it is possible to play a game in which a game ball enters the ball-entering means as a game different from the determination by the determination means, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced. There is an effect that it can be improved.

In the gaming machine A10, a variable member that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball can enter the ball-entering means and a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state; and variable control means capable of executing a variable operation to change the member to the first state for a predetermined period based on the establishment of the execution condition, wherein the variable control means is in a state in which the first game state is set. The game machine A11 is characterized in that it is easier to execute the variable action than when the second game state is set.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A10, the duration of the first gaming state in which the second condition is more likely to be established than in the second gaming state can be varied based on the establishment of the second condition. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game to satisfy the second condition.

<Characteristic group B> (Depending on the setting conditions, the rate at which the prize is given to the winning ball is changed)
Variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state, and the variable ball entry based on establishment of an execution condition. A variable control means for changing the means from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period, a specific area through which a game ball entering the variable ball entering means can pass, and a game ball entering the specific area. setting information determination means capable of determining setting information when said variable ball entry means is variably controlled by said variable control means; a first state in which the game ball entering the variable ball entering means easily passes through the specific area and a state in which the game ball enters the specific area more difficultly than the first state according to the setting information determined by the setting information determination means; A gaming machine B1 characterized by having a second state and a switching means capable of switching to and from the second state.

In recent years, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. If there was, a privilege game was executed that was advantageous to the player. Furthermore, as a starting port, a variable ball-entering means attached to the starting port is provided with a variable member that can be changed between a first state that allows the entry of a game ball and a second state that restricts the entry of a game ball, and the variable ball-entering means is There is a game machine configured to be able to set an advantageous state that is easily changed to a first state and a disadvantageous state that is more difficult to change to the first state than the first game state (for example, JP-A-2001-033569). Gazette). In such a game machine, by varying the ease with which a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, the player is expected to set an advantageous state and is motivated to play the game. However, even if a disadvantageous state is set, if the game ball is entered into the variable ball entry means, the lottery is executed, so the variable ball entry is performed in the disadvantageous state. There is a risk that the game will be played at the timing when the means will be in the first state, and there is a problem that the player's willingness to play the game to set the advantageous state will decrease. In the gaming machine described above, by making it difficult to execute a lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means in a state in which a disadvantageous state is set, the player's desire to play can be enhanced. The purpose is to provide gaming machines.

According to the gaming machine B1, since it is possible to switch between the first state and the second state according to the setting information, the player is interested in the setting information at the time when the game ball enters the variable ball entering means. can have Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The game machine B1 has operation control means for controlling the operation of the switching means. It is possible to switch the plurality of flow paths so as to flow down any one of a plurality of flow paths including a different second flow path, and the operation control means is controlled by the variable control means. The operation control to the switching means is started based on the start of the control, and the game ball flowing down the first flow path by the switching means can pass through the specific area. Game machine B2.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the operation control means controls the operation of the switching means based on the start of control by the variable control means, and when the game ball entering the variable ball entry means flows down the first flow path by the switching means, it passes through the specific area. It is possible. As a result, the variable control for making it easier for the game ball to enter the variable ball entering means and the operation control of the switching means can be interlocked, so that the game ball entering the variable ball entering means There is an effect that it is possible to appropriately control whether or not to pass through.

In the game machine B2, the game ball that has flowed down to the second flow path by the switching means is more difficult to pass through the specific region than the game ball that has flowed down to the first flow path. Game machine B3.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2, it is possible to make it more difficult for the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path to pass through the specific area than the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path. There is an effect that it is possible to set the passing ratio of the game ball entering the variable ball entering means to the specific area only by controlling the operation of the switching means by the control means.

The gaming machine B2 or B3 has a normal area through which a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can pass, and the normal area is the specific area among the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means. and the privilege imparting means does not impart the privilege when the game ball passes through the normal area. Game machine B4.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machine B2 or B3, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, when the game ball entering the variable ball entering means passes through the normal area, the privilege is not given. Therefore, even if game balls enter the variable ball entry means excessively, it is possible to prevent the player from being awarded an excessive privilege. In addition, by providing the normal area in the variable ball entry means, excessive benefits are given to the player without providing a mechanism for suppressing the entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry means outside the variable ball entry means. Since it is possible to suppress the application of , there is an effect that the area outside the variable ball entry means can be easily used for other purposes.

In any one of the game machines B2 to B4, the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path is transferred to a third flow path different from the second flow path, and a third flow path different from the second flow path and the third flow path. and a distribution means capable of distributing to a fourth flow path, and the gaming machine has a first flow path into which a game ball distributed to the third flow path by the distribution means can enter as the specific area. and a second specific region different from the first specific region into which game balls distributed to the fourth flow path by the distribution means can enter; is a gaming machine characterized in that the content of the privilege given is different between when the game ball enters the first specific area and when the game ball enters the second specific area. B5.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B2 to B4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the game ball that has flowed down to the first flow path by the switching means passes through the first specific area when distributed to the third flow path by the distribution means, and when distributed to the fourth flow path It passes through the second specific flow path. As a result, when a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, the ease with which the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means is varied according to the establishment of the set condition, and the privilege is granted by the distribution means. The contents of the privilege can be varied. Therefore, since whether or not a privilege is granted and the content of the privilege to be granted are determined in stages, compared to the case where the presence or absence of the privilege and the content of the privilege are determined at once, it is easier for the player. There is an effect that the period during which the game is enjoyed can be lengthened. Also, when using such a configuration, it is preferable to use a function of notifying information for indicating the flow condition of the game ball in the variable ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the flow condition of the game ball that has entered the variable ball entering means, so there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, it is preferable to use a function of reporting information indicating that the setting condition is established. As a result, the player can grasp that the game ball is likely to be awarded some kind of privilege by entering the game ball into the variable ball entering means before the game ball is entered into the variable ball entering means. Therefore, the player can play the game with anticipation.

Any one of the game machines B1 to B5 has game state setting means capable of setting at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, and the switching means is the game state. The game machine B6 is characterized in that switching to the first state is easier when the first game state is set by setting means than when the second game state is set.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B1 to B5, the easiness of switching to the first state can be varied according to the set game state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the currently set game state, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In any one of gaming machines B1 to B5, the variable control means varies the variable ball entry means with a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first variable pattern. The switching means is capable of switching to at least the first state when the variable control means variably controls the variable ball-entering means in the first variable pattern. Gaming machine B7.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the second variable pattern is set by the variable control means, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means than when the second variable pattern is variably controlled by the first variable pattern. . Then, the switching means can be switched to the first state when variably controlled by the first variable pattern. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a large number of game balls that cannot pass through the specific area, and it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.

In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the privilege providing means executes a specific game based on the game ball entering the specific area, and the gaming machine is executed by the privilege providing means. A gaming machine B8 characterized by having privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game when the result of the played specific game is a predetermined result.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B7, when the result of the specific game executed when the game ball passes through the specific area is a predetermined result, the privilege game is performed. Since it is executed, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game for passing the game ball to the specific area.

<Characteristic group C> (In a gaming machine that can overlap and execute multiple games, setting the mode of production for the other game according to the fluctuation time of one game)
discrimination means for executing discrimination when a discrimination condition is satisfied; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means; dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period of the identification information to be displayed based on selection information; and the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means indicates a specific determination result. and special game execution means capable of executing a special game when the special identification information is stopped and displayed, in a gaming machine having a special game execution means capable of executing the special game during the period when the identification information is dynamically displayed. A game executing means, a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect related to the specific game, and an effect mode of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means are set based on at least information corresponding to the selection information. A gaming machine C1 characterized by comprising a performance mode setting means.

In recent years, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, it is possible to duplicately execute games for executing privilege games (overlapping games are possible), and to indicate the game results for each of the games that are executed in duplicate. There is a game machine that executes the effect display of (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-45518). In such a game, when a plurality of games are executed in an overlapping manner, each game can be grasped in an easy-to-understand manner by looking at each effect display that is executed in an overlapping manner. Since the effect mode of the effect display to be executed is determined only based on the contents of the corresponding game, and the effect associated with the plurality of games to be executed in duplicate cannot be executed, the effect display being executed There is a problem that it is difficult to comprehend the whole game that is executed redundantly from the beginning, and the performance effect is lowered. To provide a game machine capable of increasing the performance effect and allowing a player to enthusiastically play a game by executing a performance that makes it easy to grasp the contents of a plurality of games that are executed in duplicate in the above-described game machine. for the purpose.

According to the gaming machine C1, since the effect mode of the specific effect can be determined based on the selection information, the effect that associates the dynamic display of the identification information and the specific game, which are executed redundantly, is executed. There is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced. In addition, since the effect mode of the specific effect can be determined based on the selection information, it is possible to make the player willingly play the game to overlap a plurality of games in order to see various effect modes. It has the effect of being able to

The game machine C1 has a remaining period determination means capable of determining a remaining period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the effect mode setting means determines the remaining period determination means. A gaming machine C2 characterized in that the performance mode is set based on the remaining period.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, the effect mode of the specific effect is set based on the remaining period of the identification information, so that the determination timing of the determination means and the execution timing of the specific game are matched. Accordingly, it is possible to vary the effect mode of the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game at various timings in order to overlap a plurality of games in order to see various presentation modes.

In the gaming machine C2, when an interruption condition is satisfied while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, an interruption means for interrupting the dynamic display, and interruption by the interruption means. restart means for restarting the dynamic display based on the end of the privilege game, and the interruption condition is that the game result of the specific game executed by the specific game execution means is equal to a predetermined game result. A game machine C3 characterized by being established when

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exhibited. Namely, the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display means can be interrupted by the interruption means. Therefore, not only the effect to be executed, but also in the actual game, the determination by the determination means and the specific game can be associated with each other, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The game machine C3 has a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state in which a game more advantageous to the player than the first game state is executed, and the game state setting is performed. The means sets the first game state when a specific period has passed since the second game state was set, and the restart means sets the second game state after the privilege game is finished. the suspended dynamic display is resumed as the dynamic display during the second game state, and the specific period is the remaining period of the identification information resumed by the resuming means. and the effect mode setting means sets the effect mode based on the remaining period when the dynamic display is interrupted by the interrupting means. Machine C4.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the length of the specific period in which the second game state in which a game advantageous to the player is executed is set varies according to the remaining period of the dynamic display interrupted by the interrupting means. Then, it is set based on the length of the remaining period of the dynamic display when the effect mode of the specific effect is interrupted by the interrupting means. Therefore, the degree of advantage of the game to be executed later can be grasped by the effect mode of the specific effect, so there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In any one of the game machines C1 to C4, a remaining period determination means capable of determining the remaining period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and a remaining period determined by the remaining period determination means. and an advantageous condition determining means for determining whether an advantageous condition is satisfied, wherein the effect mode setting means sets the effect mode based on the determination result of the advantageous condition determining means. Game machine C5 to play.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the advantageous condition determining means determines whether or not the remaining period satisfies the advantageous condition, and based on the determination result, the effect mode of the specific effect is set. There is an effect that it is possible to inform the player of the presence in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the gaming machine C5, the advantageous condition determining means determines that the advantageous condition is satisfied when the remaining period is longer than the first period.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effects of the game machine C5, when the remaining period of the identification information during the dynamic display is longer than the first period, it is determined that the advantageous condition is satisfied, so the There is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the specific game based on the specific performance.

In a gaming machine C4 or C5, a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter, an acquisition means for acquiring acquisition information when a game ball enters the ball entry means, and the acquisition acquired by the acquisition means and storage means capable of storing a predetermined number of information up to an upper limit, and the determination means executes determination based on the obtained information stored in the storage means when the determination condition is satisfied. a pre-discrimination means capable of pre-discriminating the acquired information stored in the storage means before the discrimination based on the acquired information is executed by the discrimination means; means for determining, in advance, at least a dynamic display period of the identification information for indicating a result of determination by the determining means based on the obtained information; A game machine C6 characterized in that it is determined that the advantageous condition is satisfied when the dynamic display period determined by the pre-determination means is longer than the dynamic display period.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C4 or C5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the acquired information determined by the determination means is stored in the storage means up to a predetermined number, and the dynamic display period corresponding to the acquired information stored in the storage means is pre-determined. Then, when it is determined that the remaining period of the dynamic display being executed is longer than the pre-determined dynamic display period, it is determined that the advantageous condition is satisfied. Therefore, the game can be played while predicting the interruption timing of the dynamic display that is advantageous to the player based on the specific effect to be executed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine C6, the advantageous condition determination means determines the determination result of the preliminary determination means corresponding to the acquired information to be determined next by the determination means among the acquired information stored in the storage means. A gaming machine C7 characterized in that it determines whether or not an object satisfies the advantageous condition.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since an advantageous condition is established when the remaining period is longer than the dynamic display period corresponding to the acquired information for which determination is next executed by the determination means, the dynamic display during execution is performed based on the specific effect to be executed. It is possible to let the player decide whether to interrupt the target display or to interrupt the dynamic display to be executed next. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to select a game, and the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced.

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the game state setting means sets the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means in a state where the first game state is set as the specific period. The first game state is set when a predetermined period of time until a predetermined number of times of stop display of at least two times or more has elapsed, and the period calculating means is capable of calculating the specific period, and the The period calculation means calculates the specific period by adding the specific number of times to the upper limit of the dynamic display period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the period calculation means A gaming machine C8 characterized by having a period mode display means capable of displaying a period mode for indicating the specific period calculated by the above.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effects of the game machines C1 to C7, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, the game situation in the second game state can be grasped based on the effect mode of the specific effect while grasping the length of the specific period by looking at the period mode displayed by the period mode display means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to pay attention to various effects that are executed, and the effects of the effects can be enhanced.

<Characteristic group D> (Different conditions for ending the winning game according to the operation of the operating means)
A variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state; A specific game executing means capable of executing a specific game that changes the ball-entering means from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period of time, wherein the specific game is executed by the specific game executing means. a first termination condition that is satisfied when a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable ball-entering means, and a period during which the variable ball-entering means is changed to the first state has passed the predetermined period; a terminating means for terminating when one of a plurality of terminating conditions including a second terminating condition that is satisfied when one terminating condition is satisfied; a first operation; and a second operation different from the first operation; wherein the first end condition is more likely to be met when the first operation is executed by the operation means than when the second operation is executed. A game machine D1 characterized by being a thing.

In recent years, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. A gaming machine configured to execute a privilege game that allows a game ball to enter an attacker (specific prize winning port) when there is, and to set a plurality of conditions for terminating the privilege game. (for example, JP-A-2011-45518). In such a gaming machine, generally, the time end condition for ending the privilege game based on the elapsed time after the privilege game is executed, and the number of game balls hit by the attacker during the privilege game. Winning termination conditions for terminating the privilege game are set, and control for terminating the privilege game is executed when any of the termination conditions is satisfied.

However, since the same game is played every time during the privilege game, even if a plurality of end conditions are set, basically only one of the end conditions is more likely to be satisfied. In other words, in a gaming machine configured so that a game ball can easily win a prize to an attacker during a privilege game, the winning end condition is likely to be met before the time end condition is met, and the attacker is hit during the privilege game. In a gaming machine constructed so as to make it difficult for a game ball to win a prize, the time end condition is likely to be met before the winning end condition is met.

In this way, even if a plurality of end conditions for a privilege game are set, if most of the end conditions that can be satisfied are specific end conditions, the advantage of setting a plurality of end conditions, that is, which end condition There is a problem that it is difficult to obtain the effect of making the player interested in the game during the privilege game by making it difficult to understand whether the privilege game ends based on establishment. In the amusement machine described above, the player is motivated to play the game during the privilege game by suppressing bias toward a specific termination condition among a plurality of termination conditions for terminating the privilege game. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can

According to the gaming machine D1, the end conditions for ending the specific game being executed can be changed according to the operation contents executed by the operation means, so that the player can play the game with enthusiasm. has the effect of being able to

The gaming machine D1 is characterized by having a selection effect executing means capable of executing a selection effect for allowing the player to select whether to execute the first operation or the second operation with respect to the operating means. A game machine D2.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the end condition can be selected based on the selection effect executed by the selection effect executing means, so that a game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided. It has the effect of being able to

The game machine D2 has an effect mode setting means capable of setting the effect mode of the selected effect executed by the selected effect execution means, and the effect mode setting means is configured to perform the above-described first end condition when the first end condition is satisfied; The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that the performance mode is set differently when the privilege given after the end of the specific game is different from when the second end condition is established.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the effect mode of the selection effect can be changed according to the privilege given after the specific game ends, the player will pay attention to the selection effect to be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In a gaming machine D3, determining means for performing determination when a second condition different from the first condition is established, and identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the determining means are dynamically displayed for a predetermined period. and dynamic display means capable of executing a privilege game when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed with the specific identification information for indicating the specific determination result. It has a privilege game execution means and a period determination means capable of determining a period until the privilege game execution means is executed based on the determination result of the determination means, and the effect mode setting means is the specific game. and the determination result of the period determining means, the effect mode of the selected effect is set.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the effect mode of the selection effect is set based on the execution timing of the specific game and the timing at which the privilege game is executed, any effect for the specific game being executed is determined based on the selection effect to be executed. The game can be played while predicting whether the period from the end of the specific game to the execution of the privilege game can be shortened by satisfying the end condition. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced.

The game machine D4 has a second variable ball entry means capable of changing between a third state in which a game ball can enter and a fourth state in which a game ball is less likely to enter than the third state, and The privilege game executing means changes the second variable ball-entering means in a predetermined variable pattern between the third state and the fourth state for a predetermined period of time as the privilege game. As the types of the privilege game to be executed, a first privilege type and a second privilege type in which the period during which the second variable ball entering means is in the fourth state during the privilege game is longer than that of the first privilege type. and a type setting means for setting one of a plurality of privilege types including at least, the performance mode setting means is executed at the end timing of the specific game based on the start timing of the specific game. The gaming machine D5 is characterized in that the type of the privilege game that can be played is the first privilege category and the second privilege category, and the performance mode is different.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at the end timing of the specific game, when the privilege game can be executed, the effect mode of the selection effect is set according to the type of the privilege game, so based on the selection effect to be executed, To allow a player to play a game while predicting which end condition to satisfy for the specific game will end the specific game in an advantageous situation for the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine D5, the end timing of the specific game is the first situation in which the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display means, or the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. It has situation discrimination means for discriminating whether it is a second situation or not, and the production mode setting means changes the production mode depending on whether it is the first situation or the second situation. A gaming machine D6 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D5, the selection performance is produced depending on whether the timing at which the specific game can be ended is during the dynamic display of the identification information or during the execution of the privilege game. Since the mode can be varied, it is possible to end the specific game in a situation that is advantageous to the player, which end condition is established for the specific game being executed based on the selected effect to be executed. It is possible to play a game while predicting whether it will be possible. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced.

The game machine D6 has a remaining period determining means for determining a remaining period of the dynamic display at the end timing of the specific game when the situation determining means determines that the first situation exists, and the effect The mode setting means is characterized in that, when the remaining period is equal to or longer than the predetermined period by the remaining period determining means, the mode setting means sets a performance mode different from that when the remaining period is less than the predetermined period. game machine D7.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D6, the presentation mode of the selection presentation is varied according to the length of the remaining period of the identification information dynamically displayed at the timing at which the specific game can be terminated. Therefore, based on the selected effect to be executed, which end condition is established for the specific game being executed will shorten the period from the end of the specific game to the execution of the privilege game. The game can be played while predicting whether it can be shortened. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced.

In any one of gaming machines D4 to D7, specific game executing means capable of executing a specific game when an execution condition is satisfied; and restart means for restarting the dynamic display interrupted by the interrupting means when the specific game ends. A gaming machine D8 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D4 to D7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the dynamic display can be interrupted while the specific game is being executed, it is possible to vary the length of the period during which the dynamic display is interrupted by changing the conditions for ending the specific game. . Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game.

The gaming machine D8 has a specific area through which a game ball entering the variable ball entry means can pass, and the privilege game execution means executes the privilege game even when the game ball passes through the specific area. A gaming machine D9 characterized by being capable of

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D8, it is possible to execute a privilege game even when the game ball entering the variable ball entering means passes through the specific area. To improve the amusement of the game by providing the enjoyment of selecting whether to perform the game for establishing the second end condition or the game for establishing the first end condition for the specific game. It has the effect of being able to

A game state setting means capable of setting at least a first game state and a second game state in which a game more advantageous to the player than the first game state is executed as game states in the game machine D8 or D9. wherein the game state setting means, in a state in which the second game state is set, when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed a specific number of times, the first game A game machine D10 characterized by setting a state.

According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D8 or D9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the second game state in which a game advantageous to the player is executed ends based on the number of dynamic display times of the identification information by the dynamic display means, the dynamic display is interrupted during the second game state. is effective when lengthening the duration of the second game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of choosing whether to play a game to satisfy the second end condition or to play a game to satisfy the first end condition for the specific game. , there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Feature group E> (Navigation display of the target location of the winning game)
A variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which a game ball is less likely to enter than in the first state, and judgment is executed when a judgment condition is satisfied. determining means; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determining means; and the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means specifying the determination result of the determining means. privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game in which the variable ball entering means is varied from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period when the specific identification information indicating the determination result of is stopped and displayed. and a gaming machine comprising display control means for causing a display means to display a display image showing the variable ball entry means when the privilege game is executed. .

In recent years, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. In such a case, as a privilege game advantageous to the player, a game is executed in which the ball entry means, in which the game ball is difficult to enter, is normally released. In addition, there is a gaming machine in which the arrangement position of the starting hole and the arrangement position of the ball entry means opened during the privilege game are different (for example, JP-A-2011-45518). In such a game, the position at which the game ball is shot to the player is changed depending on whether the game is aimed at the start opening or when the bonus game is performed. It was possible to provide a game that does not come.

However, when the bonus game is executed, if the game aiming at the starting hole is continued, the ball cannot be entered into the ball entry means during the bonus game, and the player suffers a loss. There was a risk that something might happen.

In addition, in recent gaming machines, in order to improve the enjoyment of the game, a plurality of devices (a state where it is difficult for a ball to enter a state to a state where it is easy to enter a ball depending on the content of the game) are installed in a limited game area. equipment) are densely arranged. In such a gaming machine, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to understand which device the game ball should be shot at, and the player may play an inappropriate game, resulting in a loss for the player. rice field. It is an object of the gaming machine described above to provide a game that is easy for a player to understand.

According to the gaming machine E1, the display image showing the variable ball entry means is displayed on the display means by the display control means. can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In the gaming machine E1, the display control means causes the display image to be displayed on the display means at least during a period from when the specific identification information is stopped and displayed until the variable ball entering means is changed to the first state. The gaming machine E2 is characterized by displaying.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the display image is displayed before the variable ball-entering means is changed to the first state. In this case, the game ball can be entered into the variable ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that a game that is easier for the player to understand can be provided.

In the gaming machine E1 or E2, by the privilege game type selection means capable of selecting one privilege game type from a plurality of privilege game types as the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, and the display control means display mode setting means capable of setting a display mode of the display image to be displayed on the display means, wherein the display mode setting means provides a different display according to the privilege game type selected by the privilege game type selection means; A game machine E3 characterized by being capable of setting a mode.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1 or E2, the display mode of the display image can be changed based on the jackpot type. game content can be suggested to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine E4 in the gaming machine E3, wherein the privilege game executing means can execute the privilege games with different values according to the privilege game type selected by the privilege game type selecting means. .

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E3, privilege games with different values are executed according to the privilege game type, so that the player is made to pay attention to the display mode of the display image displayed on the display means. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

Any one of the game machines E1 to E4 has ball entry detection means capable of detecting that a game ball has entered the variable ball entry means, and the display mode setting means causes the display means to be controlled by the display control means. The game machine E5 is characterized in that the display mode of the display image displayed in the game machine E5 is variably set based on the detection of the entering ball by the entering ball detecting means.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines E1 to E4, when a game ball enters the variable ball entry means by the ball entry detection means, the display mode of the display image can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player of the progress of the privilege game in an easy-to-understand manner.

Any one of the game machines E1 to E5 has operation means that can be operated by the player, and operation determination means that can determine the details of the operation performed on the operation means, and the display mode setting means is A game machine E6, wherein the display mode is variably set based on the determination result of the operation determination means.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines E1 to E5, the player can change the display mode of the display image by operating the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to play can be improved.

In the game machine E6, the display mode setting means can set a display mode in which the display image is enlarged or reduced based on the determination result of the operation determination means. .

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E6, the display image can be enlarged or reduced based on the operation of the operating means. As a result, a player who does not need the display of the display image when the privilege game is executed can display the display image in a small size, so that the display area formed in the display means can be used for another effect display. becomes possible. Therefore, there is an effect that a display suitable for the player can be executed.

In the gaming machine E6 or E7, the display mode setting means can set a rotation display mode in which the display image is rotated from a first position to a second position based on the determination result of the operation determination means. A gaming machine E8 characterized by:

According to the game machine E8, in addition to the effects of the game machine E6 or E7, the display image can be rotated based on the operation of the operation means, so that the player can visually recognize the detailed configuration of the variable ball entry means. It has the effect of being able to

<Feature F group> (Switching the time saving end timing according to conditions)
Discriminating means for executing discrimination when a discrimination condition is satisfied, dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discriminating means for a predetermined period, and the dynamic display means bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game when the dynamically displayed identification information is stopped and displayed with specific identification information for indicating a specific determination result; a first game state; game state setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a second game state different from the game state; updating means capable of updating predetermined information; and end determination means capable of determining whether the updated predetermined information satisfies the end condition, and the end condition is determined by the end determination means while the first game state is set. In a gaming machine capable of setting the second game state when it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the game machine has switching means capable of switching the execution timing of the end condition determination means based on establishment of the switching condition. A gaming machine F1 characterized by:

In recent years, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. If there was, a privilege game was executed that was advantageous to the player. Furthermore, a plurality of game states can be set, and when a specific game state is set, an advantageous state in which a game ball is likely to enter the starting hole is set until the number of lotteries reaches a specific number. There is a game machine configured in (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2001-033569). In such a gaming machine, the player can play the game while expecting the first game state to be set, thereby increasing the player's willingness to play. Furthermore, in the above-described gaming machine, the lottery number counting (subtraction) processing during the advantageous state and the advantageous state end processing executed based on the number of lotteries reaching a specific number are displayed while the lottery result is stopped. It is configured to be executed at the timing to be executed, and configured to provide the set advantageous state for a longer period of time to the player. However, in the above-described gaming machine, the lottery result is stopped and displayed after the counting (subtraction) process of the number of lotteries during the advantageous state and the termination process of the advantageous state which is executed based on the number of lotteries reaching a specific number. Since it is configured to be executed when the lottery is drawn, there is a problem that the number of processes executed at a predetermined timing (timing to stop and display the lottery results) increases. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the processing load by reducing the amount of processing executed at the same timing in the gaming machine described above.

In recent years, game machines such as pachinko machines are configured so that games for executing privilege games can be performed in duplicate (overlapping games are possible), and according to the game result of one game, a lottery in the other game is performed. There is a gaming machine configured to interrupt the subtraction of the variable period for indicating the result (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-12907). In such a game, since a plurality of games can be performed in an overlapping manner, a game aimed at executing a privilege game can be efficiently performed. Furthermore, according to the game result of one game, the other game can be temporarily interrupted, so that a plurality of games that are executed in duplicate will cause the bonus game to be executed in duplicate, resulting in On the other hand, it is possible to suppress the execution of an incomprehensible privilege game.

However, when the above-described advantageous state setting configuration is used in a gaming machine capable of executing overlapping games, the number of lotteries is measured (subtracted) during the advantageous state, and when the number of lotteries reaches a specific number. Since the end processing of the advantageous state executed based on is executed at the timing when the lottery result is stopped and displayed, for example, based on the award of the privilege game by one game, the lottery result in the other game If the subtraction of the variable time to indicate is interrupted, and if an advantageous state is set by the granted privilege game, the interrupted subtraction of the variable time is resumed and the lottery result is stopped. There is a problem that the number of lotteries is counted (subtracted) when the lottery is executed. That is, the number of lotteries during the advantageous state is counted (subtracted) based on the stopped display of the result of the lottery executed in a state other than the advantageous state. There was a problem that it could not be executed properly. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game by allowing a player to preferably execute the game in an advantageous state.

According to the game machine F1, since the execution timing of the end condition determination means can be switched based on the establishment of the switching condition, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the first game state ends. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine F1, the updating means can update the first information as the predetermined information based on at least the number of times the discrimination is performed by the discrimination means, and the switching condition is updated by the updating means. The game machine F2 is characterized in that it can be established when the received first information satisfies the end condition.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1, when the number of determinations of the determination means is the termination condition, the switching condition can be satisfied. The player who executed the determination by the determination means can be made to play the game while being excited about whether or not the first game state will end. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine F2, second discrimination means for executing a second discrimination when a second discrimination condition is satisfied, and second identification information for indicating the result of the second discrimination by the second discrimination means are operated for a predetermined period. and the second identification information dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means is a second specific identification for indicating the specific second determination result. and a second privilege game execution means capable of executing a second privilege game when the information is stopped and displayed, and the switching condition is that the result of the second discrimination by the second discrimination means is the second discrimination. The game machine F3 is characterized by being able to be established when it is a result.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effects of the game machine F2, the switching condition can be satisfied based on the second determination performed by the second determination means different from the determination means. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether or not the switching condition is satisfied when the determination by the determining means is executed until the condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the switching means delays execution timing of the end condition determining means for a specific period, and the determining means selects the first condition as the determination performed during the specific period. The game machine F4 is characterized in that it executes determination corresponding to the game state.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines F1 to F3, the determination of the determination means executed during the specific period in which the execution timing of the end condition determination means is delayed by the switching means is performed as the first game. It can be executed as a determination during the state, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Any one of the game machines F1 to F4 has game state display means capable of displaying a display mode for indicating the game state set by the game state setting means on the display means, and the game state display means As display modes for indicating that the first game state is set, a first display mode and a second display mode different from the first display mode can be displayed, and the second display The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that it is displayed when the execution timing of the end condition determining means is switched by the switching means.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the execution timing of the end condition determining means is switched by the switching means as a display mode indicating the state in which the first gaming state is set. Since the second display mode, which is displayed when the game is played, can be displayed, there is an effect that the current game state can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Feature G Group> (Variable navigation display of the target device of the winning game according to the progress of the game)
A first variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state, and when a first execution condition is satisfied. and a first privilege game executing means capable of executing a first privilege game that changes the first variable ball entering means from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period, wherein the game ball is A third state in which a ball can be entered and a fourth state in which a game ball is less likely to enter than the third state; When the game result of the first privilege game is a predetermined game result, a second privilege game capable of executing a second privilege game in which the second variable ball entering means is changed from the fourth state to the third state for a predetermined period a privilege game executing means, and when the first privilege game is executed, a first display image showing the first variable ball entry means is displayed on the display means, and when the second privilege game is executed, The gaming machine G1 is characterized by comprising display control means for displaying a second display image showing the second variable ball entry means on the display means.

In recent years, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. In such a case, as a privilege game advantageous to the player, a game is executed in which the ball entry means, in which the game ball is difficult to enter, is normally released. In addition, there is a gaming machine in which the arrangement position of the starting hole and the arrangement position of the ball entry means opened during the privilege game are different (for example, JP-A-2011-45518). In such a game, the position at which the game ball is shot to the player is changed depending on whether the game is aimed at the start opening or when the bonus game is performed. It was possible to provide a game that does not come.

However, when the bonus game is executed, if the game aiming at the starting hole is continued, the ball cannot be entered into the ball entry means during the bonus game, and the player suffers a loss. There was a risk that something might happen.

In addition, in recent gaming machines, in order to improve the enjoyment of the game, a plurality of devices (a state where it is difficult for a ball to enter a state to a state where it is easy to enter a ball depending on the content of the game) are installed in a limited game area. equipment) are densely arranged. In such a gaming machine, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to understand which device the game ball should be shot at, and the player may play an inappropriate game, resulting in a loss for the player. rice field. It is an object of the gaming machine described above to provide a game that is easy for a player to understand.

According to the gaming machine G1, the display image showing the variable ball entry means corresponding to the privilege game executed by the display control means is displayed on the display means. It is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner whether to shoot the . Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In the gaming machine G1, the display control means displays the first display image as the A game machine G2 characterized in that it is displayed on display means.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, the display image is displayed before the first variable ball entering means is changed to the first state. When fired, the game ball can enter the first variable ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that a game that is easier for the player to understand can be provided.

In the gaming machine G2, the display control means causes the display means to display at least part of the second display image when the first privilege game is being executed by the first privilege game execution means. A gaming machine G3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G2, during the execution of the first privilege game, the second display image showing the second variable ball entry means corresponding to the second privilege game that can be executed next. at least partially visible. Therefore, there is an effect that the game method after the end of the first privilege game can be grasped in advance, and an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player.

In the gaming machine G2 or G3, the display control means causes the display means to display at least part of the first display image when the second privilege game is being executed by the second privilege game execution means. A gaming machine G4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G2 or G3, during the execution of the second privilege game, the first display image showing the first variable ball entry means corresponding to the already executed first privilege game is displayed at least in part. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can visually recognize the content of the privilege game executed in the past, and the game can be easily understood by the player.

In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the display control means controls the first display image and the A gaming machine G5 characterized in that the second image is displayed in order.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, when the first execution condition is met, the player can be notified of the flow of a plurality of privilege games that can be executed in the future. Therefore, it is possible for the player to grasp a series of game methods in advance. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

A gaming machine Z1 characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of the gaming machines described above. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine in any one of the gaming machines described above. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

A gaming machine Z3 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
A game machine such as a pachinko machine has been proposed in which a game ball enters a specific ball entrance or a specific area during a winning game, so that a bonus such as a winning game is further provided. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2011-010741).
In such a game machine, there is a demand for an improvement in the amusement of the game.
The present technical idea was made in order to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of technical concept 1 dynamically displays identification information for indicating the identification result of the identification means and the identification information for indicating the identification result of the identification means for executing the identification when the identification condition is established. a dynamic display means capable of executing a bonus game when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed with the specific identification information indicating the specific determination result. A game state setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of game states including at least a privilege game execution means, a first game state, and a second game state different from the first game state. and updating means capable of updating the first information related to the determination by the determining means, and determining whether the first information updated by the updating means satisfies a termination condition. and an end determination means, wherein the game state setting means determines that the end condition is satisfied by the end determination means in a state where the first game state is set, the second game state is set. The game state is set, and the gaming machine executes the game machine by making the update timing of the first information by the update means different from the end determination timing of determining whether the end condition is satisfied by the end determination means. It is something to do.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein the update timing is the timing at which the determination is performed by the determination means.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the end determination timing is after the identification information is stopped and displayed.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, wherein the determination means executes determination corresponding to the game state set by the game state setting means, and the termination is performed. The determination timing is a period from when the identification information is stop-displayed to when the determination by the determination means is performed next time.
The gaming machine of technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 2 to 4, wherein the first information is updated by the updating means based on the number of times of the determination performed by the determining means. It is what is done.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, it is possible to dynamically display, for a predetermined period of time, the discrimination means for executing discrimination when the discrimination condition is established and the identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means. Dynamic display means, and privilege game execution capable of executing a privilege game when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed with specific identification information for indicating the specific determination result. and game state setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state. updating means capable of updating the first information relating to the determination by the determining means; and termination determining means capable of determining whether the first information updated by the updating means satisfies a termination condition. , wherein the game state setting means sets the second game state when the end determination means determines that the end condition is satisfied while the first game state is set. In the game machine, the updating timing of the first information by the updating means is different from the end determination timing for determining whether the end condition is satisfied by the end determining means. .
Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the update timing is the timing at which the determination is performed by the determination means.
Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1 or 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the end determination timing is after the identification information is stopped and displayed.
Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the determination means executes determination corresponding to the game state set by the game state setting means. This is a period until the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed.
Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in any one of technical ideas 2 to 4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first information is updated by the update means based on the number of times of the determination performed by the determination means.
Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)

Claims (1)

a first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball;
variable means capable of changing between a first state in which the first flow path is formed and a second state in which the first flow path is not formed;
variable control means capable of executing control to change the variable means from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition;
a game state setting means capable of setting a second game state in which a game ball shot toward said first ball entering means flows down said first flow path more easily than said first game state. ,
The first ball entry means is disposed at a position where a game ball that has flowed down a predetermined flow path among the game balls that have flowed down the first flow path is entered,
The game machine is
a second flow path through which at least some of the game balls that have flowed down the first flow path and have not flowed down the predetermined flow path can flow down;
a second ball-entering means, different from the first ball-entering means, capable of entering the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path;
A third flow path different from the second flow path, wherein at least some of the game balls that have flowed down the first flow path and have not flowed down the predetermined flow path can flow down and,
a third ball-entering means, different from the first ball-entering means and the second ball-entering means, capable of entering a game ball that has flowed down the third flow path;
At least some of the game balls that have flowed down the first flow path and have not flowed down the predetermined flow path can be distributed to the second flow path or the third flow path. and
means capable of setting the first game state when a predetermined end condition is established based on the fact that a value related to a predetermined element is updated to a specific value during the second game state;
A game of the same value or different value according to the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means entered based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means It is possible to grant benefits that are advantageous to
When a game ball enters the third ball entering means, the player is not given a privilege that is advantageous,
updating a value related to the predetermined element based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means;
A gaming machine characterized in that the value relating to the predetermined element is not updated when a game ball enters the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means.

Images